Dece

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION
ENGINEERING
C18 CURRICULUM
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING

SANKETHIKA VIDYA BHAVAN, MASAB TANK, TELANGANA,
HYDERABAD
1
C-18 - CURRICULUM
FOR DIPLOMA PROGRAMMES IN TELANGANA
I. PREAMBLE
The State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana under the aegis of the
Department of Technical Education, Telangana regularly reviews the Curricula in tune with the
developments both in academic and industry side. However, recognizing the changing needs as stated
by the catchment industries, the Board has decided to bring about the revision of curriculum. Thus,
the Board, with the assistance of senior faculty of the branches concerned, has reviewed C-16/C-16S
Curriculum in force. On finding the merits and shortcomings of C-16/C-16S Curriculum, the faculty
has made a thorough assessment of the curricular changes that have to be brought in. It was felt that
there is an urgent need to improve hands-on experience among the students pursuing diploma
courses. Further, the urgency of enhancing communication skills in English has also been
highlighted in the feedback and suggestions made by the user industries. Keeping these in view, a
number of meetings and deliberations were held at State level, with experts from industry, academia
and senior faculty of the department. The new Curricula for the different diploma courses have been
designed with the active participation of the members of the faculty teaching in the Polytechnics of
Telangana, besides reviewed by Expert Committee constituted with eminent academicians.
The new C-18 curriculum is designed, duly taking into consideration the Outcome Based
Education model as per NBA norms and Credit system has also been introduced.
This new Curriculum has taken the Telangana State Industrial Policy in the course of
Industrial Management and Entrepreneurship. Skill Upgradation is given importance by allotting
2.5 grade points per semester.
The primary objective of the curriculum change is to produce best technicians in the country
by correlating growing needs of the industries with the academic inputs.
The revised New Curriculum i.e., Curriculum – 2018 or C-18 is planned and designed by
making 6 months industrial training is mandatory.
Salient Features:
1. Duration of course is 3 years of Regular Academic instruction.

 The Curriculum is Outcome based, Semester Pattern, more practical oriented, Flexible,
Relevant to the industry needs and oriented to develop entrepreneurship skills in
Diploma students.
2
 A maximum of 20% credits be permitted in specialized electives offered in VI semester
that can be pursued through MOOC like SWAYAM / NPTEL
 To start with a robust curriculum structure is designed
 Course structure contains 5 theory courses and 5 Laboratory courses per semester
 All theory courses will be of Lecture -Tutorial-Practicals (L:T:P) pattern
 In order to ensure continuous evaluation, total course content is divided into 3 parts i.e.,
Mid Semester- I should be conducted for 20 marks from part I and Mid Semester- II
should be conducted for 20 marks from part II, End Examination shall be conducted for
40 marks of which 20 marks should be covered from part III, 20 marks covered from
overall course content.
 The sessional marks of 20 are assigned to slip tests, assignments, seminars, quiz etc.
 The question paper pattern is comprising of short answer questions, Essay questions,
Application based Questions covering the attributes of understanding, remembering and
Application.
 Scoring of the candidate in the examination is reflected in terms of grade points
blending with relative grade point award system.
2. Keeping in view the increased need of communication skills that is playing a vital role in the success
of Diploma Level students in the Industries, emphasis is given for learning and acquiring
listening, speaking, reading and writing skills in English. Communication Skills lab and Life Skills
lab are therefore introduced in III Semester and Advanced Communication Skills lab and Life
Skills lab as lab electives from IV Semester for all the branches.
3. Latest topics relevant to the needs of the industry and global scenario suitable to be taught at
Diploma level are also incorporated in the curriculum.
4. CAD specific to the branch has been given more emphasis in the curriculum. Preparing drawings
using CAD software has been given more importance.
5. Every student is exposed to the computer lab at the 1 styear itself in order to familiarize
himself/herself with skills required for keyboard/mouse operation, internet usage and e-mailing.
6. The number of teaching hours allotted to a particular topic/chapter has been rationalized keeping
in view the past experience.
7. Upon reviewing the existing C-16 curriculum, more emphasis is given to the practical content of
Laboratories and Workshops, thus strengthening the practical skills in C-18 Curriculum.
8. With increased emphasis for the student to acquire Practical skills, the course content in all the
courses is thoroughly reviewed and structured as outcome based than the conventional procedure
3
based. While the course content in certain courses felt overloaded is reduced, in rest of the courses
the content has been enhanced as per the need.
9. Curriculum of Laboratory and Workshops have been thoroughly revised based on the suggestions
received from the industry and faculty, for better utilization of the equipment available at the
Polytechnics. The experiments /exercises that are chosen for the practical sessions are identified to
conform to the field requirements of industry.
10. The course of skill up-gradation in each semester is incorporated in the time table for one complete
day consisting of 7 periods..
11. The student shall be awarded satisfactory through RUBRICS only if he/she puts in at-least 75%
attendance in the skill up-gradation course apart from the satisfactory performance in the activities
allotted.
12. The activities suggested for skill up-gradation in the curriculum at the end of each course will be
assessed by the respective course teacher through RUBRICS and duly certified by the HOS/Principal.
13. The Members of the working group are grateful to Sri Navin Mittal I.A.S., Commissioner of
Technical Education & Chairman, S.B.T.E.T.(TS) for his constant guidance and valuable inputs in
revising, modifying and updating the curriculum.
14. The Members acknowledge thanks for cooperation and guidance extended by Sri. U.V.S.N. Murthy,
Secretary and his team of SBTET, Telangana, Dr C. Srinath, Additional Secretary, SBTET and Sri A.
Pullaiah, RJD and other officials of Directorate of Technical Education and the State Board of
Technical Education, Telangana.
15. The Members acknowledge thanks for cooperation and guidance extended by Dr.Uma
Shanker Sahu of NITTTR, Hyderabad and experts from industry, academia from the
universities and higher learning institutions and all teaching fraternity from the Polytechnics who
are directly and indirectly involved in preparation of the curricula.
II. RULES AND REGULATIONS

1. ADMISSION PROCEDURES:
1.1 DUR ATION AND PATTERN OF THE COURSES
All the Diploma programs run at various institutions are of AICTE approved 3 years
duration of Academic Instruction.
All the Diploma courses are run on semester-wise pattern.
1. 2 PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION INTO THE DIPLOMA COURSES:
4
Selection of candidates is governed by the Rules and regulations laid down in this regard
from time to time.
i) Candidates who wish to seek admission in any of the Diploma courses will have to appear
for Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET) conducted by
the State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana, Hyderabad.
The candidates satisfying the following requirements only are eligible to appear for the
Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET).
a) The candidates seeking admission should have appeared for the X class examination, conducted
by the Board of Secondary Education, Telangana or equivalent examination at the time of making
application to the Common Entrance Test for Polytechnics for admissions into Polytechnics
(POLYCET). In case of candidates who apply with pending results of their qualifying examinations,
their selection shall be subject to production of proof of their passing the qualifying examination in
one attempt or compartmentally at the time of counselling for admission.
b) Admissions are made based on the merit obtained in the Common Entrance Test (POLYCET) and
the reservation rules stipulated by the Government of Telangana from time to time.
c) For admission into the Diploma in Pharmacy Course for which entry qualification is 10+2,
candidates need not appear for POLYCET. A separate notification will be issued for admission into
these courses.
d) Admission into DHMCT Course shall be based on the Merit in Intermediate for which admissions are
made by DOST conducted by TSCHE.
1.3 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION
The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.
1.4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)
A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in sessional work

and end examination of each year for determining the eligibility for promotion etc., a
Permanent Identification Number (PIN) will be allotted to each candidate, which is
computer generated so as to facilitate this work and avoid errors in tabulation of results.
1.5 NUMBER OF WORKING DAYS PER SEMESTER:
a). The Academic Year for all the Courses usually shall be from June 1 st week of the year of admission
to the 31st March of the succeeding year.
b). The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday

c). There shall be 7 periods of 50 minutes duration on all working days.
5
d). The minimum number of Instructional working days for each semester shall be 90 days
excluding examination days/ Public holidays/ orientation programme/ Sports and games
Period. If this prescribed minimum is not achieved due to any reason, special arrangements
shall be made to conduct classes to cover the syllabus.
1.6 ELIGIBILITY OFATTENDANCE TO APPEAR FOR THE END
EXAMINATION
Note: Student attendance is recorded, twice a day using Aadhar Based Attendance System
with Bio metric Device.
a). A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination in all courses, if he or she has
attended a minimum of 75% of Instructional working days during the Semester.
b). Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate upto 10% (65% and above and below 75%) in
each semester may be granted on medical grounds.
c). Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.
d). Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester are not eligible to take
their end examination of that class and their admissions shall stand cancelled. They may seek re-
admission for that semester when offered next.
e). A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation for shortage of attendance.
1.7 READMISSION
Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective Principal of the
institutions concerned. 10% of approved intake are eligible for Readmission and preference
will be given to first-cum-first-serve basis, while according permission for re-admission of
the Diploma candidates:-
1. The percentage of attendance to a readmitted candidate is to be calculated from
the first day of beginning of the class work of that year / semester, but not from
the date, a readmitted candidate reports for class work, after given readmission.
No. of working
No. of working
S No. of days required
Year/Semester days required for
No Working days for 65%
75% attendance
attendance
Any Semester
1 (Except for 90 67.5 58.5
Industrial Training
6
2. The Principals of all Polytechnics shall ensure that the readmission cases should
considered and granted:-
a) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester

Otherwise such cases should not be considered for readmission for that Semester/year, and
the candidates concerned may be advised to seek readmission in the next subsequent
semester/year.
Before issuing readmission orders, an undertaking letter from the student is to be obtained,
stating that he/she will agree to the rule that the percentage of attendance to him/her shall be
calculated from the first day of beginning of the regular class work for that year / semester, as
officially announced by DTE/SBTET but not from the day on which he/she has actually reported to
the class work, after readmission is granted, and that he/she will complete the Diploma in twice the
duration of the course from the date of the first admission, otherwise he/she will forfeit the claim
for qualifying for the award of Diploma.
2. SCHEME OF EXAMINATION
2.1 I, II, III, IV, V and VI Semesters:
THEORY EXAMINATION: Each semester end examination carries 40 marks in

respect of specified courses of 2 hours duration, along with 60 marks for continuous
evaluation.
 The Semester End Examination paper shall be set for 40 marks
 PRACTICAL EXAMINATION: Each laboratory course carries 40 marks of 2/3
hours duration and 60 sessional marks for continuous internal evaluation.
2.2 ASSESSMENT SCHEME

I. Assessment: In order to ensure continuous evaluation the examination pattern is
formulated as
End 40 marks
Examination
Mid Sem 1 20 marks
Mid Sem 2 20 marks
Tutorials 20 marks
/Sessionals
Total marks 100 Marks
7
 Total course content shall be divided into three parts as Part 1, Part 2, Part 3
 Mid sem 1 Exam should be conducted from Part 1
 Mid sem II Exam should be conducted from Part 2
 End Examination to be conducted for 40 marks of which
 20 Marks should be covered from Part 3
 Remaining 20 marks covered from over all course contents
 The tutorial/sessionals shall consist of following marks division
1. Slip test 1 -- 5 marks
2. Slip test 2 -- 5 Marks
3. Assignments -- 5 Marks
4. Seminar/paper presentation/group discussion -- 5 Marks
II. Mid semester Question paper pattern
 Part A shall consist of ‘Remember’ based questions
 Part B shall consist of ‘Understanding’ questions
 Part C shall be of ‘Application’ based Questions
III. Semester End Examination:
 The Regular Examinations and Backlog Examinations shall be conducted separately.
 Backlog examinations should be held before the commencement of Academic Year to give
sufficient time for the student to prepare for Backlog examinations.
IV. Examination Pattern (End Semester Examination):
Part 3 Unit 5&6 ‘Remember’ based questions
Part A
Entire syllabus ‘Remember’ based questions
Part 3 ‘Understanding’ based

Part B Unit 5&6 questions
‘Understanding’ based
Entire syllabus
questions
Part 3
‘Application’ based questions
Unit 5&6
Part C
‘Application’ based
Entire syllabus
questions
V. Award of Grades and Grade points criteria for C-18 Curriculum

1. Marks : In order to ensure continuous evaluation the examination pattern is formulated as:
Theory Practical
End Examination 40 marks End Examination 40 marks
Mid Sem-I 20 marks Mid Sem-I 20 marks
Mid Sem-II 20 marks Mid Sem-II 20 marks
8
Internal 20 marks Internal 20 marks
Total marks 100 Marks Total marks 100 Marks
2. Hybrid grading system for regular students:

Absolute Grade Cut off Hybrid Grade Cut off
Grade Relative Grade
Grade Practical &
Point Theory Subjects Cut off
Drawing
Min of
A+ 10 > 90% > 90% Min of Top 1/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
A 9 > 80 to < 90% > 82.5 to < 90% Min of Top 2/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
B+ 8 > 70 to < 80% > 75 to < 82.5% Min of Top 3/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
B 7 > 60 to < 70% > 67.5 to < 75% Min of Top 4/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
C+ 6 > 50 to < 60% > 60 to < 67.5% Min of Top 5/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
C 5 > 40 to < 50% > 55 to < 60% Min of Top 6/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
Min of
D 4 > 35 to < 40% > 50 to < 55% Min of Top 7/8 Abs. or Rel. grade %
E 0 Rest of the Candidates

Based on the minimum of Absolute Grade cut off and Relative Grade cut off, a Hybrid
grade cut off shall be arrived and the appropriate grade shall allotted to the student and based on the
Grade, a Grade point shall be allotted in each subject provided the Candidate passes in the subject.
Pass Criteria for Regular Candidate: The Candidate is declared pass only if he/she
secures above the Hybrid Grade cut off of ‘D’ grade and 35% or above in Theory Examination and
50% or above in Practical and Drawing Examinations, as per the formula below in Sem End
Examination:-
End semester marks secured X 100
End semester Topper marks
Grades for backlog subjects : The Candidate shall be awarded ‘P’ or ‘F’ Grade based on
‘Pass’ or ‘Fail’ respectively in the Backlog Subjects. The ‘P’ or ‘F’ Grade has no Grade point but P
grade will count towards credits earned for awarding Diploma. The Candidate shall get P Grade if
he/she secures 35% or above in Theory Examination and 50% or above in Practical and Drawing
Examinations, as per the formula below in End Sem Examination:-
End semester marks secured X 100
End semester Topper marks of Regular exam of that batch
9
VI. Credits:
For theory courses-- 3 Credits
For Laboratory courses- 1.5 Credits
Skill up-gradation 2.5 Credits
Total credits per semester 25 Credits
 CGPA will be calculated for Regular Examinations only and not for backlog exams.
 Backlog exams will count for credits.
 Skill up gradation course will not count for CGPA but for Credits.
 Minimum credits for obtaining Diploma are 130 out of 150
VII. Electives:
a) The students are permitted to choose two electives in V semester.

Or
Specialized electives related to V semester course contents offered in MOOCs, like
SWAYAM/NPTEL
b) The student has to complete one Project in V Semester
Industrial Training (VI Semester)
Swapping of Industrial Training in C-18 Curriculum in V and VI Semesters

(50% of each Polytechnic students undergo Industrial Training in V Semester and
remaining in VI Semester).
 Evaluation and assessment of Industrial Training, shall be done and marks be awarded in the
following manner, provided the candidates concerned have put up minimum 90%
attendance of Industrial Training.
Industrial assessment at Industry : 600 marks (in two spells of 300 marks each)
Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks
Semester End Examination : 100 marks

(Seminar/viva-voce at Institution) ________
TOTAL 1000 marks
10
Assessment parameters at Industry
Assessment I Assessment
Sl No (First II (Second
Learning Parameter
Quarter) Quarter)
Attendance and punctuality 20 20
1
Familiarity of tools and material 30 30
2
Engineering skills 50 50
3
Application of knowledge & Problem solving skills 50 50
4
Comprehension and observation 10 10
5
Professionalism/Professional ethics 20 20
6
Safety and environmental consciousness 10 10
7
Communication skills 20 20
8
Supervisory skills 50 50
9
General conduct during the period 40 40
10
Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

300
600 marks
Assessment parameters at Institution (End Examination)
Institution Level Evaluation Scheme

Sl Criteria Marks Time
No
1 1st Report Submission 50 within 4 Weeks
2 Seminar-I 50 9th to 10th week
3 2 Report Submission
nd
50 Within 12 weeks
4 Log book 100 --
5 Seminar-II 50 Before Viva-Voce
Institute Evaluation 300
Total
Semester End Examination
1 Viva-Voce 50 After 24 weeks
2 Presentation/Demonstration 50
of skills
Total 100
11
 The assessment at the institute level will be done by a minimum of three members i.e.
Internal Faculty, Industrial Experts/External Examiner and H.O.D. and the shall be
averaged
a) Theory Courses: Theory Courses carry 20 marks for Mid Sem I and 20 marks for Mid Sem II and 20
marks for Tutorials which consists of Slip Test-I 5 Marks, Slip Test-II 5 Marks, Assignment-5 Marks
and Seminar -5Marks. Mid Sem examinations will be conducted on the dates specified by SBTET.
The remaining 40 marks of theory will be conducted as End Semester Exam.
b) Practicals: Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop shall be assessed during each
semester of study for 40 marks in end practical course and internal assessment carries 20 marks
for Mid Sem I and 20 marks for Mid Sem II and 20 marks for Tutorials. Each student has to write a
record / log book for assessment purpose. In the course of Drawing, which is also considered as a
practical paper, the same rules hold good. Drawing exercises are to be filed in seriatim.
c) Internal assessment in Labs / workshops / Survey field etc., during the course of study shall be done
and sessional marks shall be awarded by the concerned Lecturer / Senior Lecturer / Workshop
superintendent with the concurrence of concerned HOS as the case maybe.
d) For practical examinations, there shall be two examiners. External examiner shall be appointed
by the Principal in consultation with respective head of the department preferably choosing a
person from an Industry/Academician. At least one External Examiner from Industry should be
appointed for core labs.The Internal examiner shall be the person concerned with internal
assessment as in (c) above. The end examination shall be held along with all theory papers in
respect of drawing.
e) Question Paper for Practicals: Question paper should cover all the experiments / exercise
prescribed.
f) Records pertaining to internal assessment marks of both theory and practical courses are to be
maintained for official inspection.
g) In case of D.C.C.P., though the pass mark for typewriting and short hand is 50% in the end
examination, equivalency will be given for the students who got 45% with the examinations held
by SBTET, TS.
12
3 RULES OF PROMOTIONTI ON FOR NEXT LEVEL:
3.1 For Diploma Courses for 1st ,2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5thand 6thSemesters:
1. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first Semester examination provided he / she puts the
required percentage of attendance (i.e., 75%) and pays the examination fee. However, attendance
can be condoned by the Principal on Medical grounds upto 10% (i.e. attendance after condonation
on Medical grounds should not be less than 65%) and he/she has to pay the condonation fee along
with examination fee as prescribed by SBTET from time to time.
2. A candidate shall be promoted to 2ndsemester if he/she puts the required percentage of attendance
(i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the first semester and pays the examination
fee. A candidate who could not pay the first semester examination fee has to pay the promotion fee
as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
commencement of 2nd semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 2nd semester exam if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) in the 2nd
semester.
3. A candidate shall be promoted to 3 rdsemester if he/she puts the required percentage of

attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 2nd semester and pays the
examination fee and earned more than 25 credits (upto regular End Semester Exams of 2 nd
semester). A candidate who could not pay the 2nd semester examination fee has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time
before commencement of 3rd semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 3 rd semester exam if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) and pays the
examination fee in the 3rd semester and earned 25 credits up the end of 2 nd Semester.
4. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical condonation) in the 3rdsemester and pays the
examination fee and earned 25 credits up the end of 2 nd Semester. A candidate, who could not pay
the 3rdsemester exam fee but fulfilling all other conditions has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
commencement of 4th semester. IVC pass out students admitted into 3 rd semester through lateral
entry shall be promoted to 4th Semester, if he/she Puts the required percentage of attendance
(i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) and pays examination in the 3 rd semester.
13
5. A candidate shall be promoted to 5 thsemester provided he / she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 4 thsemester and pays the
examination fee and earns 75 Credits (upto regular End Semester Exams of 4 th semester). A
candidate, who could not pay the 4thsemester examination fee but earned 75 credits has to pay
the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to
time before commencement of 5thsemester as the case may be.
6. A candidate shall be promoted to 6 thsemester provided he / she puts the required percentage of
attendance (i.e., 75% in general and 65% on medical grounds) in the 5 thsemester and pays the
examination fee and earned 75 credits upto the end of 4 th Semester. A candidate, who could not
pay the 5thsemester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of
Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 6 thsemester as the
case may be.
(a) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 6th semester (Theory) exam if he/she
i) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 6 th semester
ii) Should have appeared for 5th semester examination.
(b) A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th (Industrial Training) semester

examination if he/she
i) Puts the required percentage of attendance i.e., 90% in 6thsemester (Industrial

Training)
ii) Should have completed the Industrial Training
iii) Should have submitted Industrial Training assessment report.
(c) In case a candidate does not successfully complete the Industrial training, he / she
will have to repeat the training at his / her own cost.
Promotion rules for C-18
S From To Cumulative
Attendance Remarks
No. Sem Sem Credits
75%
1 I II -
(65% on medical grounds)
Cumulative credits are
2 II III -do- 25
applicable from the
3 III IV -do- 25
A.Y. 2021-22 onwards
4 IV V -do- 75
5 V VI -do- 75
Note: Ineligible candidates are not permitted to next higher semester classwork till he/she
fulfills the above eligibility criteria.
14
Promotion rules for C-18 (IVC)
From To Cumulative
S No. Attendance Remarks
Sem Sem Credits
75% (65% IVC candidates should be
1 III IV on medical - allotted 50 credits during
grounds) admission into 3rd semester
2 IV V -do- 75 From A.Y. 2021-22
3 V VI -do- 75 -do-
Note: Ineligible candidates are not permitted to next higher semester classwork till he/she
fulfills the above eligibility criteria.
4.1 EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

The examination fee should be paid as per the notification issued by State Board of
Technical Education and Training from time to time.
4.2 ISSUE OF GRADE CARD:

All candidates who appear for the end examination will be issued Grade Card without any
payment of fee. However, candidates who lose the original Grade Card have to pay the
prescribed fee to the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training, Telangana
for each duplicate Grade Card.
4.3 MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA COURSES:
Maximum period for completion of the course is twice the prescribed duration of the course
from the date of First admission (includes the period of detention and discontinuation of
studies by student etc) failing which they will have to forfeit the claim for qualifying for the
award of Diploma. (They will not be permitted to appear for examinations after that date).
This rule applies for all Diploma courses of 3 years of engineering and non-engineering
courses including candidates seek admission under lateral entry. In respect of Pharmacy
courses the completion period s 4 years as the prescribed duration of the course is 2
years.
4.4 ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA
A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he / she fulfill the following
academic regulations.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 3 academic years & not more than 6 academic
15
years.
ii. He / she should have earned 130 credits out of 150 credits.
Students who fail to fulfill all the academic requirements for the award of the Diploma
within 6 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in the course &
their seat shall stand cancelled.
4.5 RE-VALUATION / ISSUE OF PHOTO COPY:
4.5.1 a) As per the SBTET notification.
A candidate desirous of applying for Revaluation / issue of Photocopy of valued answer
scripts should submit the application online to the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education
and Training, Telangana., Hyderabad – 500 063 as per the notification issued for Revaluation /issue
of Photo copy of answer Script.
4.5.2 MALPRACTICE CASES:
If any candidate resorts to any Mal Practice during examinations, he / she shall be booked
and the Punishment shall be awarded as per rules and regulations framed by SBTET,TS
from time to time.
4.5.3 DISCREPANCIES/PLEAS:
Any Discrepancy regarding results etc., shall be represented to the Board within one month
from the date of issue of results. Thereafter, no such cases shall be entertained in any
manner.
4.6 EQUIVALENCE:
In general there is no equivalency of CGPA and marks percentage:
However : 60% is insisted a CGPA of 6.50
55% is insisted a CGPA of 6.00
50% is insisted a CGPA of 5.50
With respect to the intermediate vocational candidates, who are admitted directly into
diploma course at the 3rdsemester (i.e., second year) level, the CGPA over 4 semesters shall
alone be taken into consideration for award of Diploma.
5 ISSUE OF CERTIFICATES :
5.1 ISSUE OF DUPLICATE DIPLOMA:
If the candidate desires for a duplicate certificate of Diploma, he/she may obtain on payment
of prescribed fee, duly following the procedure.
16
5.2 ISSUE OF MIGRATION CERTIFICATE AND TRANSCRIPTS:
The Board on payment of prescribed fee will issue these certificates for the candidates who
intend to pursue Higher Studies in India or Abroad.
5.3 GENERAL
i. The Board may change or amend the academic rules and regulations or syllabi at any time
and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students, for whom it is
intended, with effect from the dates notified by the competent authority.
ii. All legal matters pertaining to the State Board of Technical Education and Training are
within the jurisdiction of Hyderabad.
iii. In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of the
Secretary, SBTET (TS) is final
17
Electronics
&Communication
Engineering
Semester-I
18
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME
Diploma in Electronics and Communication Engineering
Course Course Name Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Code
Instruction Total Credit Continuous internal Semester end examination
periods Period s Evaluation.
per s per
week semest
er
L T P Mid Mid Internal Max Total Min

Sem1 Sem2 Evaluatio marks Mark marks for
n Min marks s passing
including
internal
1 18EC- Basic English 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
3 1
101F
2 18EC- Basic Engineering 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Mathematics 3 1
102F
3 18EC- Basic Physics 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
103F 3 1
4 18EC- General Engineering 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Chemistry 3 1
104F
5 18EC- Basic Electrical 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
105C &Electronics 3 1
Engineering
6 18EC- Basic Engineering 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
106P Drawing
7 18EC- Basic Computer 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
107P Aided Drafting
8 18EC- Basic Electrical 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
108P &Electronics
Engineering Lab
Practice
9 18EC- Basic Sciences Lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
109P- Practice
A+B
10 18EC- Computer 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
110P fundamental Lab 0
practice
11 Skill Upgradation 0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -- -
TOTAL 20 5 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425
Note: For Activities student performance is to be assessed through Rubrics.
Pass criteria: The minimum marks required for passing in any of courses are given below
1. Cumulative 35% (Mid sem 1 + Mid sem 2+ Tutorials+ End examination) and minimum marks
in end examination is 35% (i.e.14marks).
2. If the cumulative of CIE is less than 35% (i.e.21 marks out of 60) therefore more than 35% of
SEE is required to get overall 35%.
19
Basic English
Course Title : Basic English Course Code : 18EC-101F
Semester : I Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : Credits :3
45:15:00
Methodology : Communicative Language Total Contact Periods : 60 periods
: Lecture + Tutorial
CIE : 60 Marks SEE : 40 Marks
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of English Language
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, the students will have the ability to:
101.1 communicate effectively, express their likes, dislikes and feelings and
make requests
101.2 listen and reciprocate appropriately
101.3 use a dictionary and acquire vocabulary for social interaction
101.4 speak and write grammaticallycorrect sentences
101.5 analyse and evaluate the written material
101.6 convey ideas in the form of paragraphs and letters
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – 1: SPEAKING Duration: 12 Periods

1. Need For English
2. Classroom English
3. Expressing Feelings
4. Expressing Likes & Dislikes
5. Making Requests
UNIT - 2: LISTENING Duration: 6 Periods
6. Describing Words
UNIT –3: VOCABULARY Duration: 8 Periods
7. How to use a Dictionary

8. Words Often Confused
UNIT -4 : GRAMMAR Duration: 16 Periods
9. Tenses
10. Basic Sentence Structures
20
11. Voice
12. Asking Questions
UNIT - 5: READING Duration: 6 Periods

9. The Mighty Mountain and Little Lads of Telangana
10. The Adventures of Toto
11. Tiller turns Engineer - An Innovation
UNIT- 6: WRITING Duration: 12 Periods
16. Paragraph Writing - I

17. Paragraph Writing - II
18. Letter Writing – I
19. Letter Writing – II
Suggested Learning Outcomes:

On completion of the course the students will be able to
 express feelings, likes and dislikes and make requests.
 communicate fluently.
 use dictionary
 use describing words and distinguish between confusing words.
 read, comprehend and answer the questions.
 use appropriate tenses, voices, structures and ask questions.
 write paragraphs and letters.
21
Internal evaluation
Test Units Marks Pattern
Mid Sem 1 Speaking Part A 4 short answer questions
Listening 20 Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Part C 2 essay questions with internal choice
Mid Sem 2 Vocabulary Part A 4 short answer questions
Grammar 20 Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Slip Test 1 Speaking 5 2 questions out of 3 questions
Listening
Slip Test 2 Vocabulary 5 2 questions out of 3 questions

Grammar
Assignment One assignment per one 5 Different group assignments of higher order
semester questions that develop problem solving skills
and critical thinking should be given
Seminars One seminar per one 5 Oral presentations using audio –visual
semester equipment, charts, etc.
Total 60
Suggested Student Activities

 Setting short term goals for learning English
 Identifying the suitable solutions for the skill gap
 Listen to a passage / conversations / dialogues / speeches and answer the questions
 Self introduction
 Talking about routines
 Talking about one’s emotions
 Debates
 Elocution
 Role Plays
 Quiz
 Reading a selected text / news paper for specific purpose
 Reading aloud with proper pronunciation and intonation
 Describing people
 Describing places
 Describing events
 Creating Advertisements
 Selling a product with appropriate vocabulary
22
 Interpreting advertisements
 Writing short messages
 Writing a bio note / paragraph / letter
 How to use translate using Google application
 Using a dictionary
 Vocabulary games
Textbook: English for Polytechnics

(English Textbook for First-Year Diploma Students)
REFERENCES:
1. Practical English Grammar by A.J Thomson and A.V. Martinet
2. A Course in Phonetics and Spoken English by J. Sethi and P.V Dhamija
3. Word Power Made Easy by Norman Lewis
4. Games for Language Learning by Andrew Wright, David Betteridge and Michael Buckby
5. Five Minute Activities by Penny Ur
6. English Dialogues by M. Martin
e-learning:
1.www.duolingo.com
2. www.bbc.co.uk
3. www.babbel.com
4. www.merriam-webster.com
5. www.ello.org
6. www.lang-8.com
7. youtube.com
8. Hello English (app)
9. mooc.org
10. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in
23
CO-PO Matrix
CO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 Mapping POs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
101.1 2 1 1 - - 2 - 3 3 3 1,2,3,6,8,9,10
101.2 2 2 -- 2 -- 2 -- 3 3 3 1,2,4,6,8,9,10
101.3 2 2 -- -- 1 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,5,6,7,8,9,10
101.4 2 2 2 -- 2 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,5,6,7,8,9,10
101.5 2 2 -- -- 2 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,5,6,7,8,9,10
101.6 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,8,9,10
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Total Questions 4 4 4
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
24
Questions to be set for SEE Remarks
Sl No Unit No.
R U A

1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)

2 II

3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)

4 IV

9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
Total Questions
8 8 8

Remembering (R) 1 Mark

Legend: Understanding (U) 3 Marks
Application (A) 5 Marks
25
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION (C-18)
FIRST SEMESTER COMMON-101F
BASIC ENGLISH
Mid Sem -I
Time : 1 Hour Total Marks: 20
Marks
PART - A 1X4=4
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each carries one mark.
1. Rewrite the following as requests.
a. Pass the milk.
b. Give me your cell.
2. Write your feelings in the given situations.
a. Your mother scolded you.
b. Your friends gave you a surprise party.
3. Describe your classroom in a couple of sentences.
4. Fill in the blanks with the suitable describing words.
My friend is ________. She bought a _______ house.
(dirty, clever, rich, fat, intelligent, big)
PART - B 2X3=6
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks
5. a.) What are the advantages of learning English?
(Or)
b). Write three situations in which you feel the following emotions.
i. Anger ii. Jealousy iii. Worry
6. a) Identify the describing words in the following sentences.
Harry Potter series is very interesting and popular. He is very sensitive and brave.
The author was once poor. But now she has become rich.
26
(Or)
b) Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words of description given below in brackets.
The Sun was shining brightly. It was a ___ day. The sky was ___. There were no clouds in
the sky. A __ girl came out of her house. She was very ___. Suddenly a ___ cloud loomed
over. There was ___ rain.
( large, dark, pretty, young, sunny, clear, heavy. silly)
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks.
7 a) Mention any five problems you faced in learning English?
(Or)
b) Write any five expressions used by the teacher in the classroom.

8 a). Describe your friend using appropriate describing words.
(Or)
b) Use the following words and write a paragraph on your town.
(spacious, big, beautiful, narrow, clean, dirty, wide, small, tall, polluted)
27
BASIC ENGLISH
Mid Sem -II
Time : 1 Hour Total Marks: 20 Marks
PART - A 1X4=4
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each carries one mark.
1. Use the following pair of homonyms in your own sentences to bring out the difference in
meaning.
a. Watch
b. Watch
2. Write any three basic uses of a dictionary?
a. He always ____ (visit) his parents on Sunday.

b. She ___ (be) late yesterday.
3. Change the voice.

a. Cats chase mice.
b. The wires were cut by him.
4. Change the following into yes / no questions.
a. Satish likes sweets.

b. Desserts are hot.
PART - B 2X3=6
5 a). Write about different kinds of dictionaries.
(Or)
b). Fill in the blanks with the appropriate homophones given below in brackets.
28
I tell _______ (stories, storeys) to my friends. My hobby is to tell _______ ( tales, tails)
with animal characters in them. _______ (Two, Too) of my friends like to listen to my stories
always. I told them a story about a ______(bear, bare). I bought it for them at a _______
(fair, fare). I became very _______ (week, weak) as I suffered from fever.
6 a). Frame three ‘wh-’ questions for the following passage.
One of the most famous monuments in the world, the Statue of Liberty was presented
to the U.S.A.by the people of France. It took ten years to complete it. It was made of copper
with a metal frame to support it. The sculptor Auguste Bartholdi made it.
(Or)
b). Change the voice.
a. He plays hockey.
b. The novel had been written by him.
c. We will be helped by them.
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
7 a). How will you locate a word in a dictionary?
(Or)
b). Write the following pairs of words in your own sentences.
i. Son, Sun
ii. Live, Live
iii. Hair, Hare
iv. Meet, Meat
v. Air, Heir
8 a). Write five sentences about your childhood using past tense.
(Or)
b). Write one sentence each for the given structures.
i. S.V.
ii. S.V.O.
iii. S.V.SC.
iv. S.V.O.OC.
v. S.V.IO.DO.
29
BASIC ENGLISH
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Time: 2 Hours Total Marks: 40
PART – A 8 X 1 = 08
Instructions: 1. Answer all the questions.
2. Each question carries one mark.
1. Fill the blanks with suitable expressions of feelings:
a) I feel _________ when I get a first class in diploma first semester.
b) The teacher was ________ with me when I was late to class.
2. Use raise and rise in your own sentences.
3. Write at least four supporting sentences for the following topic sentence:
I want to become an engineer.
4. Write one sentence each for the following structures:
a. S V IO DO
b. S V SC
5. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow:
Communication is the process of transmitting ideas from a human communicator to a
human communicate, directly or through a medium. Technical communication, which
is concerned with the transmission of technical information, uses a variety of
graphics, such as charts, diagrams, pictures and tables to illustrate the information
presented in a language. Every illustration communicates facts clearly, concisely,
attractively and accurately. A technician should shape his ideas into language as well
as graphics. It must also be possible for a technician to convert the ideas available in
the form of language into graphics and vice versa.
a) What is technical communication concerned with?
b) Why does technical communication use graphics?
6. Read the above paragraph and answer the following questions:
a) How should the technician develop his ability of communication?
b) Suggest a suitable title for the passage.
30
7. Write any three complimentary closures used in official letters.
8. Write a short paragraph on your long term goal.
PART- B 4 X 3 = 20
Instructions: 1. Answer the following questions.

2. Each question carries three marks.
9 a. Write any five expressions used by your teacher in classroom.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
Jalagam Vengal Rao open caste mine is located in Sathupally in Khammam district.
When coal deposits were discovered in Sathupally, it was tested by its owners –
Singareni Collieries Company Limited, to determine the quality. Surveys showed that
coal available underneath Sathupally area would last for about 50 years.
The farmers who had to leave their lands were compensated with lands
elsewhere and some of them were given jobs in mines. Open cast mining started at
Sathupally in 2005.
Almost all the work at this mine are done using machines such as bulldozers,
motor graders, shovels, drills, water sprinklers, tipper trucks, dumpers and different
trucks which can carry heavy loads of coal. Shovel and bulldozers are first used to
remove top soil or overburden and rocks. Then a series of benches are made (benches
are vertical sections of a mine from where the coal or overburden is removed). Roads
have been laid in the mining area all the way down to the bottom of the mine, connecting
all the benches. Over burden and waste rocks are removed from sides of benches by
blasting. Coal blasted in benches is then lifted using shovels and dumpers and
transported through tipper trucks. Coal is transported to the coal handling plant and
through railway wagons to power plants, cement factories and other industries. Every
day, about 10,000 tonnes of coal is mined and transported from JVR Open Cast Mine.
Questions:
a) Where is Jalagam Vengal Rao Open Cast Mine located?
b) Why were the farmers compensated with land or given jobs in mines?
c) What is a bench in a coal mine?
10 a). Rewrite the following sentences changing the voice.
a) I was helped by her.
31
b) She cleaned the house.
c) Windows have been painted by Ramesh.
(or)
b) Write a letter to your principal requesting him to issue a duplicate hall ticket.
11 a). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
Subhash Chandra Bose was born on 23 January 1897 in Cuttack, Orissa. He studied
in Cuttack and then moved to Presidency College in Calcutta for further studies. He did his
B.A. in Philosophy and went to England to appear for the Civil Services examination
Although he did well in the exam he soon resigned from the services because it meant
working against the interests of his country. .He returned to India and started a newspaper
called Swaraj. His mentor Chittaranjan Das was active and open in his criticism of British
rule. Bose followed his footsteps and was arrested and sent to prison in Mandalay. He joined
the Indian National Congress. Later he parted ways with the Congress. He revived the Indian
National Army. He is believed to have coined the slogan Jai Hind.
Questions:
a) What was Chittaranjan Das's attitude towards the British?
b) How did Bose fight against the British?
c) Why did Bose resign from the Civil Services?
(or)
b) Read the following paragraph and answer the questions that follow:
What influenced Asuthosh most was the company of the brilliant friends of his father.
They were eminent men in their several walks of life, and they fired the boy’s ambition. He
was especially impressed by Mr. Justice Dwarka Nath Mitter who often visited their house.
In his heart he wanted to emulate him in all ways. Thus at a very early age Asutosh formed
the ambition of being a judge of the Calcutta High Court. He also wanted to be a scholar and
win the Premchand Roychand Studentship which is held to be the most coveted academic
distinction in Bengal. It will be seen later how he was able to realize both his ambitions.
But he had to cut his studies short because he fell seriously ill. The doctors said that he
suffered from palpitation of the heart and advised him to have a complete rest and change.
His father sent him to Muttra for a holiday. The change had a very beneficial effect on him,
for Muttra had a fine climate and beautiful scenery, and Autosh returned fully restored in
health and sprits.
32
Mathematics attracted Asutosh most, and he came to be looked upon as a prodigy in this
subject. One day one of his teachers thought of testing his ability in mathematics and set the
class very difficult problem. All the other students looked blank on reading the problem, but
not so Asutosh. He solved it correctly in a few minutes and showed it to the teacher, who
was amazed at the evidence of his ability. As time went on he developed much originality in
solving other mathematical problems.
Questions:
a) What was Asutosh’s ambition?

b) What did he want to win?
c) Why did doctors advise him to take rest?
12 a). Write a paragraph using the hints given below.

Library in our polytechnic – a big hall – several tables and chairs – newspapers –
journals – visiting hours – two computers with internet – three cards to each student –
20000 books – many reference books
(or)
b). Write a letter to your friend describing your first day in your institute.
PART-C 4 X5 = 40
Instructions: 1. Answer the following questions.
2. Each question carries five marks
13 a). List any five problems you face in learning English and suggest solutions.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the question given below it.
In1920, the Congress meeting was held at Nagpur under the leadership of Gandhiji.
It was attended by 15000 delegates and the Congress Constitution was amended and
resolutions were taken to fight for Swaraj by nonviolent methods and undo the injustice
done to Punjab and Turkey.
This movement was called Non-Cooperation Movement. Renunciation of

honorary titles like ‘Sir’ given by British, boycott of legislatures, schools and colleges,
courts, tendering resignation to government jobs nonpayment of taxes to government
were the important programmes of this movement. Gandhi returned his Kaiser-i-Hind
33
title in August, 1920. There were strikes, hartals and burning of foreign goods all over
the country. Many Indians were killed in firings and many others were jailed.
In Kerala, a rebellion broke out by Mophlah peasants and it was suppressed
brutally. Though Gandhiji warned the people many times not to resort to violent
methods, on 5th February, 1922 in Chauri-Chaura in Uttar Pradesh people resorted to
violence. When policemen opened fire on peaceful demonstrations, the angry people set
ablaze the police station and 22 policemen were killed. Gandhiji stopped the movement
because it lost its nonviolent nature. On 10th March, 1922 Gandhiji was arrested for six
years.
Questions:
a) What resolutions were taken at the Congress meeting held at Nagpur?
b) Why was the movement called Non-Cooperation Movement?
c) Why did Gandhiji return his Kaiser-i-Hind title?
d) Why did people set ablaze the police station at Chauri-Chaura?
e) Why did Gandhiji stop the movement?
14 a). Write the basic uses of a dictionary.
(or)
b). Write a letter to the Principal of your institute requesting him to provide you admission
into hostel.
15 a). Read the passage given and answer the questions.
It was way back in 1972 that NASA began developing a space shuttle that could
launch like a rocket but fly and land like an airplane—a unique transportation system for
deploying satellites and payloads into outer space. It was indeed a technological wonder as it
was reusable unlike the earlier , one shot disposable rockets, which were used to place
astronauts and equipment into the Earth's orbit. Basically , a space shuttle consists of an
orbiter that carries astronauts and payload attached to solid rocket boosters and an external
fuel tank.To lift the space shuttle , weighing about 2 million kg, from the launch pad to its
orbit that is about 185 to 643 km above the Earth , the shuttle uses two poweful solid rocket
boosters, which provide a thrust of about 11.7 million N. In addition the SRB's support the
entire weight of the space shuttle orbiter and fuel tank on the launch pad.
Questions:
a) Why is the space shuttle unique?
b) What are the parts of the space shuttle?
34
c) What are the functions of the solid rocket boosters?
d) What is the space shuttle used for?
e) Find one word in the passage that means throw away after use.
(or)
b). Read the following paragraph and answer the questions given below it.
Another important environmental movement is the Chipko Movement which started
in the early 1970s in the Garhwal Himalayas of Uttarakhand by Sunderlal Bahuguna. Like
the tribal people of Narmada valley, the forests are a critical resource for the subsistence of
people in hilly and mountainous areas. This is both because of their direct provision of food,
fuel and fodder and because of their role in the stabilizing soil and water resources. As these
forests were being increasingly felled for commerce and industry, villagers sought to protect
their livelihoods through non-violent resistance. The name of the movement comes from the
word ‘chipko’ meaning ‘embrace’: the villagers hugged the trees, saving them by interposing
their bodies between them and the contractors’ axes. Village women were the main force of
this movement. It inspired many people to look closely at the issue of environment
sustainability.
Questions:
1. Where was Chipko movement started?
2. Why did the villagers want to protect the trees?
3. How did the villagers protect the trees?
4. What is the synonym of the word, ‘important’?
5. What do you think of this movement?
16 a). Write a letter to your uncle about your plan to visit his place during summer.
(or)
b). Write a paragraph in 150 words about the importance of following traffic rules.
35
ENGLISH
Method of evaluation of the student activities ( Rubrics)
Model Rubrics
S.No Sub Performance

activity excellent Good Satisfactory Need
improvement
1 Step-1 Data was collected Data was collected Data was Data was
from more than from three to four collected from collected only
four sources. sources two sources. one source.
2 Step-2 All materials and Almost all The materials The materials
data required for materials and data and data and data
the activity were required for the required for the required for the
accurately activity were activity were activity were
prepared based on accurately accurately inaccurately
the data collected prepared based on prepared based prepared
independently. the data collected on the data
independently. collected with
the help of
teacher.
3 Step-3 Procedures were Procedures were Procedures that Procedures that
outlined in a step- outlined in a step- outlined were outlined were
by-step fashion by-step fashion, complete with 1 not sequential,
that could be require or 2 gaps and & performed
followed by explanation & require the activity in a
anyone & performed the explanation & poor way
performed the activity performed the
activity effectively. activity normally
effectively.
4 Step-4 Presented/ Presented/ Presented/ Presented/
explained the explained the explained the explained the
information about information about information information
the activity in the activity in about the about the
logical, interesting logical sequence activity in activity
sequence with with visuals or logical sequence without
attractive visuals diagrams. with less visuals sequence and
or diagrams. or diagrams. visuals or
diagrams.
5 Conclusio Provided a Provided a Student provided Conclusions
n/ detailed conclusion / a conclusion/ /summary was
summary conclusion/ summary clearly summary less not relevant.
summary clearly based on the data effectively
based on the data and activity
and activity
Note: Separate rubrics may be prepared according to the activity
36
BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Course Code : 18EC-102F

SEMESTER : I Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in periods ( L : T : P ) : 45 :15: 00 Credits : 3 Credits
Methodology : Lecture + Tutorial Total Contact Periods : 60
Programme : Common to all Engineering Diploma Programmes
Pre requisites :
This course requires the basic knowledge of Algebra, Trigonometry in Mathematics at

Secondary school level
Course Outcomes: COs
At the end of the course, the student will have the ability to:
CO 1 Solve the problems on Logarithms

CO 2 Resolve a given fraction into Partial Fractions
CO 3 Find the Sum, Product of Matrices, Value of the determinant and Inverse of a
Matrix .
CO 4 Solve simple problems using concepts of Trigonometric Functions
CO 5 Solve simultaneous Linear Equations using Matrices and Determinants
CO 6 Solve a Triangle and an Inverse Trigonometric Equation.
Course Content:
Algebra
Unit-I Duration: 06 Periods (L: 4.5 – T: 1.5)
1. Logarithms:
Definition of logarithm and its properties, natural and common logarithms; the meaning of
e and exponential function, logarithm as a function and its graphical representation –
Solve some simple problems.
2. Partial Fractions:
37
Rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials. Resolving rational fractions in to
their partial fractions covering the types mentioned below:
Unit – II Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)

3. Matrices and Determinants: Definition of matrix, types of matrices-examples, algebra of
matrices-equality of two matrices, sum, difference, scalar multiplication and product of
matrices. Transpose of a Matrix- Symmetric, Skew symmetric matrices- Minor, cofactor of
an element-Determinant of a square matrix up to 3rd order -Laplace’s expansion,
properties of determinants. Singular and non-singular matrices- Adjoint and multiplicative
inverse of a square matrix –related problems.
Trigonometry:
Unit-III Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
4. Compound angles: Formulae of Sin (A±B), Cos (A±B), Tan (A±B), Cot(A±B), and
related identities with problems - Derive the values of sin150, cos150 , sin750 , cos750 ,
tan 150 , tan750 etc.-Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2 B etc.,
5. Multiple and sub multiple angles: Trigonometric ratios of multiple angles 2A,3A and
submultiples angle A/2 with problems - Derive useful allied formulas like
2
sin A= ( 1−cos2 2 A ) etc., - Solve simple problems using the above formulae
Unit – IV Duration: 08Periods (L: 6.0 – T: 2.0)
6. Properties of triangles: Statements of Sine rule, Cosine rule, Tangent rule and
Projection rule
7. Hyperbolic functions: Definitions of hyperbolic functions – Sinh(x), cosh(x) ,tanh(x) etc.,

- identities of hyperbolic functions, inverse hyperbolic functions and expression of
inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
38
8. Complex Numbers: Definition of a complex number, Modulus and conjugate of a
complex number, Arithmetic operations on complex numbers, Modulus- Amplitude
(polar) form, Exponential (Euler) form of a complex number.
Algebra & Trigonometry
Unit – V Duration: 12Periods (L: 9.0 – T: 3.0)
9. Transformations: Transformation of products into sums or differences and vice versa -

Simple problems - Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or
product of three or more terms.
10 Inverse trigonometric functions: Define inverses of six trigonometric functions

along with their domains and ranges - Derive relations between inverse
trigonometric functions so that given A=sin -1x, express angle A in terms of other
inverse trigonometric functions - with examples - State various properties of
inverse trigonometric functions and identities like sin-1x+cos-1 x = etc - Derive
formulae like tan−1 x + tan−1 y=tan−1 ( 1−xy

x+ y
) where x ≥ 0 , y ≥ 0 , xy <1 etc., and
solve simple problems.
Unit – VI Duration: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T:2.5)
11.Solution of Simultaneous equations using Matrices & Determinants.: System of

linear equations in 3 Variables-Solutions by Cramer’s rule, Matrix inversion method –
Examples- Elementary row operations on Matrices -Gauss-Jordan method to solve a
system of equations in 3 unknowns.
12. Solutions of triangles: Solve a triangle when (i) three sides (SSS) (ii) two sides and an
Included angle (SAS) (iii) one side and two angles are given (SAA) - Simple
problems.
References
1. Text Book of Matrices – by Shanti Narayan
2. Plane Trigonometry - by S.L.Loney
3. NCERT Mathematics Text Books Of ClassXI, XII .
39
4. Intermediate Mathematics Text Books (TeluguAcademy)
Suggested E-Learning references
1. www.freebookcentre.net/mathematics/introductory-mathematics-books.html
2. E-books:www.mathebook.net
Suggested Learning Outcomes

Algebra
UNIT – I
1.0 Use Logarithms in engineering calculations

1.1 Define logarithm and list its properties.
1.2 Distinguish natural logarithms and common logarithms.
1.3 Explain the meaning of e and exponential function.
1.4 State logarithm as a function and its graphical representation.
1.5 Use the logarithms in engineering calculations.
2.0 Resolve Rational Fraction into sum of Partial Fractions in engineering
problems
2.1 Define the following fractions of polynomials:
1. Rational
2. Proper and
3. Improper
2.2 Explain the procedure of resolving rational fractions of the type mentioned below
into partial fractions
UNIT – II
3.0 Use Matrices for solving engineering problems

3.1 Define a matrix and order of a matrix.
3.2 State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on 3 rd order square
matrices).
3.3 Compute sum, difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices.
3.4 Illustrate the properties of these operations such as associative, distributive,
commutative properties with examples and counter examples.
40
3.5 Define the transpose of a matrix and write its properties.
3.6 Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices.
3.7 Resolve a square matrix into a sum of symmetric and skew- symmetric matrices
with examples in all cases.
3.8 Define minor, co-factor of an element of a 3x3 square matrix with examples.
3.9 Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3 matrix using Laplace expansion formula.
3.10 Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices.
3.11 Apply the properties of determinants to solve problems.
3.12 Define multiplicative inverse of a matrix and list properties of adjoint and inverse.
3.13 Compute adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix.
Trigonometry:
UNIT – III
4.0 Solve simple problems on Compound Angles

4.1 Define compound angles and state the formulae of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B)
and cot(A±B)
4.2 Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values of sin15 0, cos150 ,
sin750 , cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc.
4.3 Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2B etc.,
4.4 Solve simple problems on compound angles.
5.0 Solve problems using the formulae for Multiple and Sub- Multiple Angles
5.1 Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc and sub multiple angles A/2 in
terms of angle A of trigonometric functions.
5.2 Derive useful allied formulas like sin A= (1- cos2A)/2 etc.,
5.3 Solve simple problems using the above formulae
UNIT – IV
6.0 Appreciate Properties of triangles

6.1 State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule.
7.0 Represent the Hyperbolic Functions in terms of logarithm functions
7.1 Define Sinh x, cosh x and tanh x and list the hyperbolic identities.
7.2 Represent inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
8.0 Represent Complex numbers in various forms
8.1 Define complex number, its modulus, and conjugate and list their properties.
8.2 Define the operations on complex numbers with examples.
41
8.3 Define amplitude of a complex number
8.4 Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-amplitude (polar)
form, Exponential (Euler) form – illustrate with examples.
UNIT – V
9.0 Apply Transformations for solving the problems in Trigonometry

9.1 Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two trigonometric ratios
in to a product and vice versa- examples on these formulae.
9.2 Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of

three or more terms.
10.0 Use Inverse Trigonometric Functions for solving engineering problems
10.1 Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function by selecting an
appropriate domain and range.
10.2 Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their domains and ranges.
10.3 Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that given A= sin -1x,
express angle A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions - with examples.
10.4 State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like
sin-1x+cos-1 x = etc.
10.5 Derive formulae like

etc., and solve simple problems.
UNIT – VI
11.0 Apply Matrices and Determinants in solving system of Linear Equations
11.1 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns using Cramer’s rule.

11.2 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns by matrix inversion method
11.3 State elementary row operations.
11.4 Solve a system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns by Gauss- Jordan method
12.0 Apply Properties of Triangles to solve a triangle.

12.1 Solve a triangle when (i) three sides (SSS), (ii) two sides and an included
angle(SAS), (iii) one side and two angles are given(SAA).
42
1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related
material.
2. Quiz
3. Group discussion
4. Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home Assignments.
CO / PO - MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 Mapped
POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
MID SEM-I EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
43
Sl No Unit No.
R U A

1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)

2 II

3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)

4 IV

9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)

3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

Total Questions
8 8 8


Legend:
Understanding (U) 3 Marks
44
Code: C18-Common-102F
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING, TELANGANA
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, I SEMESTER
TIME: 1: 00 Hours Max. Marks: 20
PART-A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions 04 X 01 = 04
2 Each question carries ONE mark
1. Find the value of

log 8 2
2. Define Proper fraction and give an example.
[ 1 2¿]¿¿¿
3. If A= ¿ Compute 3A+ 5B.
4. Find the value of |13 24|

.
PART-B
Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 03 = 06
2. Each question carries THREE marks
x
5(a) Resolve: in to partial fractions
( x−1 ) ( x−2)
Or
+ 3log 32
5(b) Find the value of log 2 16 8
( )
2 1 2
6 (a) If 1 4 1 , then Compute A2 +2 A−3 I , where I is a unit matrix of order 3 .
1 3 2
Or
45
| |
1 0 0
6 (b) Find x , if 2 3 4 =48
5 −6 x
PART C
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 05 = 20
2. Each question carries FIVE marks
. Resolve into Partial fractions:

7 a)
Or
75 5 32
7b) . Prove that log −2 log + log =log 2
60 9 243
8 a). If A=
3[
1 1 2 2
] −1
2 1 −2 , then show that A = A
−2 2 −1
T
Or
| |
b +c a a
8 b). Show that b c +a b =4 abc .
c c a+ b
@@@
46
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, I SEMESTER
PART-A
1. Write the formulae for Sin (A - B) and Cos (A – B)
2. If Tan A = 2, Find the value of Cos2A.
3. Write the formula for Cosine rule.
. Find the Modulus of

4
PART-B
Instructions: 1. Answer any TWO questions 02 X 03 =
06
cos 12+sin 12
5 a) Show that = Tan570
cos 12−sin 12
Or
√3
5 b) Prove that Cos200 Cos300 Cos400 Cos800 = 16 .
6 a) Write any 3 formulae from Hyperbolic functions.
Or
1
6 b) Find the modulus of z=
2+4 i
PART C
47
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions 04 X 05 =
20
1 1 π
7a). If TanA= ∧TanB= t h en s h ow t h at A+ B=
2 3 4
Or
0
7 b) If A+ B=135 ,t h en prove t h at ( 1+ CotA ) ( 1+CotB )=2
8 a) Find the additive and multiplicative Inverse of 4 + 3i
Or
1+i
8 b) Express the complex number in Exponential form
1−i
@@@
C18-common
SUB.CODE:102F
MODEL PAPER
I SEMESTER EXAMINATION
Time: 2 hours [Total Marks: 40]
PART-A
1. Define proper fraction.
2. Write the formula for cos ( A+ B ) ∧cot ( A + B ) .
3. Define solution of a triangle.
4. Find the value of log 4 16.
5. Convert cos 4 A+cos 6 A into product.
−1 3
6. Ifsin =A then find cotA.
5
7. List the elements of a triangle ABC.
8. What is the formula for the solution of triangle ABC when three sides are given
PART-B
48
1
9 (a) Resolve: into partial fractions.
( x+1 ) ( x+3 )
Or
sin 8 A+sin 6 A
9(b). Prove that =tan 7 A
cos 8 A+cos 6 A
9
10(a). Express in the form of a+ ib .
4+ 3i
Or
10(b) Solve the triangle ABC with a=2, A=300 , C=300 .
11(a) Prove thatsin 500−sin70 0+ sin 100=0 .
Or
−1 2 1 17
11(b) Prove that tan +tan −1 =tan−1 .
7 5 33
12(a) Solve [ 32 −32 ] [ xy ]=[ 47 ] .

Or
12 (b) Find the angle C in any triangle ABC if b=√ 2 ,c =√3 , B=450 .
PART C
[ ]
1 2 2
13(a) Find the inverse of the matrix 2 1 2
2 2 1
Or
13 (b) Prove that sinA +sin ( 1200 + A ) −sin ( 1200− A )=0
0 0 0 0 1
14 (a) Prove that cos 20 cos 40 cos 60 cos 80 = .
16
Or
14 (b) Solve x + y + z=6 , x+ 2 y +3 z=14 , x +4 y +9 z=3 by using Gauss Jordan methods.
15(a) In any triangle ABC prove that sin 2 A +sin 2 B+sin 2 C=4 sinAsinBsinC .
49
Or
15(b) if tan−1 x + tan−1 y+ tan −1 z=π then prove that x + y + z=xyz .
16(a) Solve x +2 y −z=−3 , 3 x+ y + z =4 , x− y +2 z=6 by Cramer’s Rule.
Or
16 (b) Solve the triangle ABC with a=1 b=2 c= √ 2.
@@@
50
I SEMESTER
SKILL UPGRADATION IN - BASIC ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
ACTIVITY ASSESSMENT Steps
1. Mathematical concepts
2. Procedure
3. Explanation
4. Working with others
5. Mathematical errors
ACTIVITIES
1. Prepare a presentation to explain Logarithms.
2. Prepare a list of articles purchased from a super market and arrange in a matrix form to
Compute the total amount using matrix multiplication.
3. Prepare a presentation to resolve a Partial fraction into simpler fractions.
4. Prepare a presentation stating the applications of Trigonometry.
5. List the methods to solve system of equations using Matrices and Determinants. Describe
their features.
6. Visit the library, refer books on Mathematics and collect the detailsrelated to 2
Mathematicians.
7. Prepare a presentation to solve a triangle ABC in different cases.
CO / PO - MAPPING OF ACTIVITIES
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO7 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
51
Rubrics for Activity assessment
CATEGORY 4 3 2 1
Mathematical Explanation shows Explanation shows Explanation shows Explanation shows
Concepts complete substantial some understanding very limited
understanding of the understanding of the of the mathematical understanding of the
mathematical mathematical concepts needed to underlying concepts
concepts used to concepts used to solve the problem(s). needed to solve the
solve the problem(s). solve the problem(s). problem(s) OR is not
written.
Procedures Typically, uses an Typically, uses an Sometimes uses an Rarely uses an
efficient and effective effective procedure effective procedure effective procedure
procedure to solve to solve the to solve problems, to solve problems.
the problem(s). problem(s). but does not do it
consistently.
Explanation Explanation is Explanation is clear. Explanation is a little Explanation is

detailed and clear. difficult to difficult to understand
understand, but and is missing
includes critical several components
components. OR was not included.
Working with Student was an Student was an Student cooperated Student did not work
Others engaged partner, engaged partner but with others, but effectively with
listening to had trouble listening needed prompting to others.
suggestions of others to others and/or stay on-task.
and working working
cooperatively cooperatively.
throughout lesson.
Mathematical 90-100% of the steps Almost all (85-89%) Most (75-84%) of the More than 75% of the
Errors and solutions have of the steps and steps and solutions steps and solutions
no mathematical solutions have no have no have mathematical
errors. mathematical errors. mathematical errors. errors.
PASS SCORE: 2.5
STUDENT ASSESSMENT by RUBRICS
AVE
CO CO CO CO CO CO CO
S.NO PIN RAG
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E
52
Basic Physics
Course Title Basic Physics Course Code 18EC-103F

Semester I Course Group Foundation
Teaching Scheme in 45:15:00 Credits 3
Periods (L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture +Tutorial Total Contact 60
Periods
CIE 60 Marks SEE 40 Marks
Pre requisites: Basic High School Science, Basic Mathematics
Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate the
role of Physics in different areas of engineering and technology.
Course Outcomes: On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain
below Course Outcomes (CO):
Course Outcomes Linked POs Teaching

Periods
Write the correct units and dimensions of physical

CO 1 PO1,PO2 10
quantities and know the concept of friction
Apply knowledge of vectors as a tool to solve engineering
CO 2 PO1, PO2 10
problems
Apply knowledge of mechanics to solve engineering
CO 3 PO1, PO2 10
problems
Apply knowledge of properties of matter to understand
CO 4 PO1, PO2 10
engineering problems
Apply Heat and thermodynamic processes to solve
CO 5 PO1, PO2 10
Apply conservation laws to engineering problems and PO1, PO2,
CO 6 10
utilization of energy sources PO3,PO6
53
BASIC PHYSICS
Course Contents
1. UNIT – 1 UNITS, DIMENSIONS AND FRICTION

Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Physical quantity - Fundamental and derived quantities – Unit –definitions - S.I units -
Advantages of S.I. units - Dimensions and dimensional formula - definitions-units and
dimensional formula for physical quantities - Principle of homogeneity - Applications of
dimensional analysis–Friction – causes - types of friction - Normal reaction - Laws of static
friction - coefficients of friction - expression-rough horizontal surface - expressions for
Acceleration, Displacement, Time taken to come to rest and Work done - Advantages and
disadvantages of friction - Methods to reduce friction – Problems on friction only.
2. UNIT – 2 ELEMENTS OF VECTORS Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T:

2.5)
Scalar and vector quantities – definitions and examples –Graphical representation of a vector -
Classification of vectors (Proper vector, Unit vector, Equal vector, Negative vector, Collinear
vector and Position vector) Resolution of a vector - Triangle law of vector addition –
Parallelogram law of vectors – statement- expression for magnitude and direction of resultant
vector –derivation- illustrations (working of sling and flying bird) - Representation of a
vector in unit vectors i, j and k– Scalar product of vectors-definition- application to work
done by force – properties of scalar product - Vector product of vectors –definition – Right
hand thumb rule and right hand screw rule - application to moment of force - properties of
vector product - area of parallelogram and triangle in terms of vector product - related
problems
3. UNIT – 3 MECHANICS Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Projectile motion – definition - examples - Horizontal projection – Time of flight and

Horizontal range – derivations - Oblique projection – Expression for path of a projectile in
oblique projection - derivation– Maximum height, Time of ascent, Time of descent, Time of
flight, Horizontal range and maximum horizontal range - derivations – Circular motion,
angular velocity, time period and frequency of revolutions–Definitions– Relation between
linear velocity and angular velocity - derivation–centripetal force – centrifugal force –
definitions and expressions only- application (banking of curved path) - angle of banking-
expression only - related problems
4. UNIT – 4 PROPERTIES OF MATTER Duration: 10 periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)
Elasticity and plasticity- definitions – examples - Stress and Strain – definitions and
expressions - elastic limit - Hooke’s law – statement - modulus of elasticity - Young’s
modulus – Derivation – Cohesive and adhesive forces - Surface tension - Illustrations -
Capillarity –angle of contact – definition- examples for capillarity- Formula for Surface
tension based on capillarity (no derivation) – Viscosity - Illustrations of viscosity - Newton’s
formula for viscous force – derivation - Coefficient of viscosity - Poiseuille’s equation -
Effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases– streamlines - laminar flow - turbulent
flow - Reynold’s number - equation of continuity – statement - related problems.
5. UNIT – 5 HEAT AND THERMODYNAMICS

54
Heat – expansion of gases - Boyle’s law –concept of absolute zero - Absolute scale of
temperature – Charles’ laws - Ideal gas equation – derivation - value of universal gas
constant ‘R’ –Isothermal and Adiabatic processes - Differences between isothermal and
adiabatic processes - Internal energy and external work done – Expression for work done –
derivation – first law of thermodynamics –application of first law to isothermal and adiabatic
processes - second law of thermodynamics – specific heat of a gas – molar specific heat of a
gas – definitions – derive relation between CP and Cv - related problems.
6. UNIT – 6 CONSERVATION LAWS AND ENERGY SOURCES

Work and Energy - Potential Energy and kinetic energy–examples – expressions for PE and
KE - derivations - Work-Energy theorem – derivation – Law of conservation of energy –
examples - Law of conservation of energy in the case of freely falling body – proof –
Illustration of conservation of energy in the case of simple pendulum– Non renewable and
renewable energy sources – definition and applications (solar cooker, wind mill and biogas) –
Green house effect - related problems
References:
1. Engineering. Physics by R.K. Gaur, S.L. Gupta, Dhanpatrai Publications, New Delhi.
2. ISC Physics, Book I&II, P. Vivekanandan, DK Banerjee, S Chand, New Delhi.
3. Intermediate Physics, Vol. I&II, Telugu Academy, TS, Hyderabad.
4. Fundamentals of Physics by Halliday and Resnick.
Suggested learning outcomes:
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1. know the concepts of units, dimensions and friction
1.1 Define Physical quantity, fundamental quantity and derived physical quantities
1.2 Define Unit.
1.3 S.I. Units. List the advantages of S.I. units.
1.4 Define dimensions and dimensional formula.
1.5 Write dimensional formulae of physical quantities.
1.6 State principle of homogeneity of dimensions.
1.7 State applications of dimensional analysis.
1.8 Define friction and state its causes.
1.9 State types of friction.
1.10 Explain normal reaction.
1.11 State laws of static friction.
1.12 Define coefficients of friction.
1.13 Derive expression for acceleration of a body moving on rough horizontal surface.
1.14 Derive expressions for displacement and time taken to come to rest and work done in the
case of a body moving on a rough horizontal surface.
1.15 List the advantages and disadvantages of friction.
1.16 Solve related numerical problems on friction only.
1.17 Explain the Methods to reduce friction.
2. know the concepts of Elements of Vectors
55
2.1 Define scalar and vector quantities with examples.
2.2 Represent a vector graphically.
2.3 Classify types of vectors – Proper vector, Unit vector, Equal vector, Negative vector,
Collinear vectors and Position vector.
2.4 Resolve a vector – Vector and Scalar components and relation between them.
2.5 State and explain Triangle law of vector addition.
2.6 State Parallelogram law of vectors – derive expressions for magnitude and direction of
resultant vector.
2.7 Illustrations of parallelogram law – working of sling and flying bird.
2.8 Representation of a vector in terms of unit vectors (i, j ,k)
2.9 Define Scalar product of vectors.
2.10 Application of scalar product for work done by force.
2.11 List the properties of scalar product.
2.12 Define Vector product of vectors.
2.13 Explain Right hand screw rule and right hand thumb rule.
2.14 Apply vector product in the case of moment of force.
2.15 Expressions for area of parallelogram and triangle in terms of cross product.
2.16 List the properties of vector product.
2.17 Solve related problems.
3. know the concepts of Mechanics
3.1 Define Projectile motion with examples.

3.2 Define Horizontal projection – Derive expressions for (a) Time of flight and (b)
Horizontal range
3.3 Define Oblique projection- Derive expression for path of a projectile in oblique projection.
3.4 Derive expressions for (a) Maximum height (b) Time of ascent (c) Time of descent
(d) Time of flight (e) Horizontal range and (f) maximum horizontal range in oblique
projection.
3.5 Define circular motion.
3.6 Define angular velocity, time period and frequency of revolutions in circular motion.
3.7 Derive the relation between linear velocity and angular velocity.
3.8 Define centripetal and centrifugal forces. Write their expressions.
3.9 Define angle of banking.
3.10 Explain banking of curved path and write the expression for angle of banking.
3.11 Solve related numerical problems.
4. know the concepts of Properties of matter
4.1 Define the terms Elasticity and Plasticity with examples.

4.2 Define Stress and Strain and write their expressions.
4.3 Define elastic limit and state Hooke’s law.
4.4 Define modulus of elasticity.
4.5 Define Young’s modulus.
4.6 Derive the formula for Young’s modulus.
4.7 Define cohesive force and adhesive force.
4.8 Define Surface tension. Give illustrations of Surface tension.
4.9 Define capillarity and angle of contact.
4.10 List the examples for capillarity.
4.11 Write the formula for Surface tension based on capillarity (T = ½ hdgr). Explain the terms.
4.12 Define Viscosity. Give illustrations of viscosity.
56
4.13 Derive Newton’s formula for viscous force.
4.14 Define coefficient of viscosity.
4.15 Write Poiseuille’s equation for coefficient of viscosity.
4.16 Discuss effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.
4.17 Define streamline flow and turbulent flow.
4.18 Define Reynold’s number.
4.19 State equation of continuity and explain the terms with diagram.
4.20 Solve related problems.
5. know the concepts of Heat and Thermodynamics
5.1 Explain expansion of gases.

5.2 State and explain Boyle’s law. Mention its limitations.
5.3 Explain concept of absolute zero using the relations Pt=P0(1+t/273) and Vt= V0(1+ t/273)
5.4 Define Absolute scale of temperature.
5.5 State Charles’ laws in terms of absolute temperature.
5.6 Define Ideal gas and derive ideal gas equation.
5.7 Calculate the value of Universal gas constant (R).
5.8 State gas equation in terms of density.
5.9 Define Isothermal and Adiabatic processes.
5.10 Distinguish between isothermal and adiabatic processes.
5.11 Explain the terms internal energy and external work done.
5.12 Derive the expression for work done by the gas [W=P(V2-V1)].
5.13 State first law of thermodynamics.
5.14 Application of first law of thermodynamics to isothermal and adiabatic processes.
5.15 State second law of thermodynamics.
5.16 Define specific heat of a gas.
5.17 Define molar specific heat of a gas.
5.18 Derive the relation between CP, Cv and R.
5.19 Solve related problems
6. know the concepts of conservation laws and energy sources
6.1 Define work and energy.

6.2 Define potential energy and kinetic energy with examples.
6.3 Derive the expressions for Potential energy and Kinetic energy.
6.4 State and prove Work-Energy theorem.
6.5 State law of conservation of energy with example.
6.6 Prove law of conservation of energy in the case of a freely falling body.
6.7 Illustrate law of conservation of energy in the case of simple pendulum.
6.8 Define non renewable and renewable energy sources. Give examples.
6.9 Explain solar cooker, wind mill and biogas.
6.10 Explain briefly Green house effect.
57
MID SEM-I EXAM
S.N
Unit Name R U A Remarks
o
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.N
Unit Name R U A Remarks
o
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A

1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)

2 II

3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)

4 IV

9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)

3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

Total Questions
8 8 8

58
Legend:
C-18 COMMON-103F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-18)

MIDSEM – I
FIRST SEMESTER EXAMINATION
BASIC PHYSICS
TIME: 1 Hour TOTAL MARKS: 20
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first attempted
question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered
PART - A (4x1 =
4M)
Note: Answer ALL the questions. Each question carries 1 mark.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1/4 of page
1. Define unit.
2. State principle of homogeneity.
3. Define vector quantity.
4. Define position vector.
PART- B (2 x 3 =
6M)
Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 3 marks.

The length of the answer shall not exceed 1 page
5 (a). State three laws of static friction.

(OR)
(b). State three applications of dimensional analysis.
6 (a). State and explain triangle law of vector addition.
(OR)
(b). State any three properties of scalar product of two vectors.
PART-C (2×5=10M)
Note: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 5 marks

The length of the answer shall not exceed 2 pages
7 (a). Derive the expression for acceleration of a body moving on rough horizontal surface.
59
(OR)
(b). Explain any five methods of reducing friction.
8 (a). Derive the expression for magnitude of resultant of two vectors using parallelogram
law of vectors.
(OR)
(b). Find the area of parallelogram formed by two vectors
⃗ ^ ^j +5 k^ ∧⃗
A=2 i+3 ^
B =2 i−3 ^j+ k^ as two adjacent sides.
C-18 COMMON-103F

MIDSEM – II
BASIC PHYSICS
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)

1. Define projectile.
2. Define centripetal force.
3. Define stress.
4. Write the formula for surface tension based on capillarity.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)

5 (a). A body is projected into air with velocity of 20 ms-1 at an angle 300 with the earth
surface. Find the maximum height reached.
(OR)
(b). Explain banking of curved path.
6 (a). Distinguish between Cohesive force and Adhesive force.

(OR)
(b). Discuss the effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.
PART-C (2×5=10M)

60
7 (a). Derive the expression for path of a projectile in oblique projection.
(OR)
(b). Derive the relation between linear velocity and angular velocity.
8 (a). Derive the formula for Young’s modulus.
(OR)
(b). Derive Newton’s formula for viscous force.
C18 – COMMON 103F

MODEL PAPER
COMMON – I SEMESTER EXAMINATION
BASIC PHYSICS
Time: 2 Hours] [Total Marks: 40
PART – A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions. 8X1=8

2. Each question carries ONE mark.
1. Write dimensional formula of Pressure.

2. Define modulus of elasticity.
3. Define non renewable energy source.
4. Define absolute zero.
5. State Charles’ constant pressure law.
6. Define molar specific heat of a gas.
7. Define Energy.
8. What is basic principle of wind mill?
PART – B
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions. 4X3=12

2. Each question carries THREE marks.
9(a). State any three laws of friction.

(or)
9(b). State first law of thermodynamics and write mathematical expression for it.
10(a). Distinguish between streamline and turbulent flow.

(or)
10(b). Derive an expression for Potential energy.
11(a). Derive formula for work done by the ideal gas.

(or)
11(b). Calculate the value of universal gas constant ( R ).
12(a). Prove work-energy theorem.

(or)
61
12(b). Explain briefly Green house effect.
PART – C 4X5 = 20
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions.

2. Each question carries FIVE marks.
13(a). Derive expressions for magnitude and direction of resultant of two vectors using
Parallelogram law of vectors.
(or)
13(b). Show that Cp - Cv = R.
14(a). Show that the path of a projectile is a parabola in case of oblique projection.
(or)
14(b). Prove law of conservation of energy in the case of a freely falling body.
15(a). Derive Ideal gas equation PV=RT

(or)
15(b). Distinguish between Isothermal and adiabatic processes.
16(a). Derive an expression for kinetic energy.

(or)
16(b). Explain solar cooker with neat diagram
** *** ***
62
SEMESTER – I
SKILL UPGRATION – BASIC PHYSICS
TASK
LEVEL 1: Concept, Ethical Data, Materials, Source (Library/internet/others)
LEVEL 2: Methodology/procedure
LEVEL 3: Analysis/experiment
LEVEL 4: Interpretation/inference/evaluation.
Bridge activity: - Visiting your college Library:
(A) Prepare a list of available reference books in Physics with details such as author,
publisher, edition etc.
(B) Prepare a list of Physics/Science journals, magazines, monographs with details.
(C) Prepare a log book of your visits to college library with brief description.
Activities:-
1. Discover some physical equations and apply principle of homogeneity.
2. Visit your College Physics laboratory. Collect equal amounts (mass in gm) of water and
mercury. Calculate the density of each in CGS units. Express them in SI system of units
using dimensional analysis. Infer the result.
3. Identify the bodies which have rolling objects like wheels, ball bearings. Prepare a chart with
drawings and explain the importance of rolling friction.
4. Identify the objects where you apply various methods of reducing friction. Make each
method as a module to one individual. Integrate all modules and generate a chart with brief
explanation by the use of drawings.
5. Take two vectors with varying angles of inclination. Find the resultant using triangle law of
vector addition by drawing the vectors in each case on a graph paper. Draw the conclusions.
Correlate the result using parallelogram law of vector addition.
63
6. Three forces F1, F2 and F3 are acting on a body with an angles θ1, θ2, and θ3 with the
horizontal respectively. Calculate the resultant force acting on that body. Draw the diagram.
7. Survey the places where curved paths are banked. Take photographs and reconstruct on the
chart. Prepare a report.
8. Verify Hooke’s Law by performing experiment using weights, spring and ruler.
9. Explore the internet. Prepare a power point report on surface tension and wetting.
10. Construct a model thermometer having centigrade scale and absolute scale with the help of
available simple objects. Formulate the method of development.
11. Debate on green house effect and global warming. Justify the advantage of green house
effect. Prepare a video clip and power point report with diagrams.
12. Design a mini wind mill as an application of conversion of energy.
NOTE: The above activities are indicative. The teacher may assign any other activity
relevant
to the course based on resources available.
Course Outcomes (CO) Linked Pos Activity

Hours
CO1 Application of principle of homogeneity PO1, PO2 3
CO2 Conversion of one system to other system using
PO1, PO2, PO3 3
dimensions
CO3 Preparation of a chart with drawings explaining
PO1, PO2, PO8 3
the importance of friction
CO4 Preparation of a chart on reducing friction PO1, PO2, PO4,
3
PO5, PO8
CO5 Triangle law of vector addition - graphical
analysis – correlation with parallelogram law of PO1, PO4, 3
vector addition
CO6 Calculation of resultant force by component
PO1, PO2, PO4 3
method
CO7 Banking of roads – practical observations PO1, PO2, PO5 3
CO8 Verification of Hooke’s law with simple PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
materials PO4
CO9 Power point report on surface tension and PO1, PO2, PO7,
3
wetting by exploring internet PO9, PO10,
CO10 Construct a model thermometer having
centigrade scale and absolute scale. Formulate PO1, PO2, PO4 3
the development.
CO11 Debate on green house effect and global
warming. Advantage of green house effect -
PO6, PO7 3
justification. Prepare a video clip and power
point report with diagrams.
CO12 Design a wind mill as an application of
PO1, PO2,PO10 3
conversion of energy
64
Rubrics for Task Assessments
General Scale for scoring student performance in Skill Upgradation
Type of
4 3 2 1
Skill/Score
All Data/Material All Data/Material All All Data/Material
was collected one was collected more Data/Material was collected
Data/Material
time independently. than one time was collected several times
Collection
independently. several times with assistance.
independently.
Procedures were Procedures were Procedures were Procedures that
outlined in a step- outlined in a step-by- outlined in a were outlined
by-step fashion thatstep fashion that step-by-step were incomplete
could be followed could be followed by fashion, but had or not sequential,
Methodology/
by anyone without anyone without 1 or 2 gaps that even after Expert
Procedure
additional additional require feedback had
explanations. explanations. Expert explanation been given.
help was needed to even after expert
accomplish this. feedback.
Quality of Skill is Skill is mastered to Skill is present Skill needs
Activity/
high. the level of but with errors improvement.
Development
expectation. and omissions.
Student provided a Student provided a Student No conclusion
Interpretation/ detailed conclusion somewhat detailed provided a was apparent.
summary clearly. conclusion clearly. conclusion with
some reference.
NOTE: The above types of skills are indicative. The teacher may change the skills
depending on type of activity.
PASS SCORE: 2.5
STUDENT ASSESSMENT (RUBRICS)
S. PIN Course Outcomes (Skill Activities) AVE
65
N CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO RA
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 GE
General Engineering Chemistry
Course Title General Engineering Course Code 18EC-104F

Chemistry
Semester I Course Group Foundation
Periods (L:T:P)
Periods
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of chemistry in secondary education.

Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and
appreciate the role of Chemistry and environmental studies in different spheres of industries.
Course Outcome: On successful completion of the course, the students will have ability to attain
below Course Outcomes (CO):
CO Course outcome CL Linked PO Teaching

periods
CO1 Explain Bohr’s atomic model, the R/U/A 1,2,9 12

different types of chemical bonding in
certain molecules and concept of
oxidation, reduction and oxidation
number
CO2 Understand and explain mole, R/U/A 1,2,9 8
molarity and normality and solve the
problems and colloids and their
applications.
CO3 Explain the different theories of acids R/U/A 1,2,3,9 12
and bases, concept of pH, buffer
solutions and buffer action.
CO4 Compare the renewable and non R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7,9,10 8
renewable energy sources, to take
measures to protect the biodiversity
and also the environment.
CO5 Distinguish the temporary and R/U/A 1,2,3,9,10 10
66
permanent hardness, apply the
different methods of softening of hard
water and desalination.
CO6 Explain electrolysis and applications of R/U/A 12,3, 4. 10
electrolysis, Solve the problems on
Faraday’s laws of electrolysis
Total Periods 60
Cognitive levels: R = Remember, U= Understand, A = Apply
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT-I: Fundamentals of Chemistry 12Periods (L : 9.0 Periods, T : 3.0 Periods)
Atomic Structure: Introduction – Atomic number – Mass number- Bohr's Atomic theory - Aufbau
principle - Hund's rule - Pauli's exclusion Principle- Orbitals, shapes of s, p and d orbitals - Electronic
configuration of elements
Chemical Bonding: Introduction – Electronic theory of valency - Types of chemical bonds - Ionic,
covalent and co-ordinate covalent bond with examples - Properties of Ionic and Covalent compounds
Oxidation-Reduction: Electronic Concepts of Oxidation-Reduction, Oxidation Number- calculations.
UNIT-II: Solutions and Colloids 8Periods (L : 6.0 Periods, T : 2.0 Periods)

Introduction-Classification of solutions based on physical state- Molecular weights ,Equivalent
weights- Expression of concentration – Mole concept, Molarity, Normality, Numerical problems on
Mole, molarity and normality - Colloids- Types of colloids- Lyophilic and Lyophobic- Industrial
applications of colloids.
UNIT-III: Acids and Bases 12Periods (L : 9.0 Periods, T : 3.0 Periods)

Introduction - theories of acids and bases and limitations - Arrhenius theory-Bronsted -Lowry theory -
Lewis acid base theory - Ionic product of water - pH and related numerical problems - Buffer
solutions- buffer action - applications of buffer solution.
UNIT-IV: Environmental Studies-I 8 Periods (L : 6.0 Periods, T : 2.0 Periods)

Introduction - environment -scope and importance of environmental studies- important terms -
renewable and non renewable energy sources - Concept of ecosystem, producers, consumers and
decomposers - Biodiversity, definition and threats to Biodiversity- Forest resources- Over exploitation-
Deforestation.
UNIT-V: Water Technology 10Periods (L : 7.5 Periods, T : 2.5 Periods)

Introduction -soft and hard water - causes of hardness – types of hardness -disadvantages of hard
water - degree of hardness (ppm) - softening methods - permutit process - ion exchange
process - drinking water - municipal treatment of water for drinking purpose - Osmosis, Reverse
Osmosis - advantages of Reverse osmosis – Desalination by Electro -dialysis – Defluoridation –
Nalgonda technique.
UNIT-VI: Electrochemistry: 10Periods (L : 7.5 Periods, T : 2.5 Periods)

Conductors, insulators, electrolytes –Types of electrolytes - Arrhenius theory of electrolytic
dissociation - electrolysis –electrolysis of fused NaCl and aqueous NaCl – applications of
electrolysis - Faraday's laws of electrolysis- numerical problems.
Reference Books:
1. Engineering chemistry – Jain & Jain – Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company.
67
2. A Text book of Engineering Chemistry – S.S.Dara – S.Chand Publications.
3. Environmental Studies – A.K.De.
4. Environmental Studies, R. Rajagopalan, 2nd Edition, 2011, Oxford University Press
5. Intermediate Chemistry I and II – Telugu Academy TS
Specific Learning Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the student will have ability to
UNIT- I: FUNDAMENTALS OF CHEMISTRY

1.1 Explain the concept of atomic number and mass number
1.2 State the postulates of Bohr's atomic theory and its limitations
1.3 Explain 1.Aufbau's principle, 2.Hund's rule and 3.Pauli's exclusion principle with
examples.
1.4 Define Orbital.
1.5 Draw the shapes of s, p and d Orbitals.
1.6 Distinguish between Orbit and Orbital
1.7 Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic number 30
1.8 Define chemical bond.
1.9 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valency.
1.10 Define and explain three types of Chemical bonding viz., Ionic, Covalent, Coordinate
Covalent bond with examples.
1.11 Explain bond formation in NaCl and MgO.
1.12 List the Properties of Ionic compounds.
1.13 Explain covalent bond formation in Hydrogen molecule, Oxygen molecule, and Nitrogen
Molecules using Lewis dot method.
1.14 List the Properties of Covalent compounds.
1.15 Distinguish between ionic compounds and covalent compounds.
1.16 Electronic concept of Oxidation and Reduction.
1.17 Define Oxidation Number
1.18 Calculate the Oxidation Number.
UNIT-II: SOLUTIONS AND COLLOIDS

2.1 Define the terms 1.Solution, 2.Solute and 3.Solvent.
2.2 Classify solutions based on physical state.
2.3 Calculate Molecular weight and equivalent weights of acids, bases and salts.
2.4 Define mole.
2.5 Explain Mole concept with examples.
2.6 Define Molarity and Normality.
2.7 Solve Numerical problems on Mole, Molarity and Normality.
2.8 Define Colloids.
2.9 Types of colloids- Lyophilic and Lyophobic.
2.10 Industrial applications of colloids.
68
UNIT-III: ACIDS AND BASES
3.1 Explain Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases.
3.2 State the limitations of Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases
3.3 Explain Bronsted - Lowry theory of acids and bases.
3.4 State the limitations of Bronsted - Lowry theory of acids and bases.
3.5 Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases.
3.6 State the limitations of Lewis theory of acids and bases.
3.7 Explain the Ionic product of water.
3.8 Define pH and explain Sorenson scale.
3.9 Solve the Numerical problems on pH (Strong Acids and Bases).
3.10 Define buffer solutions and give examples of acidic and basic buffers.
3.11 State the applications of buffer solutions.
3.12 Explain the buffer action of acidic and basic buffers.
UNIT-IV: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-I

4.1 Define the term environment
4.2 Explain the scope and importance of environmental studies
4.3 Define and understand the following terms
1) Lithosphere, 2) Hydrosphere, 3) Atmosphere, 4) Biosphere, 5) Pollutant, 6)
Contaminant
7) Pollution, 8) receptor, 9) sink, 10) particulates, 11) Dissolved oxygen (DO),
12) Threshold limit value (TLV),13).BOD and 14).COD
4.4 Explain the growing energy needs.
4.5 Explain renewable (non-conventional) and non renewable (conventional) energy sources
with examples.
4.6 Define an Ecosystem. Understand biotic and abiotic components of ecosystem.
4.7 Define and explain the terms:
1) Producers, 2) Consumers and 3) Decomposers with examples.
4.8 Explain biodiversity and threats to biodiversity.
4.9 Explain the uses of forests and over exploitation of forest resources and deforestation.
UNIT V: WATER TECHNOLOGY

5.1 State the various Sources of water.
5.2 Define the terms soft water and hard water with examples
5.3 Define hardness of water.
5.4 Explain temporary and permanent hardness of water.
5.5 List the usual chemical compounds causing hardness (with Formulae)
5.6 Disadvantages of using hard water in industries.
5.7 Define Degree of hardness, units of hardness in ppm (mg/L) and numerical problems
related
to hardness.
5.8 Explain the methods of softening of hard water: a) Permutit process b).Ion-Exchange
process.
5.9 Essential qualities of drinking water.
5.10 Explain municipal treatment of water for drinking purpose.
5.11 Define Osmosis and Reverse Osmosis (RO).
5.12 List the applications and advantages of RO.
5.13 Desalination of sea water by Electro dialysis.
5.14 Defluoridation - Nalgonda Technique.
UNIT VI: ELECTROCHEMISTRY

6.1 Define the terms1. Conductor, 2. Insulator, 3.Electrolyte and 4.Non - electrolyte
6.2 Types of electrolytes - strong and weak electrolytes with examples.
6.3 Distinguish between metallic conductors and Electrolytic conductors.
6.4 Arrhenius theory of electrolytic dissociation
69
6.5 Explain electrolysis of fused NaCl and aqueous NaCl
6.6 Applications of Electrolysis- Electroplating-Electrolytic refining of metal (Copper)
6.7 Explain Faraday's laws of electrolysis
6.8 Define chemical equivalent, electrochemical equivalent.
6.9 Relationship between chemical equivalent and electrochemical equivalent
6.10 Solve the Numerical problems based on Faraday's laws of electrolysis
Suggested Student Activities or Induction Program:
Forenoon Afternoon
Day1 Registration Class work as per Time table
Day2 Rules and Regulations Chemistry Lab practice classes may be
Day3 Getting acquainted with Head and faculty conducted
Day4 Familiarization with Institutional facilities
Day5 Interaction with Class teacher and Seniors
Day6 Introducing the mentor
Day7 Parent –Teacher meeting
1. Student visits Library to refer to Text books, reference books and manuals to find their
specifications
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Chemistry Lab to familiarize with them.
3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Seminar
6. Surprise test
E - learning links:
https://iupac.org/
https://www.youtube.com
https://www.khanacademy.org/
www.nptel.ac.in
70
Blue Print
MID SEM-I EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A

1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)

2 II

3 III
4 2 10(a) 14(a)

4 IV

5 V 3 5, 6
9(b) 13(b)
11(a) 15(a)
71
11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
Total Questions
8 8 8


Model Question Papers
I SEMESTER, MIDSEM – I
Sub. Code: 18Common-104F
Time: 1 Hour Max. Marks: 20
PART – A
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 4 X 1 = 4 marks
1. State Hund’s rule.

2. Write the electronic configuration of Cr.
3. Define mole.
4. What are colloids?
PART – B
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks 2 x 3 =6 Marks
5. a. Draw the shapes of s and d orbitals.

or
b. Explain the covalent bond formation in Nitrogen molecule by Lewis dot method.
6. a. Classify solutions based on their physical state.
or
b. Compare any three properties of lyophilic and lyophobic colloids.
PART – C
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries five marks 2 x 5 =10 Marks
72
7. a. Distinguish the ionic compounds from covalent compounds.
or
b. What is oxidation number? Find the oxidation number of ‘S’ in H2SO4 and ‘Mn’ in
KMnO4.
8. a. Define Molarity. Find the weight of H2SO4 required to prepare 400 ml of 0.5M solution.
or
b. Define Normality. Calculate the normality of 500 ml solution containing 0.53 grams of
Na2CO3.
I SEMESTER, MIDSEM – II
Time: 1 Hour Max.Marks : 20
PART – A
Instructions: i. Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 4 X 1 = 4 marks
1. What is conjugate acid base pair?

2. Define ionic product of water.
3. Define an ecosystem.
4. What is threshold limit value?
PART – B
5. a. What are the limitations of Arrhenius theory of acids and bases?

or
b. Explain the neutralization according to Lewis theory of acids and bases with an example.
6. a. Explain the terms producers, consumers and decomposers with example.
or
b. What are renewable and non renewable energy sources? Give examples.
PART – C
7. a. Define pH. Find the pH of 0.5M NaOH solution.
73
or
b. What are buffer solutions? State the applications of buffer solutions.
8. a. What is Biodiversity? Explain any two threats to biodiversity.
or
b. What is deforestation? What are its consequences?
C-18COMMON-104F
I SEMESTER EXAMINATION
Time: 2 Hours Max.Marks: 40
PART – A
1. Define atomic mass number.
2. What is biodiversity?
3. Define degree of hardness of water.
4. What are buffer solutions?
5. Define soft water and hard water.
6. Name the salts responsible for temporary hardness of water.
7. Define the terms conductor and insulator.
8. What is an electrolyte?
PART – B
9. a. State and explain Hund’ rule.

or
b. Write any six essential qualities of drinking water.
10. a. Explain the terms producers, consumers and decomposers with example.
or
b. What are strong and weak electrolytes? Give examples.
11. a. Define reverse osmosis and state its advantages.
or
74
b. Explain defluoridation of water by Nalgonda technique
12. a. Distinguish between metallic and electrolytic conductors.
Or
b. State Faraday’s Laws of electrolysis.
PART – C
13. a. Find the molarity and normality of the solution containing 10.6 grams of Na 2CO3 in 2 litres
of solution. .
or
b. Calculate the temporary and permanent hardness of water containing the following salts per
litre
i. Ca(HCO3)2 =32.4 mg, ii. Mg(HCO3)2 = 29.2 mg, iii. CaSO4 =13.6 mg, iv. MgCl2 = 19
mg
14. a. Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases.
or
b. Explain the process of electrolysis of fused NaCl.
15. a. Explain the permutit process of softening of hard water with a neat diagram.
or
b. What are the disadvantages of using hard water in industries?
16. a. Explain the process of electrolytic refining of copper.
Or
b. Calculate the weight of Al deposited on the cathode if 0.5 amperes of electric current is
passed through AlCl3 solution for 1 hour.
.
75
76
GENERAL ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
Suggested Skill Upgradation Activities
Activity – 1
Oral/Power point presentation on the different types of orbitals and electronic configuration:
Step-1: Data collection on orbitals and rules to be followed to write the electronic
configuration .
Step -2: Prepare for a oral/power point presentation on shapes of orbitals and electronic configuration
Step-3: Explain the electronic configuration with oral presentation or power point presentation
Step-4: Submission of the report.
Activity – 2
Oral/Power point presentation on ionic and covalent bonding:
Step-1: Data collection on electronic configuration and chemical bonding.

Step -2: Prepare for a oral/power point presentation on ionic and covalent bonding
Step-3: Explain the ionic and covalent bonding with oral presentation or power point presentation
Step-4: Submit the report along with ppt.
Activity – 3
Preparation and study of physical properties of True Solution, Colloidal Solution, and
Suspension
Step-1: Data/ literature collection.

Step-2: Summarization of data collected.
Step -3: Preparation/ collection of true solution, colloidal solution and suspention
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of physical properties like Nature of the solutions,
Diffusion of the solution, Sedimentation, Visibility of particles, Tyndall effect.
Step-5: Overall presentation of the activity
Activity – 4
Study of the acidic, basic or neutral nature of water sample collected from various sources.

Step-2: Summarization of data/ literature collected.
Step -3: Collection of water samples from various sources.
Step-4: Recording the pH values of different water samples by using universal indicator, pH paper,
pH
meter etc.
Activity – 5
Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy sources.

Step -3: Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy sources available.
77
Step-4: Identify the advantages of renewable energy sources over non renewable energy sources in
protecting the environment.
Activity – 6
Study and analysis of ecosystem (lake, pond etc) existing in your surroundings.

Step -3: Study of the biotic and abiotic components and effect of the pollutants if any on them.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the selected ecosystem and suggest measures to protect it from pollution.
Activity – 7
Study of bio diversity in your surroundings.
Step -3: Study of the biodiversity in your surroundings, understand its advantages and threats that
affect the bio diversity.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the selected bio diversity and suggest measures to protect it.
Activity – 8
Importance of forests resources.

Step -3: Study of the nearby forest area.
Step-4: Prepare a report on the forest selected and report its importance and resources.
Activity – 9
Importance of osmosis and reverse osmosis.

Step -3: Demonstrate the process of osmosis and reverse osmosis by using any semi permeable
membrane .
Step-4: Prepare a report on the advantages of osmosis and reverse osmosis.
Activity – 10
Method of purification of drinking water adopted at your residence .

Step -3: Explanation of the process through oral presentation or power point presentation
Step-4: Prepare a report on the advantages of the process.
78
Activity – 11
Oral/Power point presentation on the softening of water by different methods and comparison.
Step -3: Explain the process and compare them with the help of power point presentation.
Step-4: Submit the report.
Activity – 12
Study of electrolytes and non electrolytes .

Step -3: Differentiate the electrolyte from non electrolyte through the process of electrolysis.
Step-4: Prepare a report on electrolytes and non electrolytes.
Note: Any other skill upgradation activity related to the course may be taken up.
Mapping of POs to Skill Upgradation Activities
S.N Name of the activity Linked POs

o
1 Oral/Power point presentation on the different types of 1,2,4,8,9
orbitals and electronic configuration
2 Oral/Power point presentation on ionic and covalent 1,2,4,8,9
bonding
3 Preparation and study of physical properties of True 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
Solution, Colloidal Solution, and Suspension
4 Study of the acidic, basic or neutral nature of water sample 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
collected from various sources
5 Comparison of renewable and non renewable energy 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
sources
6 Study and analysis of ecosystem (lake, pond etc) existing in 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
your surroundings
7 Study of bio diversity in your surroundings 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
8 Importance of forests resources 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
9 Importance of osmosis and reverse osmosis 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
10 Method of purification of drinking water adopted at your 1,2,4,5,8,9
residence
11 Study of electrolytes and non electrolytes 1,2,3,4,8,9
12 Power point presentation on the softening of water by 1,2,3,4,8,9
different methods and comparison
79
Model Rubrics
S Sub Performance
. activity excellent Good Satisfactory Need
N improvement
o
1 Step-1 Data was collected Data was collected Data was Data was
from more than from three to four collected from collected only
four sources. sources two sources. one source.
2 Step-2 All materials and Almost all The materials and The materials
data required for materials and data data required for and data
the activity were required for the the activity were required for the
accurately prepared activity were accurately activity were
based on the data accurately prepared prepared based on inaccurately
collected based on the data the data collected prepared
independently. collected with the help of
independently. teacher.
outlined in a step- outlined in a step- outlined were outlined were
by-step fashion that by-step fashion, complete with 1 not sequential,
could be followed require explanation or 2 gaps and & performed the
by anyone & & performed the require activity in a
performed the activity effectively. explanation & poor way
activity effectively. performed the
activity normally
4 Step-4 Presented/ Presented/ Presented/ Presented/
explained the explained the explained the explained the
information about information about information about information
the activity in the activity in the activity in about the
logical, interesting logical sequence logical sequence activity
sequence with with visuals or with less visuals without
attractive visuals or diagrams. or diagrams. sequence and
diagrams. visuals or
diagrams.
5 Conclusion Provided a detailed Provided a Student provided Conclusions
/ summary conclusion/ conclusion / a conclusion/ /summary was
summary clearly summary clearly summary less not relevant.
based on the data based on the data effectively
and activity and activity
Note: Separate rubrics may be prepared according to the activity.
80
Basic Electrical &Electronics Engineering
Course Title : Basic Electrical &Electronics Course Code 18EC-105C

Engineering
Semester I Course Group Core
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Contact
Hours : 60Pds
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Basic Physics and Mathematics at Secondary school level
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course the student should be able to achieve the following outcomes
CO1 : Distinguish between DC and AC power and its units and relation between the terms
CO2 : Classify Resistors ,Select the correct resistor for a low power , medium and High power
application, and Use them for a given real time application
CO3 : Compare Electrostatic and Electromagnetic fields and solve simple problems
CO4 : Identify the types of Inductors Interpret their specifications and select the correct value and
type for a given application
CO5 : Identify the types of Capacitors, Interpret their specifications and select the correct value
and Type for a given application
CO6 : Solve simple problems in electrical circuits ,suggest correct electronic components required
for simple electronic circuits including their specifications
Course Content
UNIT 1 –Fundamentals of ElectricityDuration: 8 Periods(L: 4.8 – T:3.2)

Unit 1: Fundamentals of Electricity: Duration:8 Periods
Review of DC voltage and Current- Ohm’s Law-Effects of Electric current-Units of work, power and
energy- Heating effect of Electric current – Electrical power - formula for power and Units -Power
ratings of home appliances - Primary and Secondary Cells- series and parallel connections of cells to
form Battery- Internal resistance of a Battery- Ampere Hour and Watt Hour Efficiencies of the cell.-
Electrical characteristics of Lead acid cell -Condition of a Fully charged cell
AC Fundamentals :Generation of Alternating current - Concept of a cycle -Time period ,

Frequency and Amplitude of a sine wave- formula for the instantaneous value- different forms of
emf equation -average value, R.M.S. value, form factor and peak factor for sine wave- phase and
phase difference.
81
UNIT 2–. Resistors Duration: 12 Periods
Resistors: Types of resistors- specifications - Preferred values- features of Carbon Film Resistors,
Metal film Resistors ,Metal oxide Resistors. Precision Resistors-applications - Using Colour Code.
(4band and 5 band) -.Wire wound Resistors Types- Constructional details of wire wound resistors.
Types of Variable resistors (Potentiometer and Preset) European and US standard symbols -
Constructional details of carbon and wire wound potentiometers.- Features of carbon and wire
wound potentiometers- Series and parallel connections of Resistances-Formulas for equivalent
resistance for series and parallel connections.-Solve simple problems on series and parallel circuits
division of current in parallel circuits- Effect of temperature on Resistance
UNIT3 –. Electrostatics & Electromagnetism Duration: 8 Periods
Electrostatics : Coulomb’s law of electrostatics - Unit charge- Absolute and Relative

permittivity.
Electromagnetism: Absolute and relative permeability of medium- concept of lines of force &
magnetic Field- Field intensity, Magnetic potential, Flux, Flux density-Relation between Absolute
and relative permeability - Field patterns due to Straight current carrying conductor ,Solenoid and
Toroid .Laplace law (Biot-Savart’s Law)- expressions for field strength, - magnitude of the force on
a conductor in a magnetic field- force between two parallel current carrying conductors- nature of the
force with different directions of the currents- Define ampere - Concept of the Magnetic circuit -
Define magneto motive force (mmf), permeability, flux and Reluctance- leakage flux and leakage
co-efficient- -Expression for lifting power of a magnet. Compare electrostatic and magnetic fields
Magnetic Materials – Classification-Ferromagnetic, Paramagnetic, Diamagnetic and Ferrimagnetic

Soft and - Hard magnetic materials - - Properties of Magnetic materials -
UNIT 4 : Inductors & Transformers Duration: 12 Periods
Inductors : Classify inductors- symbols - Specifications - Important parameters of Air cored

inductors- -List various core materials used constructional features - Applications of A.F. and R.F
chokes- Series Aiding and Opposing connections in Inductors-Mutual Inductance-Coefficient of
coupling-Define Transformer - principle of Transformer- Turns ratio - Step up and step down
transformers –Types of transformers
UNIT 5 : Capacitors Duration: 8 Periods
Capacitors: Types of capacitors- specifications - markings on Capacitors - Working voltage of a

capacitor-Using colour code. - Factors affecting the capacitance-properties, - Types of variable
capacitors and their applications- -Use of trimmer capacitors-Mention the losses in capacitors
82
UNIT 6 : Engineering applications Duration: 12 Periods
Problems based on Coulomb’s law - Electrostatic field.- Solve problems on simple magnetic circuits-
Compare magnetic circuit with electric circuit-Effect of air gap in a magnetic circuit- Important
magnetic materials used in the Electrical &Electronic industry Effect of temperature on magnetism -
Curie point –
Selection of Resistors type and ratings for a given application and circuit requirements-
Determination of Colourcode , given the value of Resistance and vice versa – Combining Resistors
to get required Resistance value Range of values and applications of different types of capacitors-
value of capacitor from colour code applications of trimmer capacitor
Recommended Books
1. Electrical Technology Volume 1 By BLTheraja
2. Electronic Devices and Circuits By David A.Bell Prentice hall
3. Hand book of components for Electronics By Charles A. Harper McGrahills
1.0 Distinguish between DC and AC power and solve simple problems related to real life
1.1 Define the terms DC and A.C voltage

1.2 Define Ohm’s law and mention its applications and limitations
1.3 List different effects of Electric current
1.4 Define Electric Power
1.5 Give the formula for power and mention Units (Watts , kilo Watts , Mega watts)
1.6 Define Electrical energy and mention the units (watt hours, kilo watt hours , Megawatt hours)
1.7 Mention the typical power ratings of home appliances like Electricallamps( Incandescent ,
Florescent , CFL &LED) Water Heater , electric Iron, Fans, Refrigerators , Air coolers ,
Television set and computer.
1.8 Calculate total Electrical energy consumption and cost given the wattage , hours of operation
and Electricity tariff
1.9 Mention the merits of CFL and LED lamps over Incandescent lamps from power consumption
point of view
1.10 Define thermal efficiency
1.11 Mention the practical applications of Electric heating like, Water heater, Electric Iron etc.
1.12 Explain the generation of Alternating current with simple loop generator concept.
1.13 Draw the sine wave and explain the concept of a cycle
83
1.14 Define Time period , Frequency and Amplitude of a sine wave
a. Give the formula for the instantaneous value in terms of maximum value,frequency and
time.
1.15 Write different forms of emf equation
1.16 Solve simple problems to calculate Amplitude ,frequency and Time Period
1.17 Define the average value, R.M.S. value, form factor and peak factor for sine wave.
1.18 Explain the terms phase and phase difference.
1.19 Explain the concept of Leading , lagging and in phase with the help of waveforms
1.20 Solve problems to find resultant vector of several alternating quantities.
2.0 Classify Resistors ,Select the correct resistor for a low power , medium and High power
application, and Use them for a given real time application
2.1 Classify types of resistors.

2.2 List the specifications of a resistor, and state their importance.
2.3 Explain the necessity of preferred values in resistor.
2.4 Explain the features of following Resistors.
2.5 Carbon Film Resistors
2.6 Metal film Resistors
2.7 Metal oxide Resistors
2.8 Precision Resistors
2.9 List the applications of the above Resistors.
2.10 Identify Resistance Value by using Colour Code(4band and 5 band).
2.11 List the common faults in resistors.
2.12 Classify wire wound Resistors.
2.13 Explain the constructional details of wire wound resistors.
2.14 List any 4 applications of Wire wound Resistor .
2.15 List the two types of Variable resistors .
2.16 Distinguish between Preset and Potentiometer.
2.17 Draw the European and US standard symbols of Potentiometers and Presets.
2.18 Describe constructional details of carbon and wire wound potentiometers.
2.19 Compare the features of carbon and wire wound potentiometers.
2.20 Give standard specifications for the above.
2.21 List any 3 applications. of above.
84
2.22 Give Constructional details of LDR (Light Dependent Resistor).
2.23 List 3 important specifications of LDR.
2.24 List any 3 applications of LDR.
2.25 Explain the use of VDR.
2.26 Define the terms specific resistance and conductivity.
2.27 Deduce the relation R =( l ) / a
2.28 Solve simple problems using the above formula.
2.29 Solve simple problems on Series and parallel connections of Resistances-
2.30 Explain the effects of temperature on resistance
2.31 Define temperature coefficient of resistance.
2.32 Derive the formula Rt = Ro (1+ot) to find resistance at any given temperature
2.33 Solve Simple problems using the above formula.
2.34 Explain series and parallel connections of Resistances
2.35 Derive the expressions for equivalent resistance for series and parallel connections.
2.36 Solve simple problems on series and parallel circuits
2.37 Explain the division of current in parallel circuits
2.38 Solve simple problems on the above.
3.0 Understand Electrostatics& Electromagnetism
3.1 State coulombs laws of magnetism.

3.2 Define the terms Absolute and relative permeability of medium.
3.3 Explain the concept of lines of force & magnetic Field.
3.4 Define field intensity, Magnetic potential, Flux, Flux density .
3.5 Give the relation between Absolute and relative permeability
3.6 Draw and explain the field patterns due toStraight current carrying conductor (a)Solenoid
and (b)Toroidal
3.7 State Laplace law and Give expressions for field strength,
3.8 Derive the expression for magnitude of the force on a conductor in a magnetic field
3.9 Give the expression for the force between two parallel current carrying conductors
3.10 Explain the nature of the force with different directions of the currents
3.11 Explain the concept of the Magnetic circuit
3.12 Define magneto motive force (mmf), permeability, flux and Reluctance
3.13 Solve problems on simple magnetic circuits
3.14 Compare magnetic circuit with electric circuit.
85
3.15 Explain the effect of air gap in a magnetic circuit
3.16 Explain the terms leakage flux and leakage co-efficient
3.17 Give the expression for lifting power of a magnet.
3.18 Classify the magnetic Materials (Ferromagnetic, Paramagnetic, Diamagnetic and
Ferrimagnetic).
3.19 Define the above magnetic materials.
3.20 Define Soft and Hard magnetic materials.
3.21 Distinguish between soft and Hard magnetic Materials.
3.22 Give 3 examples for each.
3.23 List the important magnetic materials used in the Electrical &Electronic industry.
3.24 List the important properties of Magnetic materials.
3.25 Explain the effect of temperature on magnetism.
3.26 Define the curie point.
4.0 Familiarise with different types of inductors used in electronic circuits and their
applications
4.1 Classify inductors

4.2 Draw the symbol of different types of inductors.
4.3 List the specifications of inductors.
4.4 List and Explain the important parameters of Air cored inductors.
4.5 Explain the terms Stray inductance and stray capacitance.
4.6 List various core materials used in the construction of inductors.
4.7 List the applications of A.F. and R.F chokes.
4.8 List the common faults in inductors.
4.9 Define Transformer
4.10 Explain the principle of Transformer
4.11 Mention the use of transformer in electrical and electronic Engineering applications
4.12 Explain the use of Ferrites in the construction of high frequency inductors.
4.13 Define Self Inductance
4.14 Define Mutual Inductance, coefficient of coupling
4.15 Deduce the relation between Mutual Inductance, coefficient of coupling
5.0 Familiarise with different types of capacitors used in electronic circuits and their
applications
5.1 Know the different types of capacitors
86
5.2 Classify the different types of capacitors.
5.3 List the specifications of a capacitor and state their importance.
5.4 Explain different markings on the a) Electrolytic capacitors b) Ceramic and Plastic capacitors
(Value , Polarization, Voltage, Tolerance , temperature rating).
5.5 Define working voltage of a capacitor.
5.6 Reading of capacitor value and tolerance by 1. Colour code. 2.Value printed.
5.7 State the factors affecting the capacitance of a capacitor.
5.8 Mention the properties, range of values and applications of
5.9 Paper 2. mica, 3. glass, 4. polyester 5. Polystyrene 6.ceramic 7. Electrolytic capacitors.
5.10 Explain the importance of polarity in Electrolytic capacitors.
5.11 Explain the use of capacitors for coupling AC signal and blocking DC.
5.12 Explain self healing in metalized capacitors.
5.13 List different types of variable capacitors and mention their applications.
5.14 Explain the use of ganged capacitor in AM radio for tuning.
5.15 Explain the use of trimmer capacitors.
5.16 Mention the losses in capacitors.
5.17 List 3 common faults in capacitors.
6.0Engineering Applications
6.1 Solve Problems based on coulombs law of electrostatics

6.2 Solve problems on simple magnetic circuits
6.3 Compare magnetic and Electric circuit
6.4 Explain the effect of air gap in a magnetic circuit
6.5 Why choke is preferred over Resistor inflorescent lamp circuit
6.6 Calculate the Resistance for a given color code
6.7 Suggest the color code for a given value of Resistance and Tolerance Value
6.8 Find the equivalent resistance of a given resistance network
6.9 List the applications of Capacitors
6.10 Calculate the value of capacitor from colour code
1. Student visits Library to refer to Manual of Electronic components to find their specifications
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Lab to identify the components
3. Visitnear by Industry to familiarize with fabrication techniques
4. Analyze the connections in the UPS available in the Institution facility
5. .Quiz
6. Group discussion
7. Surprise tests
Suggested E-Learning rsources
87
1.http://electrical4u.com/
2. www.electronics-tutorials.ws
3. www.nptel.ac.in
MID SEM EXAMINATIONS
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R(1 Mark) U(3 Marks) A(5 Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6
11(a) 15(a)

3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8
12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
88
89
BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING – TELANGANA
C-18 DECE
SUB. CODE: 18EC-105C SUB.NAME: BASIC ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
DURATION : 1 HR. MID-I MODEL QUESTION PAPER MAX. MARLS: 20
PART-A
ANSWER ALL THE QUESTIONS. EACH QUESTION CARRIES 1 MARK.
1X4= 4M
1. Define electric power.

2. Define thermal efficiency.
3. Classify resisters.
4. Define specific resistance.
PART-B
ANSWER ALL THE QUESTIONS. EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS.
3X2= 6M
5A . Explain phase and phase difference.
OR
5B. Mention power ratings of electrical water heater, fan, incandescence bulb, television
set,
computer and water coolers.
6A. Explain the constructional details of wire wound resistors.

OR
6B. Describe constructional details of carbon potentiometers.
PART-B
5X2= 10M
7A. Calculate electricity bill for the following load in a house for a month of 30 days.
a. 40W tube lights 5 numbers working 5 hrs daily. b. 2Kw electric heater working
2Hrs daily. c. 80W fans 5 numbers working 8 hrs daily. d. 100W TV set working 10
hrs daily.
Assume meter rent to be Rs.10/- per month and cost of power consumption is Rs4/- per
unit.
OR
7B. Calculate amplitude, RMS value, frequency and time period of a sine wave given by the
equation v = 220 sin( 314) t
8A. Derive the formula Rt = R0 ( 1+ α 0 t ) to find resistance at any given temperature.
OR
8B. A 4 Ω and 8 Ω resistors are connected in series with a parallel combination of 3Ω and
6Ω
resistors. The entire combination is connected to 42 volts DC supply. Find out the
current passing through each resistor.
90
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING – TELANGANA
C-18 DECE
SUB. CODE: 18EC-105C SUB.NAME: BASIC ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
DURATION : 1 HR. MID-II MODEL QUESTION PAPER MAX. MARLS: 20
PART-A
1X4= 4M
1. State coulombs law of magnetism.

2. Define magneto motive force (mmf) and permeability.
3. Define a transformer.
4. Define self inductance and coefficient of coupling.
PART-B
3X2= 6M
5A . Explain the field pattern due to a straight current carrying conductor.

OR
5B. Compare magnetic with electric circuit.
6A. Explain stray inductance and stray capacitance .

OR
6B. Explain leakage flux and leakage coefficient.
PART-B
5X2= 10M
7A. Derive the expression for magnitude of force on a conductor in a magnetic field.
OR
7B. a. Distinguish between soft and hard magnetic materials .Give examples. 4M
b. Give expression for the lifting power of magnet. 1M
8A. Explain the use of ferrites in the construction of high frequency inductors.
OR
8B. Explain the use of transformer in electrical and electronic engineering applications.
91
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING – TELANGANA
C-18 DECE
SUB. CODE: 18EC-105C SUB.NAME: BASIC ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC
ENGINEERING
DURATION : 2 HRS. SEMESTER END EXAM (SEE) MODEL QUESTION PAPER
MAX. MARLS: 40
PART-A
1X8 = 8M
1. Define electrical energy and mention the units.

2. Define Magnetic field intensity and Magnetic potential.
3. Define working voltage of a capacitor.
4. List any two applications of LDR.
5. Mention losses in a capacitor.
6. What is meant by trimmer?
7. Find equivalent resistance of 3 resistors of 2Ω each connected in parallel combination.
8. Yellow , white , Red are colour bands marked on a resistor. Find its value.
PART-B
ANSWER ALL THE QUESTIONS. EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS. 3x4
=12M
9a. Explain the concept of leading, lagging and in phase with the help of waveforms.
OR
9b. Explain self healing in metalized capacitors.
10a. Explain the field pattern in a solenoid.

OR
10b. Explain the effect of air gap in a magnetic circuit.
11a. Explain the factors affecting the capacitance of a capacitor.

OR
11b. Mention the applications of ceramic and electrolytic capacitors.
12a. Two charged particles . Q1 = +10 μC and Q2 = +20 μC are separated by a distance of 10
cm. What is the magnitude of the electrostatic force? ( Assume k = 9 x
109 Nm2C−2)
PART-C
5x4 = 20 M
13a. Calculate electricity bill for the following load in a house for a month of 30 days.
80W lights 10 numbers working 7 hrs daily. b. 2.5 Kw electric heater working 4Hrs
daily. c. 80W fans 5 numbers working 8 hrs daily. d. 100W TV set working 10 hrs daily.
e. computer of 200W working 8 hours per day.
92
Assume meter rent to be Rs.20/- per month and cost of power consumption is
Rs4.5/- per electrical unit.
OR
13b. i) Explain the use of a ganged capacitor in AM radio for tuning. 4M
ii)How does a capacitor block DC? 1M
14a. Derive the expression for magnitude of the force on a conductor in a magnetic field.
OR
14b. Find the total current IT and branch currents I1 and I2 from the following circuit.
15a. Explain the importance of polarity in Electrolytic capacitors and list the specifications
of capacitors.
OR
15b. On a polyester capacitor the colours printed in sequence from top to bottom are
Yellow, Voilet, Orange, White and Red. Find out the value, tolerance and voltage
rating of the capacitor.
16a. Find out the equivalent resistance between the points A and B of the following resistive
network.
OR
16b. A current of 2.0 A flows through a coil that has 150 turns. The coil is made on a
former
of square section 2.0 cm × 2.0 cm, and 10 cm long. In the coil there is a material of
relative permeability 150. Calculate the reluctance.
93
BASIC ENGINEERING DRAWING
BASIC ENGINEERING
Course Title : Course Code 18EC-106P
DRAWING
Semester I Course Group Core
Teaching Scheme in
0 : 1:2 Credits 1.5
Hrs (L :P)
Total Contact
Methodology Lecture + practice 45
Periods:
Rationale: This Course is aimed at developing basic graphic skills so as to enable them to use these
skills in preparation of engineering drawings, their reading and interpretation.
Prerequisites: Enthusiasm to learn this course and requires basic knowledge of Mathematics.
Course Outcomes (CO)
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain the following Course
Outcomes (CO):
PO Mapping Periods
Course Outcome
Acquire the knowledge on Importance of

CO1 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10 3
Engineering drawing and instruments.
CO2 Practice free hand Lettering in different styles. 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10 3

Acquire the knowledge on different styles of
CO3 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10 6
dimensioning systems.
Appreciate the usage of engineering curves for
CO3 tracing the paths and surface profile of the
1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10 12
4 machine components such as gear profile from
involute and cycloid.
Realize the concept of projection and attain
visualization projection of points, Lines and
CO5 Planes. The student will also be able to draw the 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10 6
views related to projection of Points, Lines and
Planes.
Realize the concept of orthographic projections
CO6 and student will be able to draw orthographic 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10 15
views of an object from its pictorial drawing.
Course Contents
NOTE
1. B.I.S Specification should invariably be followed in all the topics.
2. A - 3 Size Drawing Sheets are to be used for all Drawing Practice Exercises.
1.0 The importance of Engineering Drawing and Engineering Instruments
94
Explanation of the scope and objectives of the subject of Engineering Drawing Its importance
as a graphic communication -Need for preparing drawing as per standards – (SP-46 –1988) –
Mention B.I.S - Role of drawing in -engineering education – Link between Engineering
drawing and other subjects of study.
Engineering drawing Instruments

Classifications: Basic Tools, tools for drawing straight lines, tools for curved lines, tools for
measuring distances and special tools like mini drafter & drafting machine – Mentioning of
names under each classification and their brief description - Scales: Recommended scales
reduced & enlarged - Lines: Types of lines, selection of line thickness - Selection of Pencils -
Sheet Sizes: A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, Layout of drawing sheets in respect of A0, A1, A3
sizes, Sizes of the Title block and its contents, Care and maintenance of Drawing Sheet,
Drawing plate: La out of sheet – as per SP-46-1988 to a suitable scale.
2.0 Free hand lettering & numbering
Importance of lettering – Types of lettering -Guide Lines for Lettering
Practicing of letters & numbers of given sizes (7mm, 10mm and 14mm)
Advantages of single stroke or simple style of lettering - Use of lettering stencils
3.0 Dimensioning practice
Purpose of engineering drawing, Need of B.I.S code in dimensioning - Shape description of
an Engineering object - Definition of dimensioning size description - Location of features,
surface finish, fully dimensioned Drawing - Notations or tools of dimensioning, dimension
line, extension line, leader line, arrows, symbols, number and notes, rules to be observed in
the use of above tools - Placing dimensions: Aligned system and unidirectional system (SP-
46-1988) - Arrangement of dimensions - Chain, parallel, combined progressive and
dimensioning by co-ordinate methods - Rules for dimensioning standard - features: Circles
(holes) arcs, angles, tapers, chamfers, and dimension of narrow spaces.
4.0 Geometric Construction
Division of a line: to divide a straight line into given number of equal parts internally
examples in engineering application. Construction of tangent lines: to draw tangent lines
touching circles internally and externally.
Construction of tangent arcs
a) To draw tangent arc of given radius to touch two lines inclined at given angle (acute,
right and obtuse angles).
b) Tangent arc of given radius touching a circle or an arc and a given line.
c) Tangent arcs of radius ‘R’, touching two given circles internally and externally.
Construction of polygon: construction of any regular polygon of given side length using
general method.
Conical Curves: Explanation of Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola, as sections of a double cone

and a loci of a moving point, Eccentricity of above curves – Their Engg. Application viz.
Projectiles, reflectors, P-V Diagram of a hyperbolic process.
Construction of any conic section of given eccentricity by general method.
Construction of ellipse by concentric circles method.
Construction of parabola by rectangle method.
Construction of rectangular hyperbola.
General Curves: Involute, Cycloid and Helix, explanations as locus of a moving point, their
engineering application, viz, Gear tooth profile, screw threads, springs etc. - their
construction
5.0 Projection of points, lines and planes
95
Projecting a point on two planes of projection -Projecting a point on three planes of
projection -Projection of straight line.
a) Parallel to both the planes.
b) Perpendicular to one of the planes.
c) Inclined to one plane and parallel to other planes.
Projection of regular planes.
a) Plane perpendicular to HP and parallel to VP and vice versa.
b) Plane perpendicular to HP and inclined to VP and vice versa.
6.0 Orthographic Projections
Meaning of orthographic projection -Using a viewing box and a model – Number of views
obtained on the six faces of the box - Legible sketches of 3 views for describing object -
Concept of front view, top view, and side view for sketching these views of engg objects -
Explanation of first angle projection. – Positioning of three views in First angle projection -
Projection of points as a means of locating the corners of the surfaces of an object – Use of
miter line in drawing a third view when other two views are given -Method of representing
hidden lines -Selection of minimum number of views to describe full object.
Specific Learning Outcomes:
Upon completion of the subject the student shall be able to -

1.0 Understand the basic concepts of engineering drawing (03 Hours)
1.1 State the importance of drawing as an engineering communication medium
1.2 State the necessity of B.I.S. Code of practice for Engineering Drawing.
1.3 Explain the linkages between Engineering drawing and other subjects of study in
diploma course.
Use of Engineering Drawing Instruments
1. 4 Select the correct instruments and draw lines of different orientation.
1.5 Select the correct instruments and draw small and large Circles.
1.6 Select the correct instruments for measuring distances on the drawing.
1.7 Use correct grade of pencil for different types of lines, thickness and given function.
1.8 Select and use appropriate scales for a given application.
1.9 Identify different drawing sheet sizes as per I.S. and Standard Lay- outs.
1.10 Prepare Title block as per B.I.S. Specifications.
2.0 Write Free Hand Lettering and Numbers (03 Hours)
2.1 Write titles using sloping lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm height
2.2 Write titles using vertical lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm height
2.3 Select suitable sizes of lettering for different layouts and applications
2.4 Practice the use of lettering stencils.
3.0 Understand Dimensioning Practice (06 Hours)
3.1 Define “Dimensioning.
3.2 State the need of dimensioning of drawing according to accepted standard.
3.3 Identify notations of Dimensioning used in dimensioned drawing.
3.4 Identify the system of placement of dimensions in the given dimensioned drawing.
3.5 Dimension a given drawing using standard notations and desired system of
dimensioning.
3.6 Dimensioning standard features applying necessary rules.
3.7 Arrange dimensions in a desired method given in a drawing.
96
3.8 Identify the departures if any made in the given dimensioned drawing with reference
to SP-46-1988, and dimension the same correctly.
4.0 Apply Principles of Geometric Constructions (12 Hours)
4.1 Divide a given line into desired number of equal parts internally.
4.2 Draw tangent lines and arcs.
4.3 Use General method to construct any polygon.
4.4 Explain the importance of conics.
4.5 Construct conics (ellipse, parabola and hyperbola) by general method.
4.6 Construct ellipse by concentric circles method.
4.7 Construct parabola by rectangle method.
4.8 Construct rectangular hyperbola from the given data.
4.9 Construct involute from the given data.
4.10 Construct cycloid and helix from the given data.
4.11 State the applications of the above constructions in engineering practice.
5.0 Apply Principles of Projection of points, lines and planes (06 Hours)
5.1 Visualize the objects
5.2 Explain the I-angle and III-angle projections
5.3 Practice the I-angle projections
5.4 Draw the projection of a point with respect to reference planes (HP&VP)
5.5 Draw the projections of straight lines with respect to two reference
Planes (up to lines parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)
5.6 Draw the projections of planes (up to planes perpendicular to one plane and inclined
to other plane)
6.0 Apply principles of orthographic projection (15 Hours)
6.1 Explain the principles of orthographic projection with simple sketches.
6.2 Draw the orthographic view of an object from its pictorial drawing.
6.3 Draw the minimum number of views needed to represent complete engineering
component.
Linked Program
Cognizant
Course Outcome Objectives
Level
(PO)
Acquire the knowledge on Importance of
CO1 R 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
Engineering drawing and instruments.
CO2 Practice free hand Lettering in different styles. R/U 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
Acquire the knowledge on different styles of
CO3 R/U 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
dimensioning systems.
Appreciate the usage of engineering curves for
tracing the paths and surface profile of the
CO3 R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
machine components such as gear profile from
involute and cycloid.
Realize the concept of projection and attain
visualization projection of points, Lines and
CO3 Planes. The student will also be able to draw the R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
views related to projection of Points, Lines and
Planes.
Realize the concept of orthographic projections
CO4 and student will be able to draw orthographic R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
views of an object from its pictorial drawing.
97
Reference Books
Engineering Drawing by Kapildev – (Asian Publisher)

Engineering Drawing by BasantAgarwal& C.M Agarwal - (McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt. (Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.)
A Textbook on Engineering Drawing by P. Kannaiah, K. L. Narayana, K. Venkata Reddy
NPTEL Videos of Engineering Dwawing.
98
BASIC COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING
BASIC COMPUTER AIDED
Course Title : Course Code 18EC-107P
DRAFTING
Semester I Course Group :Core
Teaching Scheme
0:1:2 Credits : 1.5
in Hrs (L:T:P)
Total Contact
Methodology Lecture + Practice 45
Periods
Pre requisites : The Student should have the knowledge of basic computer operation
This course requires the Basic Computer Skills and Practice concepts of engineering drawing
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Importance and advantages of CAD. Set drawing area and draw geometric shapes and
modify as per requirement
CO2 Add text with required font and size and also dimension by various methods
CO3 Generate isometric model and draw circle on three iso planes
CO4 Create 2D drawings with front, side view with all above features
Course Content:
UNIT -1 Duration: 15
periods
1.1 The Computer Aided Drafting and its software

Definition of Computer Aided Drafting, the Advantages and importance of CAD software
LIKE Auto CAD, Intelli Cad, ProG CAD etc., the features of Graphic Work station, CAD
Environment: Screen, Various tool bars and menus.
1.2 Selection of commands

Commands using toolbars, menus, command bar. Repeating a command, Nesting a command
and modifying a command.Use of prompt history window and scripts, mouse
shortcuts.Creating the drawing.Opening existing and, saving of drawing, setting up a drawing.
Setting and changing the grid and snapping alignment, and the Entity snaps.
1.3 Use of viewing tools of CAD & Use of coordinate systems of the drawing
Use of mouse, Scroll bar to move around within drawing, changing of magnification of
drawing. Displaying of multiple views, the use of controlling visual elements like Line weight.
Two dimensional coordinates such as Absolute, Cartesian, Relative Cartesian and Polar
coordinates and direct method of drawing line.
1.4 Creating simple and complex entities
99
Drawing of lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, rays and infinite lines. Creating and
editing of point entities. Drawing of shapes like rectangles, polygons, polylines, Splines,
donuts, and adding of hatch pattern
1.5 Use the Modifying tools to modify the properties of entities

Entity selection and de selection methods, the Deletion of entities.Copying of entities within a
drawing, between drawings, parallel copies, Mirroring entities and arraying entities.The
Rearranging of entities by Moving, Rotating and Reordering. Resizing of entities by Stretching,
Scaling, Extending, Trimming, and editing the length.The Braking and joining of entities.
Editing of polylines: The Exploding of entities, the Chamfering and Filleting of entities
1.6 Use the drawing information retrieving tools Measure, Divide, Calculate and Display
Measuring the intervals on entities, dividing the entities in to segments. Calculation of areas of
defined by points, closed entities, and combined entities, calculate the distance and angle
between the entities. Displaying the information about the entities and drawing status.
UNIT -2 Duration: 9
periods
2.1 Use the Text tool to create and formatting the various types of text Fonts and its styles
The creating, naming and modifying the text fonts, the Creation of line text, paragraph text,
setting of line text style and its alignment.The Setting of Paragraph text style and its alignment,
and modifying the text.
2.2 Use Dimensioning concepts to create dimensions, Edit dimensions, Control dimension styles
& variables and Adding geometric tolerances
The creating of linear, Angular, Diametral, Radial, Ordinate dimensions. The creating leaders
and annotations, making dimensions oblique, Editing the dimension text, controlling of
dimension arrows and format. The Controlling of line settings and dimension text, the
Controlling of dimension units, and dimension tolerance.
UNIT -3 Duration: 06
periods
3 Isometric Views
Setting of isometric grid – change of iso planes, drawing straight line and circle
Create Isometric views of simple objects
.UNIT -4 Duration: 15
periods
2D Drawings
Using appropriate commands creation of 2D drawings of standard components
Recommended Books
1. Auto cad by George Omura

2. 4MCAD User Guide- IntelliCAD Technology Consortium
100
1 Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to Understand about the Computer
Aided Drafting and its software
1.1 Define Computer Aided Drafting
1.2 List the Advantages of CAD and also various CAD software’s
1.3 Explain the importance of CAD software
1.4 Explain the features of Graphic Work station
1.5 Explain CAD Screen, Various tool bars and menus
1.6 Explain the benefits of Templates
2 Use appropriate selection commands
2.1. Practice commands using toolbars, menus, command bar
2.2. Practice repeating a command, Nesting a command and modifying a command
2.3. Use prompt history window and scripts
2.4. Practice mouse shortcuts
2.5. Practice the Creating the drawing, saving the drawing with .drawing extension and
Opening Existing drawing
2.6. Practice the setting up a drawing with drawing limits and drawing units.
2.7. Practice the setting and changing the grid and snapping alignment
2.8. Practice the Entity snaps
3 Use viewing tools of CAD & Use coordinate systems of the drawing
3.1. Practice the use of Scroll bar, pan command and rotating view to move around within
drawing
3.2. Practice the changing of magnification of drawing
3.3. Practice how the coordinate system work and it is displayed
3.4 Practice the Find tool to determine the coordinates of a point
3.5. Practice the Two dimensional coordinates such as Absolute Cartesian, Relative
Cartesian, Polar coordinates and direct method to draw a line.
3.6. Explain importance and use of Osnap / Esnap points.
3.7. Practice to draw with other drawing commands like circle, polygon and other.
4 Create the simple and complex entities
4.1. Draw the lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, rays and infinite lines and shapes
like Rectangles, Polygons, Polylines, Splines, donuts
4.2. Practice the adding of hatch with required pattern and adjusting line angle and line
space.
5 Use the modifying tools to modify the properties of entities
5.1. Practice the various methods of entity selection like window, cross window, fence, last
and previous methods and deselection method
5.2. Practice the Deletion, breaking and trimming of entities
5.3. Practice the Copying of entities within a drawing, between drawings
5.4. Practice the Chamfering and Filleting of entities
5.5. Practice the making of parallel copies, Mirroring entities and Arraying entities
5.6. Practice the Rearranging of entities by Moving, Rotating and Reordering
5.7. Practice the Resizing of entities by Stretching, Scaling, and Extending.
101
5.8. Practice the Editing of polylines: Opening, Closing, Curving, Decurving, Joining,
Changing width and editing vertices
5.9. Practice the Exploding of entities
6. Use the drawing information retrieving tools Measure, Divide, Calculate, Display, and
Track
6.1. Divide the entities in to required number of segments
6.2. Calculate the areas defined by points, of closed entities, and combined entities
6.3. Calculate the distance between the entities
6.4. Calculate the angle between the entities
6.5. Display the information about the entities and drawing status
6.6. Track time spent working on a drawing
7. Use the Text tool to create and formatting the various types of text fonts and its styles
7.1. Practice the creating, naming and modifying the text fonts
7.2. Practice the Creation of line text, paragraph text
7.3. Practice the Setting of line text style and its alignment
7.4. Practice the Setting of Paragraph text style and its alignment
7.5. Practice the Changing of line text and Paragraph text
7.6. Practice the use of alternate text editor
8 Use Dimensioning concepts to create dimensions, Edit dimensions, Control dimension
styles & variables and Adding geometric tolerances
8.1. Practice the creating of linear, Angular, Diametral, Radial, Ordinate dimensions
8.2. Practice the creating leaders and annotations
8.3. Practice the making dimensions oblique,
8.4. Edit the dimension text
8.5. Practice the Controlling of dimension properties like arrow types, size, dim line
adjustment, dim offset, text size: primary and secondary units and format
8.6. Practice the Controlling of dimension units, and dimension tolerance
9 Create 2D Drawings
Create 2D drawings of standard mechanical components
102
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R(1 Mark) U(3 Marks) A(5 Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6
11(a) 15(a)

3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8
12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
103
Course Outcomes CL Linked PO Teaching
Hours
Importance and advantages of CAD. Set drawing
CO1 area and draw geometric shapes and modify as per U/A 1,2,3,9,10 15
requirement
CO2 Add text with required font and size and also U/A 1,2,3,9,10
dimension by various methods 9
CO3 Generate isometric model and draw circle on three U/A 1,2,3,9,10
iso planes 6
CO4 Create 2D drawings with front, side view with all A 1,2,3,10
above features 15
104
BASIC ELECTRICAL &ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : Basic Electrical &Electronics Course Code 18EC-108P

Engineering lab practice
Teaching Scheme in 1:0:2 Credits :3
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact
Periods : :45
Pre requisites: This course requires the basic skills of handling basic tools
Course outcomes:
Course Outcome CL Linked PO Teaching

Hours
CO1 Identify the significance of Safety Hazards and R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5,6,7, 15
preventive methods, and apply them for safe and 8
efficient Laboratory practice.
CO2 Identify of different wires, cables and apply them for R/U/A 1,2,3,4 12
simple House wiring applications
CO3 Use basic Electronic measuring Instruments R/U/A 1,2,3 9
CO4 Design simple circuit using Electronic components A 1,2,3,10 9
TOTAL 45
Course Contents
I. Electrical Wiring
1. A) Read Safety precautions and Identify various Symbols related to a ) safety b) Electrical
Engineering c) Electronic components
B) Identify different a) wires and cables b) Electrical Accessories c) electronic components
2. Identify the terminals of Electrical accessories like a) Two pin socket b) 3 Pin socket c)
Power socket d) power plug and make connections .
3. Make simple switch connections using low voltage transformer and 12V lamp
4. Make either of two lamps glow by two way switch
II. Electronic Instruments & Electronic components
5. Identify and practice the operation the following equipment a) DC Regulated power supply
b) Digital Multimeter c) Decade Resistance box d) decade capacitance box
6. Identify Different Electronic Components a) Resistors b) Capacitors and C) Inductors
&Transformers , read their value and verify the value of Resistors with Digital multimeter
7. A) Verify the laws of Resistance using a nichrome wire and Multimeter
105
B) Verify the effect of temperature
8. Measure the current flowing through a two Resistors connected in series and voltage drops
across each resistors for different combinations of Resistors (Use Decade Resistance boxes)
9. A.) Verify voltage and current relationship in series and parallel resistive circuits.
B) Connect Resistors in series and parallel combination to get the required value and Verify
with DMM
III. Capacitors & Transformers
10. A) Connect Electrolytic Capacitors in Series and Parallel and observe the voltage division
B) Connect a) DC source b) AF generator to a capacitor alternately and verify that Capacitor
blocks DC and allows AC.
11. Measure the Resistance of Primary and Secondary windings of Transformer with Digital
Multimeter
12. Identify Normal and centre tapped Transformers and measure the voltage across secondary
winding terminals
13. Experimentally Verify that same Transformer can be used as Step-down transformer and as
Step-up Transformer
14. Experimentally Verify that he transformer does not change the frequency of output
voltage/Current.
IV. Soldering Practice
15. Practice soldering of a) Resistors b) Capacitors c) wires (both single strand and Multi
strand) on a general purpose PCB taking due precautions.
Reference books:
1. Getting Started in Electronics by Forrest.M.Mims (e-book)
E-Links:
1. www.electronicsh/ub.org/tutorials
106
Basic Science Lab Practice (Physics Lab + Chemistry Lab)
Course Title Basic Science Lab Course Code 18Common-

Practice (Physics Lab + 109P
Chemistry Lab)
Semester I Course Group Practical
Teaching Scheme in 15:0:30 Credits 1.5

Periods (L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods 45
Physics Lab – 109P(A)
Pre requisites: Knowledge of basic concepts of High School Science, Basic Mathematics
Course objectives: To provide practical knowledge about the basics of Physics instrumentation
and calculations/measurements.
Lecture and Demonstration: 1 Period
1. Introduction to Physics practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of

equipment in the laboratory.
2. Maintenance of apparatus and equipment.
3. Following Do’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in manual and record book.
5. Write the procedure of the experiment before the commencement of each experiment.
6. Strictly following of instructions given from time to time by the lecturer-in-charge.
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the lecturer in charge.
Conduct of an experiment: 2 Periods
Course outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to:
1. Use Vernier caliper to determine the volumes of objects like cylinder and sphere.
2: use Screw gauge to determine thickness /diameter of small objects like glass plate and wire.
3: prove Boyle’s law employing Quill tube.
4: determine the viscosity of liquid using capillary method.
5: verify the parallelogram law and triangle law of forces.
References:
1. Basic Applied Physics – R.K. Gaur
107
2. Laboratory manual for class XI and XII - NCERT
PHYSICS PRACTICALS
List of experiments
Semester I
1. Vernier calliper - determine the volumes of a cylinder and sphere.

2. Screw gauge - determine thickness of a glass plate and cross section of a wire.
3. Boyle’s law - verification using Quill tube.
4. Coefficient of viscosity of liquid - using capillary method.
5. Parallelogram law and Triangle law of forces – verification.
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, class room interaction, group discussions, graded
exercises, demonstration and practice.
Conduction of experiments: 2 periods/Experiment.
Student must perform experiment individually under the supervision of the lecturer-in charge.
On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain below Course
outcomes (CO):
Course Outcomes CL Linked Teaching

POs Periods
CO 1 Hands on practice on Vernier Caliper U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 2 Hands on practice on Screw gauge U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 3 Boyle’s law verification U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 4 Coefficient of Viscosity by capillary method U/A 1,2,3,8,9 L:P::1:2
CO 5 Verification of Parallelogram law of forces U/A 1,2,3,8,9

and Triangle law of forces L:P::1:2
CO 6 Relate the answers to the oral questions
Cognitive levels (CL): U=Understand, A=Application
Specific learning outcomes:
108
Name of the Experiment
Competencies Key competencies
1. Hands on practice on Vernier  Find the Least count  Read the scales
 Fix the specimen in position  Calculate the volume
Calipers – Cylinder and sphere  Read the scales of given object
 Calculate the volume of given
object
2. Hands on practice on Screw  Find the Least count  Read the scales
gauge – Wire and glass plate  Fix the specimen in position  Calculate thickness of
 Read the scales given glass plate
 Calculate thickness of glass plate  Calculate cross section
and cross section of wire
of wire
3. Boyle’s law verification – Quill  Find the length of air
tube  Note the atmospheric pressure column
 Fix the quill tube to retort stand  Find the pressure of
 Find the length of air column enclosed air
 Find the pressure of enclosed air  Find the value P x l
 Find and compare the calculated
value P x l
4. Coefficient of viscosity by  Find the least count of vernier  Find the pressure head
capillary  Fix the capillary tube to aspiratory  Calculate rate of
bottle volume of liquid
Method - water  Find the mass of collected water collected
 Find the pressure head
 Find the radius of
 Calculate rate of volume of liquid
collected capillary tube
 Find the radius of capillary tube  Calculate the
 Calculate the viscosity of water viscosity of water
using capillary method
5. Verification of Parallelogram  Fix suitable weights  Find the angle at

law of forces and Triangle law of  Note the positions of threads on equilibrium point
forces drawing sheet  Constructing
 Find the angle at equilibrium point parallelogram
 Construct parallelogram
 Compare the measured diagonal  Construct triangle
 Construct triangle  Compare the ratios of
 Find the length of sides force and length
 Compare the ratios
EXAMINATION & EXPERIMENTS
109
S.NO EXAMINATION EXPERIMENTS
1 MIDSEM-I EXPERIMENT NO 1 & 2
2 MIDSEM-II EXPERIMENT NO 3 & 4
SEMESTER END
3 EXPERIMENT NO 1,2,3,4 and 5
EXAMINATION
Scheme of Valuation of SEE

S.No Particulars Marks
1. Objective/Aim 01
2. Apparatus/Equipment 02
3. Observations 02
4. Principle including formula 02
5. Experiment (Tabular form, readings, etc) 05
6. Calculation and Result 05
7. Viva Voce 03
Total 20
Chemistry Lab - 109P(B)
110
Prerequisite:
Knowledge of basic concepts of chemistry of secondary education.
Course Objectives:
To provide practical knowledge about the basics of preparation of chemical solutions and volumetric
analysis of chemical compounds.
Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to attain CO:

Periods
CO1 Prepare the standard U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2

solution.
CO2 Estimate the amount of the U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2

chemical substance in the
given sample of
solutions(HCl, NaOH&
H2SO4).
CO3 Determination of hardness U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2

of water in the given
sample.
CO4 Relate the answers to the U/A

oral questions
U = Understand, A = Application
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, classroom interaction, group discussion,
demonstration and practicals.
Conduction of experiments: Lecture 1 period + Experiment 2 periods.
Student must conduct experiment individually under the supervision of the staff-in-charge.

1. Introduction of chemistry practical and its importance, safety precautions in
maintenance of cleanliness and orderliness of chemicals in the laboratory.
3. Follow of DO’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in record book.
111
6. Strict following of instructions given from time to time by the staff-in- charge.
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the staff in charge.
Course content
Volumetric Analysis: (22.5 Periods)
Volumetric analysis by Titrimetric Method:-
Volumetric Analysis -Titration – Standard Solutions- Concentration of solutions-

Indicators- acid base indicators- selection of indicators-endpoint of titration-Neutralization.
List of experiments:
1. Preparation of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.
2. Estimation of hydrochloric acid present in 250 ml of solution by using
Standard sodium carbonate solution.
3. Estimation of sodium hydroxide present in 250ml of solution by using standard hydrochloric
acid solution.
4. Estimation of sulphuric acid present in 250ml of solution by using standard sodium
hydroxide solution.
5. Determination of total hardness of water sample by 0.02N EDTA solution.

1. Prepare standard sodium carbonate solution.
2. Estimate hydrochloric acid present given volume of solution by using
standard sodium carbonate solution.
3. Estimate sodium hydroxide present in the given volume of solution by using standard
hydrochloric acid solution.
4. Estimate sulphuric acid present in the given volume of solution by using standard sodium
hydroxide solution.
5. Determine the total hardness of water sample by using 0.02N EDTA solution.
Reference Books:
1. Vogel’s Inorganic Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.

2. Practical chemistry by O.P.Pande& others.
3. Qualitative and quantitative analysis by Alex.
112
Scheme of Valuation for MID I & II and SEE
Sl. No. Particulars Marks
1 Identification of apparatus/equipment/chemical 2
compounds/tools/etc.
2 Writing Procedure 5
3 Conducting of experiment 4
4 Observation and Results 6
5 Viva-voice 3
Total 20
C-18 COMMON-109P
113
MIDSEM – I
BASIC SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE
Instructions: (1) Answer both PART-A AND PART-B on separate answer sheets.
(2) Each question carries TEN marks.
PART-A (PHYSICS LAB)
Perform ONE experiment allotted by the examiner. 1 x 10 = 10
1. Find the volume of given sphere using Vernier caliper.

2. Find the volume of given cylinder using Vernier caliper.
3. Determine the thickness of given glass plate using Screw gauge.
4. Find the cross sectional area of given wire using Screw gauge.
PART-B (CHEMISTRY LAB)
5. Prepare 250 ml of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.

6. Estimate the amount of hydrochloric acid present in 500 ml of the given solution using
0.02M sodium carbonate solution.
C-18 COMMON-109P
114
MIDSEM – II
1. Verify Boyle’s law using Quill tube.

2. Determine coefficient of viscosity of water using capillary method.
3. Estimate the amount of NaOH present in 500 ml solution using 0.02M HCl solution
4. Find the Molarity and estimate the amount of Sulphuric acid present in 250 ml solution
using 0.01M NaOH solution.
C18 – COMMON 109P

MODEL PAPER
115
COMMON – I SEMESTER EXAMINATION

(2) Each question carries TWENTY marks.
1. Find the volume of given sphere using Vernier caliper.

2. Find the volume of given cylinder using Vernier caliper.
3. Determine the thickness of given glass plate using Screw gauge.
4. Find the cross sectional area of given wire using Screw gauge.
5. Verify Boyle’s law using Quill tube.
6. Determine coefficient of viscosity of water using capillary method.
7. Verify parallelogram law of forces.
8. Verify triangle law of forces.
9. Prepare 250 ml of 0.05M sodium carbonate solution.

12. Find the Molarity and estimate the amount of NaOH present in 100 ml of the given solution
using 0.01M HCl solution.
13. Estimate the amount of Sulphuric acid present in a litre of solution using 0.01M NaOH
solution.
14. Determine the total hardness of the given water sample using 0.02N EDTA solution
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL LAB PRACTICE
Course Title :COMPUTER FUNDAMENTAL LAB Course Code : 18EC-110P
116
PRACTICE Course Group : Core
Semester :I Credits :3
Teaching Scheme in Hrs (L:T:P) :7.5:0:37.5 Total Contact Hours : 45 Pds
Type of course : Tutorial + Practicals SEE : 40 Marks
CIE : 60 Marks
Prerequisites
Knowledge of English comprehension , Basic Computer operation and IO devices.
Course Outcome
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain below Course Outcome
(CO):

Hours
CO1 Identify hardware and software components and
R,U, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5
work with DOS OS A
CO2 Operate the computer system with Windows OS
R,U, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
A
CO3 Access the internet R,U, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5
A
CO4 Draft the documents using word processing R,U, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 20
Software A
Total Sessions 45
Legends: R = Remember U= Understand; A= Apply and above levels (Bloom’s revised taxonomy)
Course Contents
COMPUTER BASICS
1. Identify the various components of a Computer system

2. Differentiate between hardware and software
3. State the configuration of a computer system
4. Practice on DOS Internal and External commands.
5. Create and use Batch Files.
6. Know the usage of Editors.
WINDOWS Operating System
7. Exercise on creation of text Files using Notepad, WordPad

8. Exercise on creation of .jpeg, .bmp files using MS Paint
9. Exercise how to use calculator
10. Exercise on creation of folders and organizing files in different folders
11. Exercise on use of Recycle Bin, My Computer and My Documents
12. Exercise on creation of shortcut to files and folders (in other folders) on Desktop
13. Exercise on arranging of icons – name wise, size, type, Modified
14. Exercise on searching, accessing and organizing files / folders
15. Change resolution, colour, appearance, screen server options of Display, date and time
117
INTERNET
16. Importance of web browser software
17. Structure of URL
18. Create an E-mail account
19. Send & Receive an E-mail
20. Browse the Internet using various search engines
WORD Processing Software
21.Open MS-word and Identify the components on the screen

22.Create a document using MS-word and save it.
23.Create a table using MS-Word and save it.
24.Apply formulas in table & sort the table
25.Convert text into table & table into text.
26.Insertion of new rows and columns in the existing table and changing background colour in
Table
27. Merge and split cells in a Table
28. Change the font of a text
29. Exercise with Headers and Footers, paragraph tool bar
30. Insert objects into the document like pictures, shapes, charts, and word-art.
31. Printing a document , page setting, different views of a document
32. Import & export files to & from Word.
33. Create a letter and send to multiple users using mail merge tool of MS-word
34. Create a Simple Newsletter with minimum three columns. Insert a Clip Art in the
Newsletter.
35. Create a Resume for a Job Application.
36. Create the Cover Page of a Project Report (use Word Art, insert Picture Image).
37. Prepare the class time table of your class.
Resources:
1. Computer Fundamentals Concepts, Systems, Application, D.P.Nagapal, S.Chand
Publication, RP-2014, ISBN: 81-219-2388-3
2. http://www.tutorialsforopenoffice.org/
3. http://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/documentation/
Software Tool
Any open source tool or equivalent proprietary tools
118
SKILL Upgradation-I
Course Title : Skill Upgradation -I Course Code : :Common

Semester : I Course : Core
Teaching Scheme in periods ( L : : 0:0:7 Group
Credits : 2.5
T :P)
Methodology : Activities Total : 105
Contact
CIE : Rubrics Periods
SEE : Nil
Rationale: This course is introduced for all semesters with a purpose of providing outside
classroom experiences that lead to overall development of the students. One whole day is
allocated for activities.
Course Objective
1. To create an awareness on Engineering Ethics and Human Values.

2. To instill Moral, Social Values and Loyalty.
3. Create awareness about social responsibilities of Engineers
4. To improve Communication and Participation skills
Course Content and Blue Print of Marks for SEE
Activity
Periods Frequency
No Activity
Haritha Haram(plantation &Maintenance) 9 3 times in a
1
semester
Waste management 12 3 times in a
2
semester
Swatch Bharat 28 4 times in a
3
semester
Mini projects 7 1 time in a
4
semester
Video Clips 9 3 times in a
5
semester
Seminar/Quiz/Presentation/Group discussion 18 6 times in a
6
semester
Local Visits (also with in the campus) 6
7 2 times
Expert Lectures
 Human Values 16
8 4 Times
 Anti-ragging Laws
 Responsibilities of a good citizen
105
Total Periods
Note: in case Expert faculty are not available English faculty should handle the expert lectures or
Video clips on the suggested lectures may be played
119
Course Outcomes
CO Outcome CO/PO Mapping

CO1 Practice the moral values that ought to guide the Engineering 1,2,5,6,7,8,9,10
profession.
CO2 Develop the set of justified moral principles of obligation, 8,10
ideals that ought to be endorsed by the engineers and apply
them in real life situations
CO3 Create awareness of saving environment through activities 3,4,5,8,9
CO4 Create awareness of Constitution of india 1,4,7,8,9,10
COURSE CONTENT:
Professional Ethics-Objectives of study of professional ethics-Human values- Definition of

Morals and Ethics-Difference between Morality and Ethics-Values-Definition-Types of
values-Definition of Integrity- Concept of Work Ethic- Service Learning - Definition Virtues-
Definition-Civic Virtue-Duties and Rights - Respect for Others – Attitude and values,
opinions-changing attitude-beliefs-Reliability-Living Peacefully-Means to be adopted for
leaving peacefully-Caring-Sharing-Honesty-ValuingTime-Co-operation-Commitment-
Empathy-Self-Confidence-Spirituality. –Responsibilities of a good citizen
Evaluation:
The student must maintain a record of all activities conducted on skill ugradtion/ Activities
day and prepare a soft copy of report and submit it to their mentor or upload to the institute
website or mail.
The reports shall be evaluated by the mentors though rubrics and accordingly give the
eligibility for 2.5 credits . The student must have participated in at least 75% of activities to
get eligibility.
CO-PO Mapping Matrix

Engineering Tools
Course Outcome
Experiments and
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Communication
Mapped PO
Environment &
Individual and
sustainability
Engineer and
Team work
Knowledge
Discipline
practice
society
Ethics
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1
0
CO1   5,10
CO2   5,10
CO3     6,7,9,10
CO4    5,7,10
120
Electronics &Communication
Engineering
Semester-II
121
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME
Course Course Name Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Code Instruction Total Credit Continuous internal Semester end
period Period s evaluation examination
sper s per
week semest
L T P er Mid Mid Internal Max Total Min
Sem1 Sem2 Evaluatio marks Mark marks
n Min marks s for
passing
includi
ng
internal
1 18EC- Communicative 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
201F English
2 18EC- Engineering 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
202F
3 18EC- AppliedPhysics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
203F
4 18EC- EngineeringChemistry 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
3 1
204F
5 18EC- Semiconductor 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35

3
205C Devices
6 18EC- AdvancedEngineering 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
206P
7 18EC- Advanced Computer 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
207P Aided Drafting
8 18EC- Semiconductor devices 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
208P Lab Practice
9 18EC- AppliedSciences Lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50

209P- Practice
A+B
10 18EC- IT Lab Practice 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
210P
0
11 Skill Up gradation 0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -- -
TOTAL 20 05 17 630 25 200 200 200 400 170 1000 425

1.Cumulative 35% (Mid sem 1 + Mid sem 2+ Tutorials+ End examination) and minimum marks
in end examination is 35% (i.e.14marks). If the cumulative of CIE is less than 35% (i.e.21 marks out
of 60) therefore more than 35% of SEE is required to get overall 35%.
122
Advanced English
Course Title :Advanced English Course Code : 18EC -201F
Semester : II Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme in Periods (L:T:P:) : Credits :3
45:15:00
Methodology : Communicative Language Total Contact Hours : 60 periods
Lecture + Tutorial
Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of English Language

COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course the students will have the ability to:
201.1 communicate effectively in English
201.2 listen for specific details and use prepositions appropriately.
201.3 learn vocabulary and use them in professional interaction
201.4 analyse errors and make communication flawless
201.5 comprehend central idea and minute details
201.6 make notes, write resumes, prepare cover letters and draft reports
CO-PO Matrix
CO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 Mapping POs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
201. 2 2 2 -- 1 -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,3,5,8,9,10
1
201. 2 2 1 2 -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
2
201. 2 2 -- 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,1
3 0
201. 2 2 2 2 1 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,4,5,7,8,9,1
4 0
201. 2 2 2 -- 1 -- 2 3 3 3 1,2,3,57,8,9,10
5
201. 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- 3 3 3 1,2,8,9,10
6
123
COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT – 1 SPEAKING Duration: 12 Periods

1. Expressing Obligation
2. Fixing and Cancelling Appointments
3. Extending and Accepting Invitations
4. Giving Instructions
5. Asking for and Giving Directions
UNIT - 2: LISTENING Duration: 6 Periods

6. The Here and Now!
UNIT –3: VOCABULARY Duration: 8 Periods

7. How to Learn a New Word
8. Synonyms, Antonyms and One word Substitutes
UNIT -4: GRAMMAR Duration: 12 Periods

9. Reported Speech
10. Error Analysis - I
11. Error Analysis - II
12. Error Analysis - III
UNIT - 5: READING Duration: 6 Periods
13. An Environmental challenge

14. The Will to Succeed
15. Waiting for Mr. Clean
UNIT- 6: WRITING Duration: 16 Periods

16. Data Interpretation- I
17. Data Interpretation- II
18. Data Interpretation- III
19. Writing a Resume
20. Writing a Cover Letter
124
21. Note Making
22. Writing a Report

On completion of the course the students will be able to:
 express obligation, fix and cancel appointments

 extend, accept and decline invitations.
 give instructions and directions
 identify and use prepositions
 enhance their vocabulary
 learn synonyms, antonyms and use one word substitutes
 read and understand main ideas and answer the questions
 write in reported speech
 identify and correct common errors
 interpret data and write a paragraph
 learn to prepare cover letter and resume
 make notes and write reports
Internal evaluation
Test Units Marks Pattern
Mid Sem 1 Speaking 20 Part A 4 short answer questions

Listening Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Mid Sem 2 Vocabulary 20 Part A 4 short answer questions
Grammar Part B 2 short essay questions with internal
choice
Slip Test 1 Speaking 5 2 questions out of 3 questions
Listening
Slip Test 2 Vocabulary 5 2 questions out of 3 questions

Grammar
Assignment One assignment per one 5 Different group assignments of higher order
semester questions that develop problem solving skills
and critical thinking should be given
Seminars One seminar per one 5 Oral presentations using audio –visual
semester equipment, charts, etc.
Total 60
125
 Listen to a passage /conversation / dialogue / speech and answer the questions
 Group Discussions
 Seminars
 Review a movie
 Review a book
 Narrating a story
 Chain stories
 JAM
 Speak about incidents /events /memories /dreams /role model
 Interview with famous personalities
 Reading for main ideas and specific details
 Summarizing
 Picture description
 Writing a recipe
 Describing a process
 Giving directions using maps
 Surveys
 Filling forms
 e-mail etiquette
 Preparing reports on field visits, experiments, projects
Textbook: English for Polytechnics

(English Textbook for the First-Year Diploma Students)
REFERENCES:
1. Practical English Grammar by A.J Thomson and A.V. Martinet
2. A Course in Phonetics and Spoken English by J. Sethi and P.V Dhamija
3. Word Power Made Easy by Norman Lewis
4. Keep Talking by Friederike Klippel
5. More Grammar Games by Mario Rinvolucri and Paul Davis
6. Essential English Grammar by Raymond Murphy
7. Spoken English-A Self Learning Guide to Conversation Practice by V Sasi Kumar
e-learning:
1.www.duolingo.com
2. www.bbc.co.uk
3. www.babbel.com
4. www.merriam-webster.com
5. www.ello.org
6. www.lang-8.com
7. youtube.com
8. Hello English(app)
9. mooc.org
10. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in
126
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A

1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)

2 II

3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)

4 IV

9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
Total Questions
8 8 8

127
Legend:

SECOND SEMESTER COMMON-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
MID SEM - I
PART-A 4X1=4
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries one mark.
1. I strongly recommend you to read this novel. (Rewrite the sentence using suitable
words of obligation).
2. Invite your friend to attend a seminar on Yoga.
3. Fill in the blanks using suitable prepositions.
a. I usually go to polytechnic _______ foot.
b. Suman has been suffering ___________ malaria.
4. Fill in the blanks using suitable preposition.

a. She is jealous ______________ her best friend.
b. Madhu jumped __________ the well.
PART-B 2X3=6
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks.
5. a) Extend an invitation to your friend to attend your brother’s marriage and write
expressions showing his / her acceptance or inability.
Or
b) Give directions to your sister on how to reach the nearest branch office of State
Bank of India from your house.
6. a) Give directions to your house from polytechnic using at least three prepositions.
Or
b) Complete the paragraph using suitable prepositions.
128
We went _____the zoo ____ Sunday. We saw a python ____ a branch of a tree.
There were several parrots _______ the cages. In the zoo, we boarded a train
that passed __________ a tunnel. There we saw a lion going ______ its cave.
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
7. a) Write on how to send an image from your mobile to another mobile number using
WhatsApp.
Or
b) Write a dialogue to fix an appointment with an orthopedic surgeon on 5th January
at
10.00 a.m.
8. a) Use the following words or phrases in your own sentences.
i) across ii) against iii) in front of iv) since v) along
Or
b) Correct the words in italics.
i. I’ve got the key on my pocket.
ii. She was sitting among her two friends.
iii. There is a tree besides the house.
iv. I was born in Monday.
v. He came in the room.
129
SECOND SEMESTER COMMON-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
MID SEM - II
PART - A 4X1=4
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries one mark.
5. Write the synonym and antonym of lazy.

6. Write any two different forms of the word, ‘beauty’.
7. Rewrite the following making necessary corrections.
a) She travelled to her village every week.
b) Raghu returned the money back.
8. Change as directed.
a) Sita said, “She is a teacher.” (Change it into indirect speech)
b) He told me that she was going to market. (Change it into direct speech.)
PART - B 2X3=6
9. a. Write down the one word substitutes of the following.

a) A person who does not believe in God.
b) The study of planets.
c) A person who loves reading books.
(Or)
b. Write antonyms for the words in italics.
My friend Rani is young and attractive. She is very sharp and loves to eat fresh
food.
10. a. Rewrite the following making necessary corrections.

I go to college everyday by walk. I am getting up late every morning. I work very
hardly.
(Or)
130
b. Change the following as directed.
i. He said to her, “I will teach you Chemistry today.” (Change it into

Reported speech)
ii. She said to him, “Take me to Central Library now.” (Change it into
reported speech)
iii. Gopal said to Mamatha, “ Please lend me your calculator.”
PART-C 2 X 5 = 10
11. a) What are the five aspects you learn when you learn a new word?
(Or)
b) Suggest any five ways to improve your vocabulary.

12. a) Rewrite the following making necessary changes.
a. My luggage were in the store room.
b. The teacher stressed on the importance of team work.
c. My friend and I gone for a movie.
d. The team is loving the food.
e. I have three son –in –laws.
(Or)
b) Rewrite the following sentences as directed.
i. He said that he was not feeling well. (Change to direct speech).
ii. Amala said that she would visit us the next day. (Change to direct speech).
iii. She said that their team had won the match. (Change to direct speech).
iv. The teacher said, “Australia is an island.” (Change to reported speech).
v. She says, “They will help us.” (Change to reported speech).
131
SECOND SEMESTER 18 COMMON-201F
ADVANCED ENGLISH
SEMESTER END EXAM
Time : 2 Hours Total Marks: 40 Marks
PART-A 8X1=8
Instructions: Answer all questions.
Each question carries one mark.
1. Fill in the blanks with appropriate prepositions.
a) They went___ a walk.
b) He went to college____bus.
2. Write one word substitutes for the given meanings.
a) Study of planets.
b) Something that cannot be heard.
3. What will you write under achievements secton in your resume?
4. Fill in the blanks with words of obligation.
a) I ____wear a helmet when I drive a two wheeler.
b) We ____- respect our elders.
5. Answer the questions given in 5 and 6 after reading the passage,
Mammals are among the most successful animals to have lived. Because they are warm
blooded, they can survive in almost any environment. To take advantage of different
environments mammals have evolved different body shapes.
a) Why do mammals have different body shapes?
6. How can mammals survive in any environment?
132
7. Make notes for the given passage.
About 40 million years ago new kinds of primates — monkeys and apes—- began to take
over lemurs. Today, there are two groups of monkeys: the old world monkeys which live
in Africa and Asia and the New world monkeys which live only in Central America.
8. Write a short paragraph

based on the flowchart
given.
Finding a
lost Item
Part -B 3 X4 = 12
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries three marks.
9.(a) Invite a celebrity to your college sports day. The celebrity accepts your invitation.
Write a conversation.
(Or)
133
(b) Answer the questions after reading the passage
There are almost 2,400 species of snake. From the 20 cm long thread snake to the gaint
anaconda, which can reach 36 feet. Snakes have many colours, patterns and ways of killing
their prey. They eat everything from ants, eggs , snails to animals as big as goats.
1. What is the largest snake?
2. What do snakes eat?
3. Are all snakes similar?
10 (a). Write three things you learn when you learn a new word?
OR
10 (b) Write a paragraph based on the tree diagram
11. (a). Read the following passage and answer the questions given in 11 a or 11 b
Humans communicate with each other everyday using sounds and body movements .Most
commonly , we share information about the world around us through spoken languages.
These are in special sounds we make to represent objects, actions, numbers, colours and other
features. We use our brains to remember words, put them in the correct order and make the
larynx, or voice ,box,produce the correct sounds. If a person is unable to speak they can
communicate by using sign language. We also have written and pictorial languages.
1. How do human beings communicate?
2. What is the larynx?
134
3. When do we use sign language?
(Or)
(b) 1. What do we use to remember words?
2. How do we share information?
3. What are some forms of communication mentioned in the passage ?
12 (a). Make notes for the given passage
Sleep is as important to healthy life style as eating and exercising. On an average healthy
adult requires just over eight hours of sleep at night. Yet polls show that the increasing
numbers of people are suffering from sleep disorder or significant sleep loss. A study shows
that 29% of Indians sleep only after midnight and 61% slept for seven hours or less. Sleep is
crucial to maintain one’s health. Without it, you increase your susceptibility to a wide range
of health problems .including heart disease, stroke, diabetes, obesity and depression. Not
sleeping enough can affect the immune system. The immune system works when you are
asleep. That is when natural killer cells are generated in the bone marrow. These killer cells
help in protecting the body against the viruses, bacteria and even cancer.
(Or)
12 (b) Write a paragraph based on the table given
Apes Country Habitat

Orangutan Sumatra live in trees
Gorilla Africa live on ground
Chimpanzee Africa live on ground
Part-C 5X4=20M
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries 5 marks.
13(a) Take an appointment with a doctor for your grandmother.
(Or)
(b) Read the passage and answer the questions.
135
Reading skills are considered the most important tools for academic success. Printed
materials serve as a source of information and entertainment. Reading is an important activity
in life with which one can update one’s knowledge . Speech precedes reading and reading is
the input for writing. Reading is an active process which involves recognition and
comprehension. A reader can understand a text only when he or she uses his or her mental
faculties. A reader should have the knowledge of the writing system, the knowledge of the
language , the ability to interpret , the knowledge of the world, a reason for reading and a
reading style.
1. What are the advantages of reading?
2. What comes before reading?
3. What does the process of reading involve?
4. What are the inputs required by a reader to read something?
5. What is the purpose of printed information?
14 (a). Correct the following sentences.
1. My friend like me very much.
2. This is the best if the two.
3. He sat among the two girls.
4. He is running daily.
5. This is the boy which won the race.
OR
(b) Write a cover letter applying for the post of a software engineer at an MNC.
15 ( a). Read the given passage and answer questions given in 15 a or 15 b
The first elephants were pig-sized creatures without tusks or trunks that lived in Northern
Africa about 150 million years ago. Today there are only two species of elephant: the Indian
Elephant and the African elephant - the largest mammal living on land. Both species live in
family groups, which sometimes join to from herds of hundreds of animals. Elephants spend
upto twenty on hours a day eating as much as 320kgs of leaves ,bark , fruit and grass. An
adult elephant needs to drink 90 litres of water a day. Elephants travel through forests on
traditional paths called elephants’ roads .These intelligent animals have good memories and
can live for more than 60 years. Both Indian and African elephants are endangered because
humans take over their habitats for farming and poachers kill them for their tusks.
1. What is the largest mammal on land?
2. What is an elephant road?
136
3. Which word in the passage means home?
4. Do elephants live alone?
5. Why are elephants killed?
(Or)
(b)
1. What do elephants eat?

2. How long does an elephant live?
3. Who is putting elephants in danger?
4. What was the size of the first elephants?
5. Elephants have tusks and_______.
16 (a). Write your resume for the post of an Assistant Engineer at TESCO Company.
(Or)
(b) Write a report about an industry you visited.
ENGLISH
Model Rubrics
S.N Sub Performance

o activity excellent Good Satisfactory Need
improvement
1 Step-1 Data was collected Data was collected from Data was collected Data was
from more than four three to four sources from two sources. collected only
sources. one source.
2 Step-2 All materials and data Almost all materials and The materials and The materials
required for the data required for the data required for the and data
activity were activity were accurately activity were required for the
accurately prepared prepared based on the accurately prepared activity were
based on the data data collected based on the data inaccurately
collected independently. collected with the prepared
independently. help of teacher.
outlined in a step-by- outlined in a step-by- outlined were outlined were
step fashion that could step fashion, require complete with 1 or 2 not sequential,
be followed by anyone explanation & performed gaps and require & performed
& performed the the activity effectively. explanation & the activity in a
activity effectively. performed the poor way
activity normally
4 Step-4 Presented/ explained Presented/ explained the Presented/ explained Presented/
the information about information about the the information about explained the
the activity in activity in logical the activity in information
logical, interesting sequence with visuals or logical sequence with about the
sequence with diagrams. less visuals or activity
attractive visuals or diagrams. without
137
diagrams. sequence and
visuals or
diagrams.
5 Conclusion Provided a detailed Provided a conclusion / Student provided a Conclusions
/ summary conclusion/ summary summary clearly based conclusion/ summary /summary was
clearly based on the on the data and activity less effectively not relevant.
data and activity
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Course Code : 18EC-202F

SEMESTER : II Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme ( L : T : P ) : 45 :15 : 0 ( in Periods ) Credits : 3 Credits
Pre requisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of Algebra, Trigonometry in Mathematics at

Secondary school level and Basic Engineering Mathematics at Diploma 1st Semester level
CO 1 Formulate the equations of Straight Line, Circle and Conic Sections

CO 2 Evaluate the Limits of different Functions
CO 3 Determine the Derivatives of Various Functions
CO 4 Find the Successive Derivatives and Partial Derivatives of Functions
CO 5 Use Differentiation in Geometrical and Physical Applications
CO 6 Use Differentiation for finding Maxima and Minima.
Course Contents:
Co-ordinate geometry
Unit – I Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
1. Straight lines: Write the different forms of a straight line – point slope form, two point
138
form, intercept form, normal form and general form - Find distance of a point from a line,
acute angle between two lines, intersection of two non-parallel lines and distance
between two parallel lines - perpendicular distance from a point to a line - Solve simple
problems on the above forms
2. Circle: Define locus of a point, circle and its equation. Find equation of the Circle given (i)
Centre and radius, (ii) two ends of a diameter (iii) Centre and a point on the
circumference (iv) three non collinear points and (v) Centre and tangent equation -
general equation of a circle - finding Centre, radius - tangent, normal to circle at a point
on it - simple problems.
Unit – II Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
3. Conic Sections: Define a conic section, focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus
rectum – Find equation of a conic when focus directrix and eccentricity are given.
Properties of parabola, ellipse and hyperbola - standard forms with Vertex (Centre) at
the Origin and Axis (Axes) along Co – Ordinate Axes only – Simple Problems.
Differential Calculus
Unit-III Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
4. Functions & Limits : Concept of Limit- Definition- Properties of Limits and Standard
Limits ( without proof ) -
- Simple Problems . Evaluate the limits of the type
and
5. Differentiation – I : Concept of derivative - definition from first principle as
- different notations - derivatives of elementary functions like xn , ax,

ex, log x, sin x, cos x, tanx, Secx, Cosecx and Cotx. Derivatives of sum, product, quotient,
scalar multiplication of functions - problems. Derivative of function of a function (Chain rule)
with illustrative examples such as
139
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
.
Unit – IV
Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9.0 – T:3.0)
6. Differentiation – II: Derivatives of inverse trigonometric functions, derivative of a function

with respect to another function, derivative of parametric functions, derivative of
hyperbolic, implicit functions, logarithmic differentiation – problems in each case. Higher
order derivatives - examples – functions of several variables – partial differentiation,
Euler’s theorem-simple problems.
Applications of Derivatives:
Unit – V Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
7. Geometrical Applications: Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of Tangent

and normal to a curve at any point on the curve. Lengths of tangent, normal, sub
tangent and subnormal to the curve at any point on it. Angle between two intersecting
curves - problems.
Unit – VI Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
8. Physical Applications: Physical applications of the derivative – Explain the derivative

as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find the velocity and acceleration of a
moving particle with examples. Explain the derivative as a rate measure in the problems
where the quantities like volumes, areas vary with respect to time- illustrative examples–
Simple Problems.
9. Maxima & Minima: Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values – Increasing
and decreasing functions, finding the maxima and minima of simple functions - problems
leading to applications of maxima and minima.
References
1. Co - Ordinate Geometry – by S.L. Loney
2. Thomas Calculus, Pearson Addison – Wesley Publications
3. Calculus – I by Shanti Narayan and Manicavachagam Pillai, S.V Publications.
140
4. NCERT Mathematics Text Books Of ClassXI,XII.
5. Intermediate Mathematics Text Books (Telugu Academy)
2.E-books:www.mathebook.net

Coordinate Geometry
Unit – I
1.0 Solve the problems on Straight lines
1.1 Write the different forms of a straight line – point slope form, two point form,
intercept form, normal form and general form
1.2 Solve simple problems on the above forms
1.3 Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two lines, intersection of
two non-parallel lines and distance between two parallel lines.
2.0 Solve the problems on Circles

2.1 Define locus of a point, circle and its equation.
2.2 Find the equation of a circle given
(i) Centre and radius
(ii) Two ends of a diameter
(iii) Centre and a point on the circumference
(iv) Three non collinear points
(v) Centre and tangent
2.3 Write the general equation of a circle and find the centre and radius.
2.4 Write the equation of tangent and normal at a point on the circle.
2.5 Solve the problems to find the equations of tangent and normal.
Unit – II
3.0 Appreciate the properties of Conics in engineering applications
3.1 Define a conic section.
3.2 Understand the terms focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum of a
conic with illustrations.
3.3 Find the equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity are given
3.4 Describe the properties of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola
3.5 Solve problems in simple cases of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola.
Differential Calculus
141
UNIT - III
4.0 Use the concept of Limit for solving the problems
4.1 Understand the concept of limit and meaning of and state the
properties of limits.
4.2 Mention the Standard limits
(All without proof).

4.3 Solve the problems using the above standard limits
4.4 Evaluate the limits of the type and
5.0 Appreciate Differentiation and its meaning in engineering situations

5.1 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) – definition, first principle as
and also provide standard notations to denote the derivative of a

function.
5.2 State the significance of derivative in scientific and engineering applications.
5.3 Find the derivatives of elementary functions like xn , ax, ex, log x, sin x, cos x, tanx,
Secx, Cosecx and Cot x using the first principles.
5.4 Find the derivatives of simple functions from the first principle.
5.5 State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar multiplication, product
and quotient of functions with illustrative and simple examples.
5.6 Understand the method of differentiation of a function of a function (Chain rule)
with illustrative examples such as
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

.
Unit – IV
6.0 Appreciate Differentiation and its meaning in engineering situations
6.1 Find the derivatives of Inverse Trigonometric functions and examples.
6.2 Understand the method of differentiation of a function with respect to another
function and also differentiation of parametric functions with examples.
142
6.3 Find the derivatives of hyperbolic functions.
6.4 Explain the procedures for finding the derivatives of implicit function with
examples.
6.5 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some functions with
examples like [f(x)]g(x).
6.6 Explain the concept of finding the higher order derivatives of second and third
order with examples.
6.7 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, partial derivatives and
difference between the ordinary and partial derivatives with simple examples.
6.8 Explain the definition of Homogenous function of degree n
6.9 Explain Euler’s theorem for homogeneous functions with applications to simple
problems.
Applications of Differentiation
UNIT - V
7.0 Understand the Geometrical Applications of Derivatives

7.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative as the slope of the tangent to the
curve y=f(x) at any point on the curve.
7.2 Explain the concept of derivative to find the slope of tangent and to find the
equation of tangent and normal to the curve y=f(x) at any point on it.
7.3 Find the lengths of tangent, normal, sub-tangent and sub normal at any point on
the curve y=f(x) .
7.4 Explain the concept of angle between two curves and procedure for finding the
angle between two given curves with illustrative examples.
Unit – VI
8.0 Understand the Physical Applications of Derivatives

8.1 Explain the derivative as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find the
velocity and acceleration of a moving particle with examples.
8.2 Explain the derivative as a rate measurer in the problems where the quantities like
volumes, areas vary with respect to time- illustrative examples.
9.0 Use Derivatives to find extreme values of functions
9.1 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions.
9.2 Explain the conditions to find points where the given function is increasing or
decreasing with illustrative examples.
9.3 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or minima) of a function
of single variable - simple problems yielding maxima and minima.
9.4 Solve problems on maxima and minima in applications like finding areas, volumes,
etc.
143
1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related
material.
2. Quiz
3. Group discussion
4. Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home assignments.
CO / PO - MAPPING
POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
@@@
MID SEM-I EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM

5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
144
Sl No Unit No.
R U A

1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)

2 II

3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)

4 IV

9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)

3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

Total Questions
8 8 8


Legend:
145
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, II SEMESTER
PART-A
1. Find the slope of the straight line 3x + 4y + 9 = 0
2. Write the equation of circle whose centre (h,k) and radius r given.
3. Define conic section.
x2 y2
4. Find the Length of major and minor axes of the Ellipse + =1
16 9
PART-B
. 5 a) Find the distance between parallel lines 2x + 3y + 5 =0 and 2x + 3y + 9 = 0

Or
5 b) Find the centre and radius of the circle x2 + y2 – 6x + 4y – 12 = 0.
6 a) Find the vertex , focus ,equation of directrix and length of latus-rectum of the
parabola y2 = 20x
Or
x2 y2
6 b) Find the centre, vertices and foci of Ellipse + =1
25 16
PART C
146
7 a) Find the angle between the lines 2x – y + 3 = 0 and x + y – 2 = 0
Or
7b) Find the equation of the Circle passing through the points (0, 0), (1,0) and (0,2)
8 a) Find the equation of the Parabola with focus at (2 , -3 ) and whose directrix is
3x – 4y + 16 = 0
Or
8 b) Find the Centre,Vertices, Eccentricity, Foci, Lengths of axes, Length of Latus Rectum,
x2 y2
and equations of directrices of the Hyperbola − =1
16 9
@@@
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, II SEMESTER
PART-A
3 2
Lt 2 x −3 x +1
9 x 2 + 8 x +7
1. Evaluate x →0
2. Differentiate x3 + Tanx w.r.t. x

3. Differentiate log(sinx) w.r.t x
∂u 3 3
4. Find if U=x + y
∂x
PART-B
5 a). Evaluate ; lim

n→∞ (
1+2+3+… .+ n
n
2 )
Or
dy
. If y = ex.cotx , find dx
5 b)
dy 2
6 a). Find if x=at , y=2 at .
dx
Or
147
dy
2
+ y2 + 3xy = 7, then find dx
6 b) If x
PART C
dy 1+ x 2
log
7 a). Find dx , If y = 1−x 2
Or
7 b) Differentiate log[log(logx)] w. r. t. x
2
8 a). If y=sin ( logx ) , prove that x y 2 + x y 1+ y =0.
Or
( )
2 2
x +y ∂u ∂u
8 b) If U =sin−1 then prove that x +y =tanu
x+ y ∂x ∂y
@@@
C18-common
SUB.CODE:202F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION,(C-18)
MODEL PAPER
II SEMESTER EXAMINATION
PART-A
1. Write the intercept form of a straight line ax +by +c =0
3
x −8
2. Evaluate lim
x →2 x−2
3. Write the conditions for an increasing function and a decreasing function of f (x) in
the interval [ a , b ]
4. Write the equation of a circle whose centre is ( h , k ) and radius is r .
5. Write the slope of a curve y=f ( x ) at the point ( x 1 , y 1 ) .
6. Define Orthogonal curves.
7. Write the conditions for a point to be a maximum point on the curve y=f ( x ) .
148
8. Write the quantities to denote the rate of change of volume and area with respect to
t.
PART-B
9(a). Find the perpendicular distance of the point (2, 4) from the line 4 x−3 y−6=0.
OR
9(b). Find the length of the tangent to the curve y=x 2 +2 x+1 at (1,4).
10(a). Differentiate log ⁡(tanx) with respect to x.
OR
1 3 2
10 (b). A particle is moving along a line such that s= t −3t +8 t+5. Find its velocity
3
and acceleration at t=2 sec .
11 (a). Find the equation of the normal to the curve y 2=16 x at (2,4).
OR
11 (b). Find the equation of the tangent to the curve y=x 3−2 x +5 at (1,4).
12 (a). Find the rate of change of Area of the circle with respect to the radius when
r =6 cm.
OR
12 (b). Find the maximum value of 2 x −9 x 2+12 x+ 5.
3
PART C
13(a). Find the equation of the parabola whose focus is the point (3, -4) and directrix is
the
line x− y +5=0.
OR
2
13 (b). Find the angle between the curves y =2 x , x + y = 8 at their point of intersection
(2, 2)
dy
14 (a). Find , if x=a ( θ−sinθ ) , y=a ( 1−cosθ ) .
dx
OR
14 (b). The sum of two numbers is 24. Find them if their product is maximum
15(a). Find the lengths of the normal, subtangent and subnormal to the curve
3
y=x −3 x +2 at ( 0,2 ) .
OR
2 k
15 (b). show that the curves y =x∧ y = cut at right angles if 8 k 2−1=0.
x
149
16 (a). A circular metal plate expands by heat so that its radius is increasing at the rate of
0.02 cm/sec. At what rate its area is increasing when the radius is 10 cms.
OR
16 (b). A wire of length 40 cm is bent so that to has to form a rectangle. Find the
maximum area that can be enclosed by the wire.
SKILL UPGRADATION IN - ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
ACTIVITY ASSESSMENT Steps
2. Procedure
3. Explanation
ACTIVITIES
1 Prepare a presentation to describe various types of Straight lines.
2 Identify the geometrical shapes in and around your locality and give the details about
them.
3. Prepare a comparative study of conic sections and their uses in engineering applications.
150
3. Prepare a detailed study report on differentiation using different methods.
4. List out and explain the applications of Differentiation.
5. Apply the differentiation in geometrical problems.
6. Apply the differentiation in rate measure problems.
7. Apply the differentiation to problem solving in finding maxima minima.
CO / PO - MAPPING OF ACTIVITIES
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO7 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CATEGORY 4 3 2 1
Concepts complete substantial some understanding very limited
understanding of the understanding of the of the mathematical understanding of the
mathematical mathematical concepts needed to underlying concepts
concepts used to concepts used to solve the problem(s). needed to solve the
solve the problem(s). solve the problem(s). problem(s) OR is not
written.
efficient and effective effective procedure effective procedure effective procedure
procedure to solve to solve the to solve problems, to solve problems.
the problem(s). problem(s). but does not do it
consistently.
151
Explanation Explanation is Explanation is clear. Explanation is a little Explanation is
detailed and clear. difficult to difficult to understand
understand, but and is missing
includes critical several components
components. OR was not included.
Working with Student was an Student was an Student cooperated Student did not work
Others engaged partner, engaged partner but with others, but effectively with
listening to had trouble listening needed prompting to others.
suggestions of others to others and/or stay on-task.
and working working
throughout lesson.
Mathematical 90-100% of the steps Almost all (85-89%) Most (75-84%) of the More than 75% of the
Errors and solutions have of the steps and steps and solutions steps and solutions
no mathematical solutions have no have no have mathematical
errors. mathematical errors. mathematical errors. errors.
PASS SCORE: 2.5
STUDENT ASSESSMENT by RUBRICS
CO CO CO CO CO CO CO AVERA
S.NO PIN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 GE
Applied Physics
Course Title Applied Physics Course Code 18EC-203F

Semester II Course Group Foundation
Periods (L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture+Tutorial Total Contact 60
Periods
Pre requisites: Basic High School Science, Basic Mathematics
Course Objectives: After studying this course, the student will be able to understand and appreciate the
role of Physics in different areas of engineering and technology.
Course outcomes: On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain
below Course outcomes (CO):
152
Course Outcomes Linked POs Teaching
Periods
Apply knowledge of waves and sound in engineering

CO 1 problems. PO1,PO2 10
Apply knowledge of Simple Harmonic Motion to solve

CO 2 PO1, PO2 10
PO1,
CO 3 Use modern instruments in engineering PO2,PO3, 10
PO4
PO1,
CO 4 Use various magnetic materials in engineering equipments 10
PO2,PO3
PO1,
Use various electrical measuring instruments as tools in
CO 5 PO2,PO3,P 10
engineering
O4
PO1,
CO 6 Apply Electronics principles in engineering problems PO2,PO3,P 10
O4
APPLIED PHYSICS
Course Contents
1. UNIT – 1 WAVES AND SOUND Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Wave motion – definition and characteristics – audible range – infrasonic and ultrasonic –
longitudinal and transverse waves – examples – Relation between wavelength, frequency and
velocity of a wave – derivation –stationary waves- beats - applications of beats - Doppler
effect – list the applications – ultrasound and radar in medicine and engineering as special
emphasis- echo –definition - applications - relation between time of echo and distance of
obstacle –derivation- Reverberation and time of reverberation - Sabine’s formula - Free and
forced vibrations - Resonance - Conditions of good auditorium - noise pollution – definition
– causes, effects and methods to minimize noise pollution - problems
2. UNIT – 2 SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Periodic motion - Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM)– definition - examples - Conditions for
SHM –Projection of circular motion on any diameter of a circle is SHM - Expressions for
Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration of a particle executing SHM – derivations - Time
period, frequency, amplitude and phase of a particle in SHM - Ideal simple pendulum – time
153
period of simple pendulum –derivation - laws of simple pendulum-Seconds pendulum-
problems.
3. UNIT – 3 MODERN PHYSICS Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Photo electric effect - Einstein’s photo electric equation – Work function and threshold
frequency - laws of photo electric effect - applications of photo electric effect – photo cell -
concept of Refraction of light - critical angle and total internal reflection - principle of
Optical fiber - Applications of optical fiber – LASER – definition and characteristics –
principle of LASER - spontaneous emission and stimulated emission - population inversion -
examples of LASER – Uses.
4. UNIT-4 MAGNETISM Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Magnetic field - magnetic lines of force -properties - Uniform and Non-uniform magnetic field
– Magnetic length, pole strength – magnetic induction field strength- definition - Coulomb’s
inverse square law of magnetism - expression for moment of couple on a bar magnet placed
in a uniform magnetic field – derivation - expression for magnetic induction field strength at a
point on the axial line of a bar magnet –derivation - Dia, Para and Ferro magnetic materials –
examples - related problems.
5. UNIT-5 ELECTRICITY AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Ohm’s law – Ohmic and non ohmic conductors – examples - Temperature dependence of
resistance – coefficients of resistance with examples - Specific resistance – units –
conductance- series and parallel combination of resistors - moving coil galvanometer -
conversion of galvanometer into ammeter and voltmeter with diagram (qualitatively) –
Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws in electricity – Expression for balancing condition of
Wheatstone’s bridge – derivation – Meter bridge –working with neat diagram –
Superconductivity-definition-superconductors - definition and examples – applications -
related problems.
6. UNIT – 6 ELECTRONICS Duration: 10 periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)

Solids – definition – energy bands in solids- valence band, conduction band and forbidden
band – Energy band diagram of conductors, insulators and semiconductors – concept of Fermi
level - Intrinsic semiconductors - examples - Concept of holes in semiconductors - Doping -
Extrinsic semiconductor - P-type and N-type semiconductors - PN Junction diode – Forward
Bias and Reverse Bias - Applications of PN diode - Diode as rectifier – principle – principle
of Light Emitting Diode and solar cell.
References:
5. Engineering Physics by R.K. Gaur, S.L. Gupta, Dhanpatrai Publications, New Delhi.
6. ISC Physics, Book I&II, P. Vivekanandan, DK Banerjee, S Chand, New Delhi.
7. Intermediate Physics, Vol. I&II, Telugu Academy, TS, Hyderabad.
8. Fundamentals of Physics by Halliday and Resnick.
Suggested learning outcomes:
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
154
1. know the concept of Waves and Sound
1.1 Define wave. Explain the characteristics of a wave (frequency, wavelength, amplitude, time
period).
1.2 Explain audibility range of sound.
1.3 Define infrasonic and ultrasonic sounds.
1.4 Define longitudinal and transverse wave motion. Write examples for each. Distinguish
between them.
1.5 Derive the relation between wavelength, frequency and velocity of a wave (v ꞊ nλ)
1.6 Define stationary waves.
1.7 Explain the phenomenon of beats. List the applications of beats.
1.8 Explain Doppler Effect. List the applications of Doppler Effect.
1.9 Application of Doppler Effect in medicine and engineering - ultrasound and radar.
1.10 Define echo. List the applications of echo.
1.11 Derive the relation between time of echo and distance of obstacle.
1.12 Explain Reverberation and time of reverberation.
1.13 Write Sabine’s formula and explain the terms.
1.14 Define free and forced vibrations.
1.15 Define resonance with examples.
1.16 State the conditions of a good auditorium.
1.17 Define noise pollution.
1.18 List the causes, effects and methods to minimize noise pollution.
2. know the concept of Simple Harmonic Motion
2.1 Define periodic motion.

2.2 Define Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM).
2.3 List the examples of SHM.
2.4 State the conditions of simple harmonic motion.
2.5 Projection of circular motion on any diameter of a circle is SHM.
2.6 Define the terms time period, frequency, amplitude and phase of particle in SHM.
2.7 Derive the expressions for Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration of a particle executing in
SHM.
2.8 Define Ideal simple pendulum and derive the expression for time period of simple pendulum.
2.9 State the laws of simple pendulum.
2.10 Define seconds pendulum.
3. know the concept of Modern Physics
3.1 Explain Photo electric effect.

3.2 Define the terms work function and threshold frequency.
3.3 State Einstein’s photo electric equation and explain the terms.
3.4 State laws of photo electric effect.
3.5 List the applications of photo electric effect.
3.6 Explain working of photocell.
3.7 Explain the concept of refraction of light.
3.8 Define critical angle.
3.9 Define Total internal reflection.
3.10 State conditions for Total internal reflection.
3.11 Explain principle and working of optical fiber.
3.12 List the applications of optical fiber.
3.13 Define LASER. State the characteristics of LASER.
3.14 Explain the principle of LASER.
3.15 Define spontaneous emission and stimulated emission.
155
3.16 Define population inversion.
3.17 List the examples of LASER.
3.18 List the uses of LASER.
4 know the concept of Magnetism
4.1 Define magnetic field.

4.2 Define magnetic lines of force.
4.3 State the properties of magnetic lines of force.
4.4 Define Uniform and Non-uniform magnetic field.
4.5 Define the terms magnetic length and pole strength of a bar magnet.
4.6 Define magnetic induction field strength.
4.7 State and explain Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism.
4.8 Derive the expression for moment of couple on a bar magnet placed in a uniform
magnetic field.
4.9 Derive the formula for magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line of a bar
magnet.
4.10 Define Dia, Para and Ferro magnetic materials with examples.
5 know the concept of Electricity and measuring instruments
5.1 State Ohm’s law – Define ohmic and non ohmic conductors with examples
5.2 Explain temperature dependence of resistance – types of temperature coefficients with
examples
5.3 Define specific resistance. Write its units.
5.4 Define conductance.
5.5 Write the formulae for effective resistance in series and parallel combination of resistors with
diagram.
5.6 Explain moving coil galvanometer.
5.7 Conversion of a galvanometer into ammeter and voltmeter. Explain with diagram.
5.8 State and explain Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws in electricity.
5.9 Derive an expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone’s bridge with legible sketch.
5.10 Explain briefly Meter Bridge with neat diagram.
5.11 Define superconductivity.
5.12 Define superconductor. Give examples.
5.13 List the applications of superconductors.
6 know the concepts of Electronics and applications
6.1 Define solid.

6.2 Define valence band, conduction band and forbidden band in solids.
6.3 Explain conductors, insulators and semiconductors on the basis of energy band diagram.
6.4 Explain the concept of Fermi level.
6.5 Define intrinsic semiconductors.
6.6 List the examples for intrinsic semiconductors.
6.7 Explain the concept of hole in semiconductors.
6.8 Define doping.
6.9 Define extrinsic semiconductors.
6.10 Explain P-type and N-type semiconductors.
6.11 Explain PN Junction Diode (formation only).
6.12 Explain forward and reverse bias of PN diode (biasing and flow of majority and minority
carriers with diagram only)
156
6.13 List the applications of PN Diode.
6.14 Explain the principle of diode as a rectifier.
6.15 Explain working principle of Light Emitting Diode (LED)
6.16 Explain the working principle of solar cell.
157
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A

1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)

2 II

3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)

4 IV

9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)

3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

Total Questions
8 8 8

158
Legend:
C-18 COMMON-203F

MIDSEM – I
SECOND SEMESTER EXAMINATION
APPLIED PHYSICS
Important Note: Wherever any question has choice, marks will be allotted only to first
attempted question. No marks will be allotted for extra questions answered
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)

1. Write the Sabine’s formula.

2. Define longitudinal wave.
3. Define Second’s pendulum.
4. Define SHM.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)

5 (a). Write any three applications of Beats.

(OR)
(b). Write any three effects of noise pollution.
6 (a). Write the conditions for SHM.

(OR)
(b). The displacement of a particle executing SHM is given by
Y=8Sin( πt + π /4 ) m. Find i) Amplitude ii) Angular velocity
and iii) Time period
PART-C (2×5=10M)

7 (a). Derive relation between time of echo and distance of obstacle.
159
(OR)
(b). State five conditions of a good auditorium.
8 (a). Derive the expression for time period of a simple pendulum.

(OR)
(b). Derive the expressions for velocity and acceleration of a particle in SHM.
*** ** ***
C-18 COMMON-203F
MIDSEM – II
APPLIED PHYSICS
PART - A (4x1 = 4M)

5. Define photoelectric effect.

6. Define total internal reflection.
7. Define magnetic field.
8. Write the formula for magnetic moment of a bar magnet.
PART- B (2 x 3 = 6M)

5 (a). State three laws of photo electric effect.

(OR)
(b). Distinguish between spontaneous and stimulated emission.
6 (a). Write three properties of magnetic lines of force.

(OR)
(b). Explain Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism.
PART-C (2×5=10M)

7 (a). Explain the principle of LASER.

(OR)
160
(b). Explain working principle of optical fiber.
8 (a). Derive the formula for moment of couple acting on a bar magnet placed in uniform
magnetic field.
(OR)
(b). Derive the expression for magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line
of a bar magnet.
** *** **
.
C18 – COMMON 203F

MODEL PAPER
COMMON – II SEMESTER EXAMINATION
APPLIED PHYSICS
PART – A
Instructions: 1. Answer ALL questions. 8X1=08

2. Each question carries ONE mark.
1. Define an echo.
2. Write any two uses of optical fiber.
3. State Ohm’s law.
4. Write any two laws of Reflection.
5. Write SI unit of specific resistance
6. Define non ohmic conductors and give one example.
7. Define Fermi level.
8. Write any two advantages of LED’s.
PART – B
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions. 4X3=12

2. Each question carries THREE marks.
9(a). Derive V= nλ.

(or)
9(b). Explain the temperature dependence of resistance on conductor.
10(a). Explain photo cell with neat diagram.

(or)
10(b). Define magnetic induction field strength, write its formula and SI unit.
11(a). State and explain Kirchhoff’s voltage law.

(or)
161
11(b). Write any three applications of Superconductors.
12(a). Explain principle of diode as a rectifier.

(or)
12(b). Write any three applications of p-n diode.
PART – C 4X5 = 20
Instructions: 1. Answer any FOUR questions.

2. Each question carries FIVE marks.
13(a). Derive the relation between time of an echo and distance obstacle
(or)
13(b). Derive the expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone’s bridge.
14(a). Explain working principle of optical fiber with neat diagram.

(or)
14(b). Explain forward and reverse bias of PN diode.
15(a). Explain briefly with neat diagram .

(or)
15(b). Explain moving coil galvanometer.
16(a). Explain the working principle of LED with neat diagram.

(or)
16(b). Explain the working principle of solar cell.
*** ** ***
162
SKILL UPGRATION – APPLIED PHYSICS
TASK
LEVEL 1: Concept, Ethical Data, Materials, Source (Library/internet/others)
LEVEL 2: Methodology/procedure
LEVEL 3: Analysis/experiment
LEVEL 4: Interpretation/ inference/ evaluation.
Bridge activity: - Visiting your college Library:
(A) Prepare a list of available reference books in Physics with details such as author,
publisher, edition etc.
(B) Prepare a list of Physics/Science journals, magazines, monographs with details.
(C) Prepare a log book of your visits to college library with brief description.
Activities:-
1. Construct a blowing pipe to detect dangerous gases in mines.
2. Construct model stethoscope with known materials.
3. Conduct awareness program on noise pollution in your college, colony. Prepare a video
report.
4. Hypothesize seconds’ pendulum timer.
5. Prepare a power point presentation on photosensitive materials with detailed specifications.
6. Prepare a report on Lasers where they are practically used.
7. Prepare a power point presentation on application of optical fibers in medical and engineering
field.
8. How can you produce electricity with a magnet? – (a) Develop a working model/ prepare a
power point presentation with animation/ prepare drawings on a chart.
9. Construct an electric calling bell.
163
10. Setup a circuit on breadboard to verify Kirchhoff’s voltage law.
11. Prepare a power point presentation on Superconductors and their practical applications with
motion pictures embedded.
12. Collect various resistors, diodes and LEDs with specifications and compile on a card board.
NOTE: The above activities are indicative. The teacher may assign any other activity
relevant
to the course based on resources available.
Course Outcomes (CO) Linked Pos Activity

Hours
CO1 Construction of a blowing pipe to detect PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
dangerous gases in mines PO4, PO5, PO6
CO2 Construction of model stethoscope with known PO1, PO2, PO5,
3
materials PO7
CO3 Conduct of awareness program on noise PO1, PO2, PO5,
pollution in the college, colony and preparation PO6, PO7, PO8, 3
of a video report. PO9
CO4 Construction of a seconds’ pendulum timer PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
PO4
CO5 Preparation of PPT on photosensitive materials
PO1, PO2 3
with detailed specifications
CO6 Preparation of report on lasers practically used PO1, PO2, PO4,
3
PO5, PO10
CO7 Preparation of PPT on application of optical PO1, PO2,PO4,
fibers in medical and engineering field PO5, PO6, PO9, 3
PO10
CO8 Production of electricity with a magnet –
PO1, PO2,
working model, PPT with animation and 3
PO3,PO4
drawings on a chart.
CO9 Construction of an electric calling bell PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
PO4
CO10 Construction of a circuit on breadboard to PO1, PO2, PO3,
3
verify Kirchhoff’s voltage law PO4
CO11 Preparation of PPT on Superconductors and
PO1, PO2, PO3,
their practical applications with motion 3
PO4, PO9, PO10
pictures.
CO12 Collection of various resistors, diodes and
LEDs with specifications and installation on a PO1, PO2 3
card board
164
Rubrics for Task Assessments
General Scale for scoring student performance in Skill Upgradation
Type of
4 3 2 1
Skill/Score
All Data/Material All Data/Material All All Data/Material
was collected one was collected more Data/Material was collected
Data/Material
time independently. than one time was collected several times
Collection
independently. several times with assistance.
independently.
outlined in a step- outlined in a step-by- outlined in a were outlined
by-step fashion thatstep fashion that step-by-step were incomplete
could be followed could be followed by fashion, but had or not sequential,
Methodology/
by anyone without anyone without 1 or 2 gaps that even after Expert
Procedure
additional additional require feedback had
explanations. explanations. Expert explanation been given.
help was needed to even after expert
accomplish this. feedback.
Quality of Skill is Skill is mastered to Skill is present Skill needs
Activity/
high. the level of but with errors improvement.
Development
expectation. and omissions.
Student provided a Student provided a Student No conclusion
Interpretation/ detailed conclusion somewhat detailed provided a was apparent.
summary clearly. conclusion clearly. conclusion with
some reference.
NOTE: The above types of skills are indicative. The teacher may change the skills
depending on type of activity.
PASS SCORE: 2.5
STUDENT ASSESSMENT (RUBRICS)
S. PIN Course Outcomes (Skill Activities) AVE
165
N CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO RA
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 GE
Engineering Chemistry and Environmental Studies
Course Title Engineering Chemistry Course Code 18EC-204F

and Environmental
Studies
Semester II Course Group Foundation

Periods (L:T:P)
Periods
Prerequisite:
Basic knowledge of chemistry in secondary education.
Course Objectives: After studying this course the student will be able to understand and appreciate
the role of Chemistry and environmental studies in different spheres of industries.
Course Outcome:
On successful completion of the course, the students will have ability to attain below Course
Outcomes (CO):
CO Course outcome CL Linked Teaching
PO periods
CO1 Understand and explain the different metallurgical R/U/A 1,2,9,10 10

processes, alloys and applications of alloys
CO2 Understand and explain corrosion and preventive methods R/U/A 1,2,9,10 10
of corrosion
CO3 List out the different methods of preparation and industrial R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7, 12
uses of plastics, rubber and fibers. vulcanization of rubber 10
and its applications
CO4 Classify the fuels and explain basic terms of fuel, outline R/U/A 1,2,10 8
the composition and industrial use of gaseous fuels
CO5 Understand and Explain Galvanic cell, emf of cell -electro R/U/A 1,2,5 12
chemical series-Applications of Galvanic cells, batteries
and cells and distinguish the Galvanic and electrolytic cell
CO6 Explain the causes, effects and controlling methods of air R/U/A 1,2,5,7 8
166
and water pollutions.
Total Periods 60
Legends: R = Remember, U= Understand, A = Apply
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

COURSE CONTENTS
UNIT - I: Metallurgy: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)

Characteristics of Metals - distinguish between Metals and Non Metals- Ore, Gangue, Flux, Slag -
Concentration of Ore -Froth floatation - Methods of Extraction of crude Metal - Roasting,
Calcination, Smelting – Alloys-purpose of making alloys - Composition of Brass, German silver,
Nichrome, Stainless steel and Duralumin
UNIT – II: Corrosion: 10Periods (L:7.5 – T: 2.5)
Introduction - factors influencing the rate of corrosion - electrochemical theory of corrosion -

composition, stress and concentration cells- rusting of iron and its mechanism - prevention of
corrosion - coating methods, Paints-constituents and characteristics of paints-cathodic protection.
UNIT – III: Polymers: 12Periods (L : 9.0 - T : 3.0)
Introduction - polymerization - types of polymerization - addition, condensation with examples -

plastics - types of plastics - advantages of plastics over traditional materials - Disadvantages of using
plastics - preparation and uses of the following plastics: 1. Polythene 2. PVC 3.Teflon 4.
Polystyrene 5.Urea formaldehyde 6. Bakelite - Rubber - Elastomers –Preparartionof Butyl rubber,
Buna-s, Neoprene rubber and their uses-Fibres-Preparation and uses of fibres-Nylon 6,6-Polyester.
UNIT – IV: Fuels: 8Periods (L : 6.0 - T : 2.0)

Definition and classification of fuels- characteristics of good fuel - Calorific value-HCV and LCV-
Calculation of oxygen required for combustion of methane and ethane - composition and uses of
gaseous fuels- a) water gas b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) coal gas, e) Bio gas
and f) acetylene.
UNIT – V: Electro Motive Force: 12Periods (L : 9.0 - T : 3.0)
Galvanic cell – standard electrode potential –electro chemical series -emf of cell-Batteries-Types of
batteries-Fuel cells.
UNIT – VI: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-II : 8Periods (L : 6.0 - T : 2.0)
Introduction- classification of air pollutants based on origin and states of matter-Air pollution -
causes-Effects - control methods - Water pollution - causes - effects - control measures.
167
Reference Books:
1. Engineering chemistry – Jain & Jain – DhanpatRai Publishing Company.
2. A Text book of Engineering Chemistry – S.S.Dara – S.Chand Publications.
3. Environmental Studies – A.K.De.
4. Environmental Studies, R. Rajagopalan, 2nd Edition, 2011, Oxford University Press
5. Intermediate Chemistry I and II – Telugu Academy TS
UNIT – I: METALLURGY
1.1. List the Characteristics of Metals.
1.2. Distinguish between Metals and Non Metals
1.3. Define the terms 1.Mineral, 2.Ore, 3. Gangue, 4. Flux and 5.Slag
1.4. Describe Froth Floatation method of concentration of ore.
1.5. Describe the methods involved in extraction of crude metal- Roasting, Calcination and
Smelting.
1.6. Define an Alloy
1.7. Explain the purpose of making of alloys
1.8. Write the Composition of the following alloys:1.Brass, 2.German silver, 3.Nichrome
4. Stainless steel, 5. Duralumin
1.9. List the uses of following Alloys: Brass, German silver, Nichrome, Stainless steel,
Duralumin
UNIT – II: CORROSION

2.1. Define the term corrosion
2.2. Explain the Factors influencing the rate of corrosion
2.3. Explain the concept of electrochemical theory of corrosion
2.4. Describe the formation of a) composition cell, b) stress cell c) concentration cell
2.5. Define rust and explain the mechanism of rusting of iron with chemical reactions.
2.6. Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion:
a) Protective Coatings i) Metallic coatings (Anodic and cathodic coatings) ii) Inorganic
coatings iii) Organic coatings, paint,constituent of paint and characteristics of good paint.
b) Cathodic protection (Sacrificial anode process and Impressed - voltage process).
UNIT – III: POLYMERS

3.1. Explain the concept of polymerization
3.2. Describe the methods of polymerization a) addition polymerization
b) condensation polymerization with examples.
3.3. Define the term plastic
3.4. List the Characteristics of plastics.
3.5. State the advantages of plastics over traditional materials
3.6. State the disadvantages of using plastics.
3.7. Types of plastics with examples.
3.8. Distinguish between thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics
3.9. Explain the methods of preparation and uses of the following plastics:
1. Polythene, 2. PVC, 3.Teflon, 4.Polystyrene 5.Urea formaldehyde 6. Bakelite
(only flow chart for Bakelite i.e. without chemical equations).
3.10. Define the term natural rubber
3.11. Explain preparation of natural rubber
3.12. State the structural formula of Natural rubber
3.13. List the Characteristics of natural rubber
3.14. Explain the process of Vulcanization
3.15. List the Characteristics of Vulcanized rubber
168
3.16. Define the term Elastomer
3.17. Describe the preparation and uses of the following synthetic rubbers a) Butyl rubber,
b) Buna-s and c) Neoprene rubber.
3.18. Define fibre.
3.19. Explain the preparation and uses of fibres –Nylon 6,6 and Polyester
UNIT – IV: FUELS
4.1. Define the term fuel
4.2. Classify the fuels based on physical state - solid, liquid and gaseous fuels with examples.
4.3. Classify the fuels based on occurrence- primary and secondary fuels with examples.
4.4. List the characteristics of a good fuel
4.5. Advantages of gaseous fuels
4.6. Define Calorific value- HCV and LCV.
4.7. Calculate the oxygen required for the combustion of Methane and Ethane fuel gases.
4.8. State the composition and uses of the following gaseous fuels:
a) water gas, b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) coal gas, e) Bio gas and f) acetylene
UNIT – V: Electro Motive Force

5.1. Define Galvanic cell
5.2. Explain the construction and working of Galvanic cell
5.3. Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell
5.4. Explain standard electrode potential
5.5. Explain standard hydrogen electrode
5.6. Define electrochemical series and explain its significance.
5.7. Define and explain emf of a cell.
5.8. Solve the numerical problems on emf of cell
5.9. Explain Batteries (Cells) and types of batteries with examples –working and applications of
Dry cell (Leclanche cell), Lead storage battery, Ni-Cd cell
5.10. Explain working and advantages of Fuel cell (Hydrogen - Oxygen Fuel Cell)
UNIT – VI: ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-II

6.1. Define air pollution
6.2. Classify the air pollutants- based on origin and states of matter
6.3. Explain the causes of air pollution
6.4. Explain the effects of air pollution on human beings, plants and animals
6.5. Explain the green house effect - ozone layer depletion and acid rain
6.6. Explain the methods of control of air pollution
6.7. Define water pollution
6.8. Explain the causes of water pollution
6.9. Explain the effects of water pollution on living and non living things
6.10. Explain the methods of control of water pollution.
Suggested Student Activities for Induction Program:
Forenoon Afternoon
Day1 Registration Class work as per Time table
Day2 Rules and Regulations Chemistry Lab practice classes may be
Day3 Getting acquainted with Head and faculty conducted
Day4 Familiarization with Institutional facilities
Day5 Interaction with Class teacher and Seniors
Day6 Introducing the mentor
Day7 Parent –Teacher meeting
169
1. Student visits Library to refer to Text books, reference books and manuals to find their
specifications
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Chemistry Lab to familiarize with them.
3. Quiz
4. Group discussion
5. Seminar
6. Surprise test
E learning links:
https://iupac.org/
https://www.youtube.com
https://www.khanacademy.org/
www.nptel.ac.in
Blue Print
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A

1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)

2 II

3 III 4
2 10(a) 14(a)

4 IV

5 V 3 5, 6 9(b) 13(b)

170
11(a) 15(a)
11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
Total Questions
8 8 8


Model Question Papers
II SEMESTER, MIDSEM – I
Time: 1 Hour Max. Marks: 20
PART – A
1. Define the terms mineral and ore.

2. Define an alloy.
3. Define corrosion.
4. What is paint?
PART – B
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries three marks 2 x 3 =6 Marks
5. a. List any six characteristics of metals.

or
b. Explain the process of roasting of ore with an example.
6. a. List any six factors influencing the rate of corrosion.
or
b. Explain the formation of stress cell with an example.
PART – C
171
Instructions: Answer all questions. Each question carries five marks 2 x 5 =10 Marks
7. a. Explain the froth floatation process of concentration of ore .

or
b. Write the composition and uses of Brass, German silver .
8. a. Explain the mechanism of rusting of iron with chemical equations.
or
b. Explain sacrificial anode method of prevention of corrosion with a neat diagram.
II SEMESTER, MIDSEM – II
Sub. Code: 18common-204F
Time: 1 Hour Max.Marks : 20
PART – A
9. What is the chemical name of natural rubber?

10. Define polymerization.
11. What are fuels?
12. Mention any two characteristics of good fuel.
PART – B
13. a. Write any three advantages of plastics over traditional materials.

or
b. Write a method of preparation and uses of Nylon-6,6 .
14. a. Define colorific value and differentiate lower and higher calorific values.
or
b. Classify the fuels based on their physical state.
PART – C
172
15. a. What is vulcanization of rubber and explain with chemical equations.
or
b. Distinguish thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics.
16. a. Write the composition and uses of water gas and producer gas.
or
b. Calculate the mass and volume of the oxygen required for the complete combustion of 8
grams of CH4.
C-18COMMON-204F
II SEMESTER EXAMINATION
Time: 2 Hours Max.Marks : 40
PART – A
1. Define gangue.
2. What are the different types of plastics?
3. Define Galvanic cell.
4. What is the chemical formula of rust?
5. What is electrochemical series?
6. What are the different types of batteries?
7. Define air pollution.
8. Define water pollution.
PART – B
9. a. Write any three differences between metals and non-metals.
or
b. Write any three significances of electrochemical series.
10. a. Write a method of preparation and two uses of polystyrene.
or
b. Classify the pollutants based on origin and give examples.
11. a. Write any three differences between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell.
or
b. Write the electrode reaction of lead storage battery during discharging.
173
12. a. Write a short note on Green house effect.
or
b. Write a note on Ozone layer depletion.
PART – C
13. a. Explain the formation of composition cell and stress cell.

or
b. Describe the construction and working principle of Leclanche cell.
14. a. Calculate the mass and volume of oxygen required for the complete combustion of 15 gm
of
ethane( C2H6).
or
b. Explain the causes of water pollution.
15. a. Explain the construction and functioning of Galvanic cell.
or
b. Explain working principle of H2-O2 fuel cell.
16. a. Explain the control methods of water pollution.
Or
b. Explain the causes of air pollution.

Suggested Skill Upgradation Activities
Activity – 1
Oral/Power point presentation on the different methods of concentration of ore :
Step-1: Data collection on the ores and different methods of concentration of ore.
Step -2: Prepare for oral/a power point presentation on different methods of concentration of ore.
Step-3: Explain the methods of concentration of ore with oral presentation/ power point
presentation
Step-4: Submit the report along with ppt.
Activity – 2
Corrosion of a metal under different conditions:
Step-1: Collection of data related to the factors effecting the corrosion.

Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment under different conditions such as
i. Metal exposed to air only
ii. Metal exposed to dry air
iii. Metal partially dipped in salt water
iv. Metal completely dipped in water
v. Metal partially dipped in pure water
Note: This experiment may be conducted in other conditions also.
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion under different conditions
174
after one week with explanation
Step-5: overall presentation of the activity
Activity – 3
Comparison of Corrosion of different metals /alloys exposed to the same environmental

conditions:
Step-1: Data collection.
Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment with different metals/alloys such as Iron, stainless steel,
aluminum, copper etc. under the same conditions
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion on different metals after one
week with explanation
Activity – 4
Comparison of Corrosion of metal with different shapes and surfaces under same
environmental conditions:
Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment with a metal having different shapes and surfaces under
the same conditions.
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion on different metals after one
week with explanation
Activity – 5
Study of Prevention of Corrosion of a metal by using different coating materials

Step -3: Setting and Execution of experiment with a metal coated with different materials like oil,
paint,
plastic, rubber etc
Step-4: Recording of observations and comparison of extent of corrosion on the metals after one week
with explanation
Activity – 6
Study of plastics, recycling of plastics and their advantages and disadvantages

Step -3: Preparation of power point presentation on recycling, advantages and disadvantages of
platsics
Step-4: Explain about the recycling, advantages and disadvantages of plastics and suggest the
measures
175
to protect the environment
Step-5: Submission of the report along with the ppt.
Activity – 7
Study on natural rubber and its uses

Step -3: Preparation of power point presentation on processing of natural rubber from natural source
and vulcanization..
Step-4: Explain about the properties and uses of natural and vulcanized rubber.
Activity – 8
Power point presentation on fossil fuels

Step -3: Preparation of power point presentation on fossil fuels.
Step-4: Explain about the advantages and disadvantages of solid , liquid and gaseous fuels.
Activity – 9
Study and analysis of environment related air pollution

Step -3: Identify the factors that affecting the quality of air.
Step-4: Explain about the quality of air and suggest the remedial measures through ppt.
Activity – 10
Study and analysis of environment related water pollution

Step -3: Identify the factors that affecting the quality of water body.
Step-4: Explain about the quality of water body and suggest the remedial measures through ppt.
Activity – 11
Study and analysis of college environment

Step -3: Identify the factors that affecting the environment of the institution.
Step-4: Explain about the existing environment and suggest the measures to improve it through ppt.
Activity – 12
176
Construction of Galvanic cell
Step -3: Construction of any galvanic cell.
Step-4: Explain about the construction and functioning of Galvanic cell through ppt.
Note: Any other skill upgradation activity related to the course may be taken up.
Mapping of POs to Student activities
S.N Name of the activity Linked POs

o
1 Power point presentation on the different methods of 1,2,4,8,9
concentration of ore
2 Corrosion of a metal under different conditions 1,2,3,4, 5,6,8,9,10
3 Comparison of Corrosion of different metals /alloys 1,2,3,4, 5,6,8,9,10
exposed to the same environmental conditions
4 Comparison of Corrosion of metal with different shapes 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
and surfaces under same environmental conditions
5 Study of Prevention of Corrosion of a metal by using 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10
different coating materials
6 Study of plastics, recycling of plastics and their 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10

advantages and disadvantages
7 Study on natural rubber and its uses 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
8 Power point presentation on fossil fuels 1,2,4,5,7,8,9,10
9 Study and analysis of environment related air pollution 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
10 Study and analysis of environment related water 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10

pollution
11 Study and analysis of college environment 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
12 Construction of Galvanic cell 1,2,3,4,5,8,9
Model Rubrics
S Sub Performance
. activity excellent Good Satisfactory Need
N improvement
o
1 Step-1 Data was collected from Data was collected from Data was collected Data was
more than four sources. three to four sources from two sources. collected only
one source.
2 Step-2 All materials and data Almost all materials and The materials and The materials
required for the activity data required for the data required for the and data
were accurately prepared activity were accurately activity were required for the
177
based on the data prepared based on the accurately prepared activity were
collected independently. data collected based on the data inaccurately
independently. collected with the prepared
help of teacher.
3 Step-3 Procedures were outlined Procedures were outlined Procedures that Procedures that
in a step-by-step fashion in a step-by-step fashion, outlined were outlined were
that could be followed by require explanation & complete with 1 or 2 not sequential,
anyone & performed the performed the activity gaps and require & performed the
activity effectively. effectively. explanation & activity in a
performed the poor way
activity normally
4 Step-4 Presented/ explained the Presented/ explained the Presented/ explained Presented/
information about the information about the the information about explained the
activity in logical, activity in logical the activity in information
interesting sequence with sequence with visuals or logical sequence with about the
attractive visuals or diagrams. less visuals or activity
diagrams. diagrams. without
sequence and
visuals or
diagrams.
5 Conclusion Provided a detailed Provided a conclusion / Student provided a Conclusions
/ summary conclusion/ summary summary clearly based on conclusion/ summary /summary was
clearly based on the data the data and activity less effectively not relevant.
and activity
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
Course Title : Semiconductor devices Course Code 18EC-205C

Semester II Course Group Core
Hrs(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Contact Periods: 60Pds
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Basic Physics and Mathematics at Secondary school
level, and about Electronic Components, AC and DC voltages and Currents
Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to

Course Outcome
CO1 Explain the different types of Semiconductor Diodes and their Specifications
CO2 Analyze the transistor operation under different configurations and application of Transistor as an
Amplifier
CO3 Determine the need for Stable operating point and reason for wide use of CE amplifier and discuss
Various Bias Stabilization techniques
CO4 Explain the Constructional features and operation of different types of FET
CO5 Select the type of Rectifier and Filter required for a given Power supply application
178
CO6 Solve simple problems and develop circuits using Semiconductor Devices for simple Electronic
circuit applications
Course Contents
UNIT1- Semiconductor diodes : Duration: 10 periods
Electrical properties of semiconductor materials-energy level diagrams of conductor, semiconductor

and Insulator-Formation of P-Type and N-Type materials and their properties-Drift and diffusion
current- Formation and behaviour of PN junction diode.-Forward and Reverse bias
characteristics,.Special purpose diodes – .Zener diode- Characteristics- zener breakdown and
avalanche breakdown- LEDs, - Varactor diodes
UNIT2 –Transistors Duration: 10 periods
Formation and properties of PNP and NPN Transistor-Transistor configurations-input and output
characteristics- α, β and γ factors-Comparison of CB,CE,CC configurations- Transistor as an
amplifier.
UNIT -3 : Transistor Biasing Duration: 10 periods
Basic amplifier concept using BJT-CE mode - reason for wide use of CE amplifier -concept of DC
and AC load line- selection of operating point on DC load line with waveforms.-factors affecting
the Q-point- thermal runaway- need for proper biasing in amplifier circuits.-types of biasing
circuits- stabilization in amplifier circuits- various stability factors (S, S β, SVBE)-expression for
stability factor in CE configuration- fixed bias circuit and derive its stability factor.
Unit 4- JFET&MOSFET Duration:10 periods
Compare JFET and BJT-List the merits of JFET over BJT- principle of operation of n-channel JFET
– drain characteristics of JFET- pinch-off voltage of JFET- mutual characteristics of JFET-
Important parameters of JFET –JFET classification –Construction and principle of –operation of
depletion type n-channel MOSFET.-Explain the construction and principle of operation of
enhancement type n-channel MOSFET. - JFET and MOSFET Comparison - Principle of operation
of CMOSFET.
UNIT -5: DC Power supplies Duration: 8 periods
179
DC power supply- Half wave, Full wave and Bridge rectifiers-RMS value, Average value, Ripple
factor, Voltage regulation. Filters – RC, CRC and CLC. Zener regulator – series and shunt IC
regulators and specifications of RPS-Inverter
UNIT- 6: Engineering applications Duration: 12 periods
Specifications - Commonly used Diode Numbers- Use of a PN junction diode for applications like:
protection against polarity reversal, power control of soldering Irons, Dimming of incandescent
lamps, Temperature sensing-Selection of Transistor based on the β Beta of the Transistor-Numbers
of commonly used Transistors Significance of the number marked on the Transistor case-Transistor
Packages and Pin Configuration-Design of Self Bias circuit-Important specifications of JFET –Drift
problem in FET
Calculation of voltage regulation, Ripple factor of DC Power Supply-Design of a Zener regulator

circuit for given Line and Load voltages, Power ratings.Design of RPS using 78XX series IC
Regulator
References
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1.Basic Electrical Engineering Volume 1 by PS Dhogal , TMH

2.Electronic devices and applications by B. Somanathan Nair, PHI.
3.Understanding Electronics Components by Filipovic D. Miomir. Mikroe online
Edition
REFERENCE BOOKS
1.Electronic Devices and Circuits by David A.Bell, Prentice hall

2.Hand book of components for Electronics by Charles A. Harper Mc Grahills
3.Printed circuit Boards Design &Technology by Walter C. Boshart TMH
1.0 Understand the working of Semiconductor Diodes.
180
1.1 State the electrical properties of solid Semiconductor materials.
1.2 Sketch energy level diagrams for conductors, Semiconductors, Insulators.
1.3 Distinguish between Intrinsic and extrinsic Semiconductors.
1.4 Describe the formation of P type and N type materials and sketch the energy band
diagrams.
1.5 Explain Majority and Minority carriers in P and N Type materials.
1.6 Distinguish between Drift and Diffusion current.
1.7 Explain the formation of PN junction diode.
1.8 Describe the working of PN junction Diode with various biasing voltages.
1.9 Explain the forward/Reverse Bias Voltage characteristics of diode.
1.10 Interpret the manufacturer specifications of a given diode from data sheet.
1.11 Describe the formation and working of Zener diode.
1.12 Explain the characteristics of Zener diode.
1.13 Distinguish between Zener breakdown and Avalanche breakdown.
2.0 Understand the working of Transistor
2.1 Know the formation of Transistor.

2.2 Draw the symbol of Transistor.
2.3 Explain the working of PNP and NPN Transistors.
2.4 Draw the different Transistor configurations.
2.5 Know cut off, saturation and active regions.
2.6 Sketch the input/output characteristics of CB,CC and CE configurations.
2.7 Define alpha, beta and gamma Factors.
2.8 Relate alpha, beta and gamma Factors.
2.9 Write collector current expression in CB, CC and CE modes of Transistors in terms of
α, β, IB, IC ,ICBO ,ICEO .
2.10 Compare the performance characteristics of CE,CB and CC Configurations
2.11 Describe the working of Transistor as an amplifier (CB configuration).
3.0 Understand the Transistor biasing and Stabilization techniques
3.1 Explain the reason for wide use of CE amplifier.

3.2 Explain the concept of DC and AC load line.
3.3 Explain the selection of operating point on DC load line with waveforms.
3.4 List the factors affecting the Q-point.
181
3.5 Explain thermal runaway
3.6 State the need for proper biasing in amplifier circuits.
3.7 List the types of biasing circuits.
3.8 Define stabilization in amplifier circuits.
3.9 Define the various stability factors (S, Sβ, SVBE)
3.10 Derive an expression for stability factor in CE configuration.
3.11 Explain the fixed bias circuit and derive its stability factor.
3.12 Explain the collector to base resistor method of biasing and derive its stability factor.
3.13 Explain the self bias circuit and derive its stability factor.
3.14 Draw a practical CE amplifier and explain the function of each component
4.0.Understand the working of FETs and MOSFETs.
4.1 Explain the construction and principle of operation of n-channel JFET.

4.2 Draw and explain the drain characteristics of JFET.
4.3 Define pinch-off voltage in JFET.
4.4 Classify the different types of FETs.
4.5 Draw and explain the mutual characteristics of JFET.
4.6 Define the parameters of JFET and obtain the relation among them.
4.7 List the important specifications of JFET and BJT.
4.8 List the merits of JFET over BJT.
4.9 List the applications of JFET and BJT.
4.10 Explain the construction and principle of operation of depletion type n-channel MOSFET.
4.11 Explain the construction and principle of operation of enhancement type n-channel
MOSFET.
4.12 Compare JFET and MOSFET.
4.13 Explain the principle of operation of CMOSFET.
5.0 Understand the working of DC Power Supplies.
5.1. Explain the necessity of D.C. power supply for Electronic circuits
5.2. Describe the working of HW, FW and Bridge section circuits with wave forms.
5.3. Give the equations for RMS value, average DC value; ripple factor and efficiency for the
above circuits.
5.4. Define Voltage Regulation.
5.5. Explain the need for a filter circuit in power supplies.
182
5.6. Explain the operation of a rectifier circuit using Capacitor filter
5.7. Give the reasons for connecting a Bleeder Resistor across capacitor
5.8. Draw the input/output waveform of Rectifier with RC Filter Circuit
5.9. Mention the factors effecting the output ripple in RC
5.10. Draw the circuit of CRC Filter
5.11. Explain the function of components and working of CRC Filter
5.12. Give the reasons for popularity of RC filter circuits
5.13. Explain the working of CLC filters Circuit
5.14. Draw the input and output waveforms
5.15. Mention the demerits of CLC filters
5.16. List the applications where CLC filters are used
5.17. State the need for a regulated power supply
5.18. List important specifications of Regulated power supply
5.19. Draw the circuit of a simple Zener regulated DC Power supply.
5.20. Explain the working of Zener regulated power supply
5.21. Determine the Resistance value and wattage of Series Resistor , zener diode for a given
Input voltage ,load voltage and load current
6.0 Engineering Applications
6.1 Interpret Data sheets and Commonly used Diode Numbers

6.2 Explain the use of a PN junction diode for applications like: protection against polarity
reversal, power control of soldering Irons, Dimming of incandescent lamps, Temperature
sensing
6.3 Calculate the value of β Beta of the Transistor for an Amplifier application with required
voltage gain.
6.4 Select the correct transistor for given circuit specifications
6.5 Explain the Significance of the number marked on the Transistor case-
6.6 Explain different Transistor Packages and describe their Pin Configuration
6.7 Design a Self Bias circuit for Given Stabilisation
6.8 Interpret important specifications of JFET –Drift problem in FET
6.9 Calculate of voltage regulation, Ripple factor of DC Power Supply for given Input Voltage
6.10Design a Zener regulator circuit for given Line and Load voltages, Power ratings.
6.11 Design an RPS using 78XX series IC Regulator
183
1. Student visits Library to refer to Manual of Electronic Semiconductor Devices to find their
specifications
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Lab to identify the Diodes, Transistors and FETs
3. Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with fabrication techniques of Semiconductor Devices
4. Analyze the Power supply Unit in the Institution facility
5. Quiz
6. Group discussion
7. Surprise test
3. www.nptel.ac.in
Course Outcome CL Linked Teaching

PO Hours
CO1 Explain the different types of Semiconductor Diodes R/U 1,2,10 10
and their Specifications
CO2 Analyze the transistor operation under different R/ 1,2,5,6,7 10
configurations and application of Transistor as an U/A
Amplifier
CO3 Determine the need for Stable operating point and R/ 1,2,9 10
reason for wide use of CE amplifier and discuss Various U/A
Bias Stabilization techniques
CO4 Explain the Constructional features and operation of R/ 1,2,5,7 10
different types of FET U/A
CO5 Select the type of Rectifier and Filter required for a R/ 1,2,5 8
given Power supply application U/A
CO6 Solve simple problems and develop circuits using R/ 1,2,3,7 12
Semiconductor Devices for simple Electronic circuit U/A
applications
184
SEMESTER END EXAMINATIONS
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl
Unit No. U(3
No R(1 Mark) A(5 Marks)
Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6
11(a) 15(a)

3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8
12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING:TS:HYDERABAD
II Semester, 18EC-205C - SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
185
MID SEM– IMODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time: 1 hour Max. Marks: 20
PART-A
Answer All questions. Each carries 1marks. 4X1=4 Marks
1.State the electrical properties of solid semiconductor materials.
2.Distinguish between drift and diffusion currents.
3. Draw the symbol of a transistor.
4. Define α, β and γ factors.
PART-B
Answer All questions. Each carries 3 marks. 2X3=6 Marks
5(a) Explain majority and minority carriers in P- type and N- type materials.
OR
5(b) Distinguish betweenZener breakdown and avalanche breakdown.
6(a) Sketch the input and output characteristics of CB, CC and CE configurations.
OR
6(b).Relate α, β and γ factors.
PART-C
Answer All questions. Each carries 5 marks. 2X5=10Marks
7(a)Describe the working of PN junction diode with various biasing voltages.
OR
7(b) Describe the formation and working of Zener diode.
8(a) Explain the working of PNP and NPN transistors.
OR
8(b) Describe the working of a transistor as an amplifier.
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING:TS: HYDERABAD
II Semester, SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
186
MID SEM – IIMODEL QUESTION PAPER
PART-A
1. List the factors affecting the Q-point.
2. Define stabilization in amplifier circuits
3. Define pinch-off voltage in JFET.
4. List the applications of JFET and BJT.
PART-B
Answer All questions. Each carries 3marks. 2X3=6Marks
5(a) Explain thermal runaway.
OR
5(b) Explain the reasons for wide use of CE amplifier.
6(a) Draw and explain the drain characteristics of JFET
OR
6(b) Compare JFET and MOSFET.
PART-C
7(a)Derive an expression for stability factor in CE configuration.
OR
7(b) Draw a practical CE amplifier and explain the function of each component.
8(a) Explain the construction and principle of operation of N-channel JFET.
OR
8(b)Explain the principle of operation of CMOSFET
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING:TS:HYDERABAD
II Semester, SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
187
SEMESTER END EXAMINATION MODEL QUESTION PAPER
PART-A
1. Define α, β and γ factors.

2. List the factors affecting the Q-point.
3. Define voltage regulation.
4. Classify different types of JFETs.
5. Mention the factors affecting the output ripple in RC filter circuit.
6. Draw the circuit of CRC filter
7. Mention some commonly used diode numbers
8. Define ripple factor.
PART-B
Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks 4X3=12Marks
9(a) Compare the performance characteristics of CE, CB and CC configurations.
OR
9(b) Explain the necessity of DC power supply for electronic circuits.
10(a) Explain the concept of DC and AC load line
OR
10(b) Explain different transistor packages and describe their PIN configuration.
11(a) Explain the operation of Half Wave Rectifier circuit using capacitor filter.
OR
11(b) Explain the working of Zener regulated power supply.
12(a) Explain the use of PN junction diode in temperature sensing.
OR
12(b) Explain the significance of the number marked on transistor case.
PART-C
188
13(a) Explain the forward and reverse bias V-I characteristics of a diode.
13(b) Explain the function of components and the working of CRC filter.
14(a) Derive an expression for stability factor in CE configuration OR
14(b) Calculate the value of β of a transistor if IE= 5 mA and IC = 4.95mA
15(a) Explain the need for a filter circuit in power supplies.
OR
15(b) Explain the working of CLC filter circuit.

16(a)Calculate the stability factor for self-bias circuit with β=199, R E=10 kΩ, R1=100 kΩ and R2=10
kΩ.
OR
16(b)Design an RPS using 7805 IC regulator.
Advanced Engineering Drawing
Course Title : Advanced Engineering Drawing Course Code 18EC-206P

189
Teaching Scheme in
1:2 Credits 1.5
Hrs (L :P)
Methodology Lecture + practice Total Contact Periods : 45
***This Course is Common to all Programs of Diploma in Level Offered by State Board of
Technical Education – Telangana State
Prerequisites: Knowledge of Basic Engineering Drawing and Clear visualization and sound
pictorial intelligence to learn this course.
This Course is aimed at developing basic graphic skills so as to enable them to use these skills in
preparation of engineering drawings, their reading and interpretation.
Course Outcomes (CO)
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to attain the following Course
Outcomes (CO):
Course Outcome
CO1 Apply the principles of Projection of solids also draw the projections of solids.
Appreciate the need of Sectional views also draw the sectional views and true
CO2
sections of the engineering components.
Escalate the need of auxiliary views and draw the auxiliary views of the given
CO3
engineering components.
Gainthe knowledge of Isometric views of engineering components also draw the

CO4
isometric views of given components.
Grasp the knowledge and draw the development of surfaces of different engineering
CO5
components
Course Contents
1.0 Projection of solids (09 Hours)

Projection of regular solids
(a) Axis perpendicular to one of the planes
(b) Axis parallel to VP and inclined to HP and vice versa.
2.0 Sectional views (06 Hours)

Need for drawing sectional views – what is a sectional view - Location of cutting plane –
Purpose of cutting plane line – Selection of cutting plane to give maximum information
(vertical and offset planes) - Hatching – Section of regular solids inclined to one plane and
parallel to other plane
3.0 Auxiliary views (06 Hours)

Need for drawing auxiliary views -Explanation of the basic principles of drawing an auxiliary
views - explanation of reference plane and auxiliary plane -Partial auxiliary view.
190
4.0 Pictorial Drawings (15 Hours)
Brief description of different types of pictorial drawing viz., Isometric, oblique, and
perspective and their use - Isometric drawings: Iso axis, angle between them, meaning of
visual distortion in dimensions - Need for an isometric scale, difference between Isometric
scale and ordinary scale difference between Isometric view and Isometric projection -
Isometric and non-Isometric lines -Isometric drawing of common features like rectangles,
circular shapes, non-isometric lines - Use of box and offset methods.
5.0 Development of Surfaces (09 Hours)

Need for preparing development of surface with reference to sheet metal work -Concept of
true length of a line with reference to its orthographic projection when the line is (i) parallel
to the plane of projection (ii) inclined to one principal and parallel to the other -Development
of simple solids like cubes, prisms, cylinders, cones, pyramid (sketches only) -Types of
development: Parallel line and radial line development -Procedure of drawing development,
drawings of trays, funnels, elbow pipes and rectangular ducts.
Reference Books
Engineering Drawing by Kapildev – (Asian Publisher)
Engineering Drawing by BasantAgarwal& C.M Agarwal - ( McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt. (Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.)
A Textbook on Engineering Drawing by P. Kannaiah, K. L. Narayana, K. Venkata Reddy
1.0 Apply Principles of Projection of solids

1.1. Draw the projections of solids to axis of solids parallel to one plane.
1.2. Draw the projections of solids to axis of solid inclined to other plane.
2.0 Appreciate the need of Sectional Views

2.1 Explain the need to draw sectional views.
2.2 Select the section plane for a given component to reveal maximum information.
2.3 Explain the positions of section plane with reference planes
2.4 Differentiate between true shape and apparent shape of section
2.5 Draw sectional views and true sections of regular solids discussed in 6.0
2.6 Apply principles of hatching.
3.0 Understand the need of auxiliary views
191
3.1 State the need of Auxiliary views for a given engineering drawing.
3.2 Draw the auxiliary views of a given engineering component
3.3 Differentiate between auxiliary view and apparent view
4.0 Prepare pictorial drawings

4.1 State the need of pictorial drawings.
4.2 Differentiate between isometric scale and true scale.
4.3 Prepare Isometric views for the given orthographic drawings.
5.0 Interpret Development of surfaces of different solids

5.1 State the need for preparing development drawing.
5.2 Prepare development of simple engineering objects (cubes, prisms, cylinders, cones,
pyramid) using parallel line and radial line method.
5.3 Prepare development of surface of engineering components like trays,funnel, 90 0

elbow & rectangular duct.
Note: Students have to get Minimum 50% of the total (i.e. 20 Marks).
Linked Program
Course Outcome CL Objectives
(PO)
Apply the principles of Projection of solids also

CO1 R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
draw the projections of solids.
Appreciate the need of Sectional views also draw

CO2 the sectional views and true sections of the R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
engineering components.
Escalate the need of auxiliary views and draw

CO3 the auxiliary views of the given engineering R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
components.
Gainthe knowledge of Isometric views of

CO4 engineering components also draw the isometric R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
views of given components.
Grasp the knowledge and draw the development

CO5 R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10
of surfaces of different engineering components
Course-PO Attainment Matrix
192
Program Outcomes (PO)
Course Name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Advanced
Engineering 3 3 3 2 -- -- -- -- 3 3
Drawing
Level 3- Highly Addressed, Level 2-Moderately Addressed, Level 1-Low Addressed
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
SMESTER END EXAMINATIONS

Sl
Unit No. U(3
Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)
3
11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
Advanced Computer Aided Drafting
Course Title : Advanced Computer Aided Course Code 18EC-207P
193
Drafting
Teaching Scheme
1:0:2 Credits 1.5
in Hrs(L:T:P)
Total Contact
Methodology Tutorials + Practice 45
Periods :
This course requires the Basic CAD Skills and concepts of engineering drawing
Course Outcomes
CO1 Significance of Layers. Create and assign properties to layers and modify layers
CO2 Importance and advantages of blocks. Use of standard blocks and user defined blocks
CO3 Need of solid modeling and various methods of solid modeling with different surfaces
CO4 Create and modify 3D drawings
Course Contents
UNIT -1 Duration: 06 periods (T:1 + P:4hrs)
Organize the information on layers
Setting a current layer, layers color, line type, line weight, print style locking and unlocking of layers,
the layer visibility and layer printing. Setting of current line type.The loading of additional line types,
creating and naming of line type, editing of line type.
UNIT -2 Duration: 9 periods (T:1.5 + P:6hrs)
Use the Blocks, Attributes and External references to manage the drawing blocks
The purpose of a block, creating a block, inserting a block, redefining a block, exploding a block
Attribute
Editing attribute definitions, attaching attribute to blocks. Editing attributes attached to blocks,
Extracting attributes information.
UNIT -3 Duration: 15 periods (T:2.5 + P:10hrs)
3.0 Viewing entities in three dimensions
Setting a new viewing direction

Dynamically setting a view direction
194
3.1 Creation of three-dimensional entities using different methods
Drawing of two dimensional entities in three dimensional space.

Converting two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by applying
elevation and thickness.
Converting two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by revolving or
extruding.
Creation of three-dimensional faces, rectangular meshes, ruled surface meshes, extruded
surface meshes, revolved surface meshes, three dimensional entities such as boxes, Cylinders,
Cones, Spheres, wedges, torus, Regions, extruded solids, revolved solids, composite solids,
intersect solids.
3.2 Editing in three dimensions
Rotating in three dimensions, Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar).
Mirroring in three dimensions, aligning in three dimensions.
3.3 Editing of three dimensional solids
Sectioning and Slicing of solids, hiding, shading and rendering.
3.4 Selection of material from library
Enable the material library, editing materials and material library.
UNIT- 4
Application of above three units
Recommended Books
1. Auto cad by George Omura

2. 4MCAD User Guide- IntelliCAD Technology Consortium
Specific learning outcomes
1.0 Organize the information on layers

1.1 Explain the need and importance of Layers.
1.2 Practice creating new layer, naming the layer and assigning properties like Layer
colour, Line type and line weight and setting the current layer
1.3 Practice the locking and unlocking of layers
1.4 Practice the Freezing and thawing of layers
1.5 Practice the layer visibility and layer printing
1.6 Practice the loading of additional line types
2.0 Use the Blocks, Attributes and External references to manage the Drawing
2.1 Define a block
2.2 Explain the purpose of a block
2.3 Practice the creating a block
195
2.4 Practice the inserting a block
2.5 Practice the redefining a block
2.6 Practice the exploding a block
2.7 Define an Attribute
2.8 Practice the editing attribute definitions
2.9 Practice the attaching attribute to blocks
2.10 Edit attributes attached to blocks
2.11 Extract attributes information
2.12 Define external reference
2.13 Practice the Attaching, Removing, and Reloading of external references
2.14 Practice the Binding, Clipping and changing the path of external references
3.0 Understand the concepts of 3D
View entities in three dimensions
3.0.1 To set a new viewing direction
3.0.2 To dynamically set a view direction
3.1 Create three-dimensional entities using different methods
3.1.1 Draw two dimensional entities in three dimensional space.
3.1.2 Convert two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by applying
elevation and thickness.
3.1.3 Convert two dimensional planar entities into three dimensional entities by revolving
or extruding.
3.1.4 Create three-dimensional faces.
3.1.5 Create rectangular meshes.
3.1.6 Create ruled surface meshes.
3.1.7 Create extruded surface meshes.
3.1.8 Create revolved surface meshes.
3.1.9 Create three dimensional entities such as boxes, Cylinders, Cones, Spheres, wedges,
torus, Regions.
3.1.10 Create extruded solids.
3.1.11 Create revolved solids.
3.1.12 Create composite solids.
3.1.13 Create intersect solids.
3.2 Editing in three dimensions
3.2.1 Rotate in three dimensions
3.2.2 Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar)
3.2.3 Mirror in three dimensions
3.2.4 Align in three dimensions
3.3 Edit three dimensional solids
3.3.1 Practice Sectioning and Slicing solids
3.3.2 Practice hiding, shading and rendering
4 Practice applications on above units
Exercise Key components
 Importance of layers
Layers
 Creation of new layers and controlling properties of
layers
196
 Create, insert and explode a block
Working with blocks  Attach attribute to blocks
 Edit and extract attributes attached to blocks
View entities in three dimensions  Set a new viewing direction
 Set dynamically view direction
 Create three-dimensional faces
 Create rectangular meshes, ruled surface meshes,
Create three-dimensional entities extruded surface meshes, revolved surface meshes
 Create three dimensional entities such as boxes,
Cylinders.
 Rotate in three dimensions
Edit in three dimensions  Array in three dimensions (Rectangular and polar)
 Mirror in three dimensions
 Align in three dimensions
Edit three dimensional solids  Practice Sectioning and Slicing solids

 Practice hiding, shading and rendering
Practice the selection of material  Enable material library
from library
 Edit materials and material library
Course Outcome Cognizant Linked PO Teaching

Level Hours
Significance of Layers. Create and assign
CO1 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 15
properties to layers and modify layers
Importance and advantages of blocks. Use of

CO2 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 9
standard blocks and user defined blocks
Need of solid modeling and various methods of

CO3 U/A 1,2,3,9,10 6
solid modeling with different surfaces
CO4 Create and modify 3D drawings A 1,2,3,10 15
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : Semiconductor devices Lab Course Code 18EC-208P
197
Practice
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practices Total Contact Periods : 45 Pds
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic skills of handling Basic Electronics tools and Components, knowledge
of connecting cables and meters
Course Contents
Sl No Unit Name Exercises Periods

1 Familiarization of A,B 6
Semiconductors
Lab
2 Semiconductor 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 24
Diodes and
Rectifiers
3 Transistors & Field 9,10,11,12 12

Effect transistors
4 Mini project Beyond curriculum 3
TOTAL 45
List of Laboratory Exercises
Unit I.- Familiarization of Semiconductors Lab
A. Collect Data sheets relevant to Semiconductors lab Practice
B. Identify different Semiconductor Devices by their symbols and device numbers
Unit II- Semiconductor Diodes and Rectifiers
1. Draw the forward & reverse characteristics of Silicon diode
i) a) Determine Knee voltage, b) Identify Cutoff, and Linear regions
2. Test the diode with DMM & Analogue multimeter and identify the Terminals
a.) Connect a 6V lamp in series with diode and observe the behaviour a) under forward and
reverse biased conditions. b) On low voltage AC supply
198
b) Observe the effect of temperature on diode reverse current by heating the diode with a
soldering Iron
3. Draw the forward & reverse characteristics of Zener diode and determine Breakdown Voltage
i) Test the Zener diode with DMM & Analogue multimeter and identify the Terminals
4. Produce different reference voltages by using a 12V Zener diode and voltage divider network.
a)) Produce higher reference voltage by connecting two Zener diodes in series
5. Implement Rectifier circuits using Diodes and observe the effect of Filtering
a) Implement Half wave rectifier with and without filter
b) Implement Full wave rectifier with and without filter
6. Implement Bridge rectifier with and without filter
a) Implement Voltage Doubler circuit
b) Connect a diode IN4007 in series with a 60W 230V Lamp and test it. (Record your
observations)
7. Build a Regulated power supply and draw the regulation characteristics
a. i) using Zener diode ii) using 3 Terminal +ve Regulator
b. i) implement a negative 3 Terminal Regulatorr ii) Implement a Dual regulated power supply
using both +ve and –ve 3 terminal regulators
8. Build an adjustable +ve Regulated power supply using LM 317 and Test
Unit III. Transistors & Field Effect transistors
9. Draw Input and output characteristics of NPN Transistor and determine Beta of the transistor
a) Plot Input & Output characteristics for CE configuration
b Test the Transistor with DMM & Analogue multimeter and identify the Terminals and Type of
transistor and find the β
10. Use Transistor as a Switch
a) Turn on and turn off a relay using Transistor ( BC148 as a switch.)
199
b) Connect a 6v lamp in series with BD139 and observe the effect of base current variation on
lamp brightness.
11. Draw the input and output characteristics of JFET and determine pinch off voltage and
transconductance.
a) Test the JFET (BFW10) with DMM &Analogue multimeter and identify the Terminals.
12. Use JFET (BFW10) as a current source/Current Limiter
a) Implement a constant current source with a FET by applying appropriate gate bias
b) Practically Verify High input impedance characteristic of the gate circuit.
Unit-IV .Mini/Micro Project (beyond curriculum)
13. Assemble a simple circuit (electronic Kit) and test it.

(i) Collection of catalogues and specification sheets, preparation of a chart displaying symbols of
passive components and connectors/cables.
(ii) Collection of the contributors (scientists) and contribution details to the field of Electrical and
Electronics engineering
(iii) Any other such activities that can contribute to the student’s knowledge in respect of this course.
(iv)Record the best practices used in the disposal of E-waste and precautions in
the operation of electrical appliances.
Course Outcome Linked PO Teaching

Periods
CO1 Appreciate the significance of Semiconductor Devices 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 12
in Circuit Building Blocks
CO2 Identify Different Diodes,Transistors and Use them to 1,2,3,4 12
Design Power Supplies for Desired Ratings
CO3 Apply the Combination of Diodes and Transistors for 1,2,3 15
Amplifier Applications
CO4 Design simple circuit using Electronic Semiconductor 1,2,3,10 6
Devices
E Learning Resources
3. www.nptel.ac.in
QUESTION BANK
200
1. Determine the knee voltage of a given silicon diode.
2. Determine the breakdown voltage of given Zener diode.
3. Implement Half Wave Rectifier circuit without filter and draw their input and output
waveforms.
4. Implement Full Wave Rectifier circuit (Center tapped)without filter and draw their input and
output waveforms.
5. Implement Bridge Rectifier circuit without filter and draw their input and output waveforms.
6. Implement Half Wave Rectifier circuit with capacitor filter and draw their input and output
waveforms.
7. Implement voltage doubler circuit and find the output voltage for an input sinewave of 2V
peak to peak.
8. Design a Zener diode regulator for a regulated output voltage of 5.1 V
9. Design a regulated power supply using 3-terminal IC 7805.
10. Design a regulated power supply using 3-terminal IC 7906.
11. Build an adjustable positive regulated power supply using LM317
12. Obtain the input and output characteristics for CE configuration.
13. Obtain the input and output characteristics for CB configuration.
14. Implement BJT as a switch.
15. Draw the input and output characteristics of JFET
16. Determine the pinch-off voltage and trans-conductance of JFET
17. Implement a constant current source using JFET
18. Test JFET with DMM and analog multimeter and identify the terminals.
19. Test BJT with DMM and analog multimeter and identify the terminals.
20. Test Zener diode with DMM and analog multimeter and identify the terminals.
Applied Science Lab Practice (Physics Lab + Chemistry Lab)
201
Applied Science Lab
Course Title Practice (Physics Lab + Course Code 18EC-209P
Chemistry Lab)
Semester II Course Group Practical
Teaching Scheme in 1.5

15:0:30 Credits
Periods (L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Periods 45
Physics Lab – 209P(A)
Pre requisites: Knowledge of basic concepts of High School Science, Basic Mathematics
Course objectives: To provide practical knowledge about the basics of Physics instrumentation
and calculations/measurements.
1. Introduction to Physics practical and its importance, safety precautions in maintenance of

equipment in the laboratory.
3. Follow of Do’s and Don’ts.
4. Maintenance of data in manual and record book.
6. Strictly following of instructions given from time to time by the lecturer-in-charge.
7. Demonstration of each experiment by the lecturer in charge.
Conduct of an experiment: 2 Periods
Course outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to:
1: Determine the Focal length and focal power of convex lenses using U-V and
graphical method.
2: Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity using Simple Pendulum and verify
with L-T2graph.
3: Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature.
4: Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
202
5: Practice the mapping of magnetic lines of force-locating neutral points.
References:
1. Basic Applied Physics – R.K. Gaur

2. Laboratory manual for class XI and XII - NCERT
PHYSICS PRACTICALS
List of experiments
Semester II
1. Convex lens-Determination of Focal length and focal power using U-V and graphical method.
2: Simple Pendulum-Determination of the value of acceleration due to gravity and verify
with L-T2graph.
3: Resonance apparatus-Determination of velocity of sound in air at room temperature .
4: Travelling microscope-Determination of refractive index of a solid.
5: Practice the mapping of magnetic lines of force-location of neutral points
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, class room interaction, group discussions, graded
exercises, demonstration and practice.
Conduction of experiments: 2 periods/Experiment.
Student must perform experiment individually under the supervision of the lecturer-in charge.
On successful completion of the course, the student will have the ability to attain below Course
outcomes (CO):
Linked
CL Teaching
Course Outcomes POs
Periods
CO 1 Focal length and Focal power of convex U/A 1,2,3,8,9
lens (Separate & Combination) L:P::1:2
CO 2 Acceleration due to gravity using simple U/A 1,2,3,8,9
pendulum L:P::1:2
CO 3 Velocity of sound in air – (Resonance U/A 1,2,3,8,9
method) L:P::1:2
CO 4 Refractive index of solid using traveling U/A 1,2,3,8,9
microscope L:P::1:2
CO 5 Mapping of magnet lines of force-locating U/A 1,2,3,8,9
neutral points L:P::1:2
CO 6 Related the answers to the oral questions
Cognitive levels (CL): U=Understand, A=Application
Specific learning outcomes:
203
Competencies Key competencies
Name of the Experiment
1. Focal length and Focal power of  Calculate the focal length

 Fix the object distance and power of convex lens
convex lens (Separate &  Find the Image distance  Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
 Calculate the focal length and graph
Combination)
power of convex lens and
combination of convex lenses
 Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v curves
2. Simple pendulum – acceleration due to  Fix the simple pendulum to  Find the time for number
gravity – length of seconds pendulum the stand of oscillations
 Adjust the length of pendulum  Find the time period
 Find the time for number of  Calculate the acceleration
oscillations due to gravity
 Find the time period  Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
 Calculate the acceleration due
to gravity
 Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
3. Velocity of sound in air  Arrange the resonance  Adjust the reservoir level
apparatus  Find the first and second
–Resonance method
 Adjust the reservoir level for resonanting lengths
booming sound  Calculate velocity of
 Find the first and second sound
resonanting lengths  Calculate velocity of
 Calculate velocity of sound sound at 00 C
4. Refractive index of solid using  Find the least count of vernier  Read the scale
on microscope  Calculate the refractive
traveling microscope
 Place the graph paper below index of glass slab
microscope
 Read the scale
 Calculate the refractive index
5. Mapping of magnet lines of  of glass
Draw slab
magnetic meridian
 Place the bar magnet in
Force – neutral points NN(North pole of bar  Draw magnetic lines
magnet pointing North) of
and NS (South pole of bar force
magnet pointing North)
directions  Locate the neutral
 Draw magnetic lines of points
force along equatorial and
 Locate the neutral points
along equatorial and axial
EXAMINATION & EXPERIMENTS
204
S.NO EXAMINATION EXPERIMENTS
1 MIDSEM-I EXPERIMENT NO 1 & 2
2 MIDSEM-II
Scheme of Valuation of SEEEXPERIMENT NO 3 & 4
3 S.No SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
Particulars EXPERIMENT NO 1,2,3,4 and 5
Marks
1. Objective/Aim 01
2. Apparatus/Equipment 02
3. Observations 02
4. Principle including formula 02
5. Experiment (Tabular form, readings, etc) 05
6. Calculation and Result 05
7. Viva Voce 03
Total 20
205
Chemistry Lab – 209P(B)
Prerequisite:
Knowledge of basic concepts of chemistry of secondary education.
Course Objectives:
To provide practical knowledge about the basics of volumetric analysis of chemical compounds.
Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will have ability to attain CO:

Periods
mohr’s salt in the given
solution
CO2 Determination of acidity , U/A 1,2,3,8 L:P ::1:2
alkalinity and pH of given
water samples/
solutions.
chlorides in the given
solution.
CO4 Relate the answers to the U/A
oral questions
U = Understand, A = Application
Course Delivery:
The course will be delivered through lectures, classroom interaction, group discussion,
demonstration and practicals.
Conduction of experiments: Lecture 1 period + Experiment 2 periods..
Student must conduct experiment individually under the supervision of the staff-in-charge.
8. Introduction of chemistry practical and its importance, safety precautions in

maintenance of cleanliness and orderliness of chemicals in the laboratory.
10. Follow of DO’s and Don’ts.
11. Maintenance of data in record book.
13. Strict following of instructions given from time to time by the staff-in- charge.
14. Demonstration of each experiment by the staff in charge.
206
Course content
Volumetric Analysis: (22.5 Periods)
Volumetric analysis by Titrimetric Method:-
Volumetric Analysis -Titration – Standard Solutions- Concentration of solutions-

Indicators- acid base indicators- selection of indicators-endpoint of titration-Neutralization.
List of experiments:
1. Estimation of Mohr’s salt by using 0.02M potassium permanganate
solution.
2. Determination of acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution.
3. Determination of alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution.
4. Estimate the chloride content present in water sample by using 0.0141N
AgNO3 solution.
5. Find out the pH of the given solution by using pH meter.

1. Estimate Mohr’s salt by using standard potassium permanganate solution.
2. Determine the partial and total acidity of water sample by using 0.02N
NaOH solution.
3. Determine the partial and total alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N
H2SO4 solution.
AgNO3 solution.
Reference Books:
4. Vogel’s Inorganic Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.

5. Practical chemistry by O.P.Pande & others.
6. Qualitative and quantitative analysis by Alex.
Scheme of Valuation for MID I & II and SEE

Sl. No. Particulars Marks
1 Identification of apparatus/equipment/chemical 2
compounds/tools/etc.
2 Writing Procedure 5
3 Conducting of experiment 4
4 Observation and Results 6
5 Viva-voice 3
Total 20
207
C-18 COMMON-209P

MIDSEM – I
APPLIED SCIENCE LAB PRACTICE
1. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lense using U-V method.
2. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lense by U-V graph method.
3. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum.
4. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum by L-
T2 graph.
5. Estimate the amount of Mohr’s salt present in the given 500 ml of solution
by using 0.02M potassium permanganate solution.
6. Determine the partial acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution.
7. Determine the total acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution
C-18 COMMON-209P
208
MIDSEM – II
1. Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature by resonance method.

2. Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
3. Determine the partial alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution.
4. Determine the total alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution
AgNO3 solution
C18 – COMMON 209P
209
MODEL PAPER
COMMON – II SEMESTER EXAMINATION

(2) Each question carries TWENTY marks.
1. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lens using U-V method.
2. Determine the Focal length and focal power of given convex lens by U-V graph method.
3. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum.
4. Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity at your place sing Simple Pendulum by L-T 2
graph.
5. Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature by resonance method.
6. Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
7. Draw magnetic lines of force around a bar magnet placed in NN position of earth’s magnetic
field and locate neutral points.
8. Draw magnetic lines of force around a bar magnet placed in NS position of earth’s magnetic
field and locate neutral points.
9. Estimate the amount of Mohr’s salt present in the given one litre of solution
by using 0.02M KMnO4 solution.
10. Determine the partial acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution.
11. Determine the total acidity of water sample by using 0.02N NaOH solution
12. Determine the partial alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution.
13. Determine the total alkalinity of water sample by using 0.02N H 2SO4 solution
AgNO3 solution
210
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY Course Code : 18EC-210P

LAB Course Group : Core
PRACTICE Credits :3
Semester : II
Total Contact Hours : 37.5Hrs/45Pds
Teaching Scheme in Hrs (L:T:P) : 0:1:2
SEE : 40 Marks
Type of course : Tutorial + Practical
CIE : 60 Marks
Prerequisites
Knowledge of Computer basics and DOS
Course Outcome
(CO):
Course Outcome CL Linked PO Practical hrs

CO1 Demonstrate skills using spreadsheet softwareA 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
CO2 Demonstrate skills using presentation software
A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
CO3 Demonstrate skills using database software A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
Total Sessions 45
Course Content
Spread Sheet
1. Open MS-Excel and identify the components on the screen
2. Create a Worksheet in MS-Excel and save it in .xls or .xlsx format
3. Inserting column and row in Excel
4. Creation of new worksheet in the existing Excel Book file
5. Generate a Chart using the data in Excel-worksheet
6. Automate calculations in a worksheet using formula
7. Sort and filter data in a worksheet
8. Protecting a worksheet, working with multiple sheets
9.
Presentation Software
10. Create a simple Power point presentation for a small topic and saving in .ppt or pptx
format
11. Inserting a new slide in the existing PowerPoint file
12. Inserting chart or image in a PowerPoint slide
13. Exercise with animation and sound features in PowerPoint
14. Exercise with Rehearse Timings feature in PowerPoint
15. Exercise in printing the PowerPoint file in (a) Slides (b) Handouts
Database Management System
16. Create a table for given data and save in .mdb or .accdb format
211
17. Add, Delete and rename fields
18. Use the Primary key field
19. Enter and edit data
20. Use Relationships option
21. Create forms
22. Modify and save forms
23. Create and use queries
24. Sort data
25. Display data
26. Create and print reports
Resources:
1. Computer Fundamentals Concepts, Systems, Application, D.P.Nagapal, S.Chand
Publication, RP-2014, ISBN: 81-219-2388-3
2. http://www.tutorialsforopenoffice.org/
3. http://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/documentation/
Composition of Educational Components:
Questions for CIE and SEE will be designed to evaluate the various educational components
(Bloom’s taxonomy) such as:
Sl. Bloom’s Category %

No.
1 Remembrance 20
2 Understanding 20
3 Application 60
Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:
(Course Outcome linkage to Cognitive Level)
Course Outcome Experiment Linked Linked PO CL Practical

Sessions
CO1 Demonstrate skills using 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15
spreadsheet software
CO2 Demonstrate skills using 9,10,11,12,13,14 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15
presentation software
CO3 Demonstrate skills using 15,16,17,18,19,20,21, 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 A 15
database software 22,23,24,25
U-Understanding; A-application/ Analysis; App-Application
Course-PO Attainment Matrix
212
Level 3- Highly Addressed, Level 2-Moderately Addressed, Level 1-Low Addressed.
Course Delivery
The course will be delivered through tutorial of one hour and one & half hours of hands on practice
per week.
Suggested Student Activities:
1. Create a spreadsheet for the class
2. Create power point presentation for a course
3. Create a database for the class
Format for Student Activity Assessment
Internal Assesment
Activity Marks
Writing the experiment, record evaluation 30
Execution of the given experiment 20
Viva-voce 10
Total 60
213
Model Question Bank
Course Title: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY LAB PRACTICE Course Code: 18EC-210P
1. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a worksheet with five columns. Enter ten records and
find the sum of all columns using auto sum feature.
2. You have a monthly income of Rs.10000. Your monthly expenditures are Rent- Rs 3000,
Food- Rs. 1500, Electricity- Rs.100, Phone- Rs. 150, and Cable TV-Rs. 200.
3. Prepare a worksheet with the Monthly Income, the Monthly Expenditures listed and summed,
monthly savings amount (what’s left over each month) calculated, and the amount saved per
day (assuming 30 days in a month). Use Spreadsheet Application.
4. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a worksheet containing the pay details (containing
Basic pay, DA, HRA ,Other Allowance , Deductions- PF, PT, Insurance, Gross and Net
salary) of the employees using formulas.
5. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a Simple Bar Chart to highlight the results of your
institute for three years.
6. Using Spreadsheet Application, create a Pie Chart for a sample data and give legends.
7. Using presentation tool, Create a simple Presentation consisting of 4-5 slides about I/O
Devices.
8. Create a presentation about a book containing Title, Author, Publisher and Contents.
9. Create an automated (timings & animation) Presentation with five slides about different
Models of Computers. Use Presentation tool
10. Create a table for given data and save in .mdb or .accdb format
11. Create a database for the class
12. Add, Delete and rename fields in a database management system
13. Demonstrate the Use of Primary key field in database management system
14. Enter and edit data in database management system
15. Demonstrate the use of Relationships option in database management system
16. Create forms in database management system
17. Modify and save forms of database in database management system
18. Create and use queries in database management system
19. Sort data in database management system
20. Display data in database management system
21. Create and print reports of database in database management system
214
SKILL Upgradation-II
Course Title : Skill Upgradation -II Course Code : :Common

Semester : II Course : Core
Teaching Scheme in periods ( L : : 0:0:7 Credits
Group : 2.5
Methodology
T :P) : Activities Total : 105
Contact
CIE : Rubrics SEE : Nil
Rationale: This course is introduced for all semesters with a purpose of providing outside classroom
experiences that lead to overall development of the students. One whole day is allocated for activities.
Course Objectives:
2. To instil Moral, Social Values and Loyalty.

Activity
Periods Frequency
No Activity
Haritha Haram(plantation &Maintenance) 9 3 times in a
1
semester
Waste management 12 3 times in a
2
semester
Swach Bharath 28 4 times in a
3
semester
Mini projects 7 1 time in a
4
semester
Video Clips 9 3 times in a
5
semester
Seminar/Quiz/Presentation/Group discussion 18 6 times in a
6
semester
7 Local Visits (also with in the campus) 6 2 times
Expert Lectures
 Engineering ethics-
 moral issues
8 16 4 Times
 Ethical theories Personality– Self control-
Self-interest –Selfrespect.
 Emerging technologies
Total Periods 105
215
Note: in case Expert faculty are not available English faculty should handle the expert lectures or
Course Outcomes:
CO Outcome CO/PO
Mapping
profession.
CO2 Develop the set of justified moral principles of obligation, ideals 8,10
that ought to be endorsed by the engineers and apply them in real
life situations
CO4 Create awareness of Constitution of India 1,4,7,8,9,10
COURSE CONTENT:
Engineering ethics-Definition-Approach-Senses of Engineering Ethics-variety of moral issues–
Inquiry-Types-Moral dilemmas-Steps to solve dilemma-Moral autonomy –Definition-consensus &
controversy –Profession-Definition–Ethical theories-Theories about right action Personality– Self
control- Self-interest –Selfrespect.
Evaluation:
The student must maintain a record of all activities conducted on skill upgradtion/ Activities day and
prepare a soft copy of report and submit it to their mentor or upload to the institute website or mail.
The reports shall be evaluated by the mentors though rubrics and accordingly give the eligibility for
2.5 credits . The student must have participated in at least 75% of activities to get eligibility.

Engineering Tools
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Experiments and
Course Outcome
Communication
Environment &
Individual and
sustainability
Engineer and
Knowledge
Team work
Mapped POs
Discipline
practice
society
Ethics
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10
CO1 ✓ ✓ ✓ 5,10
CO2 ✓ ✓ 5,10
CO3 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 6,7,9,10
CO4 ✓ ✓ ✓ 5,7,10
216
Electronics &Communication Engineering
Semester-III
217
C-18 DECE SEMESTER III TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME
Course Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Instructio Continuous
n Periods Internal
(SEE)
per week Evaluation (CIE)
Min
Total
S. mark
Periods
N Course Credit Inter s for
per Mi Mi
O Code Name s nal Min Total passi
semeste d d Max
L T P Eval mark Mark ng
r Se Se marks
uatio s s inclu
m1 m2
n ding
inter
nal
Applied
1 18EC-301F Engineering 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
Mathematics
18EC- Digital
2 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
302C Electronics
Electronic
18EC-
3 Devices & 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
303C
Circuits
Analog
18EC-
4 Communicat 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
304C
ion systems
18EC- Network
5 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
305C Analysis
Electronic
6 18EC-306P 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 60 40 20 100 50
Devices Lab
Network
Analysis &
Analog
7 18EC-307P 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 60 40 20 100 50
Communicat
ions lab
Practice
Digital
8 18EC-308P Electronics 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 60 40 20 100 50
lab Practice
Circuit
Design &
9 18EC-309P 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 60 40 20 100 50
Simulation
Lab
Communicat
10 18EC-310P ion and Life 1 2 45 1.5 20 20 60 40 20 100 50
skills lab
Skill
11 Upgradatio 0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -- -
n
2 1
TOTAL 5 630 25 100 100 400 400 170 1000 425
0 7

1.Cumulative 35% (Mid sem 1 + Mid sem 2+ Tutorials+ End examination) and minimum marks in end examination is 35%
(i.e.14marks).
2. If the cumulative of CIE is less than 35% (i.e.21 marks out of 60) therefore more than 35% of SEE is required to get overall
35%.
3
218
APPLIED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : APPLIED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS Course Code : 18EC-301F

SEMESTER : III Course Group : Foundation
Teaching Scheme ( L : T : P ) : 45 :15 : 0 ( in Periods ) Credits : 3 Credits
Programmes : Common to all Engineering Diploma Programmes
Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge of Basic Engineering Mathematics and Engineering
Mathematics at Diploma 1st and 2nd Semester level.
CO 1 Integrate different kinds of functions

CO 2 Integrate functions using different methods
CO 3 Find the values of definite integrals.
CO 4 Solve simple problems of Areas, Volumes.
CO 5 Find the Mean and RMS values of various functions and Approximate values of Definite
integrals using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3rd rule
CO 6 Form the Differential Equation and Solve Simple DEs of 1st order and 1stdegree.
Course Content:
Unit-I Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Indefinite Integration-I
Integration regarded as anti-derivative – Indefinite integral of standard functions.

Properties
of indefinite integral. Integration by substitution or change of variable. Integrals of the form
sinmq. cosnq. where m and n are positive integers. Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x, cosec x
and powers of tan x, sec x by substitution.
Evaluation of integrals which are reducible to the following forms:
219
1 1 1
i) 2 2
, 2 2, 2 2
a + x a −x x −a
1 1 1
ii) , ,
√ a2+ x2 √a 2−x 2 √ x 2−a2
iii) √ x 2 + a2 , √ a2 −x 2 , √ x 2 −a2
Unit – II Duration: 08 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
Indefinite Integration-II
Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple rational algebraic functions.

Integration by parts, Bernoulli’s rule.
Unit-III Duration: 06 Periods (L: 4.5 – T:1.5)
Definite Integral and its Properties:
Definite integral-fundamental theorem of integral calculus, properties of definite integrals,

evaluation of simple definite integrals. Definite integral as the limit of a sum.
Unit – IV Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Applications of Definite Integrals:
Areas under plane curves – Sign of the Area – Area enclosed between two curves. Solid
of revolution – Volumes of solids of revolution.
Unit – V Duration: 08 Periods (L: 6.0 – T:2.0)
Mean, RMS values and Numerical Integration:
Mean values and Root Mean Square values of a function on a given interval.
Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule to evaluate an approximate value of a definite

integral.
Unit – VI Duration: 18 Periods (L: 13.5 – T:4.5)
Differential Equations of First Order:
Definition of a differential equation – order and degree of a differential equation – formation

of differential equations – solution of differential equation of first order, first degree :
variables -separable, homogeneous, exact, linear differential equation, Bernoulli’s equation.
220
Reference Books:
1. Integral Calculus Vol.I, by M.Pillai and Shanti Narayan
2. Thomas’ Calculus, Pearson Addison –Wesley Publishers
2.E-books:www.mathebook.net
Unit-I
1.0 Use Indefinite Integration to solve engineering problems
1.1 Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.
1.2 State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties of Integrals ò (u + v)
dx And ò ku dx where k is constant and u, v are functions of x.
1.3 Solve integration problems involving standard functions using the above rules.
1.4 Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following type by the method of
substitution.
i) ò f(ax + b) dx where f(x) dx is in standard form.
ii) ò [f(x)]n f ¢(x) dx
iii) ò f¢(x)/[f(x)] dx
iv) ò f {g(x)} g ¢(x) dx
1.5 Find the Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x usingthe above.
1.6 Evaluate the integrals of the form ò SinmqCosnq. dq where m and n are positive
integers.
1.7 Evaluate integrals of powers of tan x and sec x.
1.8 Evaluate the Standard Integrals of the functions of the type
221
1 1 1
i) 2 2
, 2 2, 2 2
a + x a −x x −a
1 1 1
ii) , ,
√ a2+ x2 √a 2−x 2 √ x 2 −a2
iii) √ x 2 + a2 , √ a2 −x 2 , √ x 2 −a2
1.9 Evaluate the integrals of the type
Unit-II
2.0 Use Indefinite Integration to solve engineering problems
2.1 Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.
2.2 Evaluate integrals using integration by parts with examples.
2.3 State the Bernoulli’s rule for evaluating the integrals of the form ∫ u.vdx .
2.4 Evaluate the integrals of the form òex [f(x) + f ¢(x)] dx.
Unit-III
3.0 Understand definite integral and use it in engineering applications
3.1 State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus
3.2 Explain the concept of definite integral.
3.3 Calculate the definite integral over an interval.
3.4 State various properties of definite integrals.
3.5 Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using the above properties.
3.6 Explain definite integral as a limit of sum by considering an area.
Unit –IV
4.0 Understand definite integral and use it in engineering applications
4.1 Find the Areas under plane curves and area enclosed between two curves using
integration.
4.2 Obtain the Volumes of solids of revolution.
222
Unit –V
5.0 Understand Mean, RMS values and Numerical Methods
5.1 Obtain the Mean value and Root Mean Square (RMS) value of the functions in any
given Interval.
5.2 Explain the Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rules for approximation of definite
integrals and provide some examples.
Unit –VI
6.0 Solve Differential Equations in engineering problems.
6.1 Define a Differential equation, its order and degree
6.2 Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.
6.3 Solve the first order first degree differential equations by the following methods:
i. Variables Separable.
ii. Homogeneous Equations.
iii. Exact Differential Equations
iv. Linear differential equation of the form dy/dx + Py = Q,
where P and Q are functions of x or constants.
v. Bernoulli’s Equation (Reducible to linear form.)
6.4 Solve simple problems leading to engineering applications by using above methods.
1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related material
2.Quiz
3.Group discussion
4.Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home Assignments
223
CO / PO - MAPPING
POs
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
224
MID SEM-I EXAM
S.N Remark
Unit Name R U A
o s
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
S.N Remark
Unit Name R U A
o s
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl
Unit No.
No
R U A

1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)

2 II

3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)

4 IV

9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)
3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
Total Questions
8 8 8

225
Remembering
1 Mark
(R)
Legend: Understanding
3 Marks
(U)
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, III SEMESTER
PART-A
5. Integrate ( ex– sinx + x4 ) with respect to x

dx
6. Find ∫ 5 x+7 dx
7. Write Bernoulli’s rule of integration
8. Find ∫ xlogx dx
PART-B
5 a). ∫
x5
1+ x 12
dx .
|
Or
dx
5 b) Evaluate ∫ ¿¿ ¿
6 a) ∫ x sinxdx |
Or
6 b)∫
3 x +2
( x−1 ) (2 x+3)
dx .
|
226
PART C
7 a) Evaluate∫ √ x + 2 x +5dx
2
Or
7 b) Evaluate: ∫ cosx cos 2 xdx .
8 a) Find ∫ x tan−1 xdx .
Or
8 b) Find ∫x 4
cos 2 xdx .
@@@
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, III SEMESTER
PART-A
1
1. Find ∫ ( x ¿¿ 4+1)dx ¿
0
π
2. Evaluate : ∫ sin 3 xdx
0
1
3. Evaluate : ∫ 1+1x 2 dx
0
4. Write the formula to find area bounded by the curve y= f(x) , x-axis, between the
limits x=a and x =b
PART-B
π
2
5 a) Evaluate:
∫ √1−sin2 x dx
0
Or
227
π
2
5 b) Evaluate:
∫ sin 2 xdx
0
6 a) Find the area bounded by the line 2x + y =8, x-axis and the lines x = 2 and x = 4.
Or
6 b) Find the Volume of the Solid generated by revolving the part of the Circle x 2+ y 2=36
From x = 0 to x = 4 about x – axis.
PART C
π
2
√ Sinx
7 a) Evaluate:
∫ √ Sinx+ √Cosx
dx
0
Or
π
2
7 b) Evaluate:
∫ log sin xdx
0
8 a) Find the area enclosed between the Parabolas y=3 x−x 2∧ y =x 2−x .
Or
8 b) Find the Volume of the Solid generated by the revolution of the area bounded by the
2 2
x y
Ellipse + =1 , about x- axis.
25 16
@@@
C18-common
SUB.CODE:301F
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION,(C-18)
MODEL PAPER
III SEMESTER EXAMINATION
PART-A
1. Find ∫ x 7 – 3/ x dx
1
2. Evaluate ∫ ( x +1 )dx
2
0
3. Write the formula to find mean value of y = f(x), in the interval (a, b)
√ ( )
2
dy dy
4. Find the Order and Degree of the Differential Equation x = 1+ .
dx dx
228
b
5 Write Trapezoidal Rule to find the approximate value of∫ f ( x ) dx .
a
6. Write the formula to find RMS value of y = f(x) over the range x=a and x = b.
dy 2 x+ y
7. Solve =e
dx
8. Write the condition for exactness of the differential equation M(x,y)dx + N(x,y)dy =0
PART-B
π
2
9 a) Evaluate:
∫ √1−sin2 x dx
0
Or
6
dx
9 b) Find the approximate value of ∫ by taking n = 6 using Trapezoidal rule.
0 1+ x
10 a) Find the area bounded by the Parabola y = x2 – 2x + 1 and x-axis.
Or
10 b) Form the Differential Equation from y= A e x + B e 3 x where A, B are arbitrary constants
11 a) Find the RMS value of √ log x over the range x= 1 and x= e
Or
4
dx
11 b) Calculate approximate value of ∫ by taking n= 4 using Simpson’s 1/3 rule
0 1+ x
dy
12 a) Solve: x +2 y =logx .
dx
Or
12 b) Solve: x ( 1− y ) dx+ y ( 1−x ) dy =0
2 2
229
PART C
1
13 a) Evaluate: ∫ 2 dx
x + 2 x +2
Or
13 b) Find the RMS value of y = √ 8−4 x between x = 0 and x = 2
2
2 2
x y
14 a) Find the volume of solid generated by revolving the Ellipse 2
+ 2 =1 about Major
a b
axis
Or
dy
14 b) Solve: =sin( x + y )
dx
15 a) A curve is drawn to passing through the points given by the following table:
x 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4

y 3 3.4 3.7 3.8 2.7 2.6 2.1
Calculate the approximate area bounded by the curve, x-axis and the lines x= 1 and x=
4
using Simpson’s 1/3 rule
Or
1
15 b) Evaluate: ∫ √( 1−x2 ) dx approximately by taking n = 4 using
0
Simpson’s 1/3 rd Rule.
16 a) Solve: ( y 2−xy ) dx =x2 dy .
Or
dy 3
16 b) Solve: + yCosx= y Sin2x.
dx
@@@
230
SUGGESTED ACTIVITIES FOR - APPLIED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
ACTIVITY ASSESSMENT :
2. Procedure
3. Explanation
ACTIVITIES:
1 .Write a short notes on different types of integrals.
2. Prepare a notes on different methods to evaluate integrals.
3. List out Properties of definite integrals.
4. List out and explain various applications of definite integrals.
5. Explain the procedure to solve problems on Areas using integration
6. Explain the procedure to find volumes of irregular shapes of solids of revolution using integration.
7. Prepare a presentation to find Mean values and R.M.S values of any given function.
8. Explain the procedure to calculate approximate area by using Trapezoidal rule.
9. Explain the procedure to calculate approximate area by Simpson’s 1/3 rule
10. Prepare a presentation on solving 1st order differential equations using any suitable method.
CATEGORY 4 3 2 1

Concepts complete substantial some very limited
understanding of understanding of understanding of understanding of
the mathematical the mathematical the mathematical the underlying
concepts used to concepts used to concepts needed to concepts needed to
solve the solve the solve the solve the
problem(s). problem(s). problem(s). problem(s) OR is
not written.

efficient and effective procedure effective procedure effective procedure
effective procedure to solve the to solve problems, to solve problems.
to solve the problem(s). but does not do it
problem(s). consistently.
231
Explanation Explanation is Explanation is Explanation is a Explanation is
detailed and clear. clear. little difficult to difficult to
understand, but understand and is
includes critical missing several
components. components OR
was not included.
Working with Student was an Student was an Student cooperated Student did not
Others engaged partner, engaged partner with others, but work effectively
listening to but had trouble needed prompting with others.
suggestions of listening to others to stay on-task.
others and working and/or working
throughout lesson.
Mathematical 90-100% of the Almost all (85- Most (75-84%) of More than 75% of
Errors steps and solutions 89%) of the steps the steps and the steps and
have no and solutions have solutions have no solutions have
mathematical no mathematical mathematical mathematical
errors. errors. errors. errors.
CO / PO - MAPPING OF ACTIVITIES:
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO7 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO8 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO9 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO10 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
232
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
Course Title : DIGITAL ELECTRONICS Course Code 18EC-302 C

Semester III Course Group Core
Teaching Scheme in Hrs(L:T:P) 3:1:0 Credits 3
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Contact periods : 60Pds
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of electronics in Basic Physics at Secondary school level .
Course Outcomes
CO1 Convert number systems and Solve Boolean expressions using K-map.
CO2 Compare various digital IC logic families and identify them by their characteristics.
CO3
Design adders using Combinational logic.
CO4 Develop Combinational logic circuits like MUX , De-mux, encoder, decoder and comparator
circuits.
CO5
Identify the need of sequential circuits and design registers using flip-flops.
CO6
Design counter circuits and Compare different types of memories.
After completion of the course, the student should be able to
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT 1 –
Basics of Digital Electronics Duration: 14 Periods (L: 8– T: 6)
Convert number systems and Solve Boolean expressions using K-map.
Number systems –comparison with Decimal system-Conversion from number system into another –
performing arithmetic operations in binary-Use of weighted and Un-weighted codes- importance of
parity Bit- Different postulates in Boolean algebra- Basic logic gates with truth table- universal logic
gates - exclusive – OR gate with truth table- De-Morgan’s theorems- AND, OR, NOT operations
using NAND, NOR gates- De-Morgan’s theorems related postulates to simplify Boolean expressions
(up to three variables)- standard representations for logical functions (SOP and POS form)- Boolean
expressions from the given truth table- Karnaugh map to simplify Boolean Expression (up to 4
variables only)
233
UNIT2 –
Digital IC logic families Duration: 6 Periods (L: 6– T: 0)
Compare various digital IC logic families and identify them by their characteristics.
Classification of digital logic families- Important characteristics of Digital ICs- requirements of TTL
and CMOS ICs - Propagation delay and Noise margin- Fan-in and Fan-out capacity- Power
dissipation- Figure of merit of a logic family- explain TTL NAND gate with open collector- TTL
NAND gate with Totem pole output- CMOS NAND gate circuit – Compare logic families- IC
numbers of two input Digital IC Logic gates.
UNIT 3–
Design adders using Combinational logic . Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8– T: 2)
Concept of combinational logic circuits- Half adder circuit -truth table- Half-adder using NAND gates
only &NOR gates only- Full adder circuit - Truth table- Full-adder using two Half-adders and an OR
– gate - a 4 Bit parallel adder using full – adders- 2’s compliment parallel adder/ subtractor circuit-
Serial adder -Performance of serial and parallel adder-
UNIT 4–
Develop Combinational logic circuits like MUX, De-mux, encoder, decoder and comparator
circuits. Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8– T: 2)
Operation of 4 X 1 Multiplexers- Operation of 1 to 4 demultiplexer- IC numbers -applications- 3 X 8

decoder- BCD to decimal decoder- Decoders- Decimal to BCD encoder- IC numbers -Applications -
Tri-state buffer - Types of tri-state buffers-Applications - Digital comparator.
UNIT 5–
Identify the need of sequential circuits and design registers using flip-flops.
Duration: 12 Periods (L: 8– T: 2)
Concept of Sequential logic circuits- NAND and NOR latches with truth tables-Necessity of clock -
Clocked SR flip flop circuit using NAND gates- Need for preset and clear inputs - Circuit of Clocked
JK flip flop (using S-R flip-flops) with truth table -Race around condition- Master slave JK flip flop
circuit - clocked D and T flip flops - Truth table, Circuit diagram and timing diagram- Symbols of
above Flip Flops- Truth tables - Applications for each type of flip flop- Need for a Register - Types
of registers- 4 bit shift left and shift right registers - 4-bit bi-directional shift Register - Parallel in
parallel out shift register - Universal shift register (74194 ) - Applications of shift registers.
UNIT 6–
Design counter circuits and Compare different types of memories.
234
4-bit asynchronous counter - Asynchronous decade counter with a circuit - 4-bit synchronous
counter–Differences between synchronous and asynchronous counters- asynchronous 3 bit up-down
counter -Ring counter- applications - Types of memories - Memory read operation, write operation,
access time, memory capacity, address lines and word length- ROM and RAM- Diode ROM-
EEPROM and UVPROM- Dynamic MOS RAM cell- static RAM and dynamic RAM- Applications
of Flash ROM.
Specific Learning Outcomes: upon completing this course the student will be able to
1.0 Understand the basics of Digital Electronics

1.1 Explain Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal number systems.
1.2 Compare the above with Decimal system.
1.3 Convert a given decimal number into Binary, Octal, and Hexadecimal numbers and vice versa.
1.4 Convert a given binary number into octal and hexadecimal number system and vice versa.
1.5 Perform binary addition, subtraction, Multiplication and Division.
1.6 Perform binary addition, subtraction, Multiplication and Division and check in decimal system.
1.7 Write 1’s complement and 2’s complement numbers for a given binary number.
1.8 Perform subtraction of binary numbers in 1’s complement method.
1.9 Perform subtraction of binary numbers in 2’s complement method.
1.10 State the use of weighted and Un-weighted codes and list the types.
1.11 Write Binary equivalent number for a number in 8421, Excess-3 code.
1.12 Convert a given binary number into Gray code and vice-versa.
1.13 Explain the use of alphanumeric codes (ASCII & EBCDIC)
1.14 State the importance of parity Bit.
1.15 State different postulates in Boolean algebra.
1.16 Explain the basic logic gates AND, OR, NOT gates with truth table.
1.17 Explain the working of universal logic gates (NAND, NOR gates) using truth tables.
1.18 Explain the working of an exclusive – OR gate with truth table.
1.19 Realize AND, OR, NOT operations using NAND, NOR gates.
1.20 Realize exclusive – OR gate using basic gates.
1.21 Realize exclusive – OR gate using NAND, NOR gates.
1.22 State De-Morgan’s theorems.
1.23 Prove De-Morgan’s theorems.
1.24 Apply De-Morgan’s theorems related postulates to simplify Boolean expressions (up to four
variables).
1.25 Explain standard representations for logical functions (SOP and POS form)
1.26 Write Boolean expressions from the given truth table and draw the circuit.
235
1.27 Use Karnaugh map to simplify Boolean Expression (up to 4 variables only) in SOP form.
1.28 Use Karnaugh map to simplify Boolean Expression (up to 4 variables only) in POS form.
2.0 Understand different logic families.
2.1 Give the classification of digital logic families ( like TTL, CMOS and ECL).
2.2 List the important characteristics of Digital ICs
2.3 Explain logic levels and Voltage requirements of TTL and CMOS ICs.
2.4 Define propagation delay and Noise margin.
2.5 Define Fan-in and Fan-out capacity of a digital IC.
2.6 Define Power dissipation and figure of merit of a logic family.
2.7 Explain the working of open collector TTL NAND gate with a circuit diagram.
2.8 Explain the working of Totem pole output TTL NAND gate with a circuit diagram.
2.9 Explain the working of CMOS NAND gate with a circuit diagram.
2.10 Compare the TTL, CMOS and ECL logic families.
2.11 Give IC numbers of different two input Digital IC Logic gates( One for each type)
3.0 Understand the working of combinational logic circuits and adder circuits.
3.1 Define combinational logic circuit.
3.2 Define half adder circuit and write its truth table.
3.3 Write the output expression and draw half adder circuit using basic gates.
3.4 Realize a Half-adder using i) NAND gates only and ii) NOR gates only.
3.5 Explain the operation of full adder circuit with truth table.
3.6 Realize full-adder using two Half-adders and an OR – gate.
3.7 Write truth table for the above circuit.
3.8 Explain the working of 4 Bit parallel adder circuit using full adders.
3.9 Explain 2’s compliment parallel adder/ subtractor circuit.
3.10 Explain the working of a serial adder circuit.
3.11 Compare the performance of serial and parallel adder.
4.0 Understand the working of MUX, DE-MUX, Encoder and Decoder circuits.
4.1 Define multiplexer and de-multiplexer.
4.2 Write the truth table of 4 X 1 Multiplexer and draw its circuit.
4.3 Write the IC numbers of TTL & CMOS Multiplexer ICs.
4.4 Mention any 3 applications of multiplexer circuit.
4.5 Write the truth table of 1 to 4 de- Multiplexer and draw its circuit.
4.6 Write the IC numbers of TTL & CMOS De-multiplexer ICs.
236
4.7 Mention any 3 applications of De-multiplexer.
4.8 Write the truth table of 3 X 8 decoder and draw its circuit.
4.9 Mention any 3 applications of decoder IC.
4.10 Explain the working of BCD to decimal decoder circuit.
4.11 Explain the working of Decimal to BCD encoder circuit.
4.12 State the need for a tri-state buffer.
4.13 List the two types of tri-state buffers with IC numbers.
4.14 Write the truth table of 2 bit digital comparator and draw its circuit.
5.0 Understand the working of Sequential logic circuits.
5.1 Define a Sequential logic circuit.
5.2 State the necessity of clock.
5.3 What is level and edge triggering?
5.4 Explain clocked SR flip flop circuit using NAND gates.
5.5 State the need for preset and clear inputs.
5.6 Explain the circuit of JK flip flop (using S-R flip-flops) with truth table.
5.7 What is race around condition in JK flip-flop?
5.8 Explain the working of master slave JK flip flop circuit with necessary diagrams.
5.9 Explain the level clocked D and T flip flops with the help of truth table, circuit diagram and
timing diagram.
5.10 Draw the symbols of above Flip Flops.
5.11 Give the truth tables of edge triggered D and T flip flops.
5.12 List any 2 commonly used IC numbers of flip flops of each type.
5.13 List two applications for each type of flip flop.
5.14 State the need for a Register
5.15 List the four types of registers.
5.16 Explain the working of 4 bit shift left and shift right registers with a circuit and timing diagram.
5.17 Explain the working of 4-bit bi-directional shift register with a circuit and timing diagram.
5.18 Explain parallel in parallel out shift register with a circuit and timing diagram.
5.19 List any four common applications of shift registers.
5.20 List any 2 commonly used IC numbers of registers.
5.21 Distinguish between combinational and sequential circuits.
6.0 Understand working of Counters and Semiconductor memories
6.1 Define a counter and modulus of a counter.
6.2 Explain the working of 4-bit asynchronous up counter with a circuit and Timing diagram.
6.3 Explain the working of asynchronous 3 bit up-down counter with a circuit and Timing diagram
237
6.4 Explain the working of 4-bit synchronous counter with a circuit and Timing diagram.
6.5 Explain the working of decade counter with a circuit and Timing diagram.
6.6 Distinguish between synchronous and asynchronous counters.
6.7 List any 2 commonly used IC numbers of counters.
6.8 Explain the working of ring counter.
6.9 List any three applications for counters and ring counter.
6.10 State the need for memory in digital circuits.
6.11 Define the terms memory read operation, write operation, access time, memory capacity, and
word length.
6.12 Classify various types of memories based on principle of operation, physical characteristics,
accessing modes and fabrication technology.
6.13 Differentiate between ROM and RAM.

6.14 Explain the working of diode ROM.
6.15 Distinguish between EEPROM and UVPROM.
6.16 Explain the working of basic dynamic MOS RAM cell.
6.17 Compare static RAM and dynamic RAM.
6.18 State the need for Flash ROM.
6.19 List the applications of Flash ROM.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. Digital Computer Electronics by Malvino and leach. 3rdedition Tata McGraw-Hill Education
2. Modern Digital Electronics By RP JAIN TMH
3. Digital Electronics: Principles & Applications by Roger L. Tokheim -McGraw-Hill Education,
2008
4. Digital Electronics by GK Kharate, Oxford University Press.
e-links
1. www.nptel.com
2. www.electronics4u.com
Suggested student activities.
1. Learn how to Test the digital IC’s and submit a report.
2. Propose how to manage the e-waste.
3. Perform trouble shooting of the not working equipment in the lab.
4. Learn the latest CMOS IC equivalents of the TTL IC’s.
5. Prepare a simple PCB to perform verification of truth table for basic gates.
6. Prepare a PPT on the day to day application of the gates you have studied.
238
CO PO Mapping Matrix

PO Periods
Convert number systems and Solve Boolean expressions using K- R/U 1,2,10
CO1 : 14
map.
R/U 1,2,5,6,7
Compare various digital IC logic families and identify them by
CO2 : 6
their characteristics.
CO3 : Design adders using Combinational logic. R/U/A 1,2,9 10

R/U/A 1,2,5,7
CO4 : Develop Combinational logic circuits like MUX , De-mux, 10
encoder, decoder and comparator circuits.
R/U/A 1,2,5
CO5 : Identify the need of sequential circuits and design registers using 12
flip-flops.
R/U/A 1,2,3,7
CO6 : Design counter circuits and Compare different types of 8
memories.
239
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl
Unit No. U(3
Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6
11(a) 15(a)

3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8
12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
240
C-18 III SEMESTER
18 EC-302C DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
MODEL PAPER MID- SEM I
IME : 1 HOUR MAX. MARKS : 20

PART-A
Answer ALL questions. 4 x 1= 4M

1. Convert the binary number 1101101 into its decimal equivalent.
2. Draw the logic symbol of AND and OR gates.
3. Define propagation delay with reference to digital IC.
4. Write CMOS IC nos. of AND and NAND gates.
PART – B
Answer ALL questions. 2x3=6M
5 (a) Perform 2’s complement of subtraction for the binary numbers 10110 – 110110
OR
5(b) Draw the symbol of NAND gate, write its truth table and output expression.
6(a) Define Fan-in and Fan-out capacity of a digital IC.
OR
6(b) Write the specifications of digital IC’s.
PART – C
Answer ALL questions. 2 x 5 = 10 M
7(a) Explain the working of universal logic gates NAND and NOR with truth tables.
OR
7(b) Simplify the Boolean expression using De-Morgan’s theorems and draw its simplified logic
circuit.
A BCD + B A CD + C B D + ABCD + BC AD
8(a) Draw the TTL totem pole circuit and explain.
OR
8(b) Compare the various logic families.
241
C-18 III SEMESTER
MODEL PAPER MID- SEM II
TIME : 1 HOUR MAX. MARKS : 20

PART-A

1. Define combinational logic circuit.
2. Draw the circuit of full adder using half adders.
3. Define a multiplexer.
4. Write any 2 IC nos. of multiplexers.
PART – B
5 (a) Explain the operation of full adder with a truth table.

OR
5(b) Compare the performance of serial adder and parallel adder.
6(a) Write the truth table of 1 x 4 de-multiplexer.

OR
6(b) Write any 3 applications for each of MUX and decoders.
PART – C
7(a) Explain the working of 4-bit parallel adder using half adders.
OR
7(b) Explain 2’s compliment parallel adder/subtractor circuit.
8(a) Write the truth table of 1 x 8 demultiplexer and draw its circuit.
OR
8(b) Explain the working of BCD to decimal decoder circuit..
242
C-18 III SEMESTER
MODEL PAPER - SEMESTER END EXAMINATION
TIME : 2 HOURS MAX. MARKS : 40
PART-A
1. State any 2 postulates of Boolean algebra.
2. Define a de-multiplexer.
3. What is edge-triggering with reference to clock.
4. Draw the symbol of D and T flip-flop
5. List any 2 IC numbers of JK flip-flop.
6. List the synchronous inputs of a flip-flop.
7. Define modulus of a counter.
8. Define access time with reference to memory.
PART – B
9 (a) List out the specifications of digital IC’s.
OR
9(b) Explain clocked SR flip flop using NAND gates.
10(a) Realize a half adder using NAND gates only.
OR
10(b) Distinguish between synchronous and asynchronous counters.
11(a) Write the logic symbol and negative edge triggered truth table of D flip-flop.
OR
11(b) State the need of a register and list its types.
12(a) Draw the circuit of a decade counter.
OR
12(b) Differentiate between ROM and RAM.
243
PART – C
13(a) Simplify the Boolean expression ∑ πM (1,3,6,8,14,15 ) using K- map and draw its simplified
logic circuit.
OR
13(b) Explain the working of 4-bit left shift register with a circuit and timing diagram.
14(a) Explain the working of 4-bit bit parallel adder using full adders.
OR
14(b) Explain the working of diode ROM.
15(a) Explain the working of parallel-in and parallel-out register with circuit and timing diagram.
OR
15(b) Explain the working of master slave JK flip-flop circuit with necessary diagrams.
16(a) Classify various types of memories based on principle of operation, physical characteristics,
accessing modes and fabrication technology.
OR
16(b) Explain the working of ring counter with a circuit and necessary timing diagrams.
244
ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS
Course Title : Electronic devices and Circuits Course Code 18EC-303C

Hrs(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Contact Hours : 60Pds
Pre requisites :
This course requires the basic knowledge of Physics and Mathematics at Secondary school level ,and
about operation of diode and Transistor
Course Outcomes:

Course Outcome
CO1 Measure different parameters of a transistor amplifier using small signal model
CO2 Construct multi stage and feedback amplifiers using Transistors
CO3 Construct tuned amplifiers and power amplifiers using Transistors
CO4 Construct various oscillators using Transistors
CO5 Develop various applications using special semiconductor devices
CO6 Design wave shaping circuits using Diodes
Course Contents
Unit1-Small Signal Amplifiers: Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6– T:4)
Basic CE amplifier:- Different parameters of a Transistor amplifier- h-parameter model of CE, CB

and CC configuration- Conversion of h-parameters from CE into CB and CC configuration- simple
problems- CS FET amplifier
Unit -2: Multistage and Feedback amplifiers Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6– T:4)
Classify amplifier based on coupling- feedback and frequency- Multistage amplifiers – Different
parameters- 2-stage RC coupled amplifier- 2-stage Transformer coupled amplifier- 2-stage Direct
coupled amplifier- Darlington pair- Cascode amplifier- Feedback Amplifiers:- Concept of feedback-
four types of negative feedback amplifiers- Effect of negative feedback- Merits and De-merits of
Negative Feedback.
Unit 3 –Tuned and Power amplifiers Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6– T:4)
Voltage and Power Amplifier:- Difference between Voltage and Power amplifiers- Classification
of power amplifiers- Class A single ended- Push-pull amplifier circuit- Effect of distortion in
amplifiers- Choice of Class A , Class B Class AB Amplifier and Class C Amplifiers- Applications
of Class C Amplifiers - Efficiencies of different types of power amplifiers(A,B, AB & C)
245
Unit -4:Oscillators Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6– T:4)
Oscillators: Barkhausen criteria in oscillators- Oscillator circuits- Hartley oscillator- Colpitts

oscillator- Crystal Oscillator- Expressions for frequency of oscillation and condition for sustained
oscillations of the above circuits- Reasons for instability in oscillator circuits- Remedies for
instability in oscillators- Advantages of crystal oscillators- Merits and demerits of RC and LC
oscillators.
Unit 5- Special semiconductor devices Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6– T:4)
Working principle: Varactor diode- UJT- Photo Diode- Photo transistor- Photo Voltaic Cell- LCD,
Characteristics and Applications: Varactor diode- UJT- Photo Diode- Photo transistor- Photo
Voltaic Cell- LCD, Merits and Demerits
UNIT- 6: Wave shaping circuits Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6– T:4)
Clippers: Design of simple clippers- Clamper circuits - Applications of clippers and clampers-
Sweep Voltage generators, Applications of Voltage and current Time base circuits
After completing this course the student will be able to
1.0 Explain the working of Small Signal Amplifiers
1.10 Explain the working of basic amplifier circuit using BJT in CE mode.
1.11 Define the terms Av, Ai, Zi and Zo of an amplifier
1.12 Define frequency response and bandwidth of an amplifier
1.13 Explain the concept of Gain-Bandwidth product
1.14 Define h-parameters of a transistor
1.15 Draw the h-parameter model for CE, CB and CC Configuration
1.16 Derive expressions for Av, Ai, Zi and Zo using h-parameter model for CE configuration
1.17 Obtain h-parameters of CB and CC from CE parameters
1.18 Solve simple problems related to Av, Ai, Zi, Zo and Gain – bandwidth product
1.19 Draw the circuit of CS FET amplifier
1.20 Explain CS FET amplifier operation
1.21 Draw the JFET as current source circuit
1.22 Explain the use of JFET as current source
2.0 Explain the working of Multi-stage and Feedback amplifiers
2.12 Classify amplifiers based on coupling, feedback and frequency

2.13 State the need for multi-stage amplifiers
2.14 Define gain, frequency response and bandwidth of multi-stage amplifier
2.15 Give the expressions for gain, frequency response and bandwidth of multi-stage amplifier
246
2.16 Solve simple problems on overall gain, overall frequency response and overall bandwidth
of multi-stage amplifiers
2.17 Draw 2-stage RC coupled amplifier circuit.
2.18 Explain the operation of 2-stage RC coupled amplifier.
2.19 Explain the frequency response of the above circuit.
2.20 Draw 2-stage Transformer coupled amplifier circuit.
2.21 Explain the operation of 2-stage Transformer coupled amplifier
2.22 Explain the frequency response of the above circuit.
2.23 Draw 2-stage Direct coupled amplifier circuit.
2.24 Explain the operation of 2-stage Direct coupled amplifier
2.25 Draw Darlington pair circuit.
2.26 Explain the operation of Darlington pair circuit.
2.27 Give the expression for current gain of Darlington pair circuit
2.28 Explain high current gain amplifier using Darlington pair
2.29 Draw Cascode amplifer.
2.30 Explain Cascode amplifer.
2.31 Draw the basic block diagram of a feedback amplifier.
2.32 Derive the expression for gain in a feedback amplifier.
2.33 Compare negative and positive feedback.
2.34 Draw the block diagram of voltage series feedback amplifier.
2.35 Draw the block diagram of voltage shunt feedback amplifier
2.36 Draw the block diagram of current series feedback amplifier
2.37 Draw the block diagram of current shunt feedback amplifier
2.38 State the effect of negative feedback on gain
2.39 State the effect of negative feedback on bandwidth
2.40 State the effect of negative feedback on input impedance
2.41 State the effect of negative feedback on output impedance
2.42 List the advantages of negative feedback amplifiers.
2.43 Solve simple problems on effect of negative feedback on gain, bandwidth, Zi and Zo
3.0 Explain the working of Power amplifiers and Tuned amplifiers
3.1 State the need for a power amplifier.
3.2 Distinguish between voltage and power amplifiers.
3.3 Classify power amplifier based on conduction.
3.4 Define Conversion efficiency
247
3.5 Define distortion in power amplifier
3.6 Draw the circuit of class A amplifier with resistor load.
3.7 Explain operation of class A amplifier with resistive load
3.8 Derive the expression for efficiency of the above circuit.
3.9 Draw the circuit of class A amplifier with transformer load.
3.10 Explain the operation of class A amplifier with transformer load.
3.11 Derive the expression for efficiency of the above circuit.
3.12 Draw the circuit of class-B push-pull amplifier.
3.13 Explain the operation of class-B push-pull amplifier
3.14 Derive the expression for efficiency of class-B push-pull amplifier.
3.15 List the advantages & disadvantages of push-pull amplifier.
3.16 Draw the circuit of complementary symmetry push-pull amplifier.
3.17 Explain the operation of complementary symmetry push-pull amplifier
3.18 List the conditions to avoid thermal runaway in a power transistor
3.19 State the necessity of heat sink for a power transistor.
3.20 List different types of heat sinks and mounting methods.
3.21 Classify tuned amplifiers.
3.22 Draw single tuned amplifier circuit.
3.23 Explain the operation of single tuned amplifier circuit
3.24 Draw double tuned amplifier circuit
3.25 Explain the operation of double tuned amplifier circuit
3.26 Draw class C tuned amplifier circuit.
3.27 Explain class C tuned amplifier circuit with waveforms
3.28 List applications of tuned circuits
4..0 Explain the working of Oscillators
4.1 State the condition for an amplifier to work as oscillator.

4.2 Mention the requisites of an oscillator.
4.3 State Barkhausen criteria in oscillators.
4.4 Classify oscillator circuits.
4.5 Draw the Hartely oscillator circuit.
4.6 Explain the working of Hartely oscillator circuit
4.7 Mention the condition for sustained oscillations in Hartley Oscillator
4.8 Give the expression for frequency of oscillations in Hartley Oscillator
4.9 Draw the Colpitts oscillator circuit.
248
4.10 Explain the working of Colpitts oscillator circuit
4.11 Mention the condition for sustained oscillations in Colpitts Oscillator
4.12 Give the expression for frequency of oscillations in Colpitts Oscillator
4.13 Draw the equivalent circuit of crystal and explain.
4.14 Draw the transistor crystal oscillator circuit.
4.15 Explain the working of transistor crystal oscillator circuit
4.16 List the advantages of crystal oscillator
4.17 State the reasons for instability in oscillator.
4.18 Mention the remedies to avoid instability in oscillators.
4.19 Compare the LC and RC oscillators
5.0 Explain the working of special Semiconductor devices
5.1Explain the working principle of varactor diode.

5.2Draw the characteristics of Varactor Diode.
5.3Explain the working principle of UJT with its equivalent circuit
5.4Draw UJT characteristics.
5.5Explain UJT characteristics.
5.6List the application of varactor diode
5.7List applications of UJT.
5.8Explain constructional details of photo diode.
5.9 Draw the characteristics of photo diode.
5.10Explain operation of photo diode.
5.11Explain constructional details of photo transistor.
5.12 Draw the characteristics of photo transistor.
5.13Explain operation of photo transistor.
5.14Explain the principle of photovoltaic cell.
5.15Explain the working principle of LCD
5.16Mention the types of LCD displays
5.17Give constructional details of LCD
5.18List the merits and demerits of LCD Displays
5.19List the applications of LCD
249
6.0 Wave shaping Circuits
6.1. List the different types of clippers.

6.2. Explain the unbiased and biased clippers with waveforms
6.3. Explain the double ended clipper with waveforms
6.4. Draw the output waveforms of a given clipper circuit for sinusoidal/square input
6.5. Draw the clipper circuits for a given input and output waveforms
6.6. Explain the principle of clamper circuit with waveforms
6.7. Mention the applications of clippers and clampers
6.8. Design simple clippers and clampers for a given input and output waveform
6.9. Define Sweep Voltage.
6.10. State the fundamental consideration of sweep waveform.
6.11. Distinguish between voltage and current time-base generation
6.12. List errors in sweep signal
6.13. Draw simple voltage time base generator
6.14. Explain the operation of voltage time base generator
6.15. Draw simple current time base generator
6.16. Explain the operation of current time base generator
6.17. Draw the Bootstrap sweep circuit
6.18. Explain the operation of Bootstrap sweep circuit
6.19. Draw the Miller sweep circuit
6.20. Explain the operation of Miller sweep circuit
6.21. List the applications of Voltage and current Time base circuits.
References
RECOMMENDED BOOKS:
4.Basic Electrical Engineering Volume 1 by PS Dhogal , TMH

5.Electronic devices and applications by B. Somanathan Nair, PHI.
6.Understanding Electronics Components by Filipovic D. Miomir. Mikroe online
Edition
7.Electronic Devices and Circuits by David A.Bell Prentice hall

.
250
1.Student visits Library to refer to Manual of Electronic Semiconductor Devices to find their
specifications
2.Student inspects the available equipment in the Lab to identify the Diodes,Transistors and FETs
3.Visitnearby Industry to familiarize with fabrication techniques of Semiconductor Devices
4.Analyze the Power supply Unit in the Institution facility
5. Participate in the Quiz
6.participate in Group discussion
7. Search internet for Electronic circuits /Projects
Model of rubrics for assessing student activity:
Type of
Excellent(4) Good(3) Satisfactory(2) Developing(1)
Skill/Score
All Data/Material All All Data/Material All
was collected one Data/Material was collected Data/Material
time was collected several times was collected
independently. more than one independently. several times
Data/
Collects a great time Collects basic with assistance.
Material
deals of independently. information, most Collects very
Collection
information, all Collects more refer to the topic limited
refer to the topic information, information,
most refer to the some relate to
topic topic
outlined in a step- outlined in a step- outlined in a step-by- were outlined
by-step fashion that by-step fashion step fashion, but had were
could be followed that could be 1 or 2 gaps that incomplete or
by anyone without followed by require explanation not sequential,
Methodology
additional anyone without even after expert even after
/ Procedure
explanations. additional feedback. expert feedback
explanations. had been given.
Expert help was
needed to
accomplish this.
Quality of Skill is Skill is mastered to Skill is present but Skill needs
Activity/
high. the level of with errors and improvement.
Development
expectation. omissions.
Student provided a Student provided a Student provided a No conclusion
Interpretatio
detailed conclusion somewhat detailed conclusion with was apparent.
n/ summary
clearly. conclusion clearly. some reference.
Full-fills Performs all Performs almost Performs nearly all Performs
team roles duties of assigned all duties duties very little
and duties team roles duties
251
Always does the Always does the Usually does the Rarely does
assigned work, assigned work, assigned work, the assigned
Shares work without needing rarely needs rarely needs work, often
equality reminding reminding reminding needs
reminding.
Listens and talks a Listens and talks Listens, but Usually does
Listen to fare amount a little more than sometimes talk too most of the
other team needed much talking,
mates rarely allows
others to
speak
e-Links:
3. www.nptel.ac.in
CO-PO MAPPING MATRIX

Hours
CO1 Construct small signal model of a transistor R/U 1,2,8,9,10 10
amplifier and analyze different parameters
CO2 Apply the basic knowledge of transistor R/U/A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 10
amplifiers and Understand and analyze the
working of multi stage and feedback amplifiers
and be able to select for proper application
CO3 Apply the basic knowledge of transistor R/U/A 1,2,5,6,8,9,10 10
amplifiers and Understand and analyze the
working of tuned and power amplifiers and be
able to select for proper application
CO4 Explain the working of oscillators and be able to R/U/A 1,2,8,9,10 10
select the proper oscillator for the application
CO5 Understand the different special semiconductor R/U/A 1,2,5,6,8,9,10 10
devices and be able to select for required
application
CO6 Apply the knowledge of diodes and transistors in R/U/A 1,2,3,4,6,8,9,10 12
designing, constructing regulators and wave
shaping circuits
252
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl
Unit No. U(3
Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6
11(a) 15(a)

3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8
12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
253
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING:TS:HYDERABD
C18EC-303C Electronic Devices and Circuits
III SEMESTER MID SEMESTER – I MODEL PAPER
Time: 1 hour Max. Marks:20
PART-A
Answer All questions. Each carries 1 mark. 4X1=4 Marks
1. Define frequency response of an amplifier?

2. Define h-parameters of a transistor?
3. Classify amplifiers based on coupling?
4. List any two advantages of negative feedback amplifiers over positive feedback
amplifiers?
PART-B
Answer ALL questions. Each carries 3 marks. 2X3=6 Marks
5.a Draw the block diagrams of Voltage shunt feedback and Current series feedback
amplifiers?
(OR)
5.b Explain the concept of Gain-Bandwidth product?
6.a Derive the expression for gain in a feedback amplifier?
(OR)
6.b Explain the frequency response of 2-stage RC coupled amplifier
PART-C
254
7.a Explain how a BJT in CE mode acts as an amplifier?
(OR)
7.b A transistor used in CE arrangement has the following set of h parameters when the
d.c. operating point is VCE = 10 volts and IC = 1 mA : hie = 2000 Ω; hoe =10−4 mho; hre
= 10−3 ; hfe = 50 Determine (i) input impedance (ii) current gain and (iii) voltage gain.
The a.c. load seen by the transistor is rL = 600 Ω. What will be approximate values
using reasonable approximations?
8.a If an amplifier has a bandwidth of 200 KHz and voltage gain of 80.What will be the new
bandwidth and gain if 5% negative feedback is introduced ?
(OR)
8.b Two identical amplifier stages having gains of 50 each and phase shift between input
and output signals of 180 degrees each are cascaded. How much is the over all gain
and phase shift of 2-stage amplifier?
255
C18EC-303C

III SEMESTER MID SEMESTER – II MODEL PAPER
PART-A
1. Define conversion efficiency of a power amplifier?

2. List the applications of Tuned circuits?
3. State Barkhausen criteria in oscillators.
4. What are the advantages of crystal oscillator?
PART-B
5.a. What is push-pull power amplifier? Why the name is given so?
(OR)
5.b. What is tuned amplifier? Where it is used?
6.a What are the requisites of an amplifier to work as an oscillator?
(OR)
6.b Compare LC and RC oscillators?
PART-C
Answer ALL questions. Each carries 5 marks. 2X5=10Marks
7.a Calculate the efficiency of a transformer-coupled class A amplifier for a supply of 12 V and
outputs outputs of:
(a) V (p) =12V.
(b) V (p) =6V.
(c) V (p) =2V.
(OR)
7.b Calculate the efficiency of a class B amplifier for a supply voltage of VCC = 24 V with peak
output voltages of:
(a) (a)VL (p) =22V
(b) (b)VL (p) =6V.
8.a Which oscillator provides stable oscillations? Why?
(OR)
8.b Explain the reasons for instability in oscillators and also mention the remedies?
256
C18EC-303C

Time: 2 hours Max. Marks: 40
PART-A
1. Define gain-bandwidth product in an amplifier?
2. What is the need for a heat sink in a power transistor?
3. Draw the symbols of Varactor diode and UJT?
4. Mention Barkhausen criterion in oscillators?
5. List the merits of LCD?
6. List the applications of UJT?
7. Define sweep voltage?
8. Define a non-linear wave shaping circuit?
PART-B
Answer ALL questions. Each carries 3 Marks. 4X3=12 Marks
9.a Obtain h-parameters of CB configuration in terms of CE configuration?

(OR)
9.b Explain the working principle of LCD?
10.a Distinguish between voltage and power amplifiers?
(OR)
10.bExplain the principle of clamper with waveforms?
11.a Explain the working principle of UJT with its equivalent circuit?
(OR)
11.bExplain the working principle of photo voltaic cell?
12.a Explain the double ended clipper with waveforms?
(OR)
12.bDifferentiate voltage time base and current time base circuits?
PART-C
Answer ALL questions. Each carries 5 Marks. 4X5=20 Marks
13.a Explain how JFET is used as current source?

(OR)
13.bExplain the use of Varactor diode as a tuning element?
14.a Draw and explain the operation of class-B push-pull amplifier and derive the expression for
efficiency?
(OR)
14.bExplain the use of Bootstrap Time base generator?
257
15.a Explain the use of UJT as relaxation oscillator?
(OR)
15.bExplain the principle of operation of Photo transistor and list the application areas of photo
transistor?
16.a Explain how a diode clipper is used as noise limiter?
(OR)
16.bExplain the operation of Miller sweep circuit?
258
ANALOG COMMUNICATION SYTEMS
Course Title : ANALOG COMMUNICATION Course Code 18EC-304C

SYSTEMS
Periods(L:T:P)
Hours : 60Pds
Rationale: Analog communications is another core subject which forms the basis for Communication
Engineering(Wireless). Hence, understanding of Analog Communication is very much essential for
an electronics and communication engineering student not only from the industry point of view but
also from knowledge perspective as well. Stress is laid on the study of fundamentals of electronic
communication. This course serves as a foundation for other advanced electronic communication
courses.
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of physical sciences at Secondary school level.
Course Outcomes
CO1 : Interpret the terminologies of Communication systems.
CO2 : Compare AM ,FM and PM Communication systems.

CO3 : Analyze working of AM and FM Radio transmitters and receivers.
CO4 : Electromagnetic wave propagation concepts.
CO5 : Working principles of various Antennas used in Electronic communication.

CO6 : Problems related to parameters of Analog communication .
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1 … Duration : 08 periods
1.0 Basics of Communication systems.
Elements of a communication system - block diagram- frequency spectrum - frequencies for different
applications- modulation- need for modulation in communication systems- amplitude modulation-
wave form of an AM wave- Frequency modulation - waveform of FM Wave- phase modulation-
baseband, carrier, and modulated signals - relationship between channel bandwidth, baseband
259
bandwidth and transmission time- causes of distortion in transmission -measures for distortion less
transmission- time domain and frequency domain- types of noise- internal and external Noise- signal
to noise ratio, noise figure and noise temperature.
UNIT 2 Duration : 10 periods
2.0 Analog Modulation Techniques
Time-domain equation for an AM signal- modulation index of an AM signal- frequency spectrum of

an AM signal- effects of over modulation- bandwidth of an AM signal- relation between total power
and carrier power in AM-Solve simple problems- need for DSBSC and SSB modulation- advantages
and disadvantages of SSB- applications of SSB- Vestigial side band transmission-Angle modulation-
types of angle modulation- time domain equation for FM signal-modulation index of an FM signal-
noise triangle in FM-Comparison of AM , FM and PM- narrow band and wide band FM- pre-
emphasis and de-emphasis- need for pre-emphasis and de-emphasis in FM.
3.0 Transmitters and Receivers.
Requirements and specifications of transmitters- block diagram for high level modulated transmitter -
low level modulated Transmitter -Distinguish between low level and high level modulation- block
diagram of basic SSB transmitter - block diagram of indirect FM transmitter (Armstrong method)-
block diagram of TRF receiver - limitations of TRF Receiver- need for super heterodyning in radio
receiver- working of super heterodyne receiver - block diagram- choice of IF- sensitivity, selectivity
and fidelity, image rejection ratio- AVC (AGC)-Explain the process of demodulation in AM
receivers- block diagram of FM receiver - Foster-seeley discriminator.
4.0 Wave propagation
properties of electromagnetic waves (Absorption, attenuation)- power density and electric field
intensity- power density and electric field intensity for waves propagating in free space- polarization
of EM waves- vertical and horizontal polarization- characteristic impedance of free space- reflection,
refraction, diffraction and interference of EM waves- types of wave propagation methods- ground
wave propagation- sky wave propagation- different layers in ionosphere- critical frequency, MUF,
skip distance and virtual height in sky wave propagation- space wave propagation- line of sight -
expression for LOS- duct propagation- troposphere scatter propagation.
5.0 Antennas
Principle of an antenna- radiation pattern- isotropic antenna - radiation pattern- elementary doublet-
half wave dipole and give its radiation pattern- power gain, directivity, beam width, radiation
resistance- and front to back ratio of an antenna- antenna impedance and polarization- concept of
grounding- need for folded dipole- antenna array- operation of broadside and end fire arrays- resonant
and non-resonant antennas - construction and working of Rhombic antenna- working of Yagi-Uda
antenna- turnstile antenna- binomial array- principle of parabolic reflector- different feed
260
arrangements- working of Horn and Loop antennas- Helical and Log periodic antenna - applications
of dish antenna-antennas used for mobile comm.. and DTH.
UNIT 6 … Duration :10 periods
6.0 Engineering Applications.
Problems based on noise, S/N ratio, noise figure, noise temperature, carrier power and total
power, bandwidth, modulation index in AM, bandwidth, modulation index in FM , Image Rejection
Ratio, power density and electric field intensity at antennas , MUF, Critical frequency in ionosphere
propagation, fading- methods of diversity to reduce fading effects, power gain , front to back ratio ,
design of yagi -uda, loop, helical and dish antennas.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Electronic Communication System by George Kennedy- Bernard DavisTata Mcgraw Hill

Education Private Limited
2. Principles Of Electronic Communication Systems by Herbert Taub& Donald L Schilling,
3rd Edition-2009.McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited
3. Radio communication by G.K.Mithal- khanna publishers
4. Antennas and Wave propagation by K.D.Prasad- SathyaPrakasahan Publications.
5. Communication Engineering, by Vijayachitra, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private
Limited.
On completion of the study of the subject a student should be able to comprehend the following:
1.0 Understand basics of Communication systems.

1.1 Describe the basic elements of a communication system with block diagram.
1.2 Explain frequency spectrum and mention the usage of frequencies for different applications.
1.3 Define modulation.
1.4 State the need for modulation in communication systems.
1.5 Define amplitude modulation.
1.6 Draw the wave form of an AM wave.
1.7 Define Frequency modulation.
1.8 Draw the waveform of FM Wave.
1.9 Define phase modulation.
1.10 Distinguish between baseband, carrier, and modulated signals and give examples.
1.11 Explain the relationship between channel bandwidth, baseband bandwidth and transmission
time.
1.12 List causes of distortion in transmission and measures for distortion less transmission.
1.13 Explain the terms time domain and frequency domain.
261
1.14 Classify different types of noise.
1.15 Distinguish between internal and external Noise.
1.16 Define signal to noise ratio, noise figure and noise temperature.
2.0 Understand the principles of Analogue Modulation Techniques

2.1 Derive the time-domain equation for an AM signal.
2.2 Define the modulation index of an AM signal.
2.3 Draw the frequency spectrum of an AM signal.
2.4 Describe the effects of over modulation.
2.5 Calculate the bandwidth of an AM signal.
2.6 Derive the relation between total power and carrier power in AM.
2.7 Explain the need for DSBSC and SSB modulation.
2.8 List the advantages and disadvantages of SSB.
2.9 List applications of SSB.
2.10 Explain vestigial side band transmission.
2.11 Mention the application of vestigial side band transmission (VSB).
2.12 State the need for angle modulation.
2.13 List two types of angle modulation.
2.14 Derive the time domain equation for FM signal.
2.15 Define the modulation index of an FM signal.
2.16 Discuss noise triangle in FM.
2.17 Compare AM , FM and PM.
2.18 Explain narrow band and wide band FM.
2.19 Define pre-emphasis and de-emphasis.
2.20 Explain the need for pre-emphasis and de-emphasis in FM.
3.0 Understand the working of transmitters and receivers.

3.1 List the requirements and specifications of transmitters.
3.2 Draw the block diagram for high level modulated transmitter and explain
3.3 Draw the low level modulated Transmitter and explain.
3.4 Distinguish between low level and high level modulation.
3.5 Draw the block diagram of basic SSB transmitter.
3.6 Explain the function of each block.
3.7 Draw the block diagram of indirect FM transmitter (Armstrong method& PLL method).
3.9 Draw the block diagram of TRF receiver
262
3.11 State the limitations of TRF Receiver.
3.12 Explain the need for super heterodyning in radio receiver.
3.13 Explain the working of super heterodyne AM receiver with a block diagram.
3.14 Explain the choice of IF.
3.15 Define sensitivity, selectivity and fidelity, image rejection ratio.
3.16 Explain the need for AVC (AGC).
3.17 Explain the process of demodulation in AM receivers.
3.18 Draw the block diagram of FM receiver.
3.20 Explain Foster-Seeley discriminator (FM demodulator).
4.0 Understand the methods of wave propagation

4.1 Explain the properties of electromagnetic waves (Absorption, attenuation)
4.2 Define power density and electric field intensity
4.3 Calculate power density and electric field intensity for waves propagating in free space.
4.4 Define polarization of EM waves
4.5 Explain vertical and horizontal polarization.
4.6 Define the characteristic impedance of free space.
4.7 Explain reflection, refraction, diffraction, and interference of EM waves.
4.8 List 4 types of wave propagation methods
4.9 Explain ground wave propagation
4.10 Explain sky wave propagation.
4.11 Explain different layers in ionosphere.
4.12 Define the terms critical frequency, MUF, skip distance and virtual height in sky wave
propagation.
4.13 Explain space wave propagation.
4.14 Define the term line of sight .
4.15 Give the expression for LOS.
4.16 Explain the methods of diversity to reduce fading effects
4.17 Explain duct propagation.
4.18 Explain troposphere scatter propagation.
5.0 Understand the working Principle of antennas

5.1 Explain the principle of an antenna.
5.2 Define radiation pattern.
263
5.3 Define isotropic antenna and draw its radiation pattern.
5.4 Explain an elementary doublet.
5.5 Explain half wave dipole and give its radiation pattern.
5.6 Define the terms power gain, directivity, beam width, radiation resistance
and front to back ratio of an antenna.
5.7 Explain the terms antenna impedance and polarization.

5.8 State the need for folded dipole.
5.9 State the need of antenna array.
5.10 Explain the operation of broadside and end fire arrays.
5.11 Explain the working of Rhombic antenna.
5.12 Explain the working of Yagi-Uda antenna.
5.13 Explain turnstile antenna.
5.14 Mention the application of turnstile antenna.
5.15 State the need for binomial array.
5.16 Explain the principle of parabolic reflector.
5.17 Explain different feed arrangements.
5.18 Explain the working of Horn and Loop antennas
5.19 Explain the working of Helical antenna .
5.20 Explain the principle of working of mobile antenna.
5.21 Explain the principle of working of DTH antenna.
5.22 List the applications of dish antenna.
6.0 Engineering Applications.
6.1 Simple problems relating to noise, signal to noise ratio, noise figure and noise
temperature.
6.2 Simple problems on total power and carrier power in AM systems.
6.3 Simple problems on AM equation and bandwidth of AM systems.
6.4 Simple problems on FM equation and bandwidth of FM systems.
6.5 Problems on Image frequency, Image Rejection Ratio of receivers.
6.6 Problems on power density and electric field intensity of electromagnetic waves.
6.7 Problems on MUF, Critical frequency in ionospheric propagation of EM waves.
6.8 Problems on power gain , front to back ratio in antennas
6.9 Design of yagi-uda antenna for a given TV channel.
6.10 Design of a Loop antenna and list its applications.
6.11 Design a helical antenna and list its applications.
6.12 Design a parabolic antenna.
264
1.Suggested Student
Student visits Activities
Library to refer to wireless communication systems.
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Lab to identify transmitters and receivers.
3. Visit near by radio stations to familiarize with transmitters characteristics.
4. Prepare a document on different antennas and tabulate the specific details of each /
datasheets/ application.
5. Demonstrate Amplitude modulation and demodulation.
6. Demonstrate Frequency modulation and demodulation.
7. Demonstrate / presentation / simulation how Radio works.
8. Prepare/collect animation video of wave propagation and fundamentals of
Electromagnetic Waves and give presentation on it.
9. List different wave propagations and give presentation on it.
10. Quiz.
11. Group discussion.
12. Surprise test.
Execution Note:
1. Maximum of 3 students in each batch for student activity
2. Any 3 activities (either from the list given or any similar activities) shall be assigned among
Different batches; may be assigned by the teacher based on interest of the students.
3. Project activities shall be carried out throughout the semester and present the project report at
the end of the semester; concerned teacher is expected to observe and record the progress of
students’ activities.
4. Submit qualitative hand-written report not exceeding 5 pages; one report per batch
5. Each of the activity can be carried out off-class well in advance; however,
Demonstration / presentation should be done during laboratory sessions.
6. Assessment shall be based on quality of work as prescribed by the following rubrics table
265
3. www.nptel.ac.in
266
MID SEM -1 MODEL QUESTION PAPER 18EC-304C
PART- A
Total marks:20
Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 1x4=4M
1. Define frequency modulation.

2. Define signal to noise ratio, noise figure.
3. Define modulation index of FM signal.
4. What is meant by narrow band and wide band in Frequency modulation?
PART-B
Answer all questions. Each question carries three marks. 3x2=6M
5.(a) Distinguish between baseband, carrier, and modulated signals and give examples.
OR
5.(b) What are the causes of distortion in transmission?
6.(a) Explain about vestigial side band transmission.

OR
6.(b) Compare AM, FM and PM.
PART-C
Answer all questions. Each question carries five marks. 5x2=10M
7.(a) Explainthe terms time domain and frequency domain.

OR
7.(b) Explain about internal and external noise.
8.(a) Derive the relation between total power and carrier power in Amplitude modulation
system.
OR
8.(b) What is meant by pre-emphasis and de-emphasis in Frequency modulation system.
267
MID SEM -1I MODEL QUESTION PAPER 18EC-304C
PART- A
Total marks:20
1. What is meant by low level modulation?

2. State the need for AVC in a radio receiver.
3. Define polarization of EM waves.
4. Define critical frequency and MUF in sky wave propagation.
PART-B
5.(a) Draw the block diagram of SSB transmitter.

OR
5.(b) Explain the choice of IF in a radio receiver.
6.(a) Briefly explain the sky wave propagation .

OR
6.(b) Briefly explain the duct propagation .
PART-C
7.(a) Draw the low level modulated Transmitter and explain.

OR
7.(b) Draw the block diagram of superheterodyne AM receiver and explain .
8.(a) Explain different layers in atmosphere .
OR
8.(b) Explain space wave propagation (LOS) of EM waves .
268
SEMESTER END EXAM (SEE) - MODEL QUESTION PAPER 18EC-304C
PART- A
Total marks:40
Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 1x8 = 8M
1. Draw the basic communication system block diagram.

2. Define selectivity and fidelity of a radio receiver.
3. What is the need for a folded dipole?
4. Define critical frequency and MUF used in sky wave propogation.
5. Define radiation pattern.
6. What is the need for an antenna array?
7. Calculate bandwidth of a FM wave with frequency deviation of 75KHz and 15KHz
modulating frequency.
8. An AM transmitter has a carrier power of 2KW modulated to a depth of 40%.
Calculate the transmitter total radiated power.
PART-B
9.(a) Briefly explain the time domain of a signal .

OR
9.(b) Explain the term antenna impedance .
10.(a) Explain the process of demodulation in AM receivers.

OR
10.(b) The signal power at the input to a receiver is 6.2 µ and the noise power at the input to
that receiver is 1.8 µW. Find Signal to Noise Ratio in dB. .
11.(a) Explain the operation of an end fire array .

OR
11.(b) Briefly explain function of parabolic reflector .
12.(a) Discuss the applications of loop antenna .
OR
12.(b) Discuss the applications of helical antenna .
269
PART-C
13.(a) Explain the vestigial side band transmission and mention its application .
OR
13.(b) Explain the working of a Rhombic antenna.
14.(a) Explain how a FM signal is demodulated using discriminator .

OR
14.(b) Design a Yagi – Uda antenna for TV 4th channel..
15.(a) Explain the working of a horn antenna.

OR
15.(b) Explain the working of a turnstile antenna .
16.(a) A modulating signal m(t)=10cos(2 π ×103t) is amplitude modulated with
a carrier signal c(t)=50cos(2π×105 t). Find the modulation index, the carrier
power. ( Assume load resistance of antenna to be R L =1 Ω)
.OR
16.(b) Calculate image frequency rejection ratio (α )for a 1500 KHz carrier signal tuned in
an AM receiver with a quality factor of tuned circuit to be 150.
270
NETWORK ANALYSIS
Pre requisites :
Course Title : Network Analysis Course Code 18EC-305C

Semester Iii Course Group Core
Teaching Scheme 3:1:0 Credits 3
in Periods(L:T:P)
Hours: 60Pds
This course requires the basic knowledge of Basic Physics and Mathematics at Secondary
school level
Course Outcomes:
After completion of the course the student should be able to
CO1 : Solve simple problems related to Ohm’s law, KVL and KCL
CO2 : Apply Mesh current and Node voltage methods to simplify and find solution to
electrical circuits
CO3 : Solve simple problems on DC transients
CO4 : Design simple passive filters and attenuators for given specifications
CO5 : Find various two port parameters of simple Two port networks
CO6 : Apply various Network theorems to simplify and find solution to electrical circuits
Course Content:
Unit 1: Basics of electrical circuits and Kirchoff’s laws: Duration:8 Periods (L:5-T:3)
Active and passive elements- resistance, capacitance and inductance parameters- Energy
source and classify the energy sources- Ideal voltage source and Ideal current source-
Ideal voltage source to ideal current source and vice versa- Introduction to Alternating
voltages and currents-Phasor representation of alternating quantities –Phasor relationships
for circuit Elements-Impedance and Admittance of circuit elements-AC analysis of series
RL,RC circuits.
Unit 2: Mesh current and Node voltage analysis: Duration:12 Periods (L:7-T:5)
Concept of graph of a network - branch, nodes, junction and loop in circuits- Mesh
currents- Number of mesh equations required to solve the given Network- Mesh current
equations for a given network and arrange them in matrix form-Solve for mesh currents
using Crammer’s rule- Nodes in a network- Number of node voltage equations- Node
271
voltage equation for a given network and arrange them in matrix form- Node voltages
using Crammer’s rule
Unit 3: Transient analysis: Duration:12 Periods (L:7-T:5)
Initial conditions, steady state and transient- DC response for an RL circuit- Expression
for current for an RL circuit- DC response for an RC circuit- Expression for current for an
RC circuit- DC response for an RLC circuit-Solve simple problems on series RL,RC
circuits of DC excitation- RC differentiator circuit - Input/output waveforms for RC
differentiator circuit- RC integrator circuit- Input/output waveforms for RC integrator
circuit
Unit 4: Filters and Attenuators Duration:8 Periods (L:5-T:3)
Definition of neper, decibel, characteristic impedance, propagation constant,

Attenuation- Definition of filter- LPF, HPF, BPF, BSF- Characteristic curves for the
above- Expression for characteristic impedance for T and π network- Expression for fc
for constant k-LPF, HPF-Design of a simple LPF and HPF for a given cut off frequency
and given impedance- Design of a T-type attenuator for the given attenuation and
characteristic impedance.- Design of a π-type attenuator for the given attenuation and
characteristic impedance- Equalizer circuit-.- Applications of equalizer circuit.
Unit 5: Two port networks: Duration:8 Periods (L:5-T:3)
Definition of port.- Open circuit impedance (Z) parameters with equivalent circuit.- Short
circuit admittance(Y) parameters with equivalent circuit-Explain the hybrid (h)
parameters with equivalent circuit- Conditions for symmetry in terms of Z,Y, h,
parameters- conditions for reciprocity in terms of Z, Y, h, - Z- parameters for a given T-
network and Y parameters for a π-network- Inter Relationships of different parameters-
Examples for symmetric networks- Examples for Reciprocal networks
Unit 6: Network theorems and Resonance: Duration:12 Periods (L:7-

T:5)
Thevenin’s, and Norton’s theorems - Solve networks- Use of above theorems in

electronic circuits- Superposition theorem - Maximum power transfer theorems-Solve
simple problems using the above theorem- Importance of impedance matching for
maximum power transfer- Reciprocity theorem- Importance of Reciprocity theorem -
advantages and limitations of above theorems- Star and Delta configurations of
resistances- Formulas from Star to Delta & Delta to Star (no derivation)-Solve simple
problems on Star/Delta and Delta/Star transformation. Resonance in A.C. Circuits - Series
and parallel resonance. - curves, effect of resistance on Q factor selectivity and
bandwidth.
272
After completing the course student will be able to
1.0 Basics of electrical circuits and Kirchhoff’s laws
1.1 Define active and passive elements.

1.2 Define energy source and classify the energy sources.
1.3 Explain ideal voltage source and ideal current source
1.4 Convert ideal voltage source to ideal current source and vice versa.
1.5 Explain Phasor representation of sinusoids.
1.6 Derive the expression for I,Z, and power in an R-L series circuit.
1.7 Draw the vector and phasor diagrams for the above.
1.8 Derive the expression for I,Z, and power in an R-C series circuit.
1.10 Derive the expression for I,Z, and power in an R-L-C series circuit.
1.12 Explain the methods for solving parallel circuits.
2.0 Mesh current analysis and Node voltage analysis
2.1 Explain the concept of graph of a network

2.2 Define, branch, nodes, junction and loop in circuits.
2.3 Identify the mesh currents.
2.4 Determine the number of mesh equations required to solve the given Network
2.5 Write the mesh current equations for a given network and arrange them in matrix
form.
2.6 Solve for mesh currents using Crammer’s rule.
2.7 Identify the nodes in a network.
2.8 Determine the number of node voltage equations.
2.9 Write the node voltage equation for a given network and arrange them in matrix form.
2.10 Solve for node voltages using Crammer’s rule.
2.11 Explain duality of a network
2.12 Draw the dual of given network.
2.13 Explain the concept of graph of a network
3.0 Transient analysis.
3.1 Define the terms initial conditions, steady state and transient.
3.2 Explain the dc response for an RL circuit.
3.3 Derive expression for current for an RL circuit.
3.4 Explain the dc response for an RC circuit.
3.5 Derive expression for current for an RC circuit.
3.6 Explain the dc response for an RLC circuit.
3.7 Solve simple problems on series RL, RC circuits of DC excitation.
3.8 Explain RC differentiator circuit
3.9 Draw input/output waveforms for RC differentiator circuit
3.10 Explain RC integrator circuit
3.11 Draw input/output waveforms for RC integrator circuit
273
4.0 Filters and attenuators
4.1 Define neper, decibel, characteristic impedance, propagation constant, Attenuation

4.2 Define filter, LPF, HPF, BPF, BSF.
4.3 Draw the characteristic curves for the above
4.4 Derive the expression for characteristic impedance for T and π network.
4.5 Give the expression for fc for constant k-LPF, HPF.
4.6 Design a simple LPF and HPF for a given cut off frequency and given impedance.
4.7 Design a T-type attenuator for the given attenuation and characteristic impedance.
4.8 Design a π-type attenuator for the given attenuation and characteristic impedance.
4.9 Define the equalizer circuit
4.10 Draw the circuit of equalizer circuit.
4.11 List the applications of equalizer circuit.
5.0 Two port networks
5.1 Define port.

5.2 Explain the open circuit impedance (Z) parameters with equivalent circuit.
5.3 Explain the short circuit admittance(Y) parameters with equivalent circuit.
5.4 Explain the hybrid (h) parameters with equivalent circuit.
5.5 Give the conditions for symmetry in terms of Z, Y, h parameters.
5.6 Give conditions for reciprocity in terms of Z, Y, h parameters
5.7 Find the Z- parameters for a given T- network and Y parameters for a π-network
5.8 Express Z- parameters in terms of Y- parameters
5.9 Express Y- parameters in terms of Z- parameters
5.10 Give Examples for symmetric networks
5.11 Give Examples for Reciprocal networks
6.0 Network theorems and Resonance
6.1 State Thevenin’s and Norton’s theorem.

6.2 Apply the above theorems to solve networks.
6.3 Explain the use of above theorems in electronic circuits
6.4 State superposition theorem
6.5 Solve simple problems using the above theorem
6.6 State Maximum power transfer theorem.
6.7 Solve simple problems using the above theorem.
6.8 Explain the importance of impedance matching for maximum power transfer.
6.9 State Reciprocity theorem
6.10 Explain the importance of Reciprocity theorem by giving examples like Co axial
cable and flat twin lead cable used in Television systems.
6.11 List the advantages and limitations of above theorems.
6.12 Explain star and Delta configurations of resistances.
6.13 Give transformation formulas from Star to Delta & Delta to Star (no derivation).
6.14 Solve simple problems on Star/Delta and Delta/Star transformation.
6.15 Explain resonance in RLC series circuit
6.16 Derive the formula for series resonance
274
6.17 State the conditions for series resonance
6.18 Define bandwidth of a resonant circuit
6.19 Define lower cut off and upper cut off frequencies
6.20 Give formula for lower cut off and upper cut off frequencies
6.21 Solve simple problems on series Resonance.
6.22 Explain Resonance in parallel circuits
6.23 State the conditions required for parallel resonance
6.24 Derive Equation for resonant frequency.
6.25 Compare Series and parallel resonance
6.26 Solve problems on Resonance
6.27 Explain effect of Resistance on Bandwidth.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. Engineering circuit analysis by W.H.Hayt, J.E.Kemmerly and S.M.Durbin, Tata Mc
Graw Hill, New Delhi.
2. Fundamentals of Electric circuits by Charles K. Alexander and Matthew N.O.
Sadiku,
Mc Graw Hill publishers.
3. Network Analysis by M.E Van Valkenberg, Prantice Hall India, 3rd Edition
4. Electric Circuits -Joseph Edminister ,Schaum Series publishers.
1. www.allaboutcircuits.com
2. http://electrical4u.com
4. www.nptel.ac.in
2. participate in Group discussion
3. Search internet for more literature.
4. . Surprise test.
Suggested Model Rubrics
275
Needs
CATEGORY improvement Satisfactory Good Excellent
Organization of Hard to follow; Most of Information Information

presentation sequence of information presented in logical presented as
information jumpy presented in sequence; easy to interesting story in
sequence follow logical, easy to
follow sequence
Background content Material not clearly Material sufficient Material sufficient Material sufficient
related to topic OR for clear for clear for clear
background understanding but understanding understanding
dominated seminar not clearly AND effectively AND exceptionally
presented presented presented
Knowledge of subject Does not have At ease with At ease; answered Demonstrated full
grasp of information; all questions but knowledge;
information; answered most failed to elaborate answered all
answered only questions questions with
rudimentary elaboration
questions
Eye Contact Reads most slides; Refers to slides to Refers to slides to Refers to slides to
no or just make points; make points; eye make points;
occasional eye occasional eye contact majority of engaged with
contact contact time audience
Pace Rushed OR Rushed OR Most of the Well-paced

dragging dragging in parts seminar well paced throughout
throughout
Course Outcome Linked CL Teaching

PO Periods
CO1 Solve simple problems related to Ohm’s law, KVL and KCL R/U/A 1,2,10
8
CO2 Apply Mesh current and Node voltage methods to simplify R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7
12
and find solution to electrical circuits
CO3 Solve simple problems on DC transients R/U/A 1,2,9 12
CO4 Design simple passive filters and attenuators for given R/U/A 1,2,5,7
8
specifications
CO5 Find various two port parameters of simple Two port R/U/A 1,2,5
8
networks
CO6 Apply various Network theorems to simplify and find R/U/A 1,2,3,7
solution to electrical circuits Design simple passive filters 12
and attenuators for given specifications
276
MID SEM-I EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl
Unit No. U(3
Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6
11(a) 15(a)

3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8
12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
Model Paper for Mid-I,
277
III SEMESTER, 18 EC-305C
NETWORK ANALYSIS
Time :1 Hr Total Marks :20Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions, each carries one marks 4X1=4
1. Define Active and Passive elements.

2. Define Impedance.
3. Define branch and node.
4. Define admittance.
PART-B
Answer all questions, each carries three marks 2X3=6
5. a) Explain Importance of sinusoid as an AC forcing function

OR
b) Derive relationship between phasor voltage across and phasor current through an
inductor.
6. a) For the given circuit write the mesh equations in matrix form and find the value of I 1.
OR
278
b) find the mesh currents in the given circuit.
PART-C
Answer any all questions, each carries five marks 2X5=

10
7. a) Apply source transformation technique to find out current flowing through 47 kΩ
resistor
OR
b) Apply KVL to find the voltage between points A and B in the given circuit.
279
8. a) Find the voltages at node1 and node2 by using node analysis
OR
b) Determine the value of vx in the given circuit.
Model Paper for Mid-II,

NETWORK ANALYSIS
Time :1 Hr Total Marks:20Marks

PART-A
1. Define time constant of RL circuit and mention its units.
2. Draw RC integrator circuit.
3. Define characteristic impedance.
4. List the applications of equalizers.
PART-B
Answer any all questions, each carries three marks 2X3=6
280
5. a) Explain the transient analysis of RC circuit for DC excitation.
OR
b) Explain about RC differentiator circuit
6. a) Derive expression for characteristic impedance of symmetrical π network.
OR
b) Derive the design formulas for constant K low pass filter.
PART-C
Answer any all questions, each carries five marks 2 X 5 = 10

7. a) For the circuit shown find the complete expression for current when the switch is closed at
time t = 0.
OR
b) Find the voltage across the capacitor at time t = 200 μs.
8. a) Design a high pass filter having a cutoff frequency of 1 kHZ with a load resistance of 600Ω.
OR
b) Derive the expression for the cutoff frequency f c for constant K high pass filter.
281
Model Paper for SEE
NETWORK ANALYSIS
Time :2Hrs Total Marks : 40Marks
PART-A
Answer all questions, each carries one marks 8 X 1 =8
1. Mention the limitations of Ohm’s Law.

2. Define time constant of RC circuit and mention its units.
3. List the applications of equalizers.
4. State the conditions for symmetry and reciprocity for Z parameters.
5. Define two-port network.
282
6. Mention the limitations of superposition theorem.
7. State the condition for resonance in series RLC circuit.
8. State Maximum power transfer theorem for DC load.
PART-B
Answer any all questions, each question carries three marks 4 x 3 = 12
9. a) Applying repeated source transformation convert the given circuit into a single voltage
source and a resistance.
OR
b) Explain about Y parameters and draw its equivalent circuit model.
10. a) Explain the transient analysis of RL circuit for DC excitation.
OR
b) Explain about resonance in parallel RLC circuit
11. a) Derive the expressions for Z parameters in terms of Y parameters.

OR
b) Explain about open circuit impedance (Z) Parameters with equivalent circuit.
12. a) Find the Norton’s equivalent between points A and B.
OR
b) Explain the effect of resistance on bandwidth of a series RLC circuit
PART-C
Answer any all questions, each question carries five marks 4 x 5 = 20
283
13. a) Apply super node analysis to find the values of v1, v2 and v3 in the given circuit.
OR
b) Find the h parameters of the given circuit.
14. a) Derive the expression for the cutoff frequency f c for constant K low pass filter.
OR
b) Apply superposition theorem to find the value of ix.
15. a) Find the Z parameters for the given network.
OR
b) Derive the expressions for Y parameters in terms of Z parameters
284
16. a) Find the value of load impedance required to be connected across the terminals A-B for
maximum power transfer, in the network shown below. Also find the maximum power
delivered to load
OR
b) Verify reciprocity theorem for the given network
285
18EC-306P
ELECTRONIC DEVICES LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : Electronic Devices Lab Practice Course Code 18EC-306P

Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practicals Total Contact
Periods : 45
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic skills of Handling Basic Electronics tools and Components,
knowledge of connecting cables and meters
Course Contents
I. Amplifiers and Oscillators
1. Implement voltage divider bias single stage RC coupled CE amplifier and plot frequency response.
a) Observe the effect of connecting and disconnecting the emitter bypass capacitor on gain and
distortion.
b) Observe the effect of emitter bypass capacitor Ce on voltage across Emitter Resistance using
CRO.
c) Measure the output power using ac power meter
2.Implement Colpitt’s oscillator and verify the effect of Varying the tank circuit component values
and observe output waveforms on CRO.
3.Implement Hartley oscillator and verify the effect of Varying the tank circuit component values
4. Implement transistor Astable multivibrator circuit and observe the waveforms on CRO.
II. Special Semiconductor Devices
5. Plot the characteristics of a) Photodiode b) photo transistor
6.a) Implement a Twilight switch using a Phototransistor and a Relay
b) Replace Phototransistor with LDR and Test
7. a)Plot the VI characteristics of different color LEDs & determine the Vf (forward voltage drop)
b) Test the above devices with DMM & Analogue multimeter and identify the Terminals
286
8.a) Plot the characteristics of i) LDR ii) Thermistor iii) VDR
b) Test the above devices with DMM & Analogue multimeter
9. a)Implement a simple Temperature controller using Thermistor and a Relay
b)Use a VDR /Trigistor for protection against high voltage surges and verify
10. a)Plot the characteristics of optocoupler MCT2E
b) Test the given optocoupler and identify its terminals
11. a)Use MCT 2E to switch on a 6V lamp connected to RPS by applying a Low voltage 1.5 V signal
from a cell at input
b) Implement a simple timer using 1 M Ω Resistor , 1000 mfd capacitor ,Transistor BC148 and a
Relay
III. Wave shaping Circuits
Realize Clipper and Clamper circuits and observe the waveforms on CRO
12. a)Realize Series and Parallel diode clippers
b) Assemble and test Positive and negative clipper circuits with and without bias
13. a) Implement Amplitude limiter ( two diodes connected back to back) and observe the
waveform on CRO.
b) Implement a Zener diode Clipper and measure the output voltage with DMM and also observe
waveform on CRO
14. Implement Boot-strap sweep circuit and observe the sweep wave form.
15. Implement Miller sweep circuit and observe the waveform.

(i) Collection of catalogues and specification sheets, preparation of a chart displaying symbols of
passive components and connectors/cables.
(ii) Collection of the contributors (scientists) and contribution details to the field of Electrical and
Electronics engineering
(iv)Record the best practices used in the disposal of E-waste and precautions in
the operation of electrical appliances.
287
Course Outcome Linked PO
CO1 Apply the basics of transistor to construct amplifiers, 1,2,3,8,9,10 12
oscillators and multi-vibrators and analyze the effect
of circuit components
CO2 Identify different special semiconductor devices and 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10 18
apply the knowledge of special semiconductor devices
in special applications
CO3 Apply the knowledge of semiconductor components in 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 15
realizing and analyzing wave shaping circuits
45
3. www.nptel.ac.in
4.studentboxoffice.in
288
State Board of Technical Education and Training,Telangana
III Semester Mid Examination-I Model Question paper
DECE III semester practical Examination
Corse Code:18EC-306P Duration:2

hours
Course Name: Electronic Devices Lab Practice

Max.Marks:20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----
Instructions to the Candidate:
(i)Answer any One of the following Questions.
(ii)Record the results on a graph sheet if required , and conclude your observation of the
experiment
(iii) Draw the circuit diagram for illustration ,choose appropriate values when not mentioned in the
question
Record the effect of emitter bypass capacitor on gain of the amplifier.
2. Implement Colpitt’s oscillator and verify the effect of Varying the tank circuit component values
3. Implement Hartley oscillator and observe the effect of Varying the tank circuit component values
and observe output waveforms on CRO. Record your observations.
4. Implement transistor Astable multivibrator circuit and observe the waveforms on CRO and record
your observations.
5.Implement the Photo diode circuit to show that the resistance of the photo diode varies with light
and also measure the current through the Photodiode. Record your observations.
289
III Semester Mid Examination-II Model Question paper

hours
Course Name: Electronic Devices Lab Practice

Max.Marks:20
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----
experiment
question
1. .Implement the Photo transistor circuit to show that the resistance of the photo transistor varies
with light and also measure the current through the Photo transistor. Record your observations.
b) Replace Phototransistor with LDR and record the observations.
3. a)Plot the VI characteristics of white, red and green color LEDs & determine the Vf (forward
voltage drop)
4.a) Plot the V-I characteristics and response characteristics of i) LDR
b)Use a VDR for protection against high voltage surges and verify
290
Semester End Examination Model Question paper

hours
Course Name: Electronci Devices Lab Practice

Max.Marks:40
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----
experiment
question
Record the effect of emitter bypass capacitor on gain of the amplifier.
4. Implement Colpitt’s oscillator and verify the effect of Varying the tank circuit component values
5. Implement Hartley oscillator and observe the effect of Varying the tank circuit component values
and observe output waveforms on CRO. Record your observations.
4. Implement transistor Astable multivibrator circuit and observe the waveforms on CRO and record
your observations.
5.Implement the Photo diode circuit to show that the resistance of the photo diode varies with light
and also measure the current through the Photodiode. Record your observations.
6. .Implement the Photo transistor circuit to show that the resistance of the photo transistor varies
with light and also measure the current through the Photo transistor. Record your observations.
b) Replace Phototransistor with LDR and record the observations.
8. a)Plot the VI characteristics of white, red and green color LEDs & determine the Vf (forward
voltage drop)
9.a) Plot the V-I characteristics and response characteristics of i) LDR
291
b)Use a VDR for protection against high voltage surges and verify
11. a)Plot the characteristics of optocoupler MCT2E
b) Test the given optocoupler and identify its terminals
12. a) Use MCT 2E to switch on a 6V lamp connected to RPS by applying a Low voltage 1.5 V
signal from a cell at input b) Implement a simple timer using 1 M Ω Resistor , 1000 mfd
capacitor ,Transistor BC148 and a Relay
13. Construct and test Positive and negative clipper circuits with and without bias
14. Implement Amplitude limiter ( two diodes connected back to back) and observe the waveform
on CRO.
b) Implement a Zener diode Clipper and measure the output voltage with DMM and also observe
waveform on CRO
15. Implement Boot-strap sweep circuit and observe the sweep wave form.
292
NETWORK ANALYSIS AND ANALOG COMMUNICATION LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : ANALOG COMMUNICATION Course Code 18EC-307P

LAB PRACTICE

Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Hours
: 45Pds
Pre requisites
Knowledge of networks theorems and analog communication basic concepts.

Course outcomes

CO1 Understand and prove 1,2,3,4,5,,7,8,9
the network theorems on a given network
CO2 Hands on experience using measuring equipment and CRO 1,2,3,4,8,9
CO3 Observe and study waveforms of AM and FM radio systems 1,2,3,4,8,9,10
CO4 Observe and study waveforms of pulse shaping and filter 1,2,3,10
networks and demonstrate principles of Resonance.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
I. Verification of Network theorems
1. A) Verify Thevenin's theorem.
B) Determine the Thevenin's Resistance of a Potential divider network.
C) Verify Norton's theorem
2. A) Verify Super position theorem.
B) Verify Maximum power transfer theorem.
C) Connect Four 4 ohms speakers to obtain 4 Ohms Impedance and test for maximum power
output by Audio amplifier at 4 ohms output terminals.
II. Electronic measuring equipment
3. Measure the component values using special equipment
A) Use DMM/ Multimeter to measure DC current , AC Current,Beta of transistor
B) Use the AC bridge/Digital LCR meter to measure Resistance , Inductance , capacitance

and Q
293
III. Measurements using CRO
4. Familiarize with CRO front panel controls and observe the effect of different settings
A) Set intensity , Astigmatism and Focus controls to display i)Medium frequency ii) Low
frequency iii) High frequency.
B) Apply different waveforms using function generator and produce flicker free waveforms.
C) Set the output of function generator to desired amplitude and frequency (say 20 milli volts
and 1.5 khz) by observing on CRO.
5. Determine Vertical and Horizontal deflection sensitivity of CRO by applying standard

signal provided on CRO
A) Observe the effect of Trigger control on the waveform and display the waveform from the
set point.
B) Measure signal amplitude using x10 CRO probe.
6. Use dual mode for simultaneous observation of two signals.
A) Use ADD mode observe the resultant wave form
B) Measure the Time period and frequency of a signal in Time base multiplier mode.
7. A) work with various controls on Digital CRO
B) Practice with i) Manual measurements ii) Cursor measurements iii) Automatic

measurements By repeating sub experiments in experiment number 4& 5 .
C) Observe charging and discharging curves of a capacitor using digital CRO and determine
time constant of given RC circuit.
IV. Modulation & Demodulation Techniques
8. A) implement and observe AM signal and determine Modulation index using CRO
i) Using Envelop method
ii) Trapezoidal Pattern method
iii) observe the effect of Over modulation and under modulation
B) Implement diode demodulator circuit and observe the detected waveform
9. Identify different sections in AM/FM radio receiver.
B) Observe the different types of inductors used in the radio tuned circuits.(Local oscillator
coils, IFT coils, Ferrite cored)
10. Generate FM signal and determine Modulation index
A) Demodulate F.M signal and compare the output signal with original modulating signal. .
294
V. Pulse and wave shaping circuits
11. A) Measure the Rise time, Fall time , duty cycle, Pulse width, Pulse amplitude , overshoot of
Pulse on CRO
B) Observe the effect of Offset control on function generator on output waveform
12. A) Design and implement RC integrator circuit
B) apply a square wave and observe the output waveform on CRO.
C) use a differentiator circuit to convert a long Push button trigger signal into a pulse for use
in Timer circuits
D) Use integrator circuit for producing triangular wave / Ramp
E) Design a Low pass filter Using Integrator circuit for a given cut off frequency
F) Design a High pass filter Using Differentiator circuit for a given cut off frequency.
13. Realize Clipper and Clamper circuits and observe the waveforms on CRO
A) Realize Series and Parallel clippers
B) Assemble Positive and negative clipper circuits with and without bias
C) Connect a Zener diode in place of diode and measure the output voltage with DMM and
also observe waveform on CRO
D) Realize a Clamper circuit and observe the input and output waveforms on CRO.
V. Resonance & Filters
14. Plot resonant curves of a tuned circuit
A) Series Resonance. b) Parallel Resonance. C) Wind a small coil and determine its
inductance.
15. Design and construct constant K filters of 1st order
A) Design and implement a Low pass filter with a cut off frequency of 10 khz(or any other
frequency) and evaluate the performance.
B) Design and implement a High pass filter with a cut off frequency of 10 khz (or any other
frequency) and evaluate the performance.
E-Learning:
3. www.nptel.ac.in
295
QUESTION BANK
1. Verify Thevenin’s theorem for a given network.

2. Verify Nortorn,s theorem for a given network.
3. Verify Maximun power transfer theorem for a given network.
4. Verify superposition theorem for a given network.
5. Using a DMM measure DC voltages, AC voltages of a given active network and values of
given resistances verify them with their color codes.
6. Using a digital LCR meter measure the values of given resistances, capacitances and
inductors and the quality factor of a coil.
7. Using a CRO find out the amplitude and frequency values of a given waveform derived from
a AF /RF generating instrument.
8. Calculate time period and frequency of a given pulse wave form derived from pulse
generator.
9. Observe the charge and discharge curves of using a digital CRO, determine the time
constant of a given RC circuit.
10. Observe an AM signal through a CRO and find out the modulation index using envelope
method.
11. Obtain a AM detected signal through a CRO using an AM detector and find out its frequency
and amplitude.
12. Identify the various sections of AM receiver and observe different types of inductors used in
tuned circuits like RF , IF and AF amplifiers.
13. Identify the various sections of FM receiver and observe different types of inductors used in
tuned circuits like RF , IF and AF amplifiers.
14. Observe a FM signal through CRO and find out its modulation index.
15. Demodulate F.M signal and compare the output signal with original modulating signal using
a CRO.
16. Measure the Rise time, Fall time, duty cycle, Pulse width, Pulse amplitude , overshoot of a
given Pulse on CRO.
17. Observe and sketch the waveform of a given RC differentiator network being driven by a
pulse (pulse width t d) under the following conditions. 1) RC>> t d 2) RC<< t d 3)
RC=td
18. Observe and sketch the waveform of a given RC integrator network being driven by a pulse
(pulse width t d) under the following conditions of time constants. 1) RC>> t d 2)
RC<< t d 3) RC=td .
19. Demonstrate the use of integrator circuit for producing triangular wave / Ramp through a
square wave using a CRO.
20. Design a Low pass filter using a given Integrator circuit (RC) for a given cut off frequency say
1KHz.
21. Design a Low pass filter using a given Integrator circuit (RC) for a given cut off frequency say
2KHz.
22. Realize a series clipper and observe the waveform on a CRO.
23. Realize a parallel clipper and observe the waveform on a CRO.
24. Realize a positive clipper without bias and observe the waveform on a CRO.
25. Realize a positive clipper with bias and observe the waveform on a CRO.
296
26. Realize a negative clipper without bias and observe the waveform on a CRO.
27. Realize a negative clipper with bias and observe the waveform on a CRO.
28. Realize a zener diode clipper and observe the wave form on a CRO.
29. Realize a Clamper circuit and observe the input and output waveforms on CRO.
30. Plot the resonance curve of a given series tuned circuit.
31. Plot the resonance curve of a given parallel tuned circuit.
297
Digital Electronics Lab Practice
Course Title : Digital electronics lab practice Course Code 18EC-308P

Teaching Scheme in 1:0:2 Credits : 1.5
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact /Periods :45
:
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic skills of Handling bread boards and PCB.
Course outcomes:

Hours
CO1 Identify Basic Gates and Logic Families R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
9
CO2 Realization of Boolean Functions using Gates R/U/A 1,2,3,4
15
CO3 Verification of truth tables of Multiplexers and R/U/A 1,2,3
9
DeMultiplexers/encoder, BCD decoder.
CO4 Flip Flops & Timing Circuits Counters & Shift Registers A 1,2,3,10
12
45
Course Contents:
I. Basic Gates and Logic Families
1. Identify Digital ICs and noting down pin details from data sheets
a. Identify the given digital ICs and draw the pin diagrams. (Use TTL and CMOS ICs of
AND, OR,NOT, NAND, NOR and XOR gates with two and three inputs).
b. Realize basic gate functions using toggle switches and a bulb.
2. Verify the truth tables of basic gates using universal gates.
a. Verify the truth table of 7403 IC (open collector quad 2input NAND gate).
b. Verify the Truth table of 4073 IC.
3. a) Implement OR gate using NAND gates only and verify the Truth Table
b) Implement NOT gate using using NOR gates only and verify the Truth Table
298
4. a) Verify the truth table of AND gate using NOR gates only.
b) From the data sheets find out CMOS equivalent of above ICs.
II. Realizing Boolean Functions.
5. a). Verify the truth table of XOR using TTL NAND gates only.
b) Verify the truth table of XOR using CMOS NOR gates only.
c) From the data sheets find out CMOS Equivalent of XOR ICs.
6. a) Implement a given Boolean function using basic gates and verify the truth table.
b) Implement a given Boolean function using NAND gates only and verify the truth table.
7. a) Verify the truth table of half adder using basic gates only.
b) Verify the truth table of half adder using NAND gates only.
8. a) Verify the truth table of full adder using 2 half adders.
b) Implement a full adder using NOR gates only.
III. Realization of Boolean Functions using Multiplexers and Demultiplexers
9. a) Verify the truth table of IC 74153MUX.

b)Verify the truth table of IC 74154 DE-MUX.
10. a) Verify the function of 74148 Encoder and write the truth table
b)Verify the function of 74138 Decoder and write the truth table
11. a) Verify the to decimal decoder and write function of BCD its truth table.
b) Verify the function of decimal BCD to encoder and write its truth table.
IV. Flip Flops &Sequential Circuits
12. a) Construct clocked RS FF using NAND gates and Verify its truth table.
b) Verify the truth table of CD 4013 Dual D flip Flop
13. a) Verify the functionality and truth table of 74L71 RS flip flop with Preset and Clear
b)Verify the Truth table of JK FF using 7476 IC.
14. a) Construct and verify the function of decade counter using 7490 ICs.
b) Verify the function of up/down counter using 74190, 74193
15. a) Verify the function of CD 4029 up/down counter.
b) Verify the function of shift register (ICs like 7495or 74194 etc.)
c) Verify the function of Johnson counter using CD 4017 IC
299
18EC-309P - CIRCUIT DESIGN AND SIMULATION LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : Circuit Design and Simulation Lab Course Code 18EC-309P
Practice
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practicals Total Contact Period : 45 Pds
Pre requisites :
This course requires the knowledge of basic understanding of Electronic Devices and Circuits, Digital
Electronics and Analog Communications
Course outcomes
Hours
CO1 Practice with Simulation software like 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 15
ORCAD/MULTISIM/PSPICE Environment
CO2 Design and verify the results of various electronic 1,2,3,4,10 15

circuits using Simulation software and verify the result
CO3 Demonstrate Skills using ORCAD / 1,2,3,4,10 10
MULTISIM/PSpice to simulate Network Theorems

CO4 Demonstrate Skills using ORCAD / 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5
MULTISIM/PSpice to simulate Modulation

Techniques
Course Contents:
Unit-1: Practice with Simulation software like ORCAD/MULTISIM/PSpice Environment
1. Familiarize ORCAD suite/MULTISIM/PSpice/ environment
2. Use various tool bars such as standard toolbar, main toolbar, simulation toolbar, view tool bar
components toolbar, virtual toolbar, graphical annotation toolbar and instruments toolbar
3. Familiarize its features
4. Select and Place various Electronic Components and wire them
5. Draw the circuit and simulate and Debug the errors
6. Capture and simulate a potential divider circuit
300
Unit-2: Design and verify the results of various electronic circuits using Simulation software
7. Verify Ohm’s law and simulate it using ORCAD suite/MULTISIM/PSpice/similar software
8. Design and implement a) Low pass filter with a cut off frequency of 10 kHz and b) High pass
filter with a cut off frequency of 10 kHz and evaluate the performance
9. Simulate Full wave Rectifier with filter
10. Simulate Clipper and Clamper circuits
11. Design and simulate BCD to excess-3 code and vice versa using logic gates
12. Design and simulate Binary to gray and vice-versa vice versa using logic gates
13. Design and simulate 4 bit odd/even parity generator

14. Design and simulate 4 bit ripple counter with Mod-10 and Mod- 12
Unit-3: Demonstrate Skills using ORCAD / MULTISIM/PSpice to simulate Network Theorems

and Modulation Techniques
15. Simulate the given AM modulation circuit
Reference Book:
1. ORCAD software User manual.
2. MULTISIM user manual
3. Electric circuits by Schaum’s series
4. PSpice user manual
3. www.nptel.ac.in
3. http://www.electronics-lab.com/downloads/circutedesignsimulation
4. https://www.orcad.com
301
Communication Skills and Life Skills
Course Title Communication Skills and Life Skills Course Code 18 EC- 310 P
Semester III Course Group Foundation
Teaching 15:0:30 Credits 1.5

Scheme in
Periods- L: T:P
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact 45 Periods
Hours (3 Periods per
Week)
Rationale:
This course is designed to impart communication skills and life skills to the students of diploma
which will help them a great deal in personal and professional fronts.
Prerequisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of vocabulary, grammar, and four language learning skills,
viz. Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course the students will have the ability
to:
Identify the main or the central idea.
Listening Skills Listen for specific details.
Learn the pronunciation.
Learn relevant vocabulary to make introductions.
Communication Skills – I Learn to introduce oneself in formal and informal
situations.
Learn vocabulary and expressions useful for describing
objects
Describe objects
Learn vocabulary to talk about the past

Describe the incidents that happened in the past
Learn the techniques of organising the matter / content for
Communication Skills – II one-minute speech.
Speak fluently and accurately using appropriate body
language.
302
Think positively.
Develop positive attitude.
Life Skills – I Overcome negative attitude.
Know the importance of setting goals.
Set goals using SMART features.
Know the reasons for a problem.

Learn to overcome problems.
Learn the various techniques to solve the problems.
Life Skills – II Learn to make proper decisions on time.
Think ‘out of the box’.
Learn to be creative.
Think innovatively.
Think critically.
Know how to be a leader.
Learn the qualities of a good leader.
Life Skills – III Learn the qualities of a good team.
Learn the advantages and disadvantages of a team.
Manage time effectively.
Learn various time management techniques.
Learn the importance of prioritisation.
CO-PO Matrix

CO 1 Listening for main idea and specific R/U/A 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,7,8,
details 9,10
CO 2 Introduce oneself and Describe R/U/A 1,2,3,8,9,10
Objects
CO 3 Talk about the past and speak fluently R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8.9,10
for one minute
CO 4 Develop positive attitude and set short R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
term and long term goals
CO 5 Learn to solve a problem, make R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
decisions and think innovatively
CO6 Learn to become a good team member R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
and leader
303
Course Contents:
I. Listening Skills Duration: 9
1. Listening – I
 Digital Camera
 A Dialogue
 Wild Animal / Human conflict
2. Listening – II
 A Recipe
 A Telephone conversation
 An Interview
II. Communication Skills – I Duration:6
3. Introducing Oneself
4. Describing Objects
III. Communication Skills – II Duration:6
5. Talking About the Past
6. Just A Minute
IV. Life Skills – I Duration:6
7. Attitude
8. Goal Setting
V. Life Skills – II Duration:9
9. Problem Solving and Decision-Making Skills
10. Critical Thinking & Creativity
VI. Life Skills – III Duration:9
11. Leadership and Teamwork
12. Time Management
 Listening Comprehension
 Seminars
 Paper Presentations
 Line ups for introducing oneself
 Describing persons / places / things
 Picture description
 Role Plays
 Dumb charades
 What is in the bag? (Identify the objects)
 Games using Online Dictionaries
 Sharing the information using emails, chats and groups
 Just A Minute
 Writing diary events
 Find a solution to the problem
 Making innovative things through recycling
 Creating advertisements
 Five-minute activities on Life Skills
 Watching videos on life skills and making presentations
 Case studies
304
Evaluation Pattern:
I. Continuous Internal Examination: 60 Marks
a. Mid Sem- I 20 marks

Syllabus:
i. Listening Skills
ii. Communication Skills - I
b. Mid Sem – II 20 Marks

Syllabus:
i. Communication Skills - II
ii. Life Skills - I
c. Internal assessment: 20 marks
i. Seminars: 10 marks
ii. Assignments: 5 marks
iii. Lab record submission: 5 marks
II. Semester End Examination : 40 Marks

a. Listening: 10 Marks
b. JAM or Role plays: 15 Marks
c. Viva Voce on any life skills topic : 15 Marks
References:
Flint, Chrisand Jamie FlockhartListening: A2 (Collins English for Life: Skills)Collins. 2013
Brown, Stephen E. English in Everyday Life. McGraw-Hill Education.2008
Mohanraj, Jayashree. Let Us Hear Them Speak: Developing Speaking-Listening Skills in

English.Sage. 2015
Susan Earle – Carlin. Q Skills for Success: Listening and Speaking 5: Student Book with
Online Practice. Oxford University Press. 2013
Kumar, Sanjay and Pushpa Latha. Communication Skills: A Work Book.Oxford University
Press. 2018
Carnegie, Dale.The Leader in You. Simon & Schuster: 1995
Carnegie, Dale.The Art of Public Speaking. Prabhat Prakashan. NewDelhi.2013
Kaye, Martin. Goal Setting (Workbook Included): Goals & Motivation: Introduction To A
Complete & Proven Step-By-Step Blueprint For Reaching Your Goals (Goal Setting Master
Plan 1). Kindle Edition. MK Coaching.2016.
West, Steven. Critical Thinking Skills: Practical Strategies for Better Decision making,
Problem-Solving and Goal Setting. Kindle Edition.2018
Tracy, Brain. Goals. Berret-Koehler PublishersInc. San Francisco. 2017
305
Tracy, Brain. Master your Time Master your Life. Penguin Random House Inc. New York.
2017
Sean Covey . The 7 Habits of Highly Effective Teens. Simon and Schuster,2011
E-Learning Resources:
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/youmeus/learnit/learnitv39.shtml
https://www.examenglish.com/leveltest/listening_level_test.htm
https://www.oxfordonlineenglish.com/listening?utm_referrer=https%3A%2F
%2Fwww.google.co.in%2F
https://takeielts.britishcouncil.org/prepare-test/free-ielts-practice-tests/listening-practice-test-
1
https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/en/listening
https://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning-english/activities-for-learners/?skill=listening
https://www.businessenglishsite.com/business-english-listening.html
306
THIRD SEMESTER 18 COMMON-310P
COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS
MID SEM - I
Part – A 10 marks
1. Listening Comprehension: 5 X 2 = 10
(Teacher should give the questions before reading the passage given below)
Florence Nightingale was an English social reformer and a statistician, and the
founder of modern nursing. She was born in Florence, Italy, on May 12, 1820. Part of a
wealthy family, Nightingale defied the expectations of the time and pursued what she saw as
her God-given calling of nursing during the Crimean War. She and a team of nurses
improved the unsanitary conditions at a British base hospital, greatly reducing the death
count. Her writings sparked worldwide health care reform, and in 1860 she established St.
Thomas' Hospital and the Nightingale Training School for Nurses. A revered hero of her
time, she died on August 13, 1910, in London. Nightingale came to prominence while serving
as a manager and trainer of nurses during the Crimean War, in which she organized care for
wounded soldiers. She gave nursing a favourable reputation and became an icon of Victorian
culture, especially in the persona of "The Lady with the Lamp" making rounds of wounded
soldiers at night.
Questions:
1. Who was Florence Nightingale?
2. When and where was she born?
3. What does the passage convey?
4. When did she pass away?
5. Where did she establish nursing school?
PART- B 10 Marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the questions in 150 words.
2. How do you introduce yourself formally in an interview?

3. Describe your polytechnic.
307
MID SEM - II
Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions in 150 words.
1. Describe how you have spent your summer vacation.
2. What are the features of good JAM presentation? What precautions do you take before
speaking for one minute on the given topic?
Part – B 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions in 150 words.
3. What is positive attitude? Give examples of positive attitude from your life.
4. Mention your long term goal with SMART features. How do you achieve it?

SEMESTER END EXAM
Part – A 10 marks
1. Listen to the following passage and answer the questions give below it. 5 X 2 = 10
(Teacher should give the questions before reading the passage)
Answer the following questions after teacher reads the following paragraph.
Prof. Jayashankar was born to Mahalaxmi and Laxmi Kantha Rao on 6th August 1934
in Akkampet village, Warangal District. He was a Doctorate in Economics. He worked as
a Vice-Chancellor of Kakatiya University. He worked in many capacities. He was
popularly known as “Pedda Sir.” He inspired many a people to fight for the cause of
Telangana Statehood.
At the age of twelve, Jayashankar refused to sing songs in praise of the Nizam and
insisted on singing Vande Mataram instead. As an intermediate student, in 1952, he
protested against State Reorganization Committee plan to merge with the Andhra Rashtra.
He took an active part in the agitations of “Non – Mulki go back“ and “ Idli Sambar go
back.” He took an active part in Telangana separate statehood agitation in 1969 too. In
1999, Prof. Jayashankar started the Telangana Development Forum in the USA which
helped to propagate the injustice, discrimination and exploitation meted out to Telangana
308
region and people in the aspects of employment, funds and water resources. He
relentlessly put his efforts to end the struggle of Telangana people. He passed away on
June 21, 2011. He was 76 years old at the time of his death.
Questions:
1. Where was Prof. Jayashankar born?

2. Why didn’t he sing songs in praise of the Nizam?
3. Why did Jayashankar start the Telangana Development Forum in USA?
4. What are the two agitations in which he took an active part?
5. What is the meaning of ‘relentlessly’?
Part – B 15 marks
2. JAM / Role Plays
Part – C 15 marks
3. Viva Voce on Life Skills topics
309
SKILL UPGRADATION-III
Course Title : Skill Upgradation -III Course Code : :Common

Group : 2.5
Methodology
Contact
Rationale: This course is introduced for all semesters with a purpose of providing outside classroom
experiences that lead to overall development of the students. One whole day is allocated for activities.
Course Objective:

Activity
Periods Frequency
No Activity
Haritha Haram(plantation &Maintenance) 3 times in a

1 9
semester
Waste management 3 times in a

2 12
semester
Swach Bharath 4 times in a

3 28
semester
Mini projects 1 time in a

4 7
semester
Video Clips 3 times in a

5 9
semester
Seminar/Quiz/Presentation/Group discussion 6 times in a

6 18
semester
310
Expert Lectures
 Safety and Responsibilities of an Engineer
8 16 4 Times
 Occupational crime/Cyber crimes
 Responsibility of engineers
 Emerging technologies
Total Periods 105
Note: in case Expert faculties are not available English faculty may handle the expert lectures or
Video clips on the suggested lectures may be played and the suggested activities are flexible.
Course Outcomes
CO Outcome CO/PO
Mapping
profession.
COURSE CONTENT:
SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES OF ENGINEERS
Safety and risk-definition- - assessment of safety and risk - risk benefit analysis and reducing risk-–
Personal risk-Public risk-Reducing risk-Voluntary Risk-Collegiality and loyalty–Authority- Types-
collective bargaining -occupational crime –Responsibility of engineers–Types-Social responsibility-
Professional responsibility-confidentiality-conflicts of interest-liability
Evaluation:
The student must maintain a record of all activities conducted on skill upgradtion/ Activities day and
prepare a soft copy of report and submit it to their mentor or upload to the institute website or mail.
The reports shall be evaluated by the mentors though rubrics and accordingly give the eligibility for
2.5 credits . The student must have participated in at least 75% of activities to get eligibility.
311
CO4
CO3
CO2
CO1 ✓
Basic knowledge
PO1
Discipline
PO2
Knowledge
Experiments and
PO3 practice
Engineering
PO4
Tools
✓
✓
✓
Engineer and
PO5
society
✓
312
Environment &
PO6
sustainability
✓
✓
Ethics
PO7
Individual and
PO8
Team work
✓
Communication
PO9
✓
✓
✓
✓
Lifelong
PO10
learning
Mapped PO
5,10
5,10
5,7,10
6,7,9,10
Electronics & Communication Engineering
IV SEMESTER
313
C-18 DECE SEMESTER IV TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME
Total
Instruction
Periods Cred Continuous Internal Semester End Examination
Periods per
per its Evaluation (CIE) (SEE)
week
semester
S.
N
Min
O Code Course Name marks
Ma
Mid Internal Min Total for
Mid x
L T P Sem Evaluati mark Mark passing
Sem 2 mar
1 on s s includi
ks
ng
internal
1 18 EC- Advanced
3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
401F Engineering
Mathematics
2 18EC - Microcontroller
3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
402C Programming
3 18EC- Linear
3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
403C Integrated
circuits
4 18EC - Digital 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
404 C Communication
18EC - Microwave
5 405C Communication 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
and Television
6 18EC- Linear
1 0 2 45 1.5 60 40 20 100 50
406P Integrated
circuits Lab
7 18EC - Digital
1 0 2 45 1.5 60 40 20 100 50
407P Communication
Lab
8 18EC- Microcontroller
408P s Programming 1 0 2 45 1.5 60 40 20 100 50
Lab
9 18EC- MATLAB
1 0 2 45 1.5 60 40 20 100 50
409P practice
10 18EC- Advanced
410P Communication 1 0 2 45 1.5 60 40 20 100 50
and Life skills
lab
11 Skill 0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics - -- -
Upgradation
TOTAL 2 5 17 630 25 100 100 400 400 170 1000 425
1. Cumulative 35% (Mid sem 1 + Mid sem 2+ Tutorials+ End examination) and minimum marks in end examination is 35% (i.e.14marks).
2. If the cumulative of CIE is less than 35% (i.e.21 marks out of 60) therefore more than 35% of SEE is required to get overall 35%.
314
ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Course Title : Advanced Engineering Mathematics

Course Code : 18EC-401F
SEMESTER : IV Course Group : Foundation

Teaching Scheme ( L : T : P ) : 45 :15: 00 ( in Credits : 3 Credits
periods) )
Pre requisites:
This course requires the knowledge of Engineering Mathematics at Diploma first year level and
Applied Engineering Mathematics at Diploma 3rd Semester level.
Course Outcomes:
CO 1 Solve simple Homogeneous Linear Differential Equations
CO 2 Solve simple Non-Homogeneous Linear Differential Equations
CO 3 Express f(x) as a Fourier series in the given interval
CO 4 Express f(x) as a Fourier Half-Range Cosine series and Sine series
CO 5 Find Laplace transforms of simple functions
CO 6 Find Inverse Laplace transforms of simple functions and solve Linear Differential
Equations using Laplace Transformations.
Course Contents:
Unit – I Duration: 05 Periods (L:3.75 – T:1.25)
Homogeneous Linear Differential equations with constant coefficients
Homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of order two and higher
with emphasis on second order.
Unit – II Duration: 15 Periods (L:11.25 – T:3.75)

Non-Homogeneous Linear Differential equations with constant coefficients
Non-homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of the form f(D)y =
X, where X is in the form k(a constant ) ,eax, sin ax, cos ax, xn, (n= 1,2,3) Complimentary
Function (CF), Particular Integral (PI) and General Solution (GS).
Unit-III Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7.5 – T: 2.5)

Fourier series
Orthogonality of trigonometric functions, Representation of a function in Fourier series over the
interval , Euler’s formulae, sufficient conditions for existence of Fourier series for a
function. Even, Odd functions and Fourier series over the Interval (0,2 π ) and (- π , π )
Unit – IV Duration: 05 Periods (L:3.75 – T:1.25)

Fourier Half-range series
Representation of a function as Fourier Half-range Sine series and Cosine series over the
interval (0, π)
Unit – V Duration: 10Periods (L: 7.5 – T:2.5)
Laplace Transformations:
Definition, sufficient conditions for existence of Laplace Transform, Laplace Transform of
elementary functions, linearity property, Change of scale property, First shifting theorem ,
multiplication by tn, division by t, Laplace Transform of derivatives and integrals, unit step
function, Laplace Transform of second shifting theorem
315
Unit – VI Duration: 15 Periods (L:11.25 – T:3.75)
Inverse Laplace transforms:
Inverse Laplace transforms- shifting theorems and change of scale property, multiplication
by sn and division by s –Inverse Laplace Transform using partial fractions – convolution
theorem (no proof) – application of Laplace Transformations to solve ordinary differential
equations of second order with initial conditions.
Recommended Books:
1. Higher Engineering Mathematics, B.S.Grewal .
2. Laplace Transforms - Murray R. Spigel .
3. Ordinary Differential Equations – R. S. Aggarwal.
4. Fourier Series – A.R. Vasishtha and Gupta.
Suggested E-Learning references:

2. E-books:www.mathebook.net
Unit-I
1.0 Solve Homogeneous linear differential equations with constant coefficients in engineering
situations
1.1 Solve Differential equations of the type (aD 2 +bD + c)y = 0 when the roots of the auxiliary
equation are real and different, real and repeated, complex.
1.2 Solve the higher order homogeneous Linear differential equations with constant coefficients.
Unit-II
2.0 Solve Non Homogeneous linear differential equations with constant coefficients in
engineering situations
2.1 Explain the concept of complementary function, particular Integral and general solution
of a differential equation.
2.2 Solve nth order differential equation of the type f(D) y = X where f(D) is a polynomial of second
order and X is a function of the form k, eax ,Sinax, Cosax, xn.
2.3 Solve simple problems on the above types of 2.2
Unit-III
3.0 Understand the Fourier series expansion of functions
3.1 Define the orthogonality of functions in an interval.
3.2 Define Fourier series of a function in the interval (C, C+2 π ¿ and write the Euler’s
formulae for determining the Fourier coefficients.
3.3 Write sufficient conditions for the existence of Fourier series for a function.
3.4 Write Fourier series of simple functions in the range (0, 2 π ¿ and (- π , π ¿.
3.5 Write Fourier series for even and odd functions in the interval (- π , π ¿
3.6 Solve simple problems on even and odd functions in the interval. (0,2 π ¿∧¿ (- π , π ¿
Unit- IV
4.0 Understand the Half – Range Fourier series expansion of functions
4.1 Write Half – Range Cosine series of a function in the range (0 , π) .
4.2 Write Half – Range Sine series of a function in the range (0 , π) .
4.3 Solve simple problems on Half – Range Cosine and Sine series over the interval (0 , π)
Unit-V
5.0 Understand Laplace transforms
5.1 Write the definition of Laplace Transform and Laplace transform of standard functions.
5.2 Explain the sufficient conditions of existence of Laplace Transform.
5.3 Write the properties of Laplace Transform – Linearity property, First shifting theorem,
Change of Scale property.
5.4 Solve simple problems using the above properties.
t
f (t ) n
5.5 Write formulae for Laplace transform of t n f (t ) , , f ( t ) ,∫ f ( u ) du
t 0
in terms of Laplace transform of. f (t)
316
5.6 Solve simple problems using the above formulae.
5.7 Define unit step function and write the Laplace Transform of unit step function.
5.8 Write Second shifting theorem.
Unit-VI
6.0 Use Laplace transforms and Inverse Laplace transforms to solve differential
equation in engineering problems
6.1 Define inverse Laplace Transform and write inverse Laplace Transforms of standard
functions.
6.2 Solve simple problems on Inverse Laplace Transforms.
6.2 Write Shifting theorems and Change of scale property of inverse Laplace Transform.
6.3 Solve simple problems on 6.2
6.4 Write inverse Laplace Transforms corresponding to Laplace Transform of the functions
t
f (t) n
, f ( t ) ,∫ f ( u ) du
n
t f (t),
t 0
6.5 Solve simple problems on 6.4
6.6 Define convolution of two functions and state convolution theorem.
6.7 Solve simple problems on Convolution theorem.
6.8 Use Laplace and inverse Laplace Transforms to solve simple differential equations of
Second order.

1. Student visits Library to refer Standard Books on Mathematics and collect related material.
2. Quiz
3. Group discussion
4. Surprise tests
5. Seminars
6. Home Assignments.
Linked PO
Engineering Tools
Lifelong learning
Basic knowledge
Experiments and
Communication
Environment &
Individual and
sustainability
Engineer and
Knowledge
Team work
Discipline
practice
society
Ethics
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO
10
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 3 1,2,3,4,7,10
Internal Evaluation
Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks

Questions each question
01 Part-A Remembering(R) 4 1 Nil 4 Marks
02 Part-B Understanding(U) 4 3 2 6 Marks
03 Part-C Application(A) 4 5 2 10 Marks
Total Marks 20 Marks
317
Test Units Marks
Mid Sem 1 1 and 2 20
Mid Sem 2 3 and 4 20
Slip Test 1 1 and 2 5
Slip Test 2 3 and 4 5
Assignments - 5
Seminars - 5
Total 60
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR MID SEMESTER EXAMS

MID SEM-I EXAM
S.No Unit No R U A Remarks
1 Unit-I 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-II 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM

S.No Unit No R U A Remarks
1 Unit-III 1,2 5(a) 7(a)
5(b) 7(b)
2 Unit-IV 3,4 6(a) 8(a)
6(b) 8(b)
The length of answer for each question framed in respect of Part-A, B&C shall not exceed ¼ of a
page,1page and 2 pages respectively
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR SEMESTER END EXAM
Sl.No Description Level No of Marks for Choice Total Marks
Questions each question
01 Part-A Remembering(R) 8 1 Nil 8 Marks
02 Part-B Understanding(U) 8 3 4 12 Marks
03 Part-C Application(A) 8 5 4 20 Marks
Total Marks 40 Marks
Questions to be set for SEE

Unit No
R U A
I
Q1 Q9(a) Q13(a)
II
III
Q2 Q10(a) Q14(a)
IV Q4
Q9(b), Q13(b),
V Q5,Q6
Q11(a), Q11(b) Q15(a), Q15(b)
Q3
Q10(b), Q14(b),
VI Q7,Q8
Q12(a), Q12(b) Q16(a), Q16(b)
318
Code: 18Common-401F
MID SEM –I, MODEL PAPER, IV SEMESTER
PART-A
1. Write the General solution of (aD2+bD+c)y = 0, whose roots of auxiliary equation are real and
distinct.
2. Find the roots of auxiliary equation of the differential equation ( D 2 +2 D+ 1¿ y=0
3. Find the Particular Integral of( D 2−4 D+1 ) y=e3 x
4. Find the P.I of ( D2−16 ) y=sin 4 x
PART-B
5 a) Solve (D2 + 3D – 54)y = 0
Or
5 b) Solve (D2 +16)y = 0
6 a) Solve (D 2 +4 D+ 4) y =e 2 x
Or
6 b) Find P.I of ( D 3 + D) y = sin2x
PART C
7 a) Solve (D3 – 2D2 – 4D + 8) y = 0
Or
7 b) Solve (D3 – D2 – D +1)y = 0
8 a) Solve (D 2 +36) y =sin2 x
Or
8 b) Solve :( D 2+3 D+2) y = x 2
319
Code: 18 Common-401F
MID SEM –II, MODEL PAPER, IV SEMESTER
TIME: 1: 00 Hours Max. Marks:
20 PART-A

1. Define periodic function and give one example
2. Define Fourier series of the function f(x) in the interval (0, 2 π )
3. Write Half-range sine series of f(x) in the interval (0, π ¿
4. Find a 0for f(x) =e x in 0¿ x <π
PART-B
5 a) If f(x) = x 2 in (0, 2 π ¿, then find the value of an in Fourier series of f(x)
Or
5 b) If f(x) =|x| in (- π , π ¿, then find the value of a1 in Fourier series of f(x)
6 a).Find the value of an in half-range Cosine series for the function f(x) = e x in (0, π ¿
Or
6 b) Obtain the Fourier Half – Range Sine series for f(x) =( π−x ¿ intheinterval(0 , π )
PART C
7 a) Obtain the Fourier series for f(x) = x in the interval 0 ¿ x <2 π
Or
7 b) Find the Fourier series for f(x) =( x−x 2 ¿ in the interval (- π , π ¿. Hence show that
1 1 1 1 π
2
2 - 2 + 2 - 2 + ……….+ =
1 2 3 4 12
8 a) Express f(x) = πx – x2 as a half-range Sine series in (0, π ¿
Or
8 b) Find the half –range cosine series for the function f(x) = x 2 in the interval (0, π ¿
320
18 Common-401F

SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
IV SEMESTER EXAMINATION
PART-A
1. Find the roots of auxiliary equation of the differential equation( D2 + 4 D ) y=0 .
2. Define Fourier Series for the function f(x) in the interval ( c, c+2 π ¿
3. Find the Particular Integral of( D 2−4 D+1 ) y=e x
4. Find L ( e 2t +cos 3 t )
5. Find L ( t+5 Cosht )
6. State the First Shifting theorem of Laplace Transforms.
7. Find L
−1
( 1
+ 2
s
s−3 s + 4 )
8. Find L
−1
( 2 s+5
1
)
PART-B
9a) Solve (D2+D + 1) y = 4e3x
Or
9 b) Find L ( tCos 3 t )
10 a) Find Half Range Sine Series of f(x) = x in ( 0 , π )

Or
10 b) Find L
−1
( s +6s +1s−7 )
2
20−4 s
11 a) If L{f(t)} = 2 , find L{f(3t)}
s −4 s +20
Or
∞
11 b) Find ∫ t . e−2 t sin 3 tdt using Laplace Transform Technique
0
1−cos at
12 a) Show that L−1 ¿ = 2
a
or
12 b) Find L
−1
( s
2
( s+ 2) +4 )
321
PART C
13 a) Solve:(D + D -2) y = x + sinx
2
Or
13 b) Find L[ t et sin 3 t ]
(−π , π )
14 a) Expand f(x) = x as a Fourier series in the interval
2
Or
14 b) Find L
−1
( s
( s +1 ) (s 2 +1) 2
)
15 a) Find L (
sin 3 t . Cost
t )
Or
{ }
t
sin t
L ∫ t
dt
15 b) Evaluate 0
16 a) Find L
−1
( ( s +1)1(s+2) ) using Convolution theorem .
Or
16 b) Solve the differential equation y’’– 2y’– 8y = Sint , when y (0) = 3, y’ (0) = 6 by
Laplace Transform method.
322
18EC-402C - MICROCONTROLLER PROGRAMMING
Course Title : MICROCONTROLLER Course Code 18EC-402 C

PROGRAMMING
Semester IV Course Group Core

in Hrs(L:T:P)
Pre requisites :
This course requires the basic knowledge of digital electronics.
Course Outcomes: Upon completion of the course the student should be able to
CO Corse Outcome Linked POs Periods
CO1 : Analyze the architecture of 8051. 1,2,10 14
CO2 : Compare the various low level and high level languages and 1,2,
6
interpret the addressing modes.
CO3: Write simple programs using instructions of 8051. 1,2, 14
CO4 : Classify and know the working of hardware interfacing devices. 1,2, 6
CO5 : Analyze the need for programmable interfacing devices. 1,2, 10
CO6 : Make use of instructions to solve programs. 1,2, 10
Course content:
UNIT 1
Architecture of Microcontroller 8051 Duration: 14 Periods (L: 11– T: 3)
Block diagram of a microcomputer - function of each block-Compare Microprocessors and Microcontrollers-

applications of microcontrollers-INTEL microcontroller family chips.--features of various INTEL microcontroller
family chips-Compare the various INTEL microcontroller families-features of Intel 8051 Micro Controller-
multiplexing and de-multiplexing in 8051. Functional block diagram of 8051 microcontroller-function of each block-
register structure of 8051- function of various special function registers-pin diagram of 8051 micro controller -purpose
of each pin-internal memory Organization in 8051-interrupts in 8051.
UNIT 2
Assembly language and addressing modes.
Define bit, nibble, byte and word related to microcontrollers- machine language, assembly language, and mnemonics-
Differences between machine level and assembly level programming-Differences between low level and high level
languages-need for assembly level programming-need for an instruction set-instruction format of 8051 -Classify the
323
instruction set of 8051-one byte, two byte and three byte instructions of 8051-What is addressing mode with reference
to microcontroller-various addressing modes of 8051-need for bit level addressing..
UNIT 3
Instruction set of 8051. Duration: 14 Periods (L: 10– T: 4)
Explain the instruction set of 8051

Function of data transfer instructions and the effect of flags- data transfer instructions with examples. Programs in
mnemonics to illustrate the application of data copy instructions-function of arithmetic group of instructions and the
effect of flags-arithmetic group of instructions with examples. Programs in mnemonics to illustrate the application of
arithmetic instructions-function of logical instructions and the effect of flags-logical instructions with examples-
programs in mnemonics to illustrate the application of logical instructions-function of branching instructions and the
effect of flags-unconditional jump instructions-conditional jump instructions-bit manipulation or Boolean instructions.
UNIT 4
Hardware Interfacing Duration: 6 Periods (L: 5– T: 1)
Classify and know the working of hardware interfacing devices.

Interfacing and its need- Distinguish between input and output interfacing-interfacing of pushbutton switch to 8051-
interfacing of LED to 8051-interfacing of seven segment display -assembly level program for the above- functions of
pins of LCD-instruction command code for programming a LCD- interfacing of LCD to 8051-assembly language
Program for interfacing LCD - key press and detect mechanism- interfacing of 4x4 matrix key board.
UNIT 5
Programmable peripheral devices. Duration: 10Periods (L: 7– T: 3)
Analyze the need for programmable interfacing devices.

Need for programmable peripheral devices- Classify various programmable interfacing devices- block diagram of PPI
8255- control word format of 8255- PIN diagram of 8255 and function of each PIN- need for DMA controller-block
diagram of DMA controller 8257- PIN diagram of 8257 and function of each PIN- need for programmable
communication interface-block diagram of serial communication interface 8251- PIN diagram of 8251 and function of
each PIN- RS 232 standards-RS232 pin, DB25 and DB9 connectors.
UNIT 6
8051 Programming Concepts
Duration: 10Periods (L: 7– T: 3)
Make use of instructions to solve programs.
Various symbols used in drawing flow charts-flow charts for simple problems-flow chart illustrating counter
technique--program using counter techniques-programs of instructions to perform single byte, double byte and multi
byte addition and subtraction-subroutine and its advantages-operation of stack with PUSH & POP instructions-
branching instructions related to subroutines-sequence of program when subroutine is called and executed-
information exchange between the program counter and the stack and identification of stack pointer register when a
subroutine is called-concept of nesting, multiple ending and common ending in subroutines- input/output, machine
related statements in writing assembly language programs- debugging a program-important steps in writing and
trouble shooting a simple program-principles of single step and break point debugging techniques-simple programs to
setup time delay using counter & a single register-time delay in the program given the clock frequency.
1.0 Comprehend the architecture of Microcontroller 8051

1.1 Draw the block diagram of a microcomputer and explain the function of each block.
1.2 Compare Microprocessors and Microcontrollers.
324
1.3 List the applications of microcontrollers.
1.4 State the INTEL microcontroller family chips.
1.5 List the features of various INTEL microcontroller family chips.
1.6 Compare the various INTEL microcontroller families.
1.7 State the features of Intel 8051 Micro Controller.
1.8 Explain multiplexing and de-multiplexing in 8051.
1.9 Draw the functional block diagram of 8051 microcontroller.
1.11 Draw the register structure of 8051and explain.
1.12 Explain the function of various special function registers.
1.13 Draw the pin diagram of 8051 micro controller and specify the purpose of each pin.
1.14 Explain internal memory Organization in 8051.
1.15 Explain interrupts in 8051.
2.0 Understand the languages and addressing modes of 8051 micro controller.
2.1 Define bit, nibble, byte and word related to microcontrollers.
2.2 Define the terms machine language, assembly language, and mnemonics.
2.3 Write the differences between machine level and assembly level programming.
2.4 Write the differences between low level and high level languages.
2.5 State the need for assembly level programming.
2.6 State the need for an instruction set.
2.7 Write the instruction format of 8051 & illustrate these terms by writing an instruction.
2.8 Classify the instruction set of 8051.
2.9 Explain one byte, two byte and three byte instructions of 8051.
2.10 What is addressing mode with reference to microcontroller.
2.11 List the various addressing modes of 8051and Explain with examples.
2.12 State the need for bit level addressing.
3.0 Understand the instruction set of 8051.
3.1. Explain the function of data transfer instructions and the effect of flags.
3.2. Explain the data transfer instructions with examples.
3.3. Write programs in mnemonics to illustrate the application of data copy instructions.
3.4. Explain the function of arithmetic group of instructions and the effect of flags.
3.5. Explain the arithmetic group of instructions with examples.
3.6. Write programs in mnemonics to illustrate the application of arithmetic instructions.
3.7. Explain the function of logical instructions and the effect of flags.
3.8. Explain the logical instructions with examples.
3.9. Write programs in mnemonics to illustrate the application of logical instructions.
3.10. Explain the function of branching instructions and the effect of flags.
3.11. Explain unconditional jump instructions.
3.12. Explain conditional jump instructions.
3.13. Explain bit manipulation or Boolean instructions.
325
4.0 Hardware Interfacing
4.1 What is interfacing and its need?

4.2 Distinguish between input and output interfacing.
4.3 Explain the interfacing of pushbutton switch to 8051.
4.4 Explain the interfacing of LED to 8051.
4.5 Explain the interfacing of seven segment display.
4.6 Write the assembly level program for the above.
4.7 Explain the functions of pins of LCD.
4.8 List instruction command code for programming a LCD.
4.9 Explain interfacing of LCD to 8051.
4.10 Explain key press and detect mechanism.
4.11 Explain interfacing of 4x4 matrix key boards.
4.12 Explain assembly language Program for interfacing LCD
5.0 Programmable peripheral devices.
5.1 Explain the need for programmable peripheral devices.

5.2 Classify the various programmable interfacing devices.
5.3 Draw and explain the block diagram of PPI 8255.
5.4 Write the control word format of 8255.
5.5 Draw the PIN diagram of 8255 and explain the function of each PIN.
5.6 State the need for DMA controller.
5.7 Draw and explain the block diagram of DMA controller 8257.
5.9 State the need for programmable communication interface.
5.10 Draw and explain the block diagram of serial communication interface 8251.
5.12 Explain RS 232 standards.
5.13 List RS232 pin, DB25 and DB9 connectors.
5.14 Explain the need for MAX 232 and 233 IC’s and their circuits used for interfacing.
6.0 Comprehend 8051 Programming Concepts
6.1 List the various symbols used in drawing flow charts.

6.2 Draw flow charts for simple problems.
326
6.3 Draw a simple flow chart illustrating counter technique.
6.4 Write a program using counter techniques.
6.5 Write programs to perform single byte, double byte and multi byte addition and subtraction.
6.6 Define a subroutine and write its advantages.
6.7 Explain the operation of stack with PUSH & POP instructions.
6.8 Explain the branching instructions related to subroutines.
6.9 Explain the sequence of program execution when subroutine is called and executed.
6.10 Explain information exchange between the program counter and stack when a subroutine is called.
6.11 Illustrate the concept of nesting, multiple ending and common ending in subroutines.
6.12 Use input/output, machine related statements in writing assembly language programs.
6.13 Explain the term debugging a program.
6.14 List the important steps in writing and trouble shooting a simple program.
6.15 Explain the principles of single step and break point debugging techniques.
6.16 Write simple programs to setup time delay using counter & a single register.
6.17 Calculate the time delay in the program given the clock frequency.
Recommended books
1. The 8051 Micro controller and Embedded systems , by Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Mazidi, Janice
Gillispie Mazidi Pearson-Prenticehall publication
2. The 8051 Microcontroller By Kenneth J. Ayala -Thomson Delmar publications
3. Programming customizing the 8051 Microcontroller by MykePredko, TMH
4. Introduction to microprocessors for engineers and scientists by by Ghosh & Sridhar, Prentice-Hall.
5. Microprocessors and Microcontrollers by N.Senthil Kumar, M. Saravanan, S. Jeevanathan, Oxford
press.
Suggested e-learning resources
1. www.nptel.com
2. www.electronics4u.com
Suggested student activities.

1. Learn how to download keil software.
2. Propose how to manage the e-waste.
3. Down load ed-sim simulator and know its working.
4. Learn the latest microcontrollers used in day to day applications.
5. Prepare a simple PCB to interface a switch and LED.
327
Type of
Skill/Score

Data/Mater was collected one Data/Material was collected Data/Material
ial time independently. was collected several times was collected
Collection Collects a great more than one independently. several times
deals of time Collects basic with assistance.
information, all independently. information, most Collects very
refer to the topic Collects more refer to the topic limited
information, information,
topi
topic c

wer
outlined in a step-by- outlined in a step- outlined in a step-by- e outlined
wer
step fashion that could by-step fashion step fashion, but had e
incomplet
be followed by that could be 1 or 2 gaps that e or
Methodolog anyone without followed by require explanation not sequential,
anyon
y/ additional e without even after expert even after
Procedure explanations. additional feedback. expert feedback
Expert help was
needed to
accomplish this.
o i presen
Activity/ Quality f Skill is Skill is mastered to Skill s t but Skill needs
Developme high. the level of with errors and improvement.
nt expectation. omissions.
Interpretati Student provided a Student provided a Student provided a No conclusion

on/ detailed conclusion somewhat detailed conclusion with was apparent.
summary clearly. conclusion clearly. some reference.
Perform
Full-fills Performs all duties Performs almost Performs nearly all s
assigne
team roles of d team all duties duties very little
and duties roles duties
Alway Rarel
s does the Always does the Usually does the y does
th
assigned work, assigned work, assigned work, e assigned
withou
t needing rarely needs rarely needs work, often
Shares reminding reminding reminding needs
work
328
reminding.
equality
fare amount a little more than sometimes talk too most of the
Listen to
needed much talking,
other team
rarely allows
mates
others to
speak
329
CO/PO Mapping Matrix

PO Periods
CO1 Analyze the architecture of 8051. U/A 1,2,10 14
CO2 Compare the various languages and interpret the addressing modes. R/U 1,2, 6
CO3 Explain the instruction set of 8051 and write simple programs. R/U/A 1,2, 14
CO4 Classify and analyze the hardware interfacing devices. R/U/A 1,2, 6
CO5 Analyze the need for programmable interfacing devices. R/U 1,2, 10
CO6 Make use of instructions to solve programs. R/U/A 1,2, 10
330
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
Sl Questions to be set for SEE Remarks

No Unit No. U(3
R(1 Mark) A(5 Marks)
Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)
3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
331
18EC-402C MICROCONTROLLER PROGRAMMING

MODEL PAPER
MID- SEM I

PART-A
1. List any 2 applications of microcontrollers.
2. List the interrupts of 8051 microcontroller.
3. Define bit and nibble related to microcontrollers.
4. Write the instruction format of 8051.
PART – B
5(a) State the features of 8051 microcontroller.
OR
5(b) List any 6 SFR’s and their functions.
6(a) Write the difference between machine level and assembly level programming.
OR
6(b) Classify the instruction set of 8051.
PART – C
7(a) Draw the register structure of 8051 and explain.
OR
7(b) Draw the PIN diagram of 8051 and explain the function of each PIN.
8(a) Explain one byte, two byte and three byte instructions with example for each.
OR
8(b) Explain the addressing modes of 8051 microcontroller with an example for each.
332
MODEL PAPER
MID- SEM II
PART-A
1. Write the function of the instruction MOV @R0, A.
2. Write the number of bytes and the type of addressing mode for the instruction MOV DPTR, #6500H .
3. What is interfacing?
4. List any 2 input devices and 2 output devices.
PART – B
5(a) Write an assembly language program to add the numbers 3Ah and 19H.
OR
5(b) Write an assembly language program to multiply two binary numbers.
6(a) Explain the interfacing of pushbutton switch to 8051.

OR
6(b) Write functions of pins of LCD.
PART – C
7(a) Write an assembly language program to load numbers into registers R1 and R2 using indirect
addressing mode, then exchange the data between them.
OR
7(b) Write any 5 arithmetic group of instructions and explain them with an example for each.
8(a) Explain the interfacing of seven segment LED display to 8051.

OR
8(b) Explain the interfacing of LCD display to 8051.
333
MODEL PAPER

PART-A
1. Define machine language and nemonics.
2. Define interfacing.
3. List any 2 pins of DB 9 connector.
4. What is the need for programmable peripheral devices?
5. Write the function of IC’s 8255 and 8257.
6. What is control word with reference to 8255.
7. List any 4 flow chart symbols.
8. Define a subroutine.
PART – B
9(a) List the interrupts of 8051 and write their vector addresses and order of priority.
OR
9(b) Write the control word format of 8051.
10(a) Write an assembly language program to rotate a number in register R4 twice towards left with carry.
OR
10(b) Explain the operation of stack with PUSH and POP instructions.
11(a) Draw the PIN diagram of 8257.
OR
11(b) Explain the standards of RS – 232.
12(a) Explain the term debugging.
OR
12(b) Write an assembly language program to generate a time delay of 10 microseconds using a register
and operating with a clock frequency of 10MHz.
334
PART – C
13(a) Draw and explain the functional block diagram of 8051.

OR
13(b) Draw and explain the block diagram of 8251.
14(a) Explain the key press and key detect mechanism.
OR
14(b) Explain the sequence of program execution when a subroutine is called and executed.
15(a) Draw and explain the block diagram of 8255.

OR
15(b) Explain MAX 232 and MAX 233 IC with necessary diagrams.
16(a) Write an assembly language program to transfer a block of 5 numbers stored in i-RAM locations
from 10H onwards to off-chip RAM locations from 6400H onwards.
OR
16(b) Write an assembly language program to add a block of 5 numbers stored in i-RAM locations
from 10H onwards. Store the sum onto off-chip RAM locations from 6400H and carry 6401H.
335
18EC-403C - LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Course Title : Linear Integrated Circuits Course Code 18EC-403C

Hrs(L:T:P)
Pre requisites :
This course requires the basic knowledge of Basic Physics and Mathematics at Secondary school level ,and basics
of electrical and electronics
Course Outcomes:
Course Outcome Linked Pos Periods
CO1
Compare different IC fabrication techniques 1,2,10 8
CO2 Familiarize operational amplifier and its characteristics 1,2,5,6,7 12
CO3 Construct basic application circuits using op-amp 1,2,9 10
CO4 Construct oscillators and multi-vibrators using Op-amp 1,2,5,7 12
CO5 Develop Timers and PLL using Op-amp 1,2,5 8
Construct Instrumentation amplifier and ADC and DAC converters

CO6 using Operational Amplifiers 1,2,3,7 10
336
Course contents
UNIT1- IC Manufacturing: Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6– T:2)
Merits and de-merits of Integrated Circuits-Classification of ICs based on manufacturing process (monolithic, thin film,
thick film and hybrid)- Manufacturing process of monolithic ICs- fabrication of resistor, and capacitor on monolithic
IC- Fabrication of diode and transistor on monolithic IC- different IC packages- - Power rating of above packages-
Various levels of integration (SSI, MSI, LSI, VLSI etc.,)- Surface Mount Technology (SMT)- Merits of SMT
Technology
UNIT -2: Operational Amplifier Duration: 12 Periods (L: 8– T:4)
Need for differential amplifier- Circuit diagram of differential amplifier- Operation of differential amplifier- Reasons for
not implementing differential amplifier with discrete components- differential gain and common mode gain- Function of
an operational amplifier- Symbol - Inverting and Non inverting inputs of Op Amp- Important characteristics of ideal
operational amplifier- Input impedance, Open loop gain, Slew rate, CMRR, Input offset voltage, Input offset Current-
block diagram and pin out diagram of IC 741 - Pin configuration of IC 741- Typical values of Open loop gain, Slew
rate, CMRR, Input offset voltage, Input offset Current- Power supply requirements of Operational Amplifier- Concept
of virtual ground and Virtual short- Single supply operation of Operational Amplifier- Pin configuration of single supply
Op Amps such as CA 3011 ,LM324 - Features of above ICs.
UNIT 3 –Op-amp applications Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8– T:2)
Inverting amplifier configuration of Op Amp- input and output waveforms- Equation for voltage gain- Effect of
feedback on input impedance and Bandwidth for inverting amplifier configuration- Non Inverting amplifier
configuration of Op Amp- formula for Voltage gain- Effect of feedback on input impedance and Bandwidth- For Non
inverting amplifier configuration. Use of operational amplifier as i) inverter , ii) Voltage Buffer iii) Summing Amplifier
iv)Scale changer v) Integrator vi) Differentiator- Reasons for not implementing differentiator circuit in
high frequency applications-Voltage to current converter circuit- applications of Voltage to current converter- Current
to Voltage converter circuit - Current to Voltage converter circuit - Applications of Current to Voltage converter-Active
and Passive filters- Op amp Active low pass filter with circuit diagram of first order- Frequency response - Op amp
Active high pass filter of first order- Frequency response of the above circuit- Merits of active filters
UNIT -4: Oscillators and Multi- vibrators using Op-amp Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9– T:3)
OP-Amp Wein-bridge Oscillator circuit- - Output waveform - Conditions required for stable operation - RC Phase
shift oscillator using OP Amp - conditions for stable operation -Classification of Multi vibrators- OP-Amp Bistable
multi vibrator - OP-Amp Bistable multi vibrator- output waveforms- OP-Amp Monostable multivibrator with
waveforms- Astable multi vibrator using OP-Amp- OP-Amp based Astable multi vibrator- waveforms- applications
of multivibrators- OP-Amp Schmitt trigger circuit- fundamental consideration of sweep waveform- Hysteresis of
Schmitt trigger circuit
337
Unit 5- Timers and PLL Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6– T:2)
Block diagram of 555 IC - Astable multi using 555 IC- Monostable Multivibrator using 555 IC.- Phase locked loops -
Block diagram of PLL – LM565- operation of VCO (LM566)- Lock range of PLL- Capture range of PLL-Give design
rules(Formulas) for implementing PLL circuit - Applications of PLL
UNIT- 6:Instrumentation amplifiers Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8– T:2)
Use of op amp circuits in instrumentation- Op amp and instrumentation amplifier- Need for instrumentation amplifier-
OP amp instrumentation amplifier circuit- Need for A/D and D/A conversion- Terms: resolution, Accuracy,
Monotonicity and settling time of D/A converter- D/A converter using binary weighted resistors- - Circuit of D/A
converter using R-2R ladder network-.A/D converter using counter method with a block diagram - A/D converter using
successive approximation method - Block diagram - Performance of above A/D converters
Suggested Learning Outcomes :After completing this course the student will be able to
1.0 Explain the IC manufacturing methods
1.1 List the advantages and disadvantages of Integrated Circuits over discrete assembly.
1.2 Classify ICs based on fabrication techniques (monolithic, thin film, thick film and hybrid).
1.3 Compare the different types of above fabrication techniques
1.4 Explain the manufacturing process of monolithic ICs.
1.5 Explain the fabrication of resistor, and capacitor on monolithic IC.
1.6 Explain the fabrication of diode and transistor on monolithic IC.
1.7 List different IC packages.
1.8 Draw the sketch of above package types
1.9 Mention the power rating of above packages.
1.10 Explain various levels of integration (SSI, MSI, LSI, VLSI etc.,).
1.11 Explain the Surface Mount Technology (SMT)
1.12 List 6 merits of SMT Technology.
2.0 Explain the working of Operational amplifier
2.1 State the need for differential amplifier

2.2 Draw and explain the circuit diagram of differential amplifier
2.3 Give reasons for not implementing differential amplifier with discrete components.
2.4 Define the terms differential gain and common mode gain
2.5 State the function of an operational amplifier.
2.6 Draw the symbol of an operational amplifier.
2.7 Explain inverting and Non inverting inputs of Op Amp
2.8 State the important characteristics of ideal operational amplifier with practical values.
2.9 Define Input impedance, Open loop gain, Slew rate, CMRR, Input offset voltage, Input offset Current,
338
2.10 Draw the Pin configuration of IC 741
2.11 State the function of Each pin.
2.12 Give typical values of Open loop gain, Slew rate, CMRR, Input offset voltage, Input offset Current,
2.13 Explain the power supply requirements of Operational Amplifier.
2.14 Explain the concept of virtual ground and Virtual short.
2.15 Explain single supply operation of Op-amp
2.16 Give the pin configuration of single supply op-amps such as CA 3011, LM324
2.17 List 6 important features of above ICs
2.18 Explain the operation of adjustable voltage regulator (LM317)
2.19 Give the formula for output voltage of adjustable regulators
3.0 Operational amplifier applications using negative feedback
3.1. Explain the Inverting amplifier configuration of Op Amp with input and output waveforms.
3.2. Derive the equation for voltage gain of an inverting amplifier
3.3. Explain the concept of virtual ground and Virtual short.
3.4. Derive the equation for voltage gain of an inverting amplifier.
3.5. Explain the Non Inverting amplifier configuration of Op Amp.
3.6. Derive the formula for Voltage gain of above.
3.7. Explain the use of operational amplifier as i) inverter , ii) Buffer iii) Summing Amplifier iv)Scale changer
v) Integrator vi) Differentiator
3.8. Mention the reasons for not implementing differentiator circuit in high frequency applications.
3.9. Draw the Voltage to current converter circuit.
3.10. Explain the operation of above circuit
3.11. List 3 applications of Voltage to current converter.
3.12. Draw the Current to Voltage converter circuit.
3.13. Explain the operation of Current to Voltage converter circuit.
3.14. List 3 applications of Current to Voltage converter
3.15. .Distinguish between Active and Passive filters.
3.16. Explain the working of Op amp Active low pass filter with circuit diagram of first order.
3.17. Draw the frequency response of the above circuit.
3.18. Explain the working of Op amp Active high pass filter with circuit diagram of first order
3.19. Draw the frequency response of the above circuit.
3.20. Mention the merits of active filters.
4..0 Explain the working of Oscillators and Multi- vibrators using Op-amp
4.1 Explain Wien-bridge Sine wave Oscillator circuit using an OP-Amp

4.2 Mention the reason for using non linear element in the feedback circuit.
4.3 State the conditions required for stable operation and frequency of oscillation of above circuit
4.4 Explain RC Phase shift oscillator circuit using OP Amp
4.5 Mention the conditions and frequency of oscillation for stable operation of the above circuit
339
340
4.6 Explain Gain Bandwidth product of Op-Amp
4.7 Classify Multi vibrators.
4.8 Draw and explain the operation of transistor astable multivibrator.
4.9 Draw OP-Amp Bistable multi vibrator
4.10 Explain the working of OP-Amp Bistable multi vibrator with output waveforms.
4.11 Draw and explain the working of OP-Amp Monostable multivibrator with waveforms.
4.12 Draw the circuit of Astable multi vibrator using OP-Amp.
4.13 Explain the working of OP-Amp based Astable multi vibrator with output waveforms.
4.14 List 6 applications of multivibrators
4.15 Draw OP-Amp Schmitt trigger circuit.
4.16 Explain the working of OP-Amp Schmitt trigger circuit.
5.0 Explain the working of Timers and PLL
5.1. Draw the block diagram of 555 IC and explain.

5.2. Explain the working of astable multi using 555 IC.
5.3. Explain the working of Monostable Multivibrator using 555 IC.
5.4. Explain the concept of Phase locked loops
5.5. Draw and explain the block diagram of PLL – LM565.
5.6. Explain the operation VCO (LM566)
5.7. Define lock range of PLL
5.8. Define capture range of PLL.
5.9. Give design rules(Formulas) for implementing PLL circuit
5.10. List the applications of PLL.
5.11. Explain use of PLL as frequency multiplier
6.0 Explain the working of Instrumentation Amplifiers and A/D and D/A converters
6.1. Explain the use of op amp circuits in instrumentation.

6.2. Distinguish between Op amp and instrumentation amplifier.
6.3. Explain the need for instrumentation amplifier
6.4. Draw three OP amp instrumentation amplifier circuit
6.5. Explain the working of above circuits.
6.6. State the need for A/D and D/A conversion.
6.7. Define the terms resolution, Accuracy, Monotonicity and settling time of D/A converter.
6.8. Draw and explain the circuit of D/A converter using binary weighted resistors
6.9. Explain the operation D/A converter using binary weighted resistors.
6.10. Draw and explain the circuit of D/A converter using R-2R ladder network.
6.11. Explain operation of D/A converter using R-2R ladder network.
341
6.12. Explain the operation of A/D converter using counter method with a block diagram
6.13. Explain A/D converter using successive approximation method with a block diagram
6.14. Compare the performance of above A/D converters
Recommended Books:
1. Electronic Devices and Circuits – T.F. Bogart Jr., J.S.Beasley and G.Rico, Pearson Education,6th
edition, 2004.
2. Linear Integrated circuits – D.Roychoudhury & Shail.B. Jain – New age International Publishers –
II Edition –
2004.
3. Op-amps and linear integrated circuits, Ramakanth A. Gayakwad, ISBN- 9780132808682
4. Principles of Electronics, Rohit Mehta and V K Mehta, S. Chand and Company
Publishing, ISBN-9788121924504
5. Electronic Devices and Circuits, David A. Bell, Oxford University Press, ISBN9780195693409
3. www.nptel.ac.in
1.Student visits Library to refer to Manual of Operational amplifiers
2.Student inspects the available equipment in the Lab to test the applications of op-amp
3.Visitnearby Industry to familiarize with fabrication techniques of ICs
5. Participate in Group discussion
6. Search internet for circuits using the operational amplifier
Type of
Skill/Score

time independently. was collected several times was collected
Collects a great more than one independently. several times
Data/Mater
deals of time Collects basic with assistance.
ial
Collection
refer to the topic Collects more refer to the topic limited
342
topic topic

Methodolog outlined in a step-by- outlined in a step- outlined in a step-by- were outlined
y/ step fashion that could by-step fashion step fashion, but had were
Procedure be followed by that could be 1 or 2 gaps that incomplete or
anyone without followed by require explanation not sequential,
additional anyone without even after expert even after
explanations. additional feedback. expert feedback
Expert help was
needed to
accomplish this.
Activity/ Quality of Skill is Skill is mastered to Skill is present but Skill needs

Full-fills Performs all duties Performs almost Performs nearly all Performs
team roles of assigned team all duties duties very little
without needing rarely needs rarely needs work, often
Shares reminding reminding reminding needs
work reminding.
equality
fare amount a little more than sometimes talk too most of the
Listen to
needed much talking,
other team
rarely allows
mates
others to
speak
343
CO/PO Mapping Matrix:
Course Outcome CL Linked PO Periods
CO1
Compare different IC fabrication techniques R/U 1,2,10 8
Familiarize operational amplifier and its

CO2 characteristics R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7 12
CO3 Construct basic application circuits using op- R/U/A 1,2,9 10

amp
CO4 Construct oscillators and multi-vibrators using R/U/A 1,2,5,7 12
Op-amp
CO5 Develop Timers and PLL using Op-amp R/U/A 1,2,5 8
Construct Instrumentation amplifier and ADC R/U/A 1,2,3,7

CO6 and DAC converters using Operational 10
Amplifiers
344
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

No Unit No. U(3
Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)
3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
345
18EC-403C LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
MODEL PAPER
MID- SEM I
PART-A
1. List different IC packages?

2. List merits of SMT technology?
3. List the important characteristics of ideal operational amplifier?
4. Define the common mode gain?
PART-B
5.a Explain manufacturing process of monolithic IC?

(OR)
5.b Explain the fabrication process of diode on monolithic IC?
6.a Draw the pin diagram of IC741 and mention the function of each pin?
(OR)
6.b List important features of ICs CA 3011 and LM 324?
PART-C
7.a Explain the Surface Mount Technology (SMT)?

(OR)
7.b Explain fabrication of a transistor on monolithic IC?
8.a Define Slew rate and CMRR of operational amplifier? Explain their importance in the operation of
operational amplifier?
(OR)
8.b Explain power supply requirements of Operational Amplifier?
346
MODEL PAPER
MID- SEM II
PART-A
1. List the applications of Voltage to Current converter?

2. List the merits of active filters?
3. Classify Multi-vibrators?
4. List the applications of Multi-vibrators?
PART-B
5.a. Give the reason for using non-linear element in the feedback circuit of Wien-bridge oscillator?
(OR)
5.b. Give the conditions for stable operation of RC – Phase shift oscillator?
6.a Explain Gain-Bandwidth product of Op-amp?
(OR)
6.b Explain RC phase shift oscillator circuit using Op-amp?
PART-C
Answer ALL questions. Each carries 5 marks. 2X5=10Marks
7.a Draw and explain the working of first order active low pass filter using op-amp?
(OR)
7.b Draw and explain the Non-inverting amplifier configuration of op-amp and derive the expression for
voltage gain?
8.a Draw and explain the working of Bi-stable multi-vibrator using Op-amp?
(OR)
8.b Draw and explain the Schmitt-Trigger circuit using Op-amp?
347
MODEL PAPER
PART-A
1. What is the need for a heat sink in a power transistor?

2. Draw the Summing amplifier circuit using Op-amp?
3. Define Mono tonicity and settling time?
4. Define Input offset voltage and Input offset current of Op-amp?
5. Define lock range and capture range of PLL?
6. What is the purpose of the voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO) in PLL?
7. What is instrumentation amplifier?
8. The basic step of a 9 bit DAC is 10.3 mV. If 000000000 represents 0Volts, what is the output for an input
of 101101111?
PART-B
Answer ALL questions. Each carries 3 Marks. 4X3=12Marks
9.a Draw the block diagram of operational amplifier?.

(OR)
9.b Explain controlled voltage and threshold of IC-555.?
10.a Mention the reasons for not implementing differentiator circuit in High Frequency
applications? (OR)
10.b What is the difference between Op-amp and instrumentation amplifier?
11.a Explain controlled voltage and threshold of IC-555.?
(OR)
11.b Mention design rules for implementing PLL circuit?
12.a What is the need for ADC and DAC converters?
(OR)
12.b Compare the performance of Counter method and SAR ADC?
348
PART-C
Answer ALL questions. Each carries 5 Marks. 4X5=20Marks
13.a Define Slew rate and CMRR of operational amplifier? Explain their importance in the operation of operational
amplifier?
(OR)
13.b Determine the frequency of oscillation for the astable multivibrator using IC-555. Given
that RA=RB=1KΩ and C=1000PF.
14.a For the subtracter circuit using an op-amp input voltages are V1=5V and V2=2V and R1=10K
and R2=20k respectively. Calculate the output voltage.
(OR)
14.b A certain 8-bit DAC has a full-scale output of 2mA and a full-scale error of ± 0.5% F.S. What is
the range of possible outputs for an input of 10000000?
15.a Explain controlled voltage and threshold of IC-555.?
(OR)
15.b Explain the operation of PLL-based FM demodulator?
16.a Explain the operation of instrumentation amplifier using three operational amplifiers?
(OR)
16.b Explain the operation of Successive Approximation method of ADC?
349
18EC-404C - DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
Course Title Digital Communications Course Code 18EC-404C

Periods(L:T:P)
Pre requisites :
Knowledge of analog modulation and demodulation techniques, analog electronic circuits and digital electronics.
Course outcomes: After Completion of the course the student will be able to attain the following outcomes.
CO Course Outcome Linked POs Periods
CO1 : Apply the knowledge of Pulse Modulation techniques 1,2,3,9,10 10
CO2 : Compare various line coding techniques 1,2,3,9 10
CO3 : Distinguish the digital modulation techniques 1,2,3,9,10 12
CO4 : Apply the knowledge of different types of multiplexing 1,2,3,4,9,10 08
CO5 : Choose suitable techniques for error detection and correction 1,2,3,9 10
CO6 : Use the applications of digital communication 1,2,3,9,10 10
Course content:
UNIT 1
Principles of Pulse Modulation Techniques Duration: 10 Periods (L:8- T:2)
Analog and digital signals-Compare analog and digital communication techniques-Block diagram digital
communication system-Information capacity of a channel- Sampling theorem and its significance-Pulse modulation
techniques- PAM,PWM and PPM with waveforms- Generation and demodulation of PAM, PWM and PPM with
block diagram- Advantages and disadvantages of PAM, PWM and PPM -Compare PAM, PWM and PPM.
UNIT 2
Digital Coding Techniques Duration:10 Periods (L: 8– T:2)
Quantization noise, source coding techniques: PCM, DPCM, DM, noise in PCM, DM system - Performance
comparison of above systems - Digital signal encoding formats- NRZ line coding techniques- RZ line coding
techniques
350
UNIT 3
Digital Modulation Techniques Duration: 12 Periods (L: 9– T:3)
Need for digital modulation - Bit rate and baud rate -Types of digital modulation techniques- ASK,FSK and
PSK- ASK modulator with block diagram- ASK coherent demodulator with block diagram- advantages &
disadvantages of ASK- BFSK modulator with block diagram- Coherent BFSK demodulator- FSK demodulator
using PLL - advantages and disadvantages of FSK- BPSK modulator- BPSK demodulator- advantages of BPSK-
importance of Constellation diagram- QPSK and 8 PSK with constellation diagrams –Comparison of ASK, FSK
and PSK- Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM)- application areas of different digital modulation
techniques
UNIT 4
Principles of Multiplexing techniques Duration: 08 Periods (L: 6– T:2)
Need for multiplexing- Frequency Division Multiplexing- Time Division Multiplexing- Advantages &disadvantages
of TDM-Comparison of TDM and FDM, Applications of Multiplexing and its use in telephony
UNIT 5
Error Detection & Correction Methods
Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7– T:3)
Bit overhead- overhead efficiency- Conversion between parallel and serial data- Synchronous transmission- Types of
errors during data transmission- Error detection techniques- Parity check method of error detection- VRC method of
error detection - LRC method of error detection with an example- Checksum method of error detection- CRC method of
error detection with an example- Advantages of CRC method of error detection- Error correction techniques
UNIT 6
Applications Digital communication Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7 – T:3)
351
Classification of telephone systems- Signal system Seven(SS7)- TDM in telephony- Internet telephony- IP
telephony (VOIP)-Need for a modem in data communication- Digital EPABX-Types of broadband access
technologies-Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) technology- State the need for multiple access
techniques- types-Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) with a block diagram- features of FDMA-
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) with a block diagram-features- concept of spread spectrum
technique - types of spread spectrum techniques- Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technique with a
block diagram- features- advantages of CDMA-Compare FDMA, TDMA and CDMA
Suggested Learning Outcomes :

1.0 Principles of Digital Communication
1.1 Explain analogue and digital signals.
1.2 Compare analogue and digital communication techniques.
1.3 Draw the block diagram digital communication system
1.4 Define information capacity of a channel.
1.5 State sampling theorem and explain its significance.
1.6 Classify pulse modulation techniques.
1.7 Explain PAM,PWM and PPM with waveforms
1.8 Explain the generation and demodulation of PAM with block diagram.
1.9 List the advantages and disadvantages of PAM.
1.10 Explain the generation and demodulation of PWM with block diagram.
1.11 List three advantages and disadvantages of PWM

1.12 List three advantages and disadvantages of PPM
1.13 Compare PAM, PWM and PPM.
2.0 Digital coding of analogue Signals
2.1 List the elements of digital communication system

2.2 State sampling theorem
2.3 Define quantization in PCM,
2.4 Explain the process of quantization with waveforms.
2.5 Define quantization noise.
2.6 Define bit rate, and dynamic range for PCM systems.
2.7 Describe the coding and decoding of a PCM signal.
2.8 Explain delta modulation with block diagram.
2.9 Explain the advantages of delta modulation over PCM.
2.10 Explain adaptive delta modulation with block diagram and waveform
2.11 Compare PCM, DM and ADM
2.12 List four digital signal encoding formats
352
2.13 Explain NRZ line coding techniques.
2.14 Explain RZ line coding techniques
3.0 Digital Modulation Techniques.
3.1 State the need for digital modulation

3.2 Explain the difference between bit rate and baud rat
3.3 List the three basic types of digital modulation techniques.
3.4 Define ASK,FSK and PSK
3.5 Explain ASK modulator with block diagram.
3.6 Explain ASK coherent demodulator with block diagram
3.7 List four merits &demerits of ASK
3.8 Explain BFSK modulator with block diagram.
3.9 Explain Coherent BFSK demodulator.
3.10 List three merits & demerits of FSK.
3.11 Draw and explain BPSK modulator.
3.12 Draw and explain BPSK demodulator.
3.13 List four advantages of BPSK
3.14 Compare ASK, FSK and PSK.
3.15 Explain Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM).
3.16 State typical application areas of different digital modulation techniques.
4.0 Principles of Multiplexing techniques.
4.1 State the need for multiplexing

4.2 Explain Frequency Division Multiplexing
4.3 Explain Time Division Multiplexing.
4.4 List four merits &demerits of TDM
4.5 Compare TDM and FDM
4.6 List applications of multiplexing
4.7 Explain the use of multiplexing in Telephony
5.0 Error Detection & Correction Methods
5.1 Define the term bit overhead.

5.2 Define overhead efficiency.
5.3 Explain the conversion between parallel and serial data.
5.4 Explain the process of synchronous transmission.
353
5.5 List different types of errors during data transmission.
5.6 Mention different error detection techniques.
5.7 Explain parity check method of error detection.
5.8 Explain VRC method of error detection with an example.
5.9 Explain LRC method of error detection with an example.
5.10 Explain Checksum method of error detection.
5.11 Explain CRC method of error detection with an example.
5.12 State the advantages of CRC method of error detection.
5.13 List different error correction techniques.
5.14 Explain retransmission method of error correction.
5.15 Explain symbol substitution method of error correction.
5.16 Explain importance of hamming code in error detection and correction.
6.0 Applications of Digital communication
6.1. Mention various applications of digital communication

6.2. Classify different telephone systems
6.3. Explain the use of Signal system Seven (SS7).
6.4. Explain the use of TDM in telephony.
6.5. Explain Internet telephony/IP telephony (VOIP).
6.6. Explain about digital EPABX
6.7. State the need for a modem in data communication
6.8. List types of broadband access technologies
6.9. Explain Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) technology

6.10. State the need for multiple access techniques
6.11. List the three types of multiple access techniques
6.12. Explain Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) with a block diagram
6.13. List the features of FDMA
6.14. Explain Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) with a block diagram
6.15. List the features of TDMA
6.16. Explain the concept of spread spectrum technique
6.17. List two types of spread spectrum technique
6.18. Explain Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technique with a block diagram.
6.19. List the features of CDMA
6.20. List the advantages of CDMA Compare FDMA, TDMA and CDMA
354
Recommended Books: Recommended books:
1. Electronic communications systems by Roy Blake, Thomson Delmar

2. Analog & Digital Communication by T L Singal, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Electronic Communication System by George Kennedy.
4. Electronic Communication Systems A Complete Course –4th Edi by Schweber PHI
5. Communication systems : Analog and Digital by RP Singh, SD Spare, Tata McGraw Hill.
6. Digital Communication Systems, Simon Haykin, Wiley India, ISBN:9788126542314
7. Digital and analog communication systems, K.ShamShanmugam, Wiley India,
ISBN:978126536801.
8. Digital Communications, P. RamkrishnaRao, McGraw Hill Education (india) Pvt. Ltd. New
Delhi. ISBN-10:0-07-070776-6, ISBN-13:978-0-07-070776-4.
9. Principles of Electronic Communication Systems, Louis E. Frenzel, Tata McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, ISBN-13:978-0-07-066755-6, ISBN-10:0-07-066755-1.
10.Introduction to Analog & Digital Communications, 2ed, Haykin, Wiely India,
ISBN:9788126536535.
Suggested E learning Resources:
3. www.nptel.ac.in
4.www.youtube.com
Suggested student activities :

1.Collect and prepare a report on the functional blocks in digital
communication system such as scramblers, unscramblers, equalizers or clock recovery
circuits with specifications and applications.
2.Recognize/identify the digital modulation technique and line coding for the voice
signal transmission in telephone system and Prepare a brief handwritten report
with specifications and applications.
3. Visit a nearest telephone exchange, collect and prepare a handwritten brief report on
Modems for the communication purpose with specifications.
4.Identify the type of multiplexing used for the mobile
355
communication purpose and Prepare a handwritten brief report on any one
with specifications and applications.
5. Participation in quiz
6. Participation in Group
discussion 7.Attend seminars
8.Industrial visit
Model rubrics for assessing student activity
Scale
Dimension 1 2 3 4 5
Unsatisfactory Developing Satisfactory Good Exemplary
1. Collects very Collects a
Collects basic Collects more
Information Does not collect limited great deals of
search and information information, information,
most refer to most refer to
documentati relate to topic some relate to all refer to the
the topic the topic
on topic topic
Does not Performs all
2. Full-fills Performs Performs Performs
perform any duties of
team roles and very little nearly all almost all
duties assigned assigned team
duties duties duties duties
to the team role roles
Rarely does Usually does Always does Always does
3. Shares Always relies on the assigned the assigned the assigned the assigned
work equality others to do the work, often work, rarely work, rarely work, without
work needs needs needs needing
reminding reminding reminding. reminding
Usually does
Is always Listens and
most of the Listens, but Listens and
4. Listening talking, never alks a little
talking, rarely sometimes talks a fare
skills fallows anyone to allows others talk too much, emore than amount
else to speak to speak needed.
356
CO PO MAPPING MATRIX

Periods
CO1 Acquire knowledge on Pulse Modulation techniques R/U/A 1,2,3,9,10 10
CO2 Compare various line coding techniques R/U/A 1,2,3,9 10
CO3 Distinguish the digital modulation techniques U/A 1,2,3,9,10 12
CO4 Recognize the different types of multiplexing techniques U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10 8
CO5 Detect and correct the errors using suitable techniques R/U/A 1,2,3,9 10
CO6 Use the applications of digital communication U/A 1,2,3,9,10 10
357
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

No Unit No. U(3
Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)
3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
358
18EC-404C DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
MODEL PAPER
MID- SEM I
PART-A
Answer ALL questions. 4X1=4 Marks
1.State sampling theorem

2. Classify pulse modulation techniques.
3. Define quantization in PCM.
4. List four digital signal encoding formats.
PART-B
5(a).Draw the block diagram of PAM generation

OR
5(b) Explain PWM with waveforms.
6(a). Describe the coding of a PCM signal.

OR
6(b). Compare PCM, DM and ADM.
PART-C
7(a) Explain the generation and demodulation of PWM with block diagram
OR
7(b) Compare PAM, PWM and PPM.
8(a) Explain delta modulation with block diagram.

OR
8(b) Explain NRZ line coding techniques
359
MODEL PAPER
MID- SEM II
PART-A
4X1=4MARKS
Answer ALL questions.
1. Define the bit rate and baud rate

2. List the three basic types of digital modulation techniques.
3. State the need for multiplexing
4. List any two merits of TDM
PART-B

5(a) Explain BFSK modulator with block diagram
OR
5(b) Compare ASK, FSK and PSK
6(a) Explain Frequency Division Multiplexing

OR
6(b) List four merits & demerits of FDM
PART-C
7(a) Explain ASK modulator with block diagram

OR
7(b) Explain Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM)
8(a) Explain Time Division Multiplexing.

OR
8(b).Explain the use of multiplexing in Telephony system?
360
MODEL PAPER
PART-A
1. Define information capacity of a channel

2. List different types of errors during data transmission
3. List types of broadband access technologies
4. List four merits & demerits of TDM
5. Mention different error detection techniques
6 .State the advantages of CRC method of error detection
7. List the three types of multiple access techniques
8. State the need for a modem in data communication
PART-B
Answer ALL questions. 4X3=12Marks
9(a)Explain the generation and demodulation of PAM with block diagram

OR
9(b) Explain parity check method of error detection
10(a) Explain the use of multiplexing in Telephony system?

OR
10(b) Explain about digital EPABX
11(a) Explain the process of synchronous transmission

OR
11(b) Explain LRC method of error detection with an example
12(a) List the features of FDMA
OR
12(b) List the advantages of CDMA
PART-C
13(a) Explain the generation and demodulation of PWM with block diagram.
OR
13(b) Explain CRC method of error detection with an example.
361
14(a) Explain ASK coherent demodulator with block diagram
OR
14(b) Explain Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) with a block diagram
15(a) Explain importance of hamming code in error detection and correction with an example.
OR
15(b) Explain Checksum method of error detection.
16(a) Explain Internet telephony/IP telephony (VOIP).

OR
16(b) Explain Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technique with a block diagram.
362
18EC-405C - MICROWAVE COMMUNICATION & TELEVISION
Course Title : Microwave Communication & Course Code 18EC-405C

Television

Hrs(L:T:P)
Pre requisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of networks analysis, electronic circuits and Analog Communication.
Course Outcomes:
CO Course Outcome Linked PO Periods
CO1 1,2,3, 10
Comprehend Basic Concepts of transmission lines and
waveguides.
CO2 Explain working of microwave tubes and semiconductor 1,2,6,7 10

devices.
CO3 Explain the principle of radar systems. 1,2,9 10
CO4 Understand the working of satellite communication 1,2,5,7 10
CO5 Comprehend TV Picture & Composite video signal 1,2,5,7,10 10
CO6 Understand the basics of Colour Television and digital TV. 1,2,3,7,10 10
Course Contents:
UNIT1- Basic Concepts of transmission lines and waveguides Duration: 10 Periods (L: 7– T:3)
Transmission Lines- types and Electrical equivalent circuit- Primary and Secondary constants - group and phase
velocities - types of distortions- Reflection coefficient and SWR-relation -equation for input impedance of a
transmission line terminated with load Z L- various bands in microwave frequency range- dominant mode and cut-off
wavelength in rectangular waveguide-cut-off frequency, cut-off wavelength, guide wavelength, phase velocity, group
363
velocity and characteristic impedance in rectangular waveguide- need for microwave bends, corners and twists-
different T-Junctions-- need for isolators and circulators- need of directional coupler.
UNIT -2: Working of microwave tubes and semiconductor devices. Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8– T:2)
Need for microwave tubes-types- working and applications of Multi cavity Klystron amplifier- working of Reflex
Klystron oscillator - applications of various microwave tubes such as Klystron and magnetron- working of TWT and its
applications- need for microwave semiconductor devices-distinguish between ordinary semiconductor devices and
microwave semiconductor devices- Gunn Effect- applications of GUNN diode- working of IMPATT diode- applications
of TRAPATT diode- need for a microwave integrated circuits (MICs)- applications of micro-strip antennas.
UNIT – 3: Principles Of Radar Systems Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8– T:2)
Basic principle of Radar with a block diagram- basic Radar range equation- range performance factors from range
equation- block diagram of pulsed Radar system- need for duplexer in Radar- working of branch type Duplexer with
sketch- types of indicators used in radar systems- disadvantages of pulsed radar- principle of CW radar- block diagram
of CW radar- limitations of a CW Radar- block diagram of MTI Radar-applications of various Radar systems
UNIT-4: Working of Satellite Communication Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8– T:2)
Uses of microwave links- fixed microwave link with block diagram-need for satellite communication-
Classify satellites- advantages of satellite communication over terrestrial radio communication- features of satellites in
LEO,MEO,GEO - applications of satellites - azimuth and elevation with reference to satellites--terms apogee and
perigee- uplink frequency and down link frequency- block diagram of communication satellite-functions of a
transponder- types transponders used in satellites (single conversion, double conversion and regenerative)- working of
the three types of transponders- block diagram of Earth station
UNIT- 5: TV Picture & Composite video signal Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6– T:4)
Formation of picture- need for horizontal and vertical scanning- frame and field frequencies- need for vertical
synchronization, horizontal synchronization and blanking pulses- Important standards of T.V. transmissions
as per C.C.I.R- different types of scanning- Distinguish between progressive and interlaced scanning-
standard scanning pattern in an interlaced scanning - need for interlaced scanning with reference to
Bandwidth-different pulses in a composite video signal- positive and negative modulation-compare-
composite video signal as per I.S.I. specification- need for front porch and back porch in blanking pulses-
necessity of equalizing pulses and serrated vertical blanking pulses.
Unit-6: Basics of Colour Television and digital TV. Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8– T:2)
Main characteristic of human eye with regard to perception of colours-additive and subtractive mixing of colours-
complementary colours, hue, saturation, and Colour circle- compatibility and reverse compatibility in TV system- three
standards of Colour transmission system NTSC, PALand SECAM- chrominance signals are transmitted on one carrier
in PAL system- block diagram of a Colour TV transmitter- block diagram of a Colour TV receiver -processing of
Colour video signal (PAL system) in a Colour receiver- need of satellite for TV broadcasting over wide area - DTH and
the merits - need for Set Top Box- features of HDTV- Explain the features of SMART TV.
364
Suggested Learning Outcomes: After completing this course the student will be able to
1.0 Comprehend the Basic Concepts of Transmission lines and waveguides

1.1 List different types of Transmission Lines.
1.2 Draw the Electrical equivalent circuit of a Transmission line.
1.3 Define Primary and Secondary constants of a Transmission line.
1.4 Define group and phase velocities in transmission lines
1.5 List two types of distortions in transmission lines
1.6 Define Reflection coefficient and SWR
1.7 Derive the relation between Reflection Coefficient & SWR
1.8 Derive the equation for input impedance of a transmission line terminated with load Z L
1.11 List the various bands in microwave frequency range.
1.12 List the different types of waveguides.
1.13 Define dominant mode and cut-off wavelength in rectangular waveguide.
1.14 Give the expression for cut-off frequency, cut-off wavelength, guide wavelength, phase velocity, group velocity
and characteristic impedance in rectangular waveguide.
1.15 State the need for microwave bends, corners and twists
1.16 List different T-Junctions
1.17 State the need for isolators and circulators.
1.17 State the need of directional coupler.
2.0 Working of microwave tubes and semiconductor devices.
2.1 State the need for microwave tubes.

2.2 List the various microwave tubes.
2.3 Explain the working of Multi cavity Klystron amplifier.
2.4 List the applications of Multi cavity Klystron
2.5 Explain the working of Reflex Klystron oscillator
2.6 List the applications of various microwave tubes such as Klystron and magnetron.
2.7 Explain the working of TWT and its applications.
2.8 State the need for microwave semiconductor devices
2.9 Distinguish between ordinary semiconductor devices and microwave semiconductor devices.
2.10 Define Gunn Effect.
2.11 List the applications of GUNN diode.
2.12 Explain the working of IMPATT diode.
2.13 List the applications of IMPATT diode.
2.14 List the applications of TRAPATT diode.
2.15 State the need for microwave integrated circuits (MICs).
2.16 List the applications of micro-strip antennas.
365
3.0 Explain the principles of radar systems
3.1 State the basic principle of Radar with a block diagram.

3.2 Derive the basic Radar range equation.
3.3 Predict the range performance factors from range equation.
3.4 Draw and explain the block diagram of pulsed Radar system.
3.5 State the need for duplexer in Radar
3.6 Explain the working of branch type Duplexer with sketch.
3.7 List the types of indicators used in radar systems.
3.8 State the disadvantages of pulsed radar.
3.9 Explain the principle of CW radar.
3.10 Draw and explain the block diagram of CW radar.
3.11 List the limitations of a CW Radar
3.12 Draw and explain the block diagram of MTI Radar.
3.13 List the applications of various Radar systems.
4.0 Understand the working of satellite communication

4.1 Mention the uses of microwave links.
4.2 Explain fixed microwave link with block diagram.
4.3 State the need for satellite communication
4.4 Classify satellites.
4.5 List the advantages of satellite communication over terrestrial radio communication.
4.6 List the applications of satellites
4.7 Define azimuth and elevation with reference to satellites.
4.8 Define terms apogee and perigee.
4.9 Define uplink frequency and down link frequency
4.10 Draw and explain the block diagram of communication satellite.
4.11 List the functions of a transponder.
4.12 List three types transponders used in satellites (single conversion, double conversion and regenerative)
4.13 Explain the working of the three types of transponders.
4.14 Draw and explain the block diagram of Earth station.
5.0 Comprehend TV Picture & Composite video signal
5.1 Explain formation of picture.

5.2 State the need for horizontal and vertical scanning.
366
5.3 State the frame and field frequencies.
5.4 State need for vertical synchronization, horizontal synchronization and blanking pulses.
5.5 Mention important standards of T.V. transmissions as per C.C.I.R.
5.6 List different types of scanning
5.7 Distinguish between progressive and interlaced scanning.

5.8 Draw the standard scanning pattern in an interlaced scanning and explain.
5.9 State the need for interlaced scanning with reference to Bandwidth.
5.10 List the different pulses in a composite video signal.
5.11 Define positive and negative modulation.
5.12 State and compare positive and negative modulation.
5.13 Sketch the composite video signal as per I.S.I. specification.
5.14 State the need for front porch and back porch in blanking pulses.
5.15 State the necessity of equalizing pulses and serrated vertical blanking pulses.
6.0 Understand the basics of Colour Television and digital TV.
6.1 Explain the main characteristic of human eye with regard to perception of colours.
6.2 Distinguish between additive and subtractive mixing of colours and draw circle diagrams.
6.3 Define complementary colours, hue, saturation, luminance and chrominance, and Colour
circle.
6.4 Explain compatibility and reverse compatibility in TV system.
6.5 List three standards of Colour transmission system NTSC, PALand SECAM.
6.6 Explain how chrominance signals are transmitted on one carrier in PAL system.
6.7 Draw the block diagram of a Colour TV transmitter and state the function of each block.
6.8 Draw the block diagram of a Colour TV receiver and state the function of each block.
6.9 Explain the processing of Colour video signal (PAL system) in a Colour receiver.
6.10 State the need of satellite for TV broadcasting over wide area.
6.11 Explain DTH system and list merits of DTH system.
6.12 State the need for Set Top Box.
6.13 Explain the features of HDTV.
6.14 Explain the features of SMART TV.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. Electronic communication system by George Kennedy, TMH
2. Electronic communications systems by Roy Blake, Thomson Delmar,2002.
3. Introduction to RADAR Engineering by Merryl I Skolnik. TMH
367
4. Microwave Integrated circuits by Samuel Leo 3 ed.-Prentice Hall
5. Transmission lines umeshsinha.
6. Satellite communication by dc agarval
Suggested E-Learning resources
2. www.nptel.ac.in
4. www.nptel.ac.in
1.Students visits Library to refer to Manuals and related books of microwave Communication.
2.Student inspects the available equipment in the Lab.
3.Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with working of various radar satellite communication systems.
4. Prepare a report on the limitations of microwave signals for conventional low frequency devices.
5. Visit the local BSNL office and prepare a report on it.
6. Visit the local Microwave station and prepare a report on it.
7. Prepare a report on different types of antennas used in radar application.
8. Prepare a report on Historical background of Satellite.
9. Prepare a report on Indian satellites.
10. Prepare a report on activities of ISRO.
368
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

No Unit No. U(3
Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)
3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)
12(b) 16(b)
369
18EC-405C MICROWAVE COMMUNICATION & TELEVISION
MODEL PAPER
MID- SEM I
PART- A
Total marks:20

1. Give the expression for cut-off frequency in a rectangular waveguide.
2. Define Primary and Secondary constants of a Transmission line.
3. List any 4 microwave tubes.
4. List any 4 applications of IMPATT diode.
PART-B
Answer all questions. Each question carries three marks. 3x2=6M 5.(a) Derive the relation
between reflection co-efficient and SWR.
OR
5.(b) State the need for directional coupler .
6.(a) State the need for microwave tubes.

OR
6.(b) Distinguish between ordinary semiconductor devices and microwave devices.
PART-C
7.(a) Derive the equation for input impedance of a transmission line terminated with load Z L .
OR
7.(b) State the need for isolators and circulators.
8.(a) Explain the working of Multi-cavity Klystron Amplifier.

OR
8.(b) Explain the working of Travelling wave tube.
370
MODEL PAPER
MID- SEM II
PART- A

1. List the types of radars.
2. List the limitations of CW radar.
3. Classify satellites.
4. Define apogee and perigee.
PART-B
5. (a) State the need of duplexer in radar.

OR
5.(b) List the disadvantages of pulsed radar.
6.(a) List the functions of transponder.

OR
6.(b) Define azimuth and elevation with respect to satellites.
PART-C
7.(a) Explain the working of branch type duplexer with a sketch.

OR
7.(b) Draw and Explain the block diagram of CW radar.
8.(a) Explain fixed microwave link with a block diagram.

OR
8.(b Draw and Explain the block diagram of earth station.
371
MODEL PAPER
SEMESTER END EXAM (SEE)

TIME : 2 HOUR MAX. MARKS :
40
PART- A
Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 8X1 = 8M
1. List 2 types of distortions in transmission lines.

2. State the need for satellite communication.
3. State the frame and field frequencies.
4. State the need for synchronization.
5. Define positive modulation.
6. State the need for horizontal and vertical scanning.
7. List the primary and secondary colours.
8. Define hue and saturation.
PART-B
Answer all questions. Each question carries three marks. 4X3=12M
9.(a) State the need for isolators and circulators.

OR
(b) Draw standard interlaced scanning pattern.
10(a) Define uplink and down link frequency.

OR
(b) What is compatibility and reverse compatibility in TV ?.
11(a) State the need for front porch and back porch in blanking pulses.
OR
(b) Compare positive and negative modulation
12(a) Draw circle diagrams for additive and subtractive mixing of colours.
OR
(b) Draw the block diagram of colour TV transmitter.
PART-C
Answer all questions. Each question carries five marks. 4X5=20M
13(a) Draw and explain reflex klystron with timing diagram.

OR
(b) Draw and explain composite video signal.
14(a) Explain the working of MTI radar with block diagram.
372
OR
(b) Explain the block diagram of colour TV receiver.
15(a) Distinguish between progressive and interlaced scanning.
OR
(b) State the need for front porch and back porch in blanking pulses.
16(a) Explain the processing of Colour video signal (PAL system) in a Colour receiver.
OR
(b) Explain the features of HDTV.
373
18EC-406P - LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : Linear Integrated Lab Practice Course Code 18EC-406P

Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practicals Total Contact Hours : 45 Pds
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic skills of Handling Basic Electronics tools and Components, knowledge of connecting
cables and meters
Course Contents
List of Experiments
I. Operational Amplifier Circuits
1. Familiarize with Operational amplifier 741 and Quad Op-amp LM 324 and comparator LM 339 ICs
2. Determine the CMRR and Slew Rate of the OP-AMP.
3) Implement and test 741 Op-Amp as
a) inverting amplifier
b) Non Inverting amplifier
c) Voltage follower (Buffer),
4) Implement and test 741 Operational amplifier as
a)summing Amplifier
b) Difference amplifier
c) Scale changer (with two Op-Amps)
5. Implement Wave shaping circuits using Op-Amp
a) Implement & test Differentiator and Integrator circuits .
b) Implement & test a Voltage comparator Circuit
c ) Implement &test Op-amp Schmitt trigger and draw characteristics
II. Signal conditioning Circuits using Op-amp
6) Implement & test Current to Voltage converter using Op-amps
7. Implement & test Voltage to current converter
374
a) Implement & test a Voltage to current converter that produces a proportionate current in the range of 4mA to
20mA corresponding to input voltages from 0 to 5V
III. Opamp Oscillators &555 Timer IC
8) Implement & test Sine wave Oscillator Circuits using Op-Amp CA 3011
a) RC-phase shift oscillator
b) Wien bridge oscillator
9) a) Implement &test Monostable multi-vibrator circuit and observe output waveforms on CRO
b) Implement & test Astable multi-vibrator observe output waveforms on CRO
10) Verify different modes of 555 IC.
a) Implement Monostable multi vibrator and observe output waveforms on CRO
b) Implement Astable multivibrator and observe output waveforms on CRO
11) Verify functions of 565 Phase Locked loop IC
a) Implement 565 Phase locked loop circuit and determine VCO free running frequency Lock range , Capture Range
Practically and observe output waveforms on CRO
b) Implement Frequency demodulator using 565 and observe output waveform on CRO.
11) Use 566 as a square and Triangular wave generator
a) Implement waveform /Function generator using 566 .
b) Produce Frequency modulation using 566 and observe output waveform on CRO.
12) Verify the features of Tone Decoder IC 567 IC
( Refer to the application notes and implement following circuits)
a) Implement 10 Khz signal detector and test
b) Implement frequency Doubler and test .
13) Implement &Test Precision Rectifier using Op-amp
14) Assemble Audio Power Amplifier circuit using LM 380 IC and Test the performance.
3. www.nptel.ac.in
375
(i) Collection of catalogues and specification sheets, preparation of a chart displaying symbols of passive
components and connectors/cables.
(ii) Collection of the contributors (scientists) and contribution details to the field of Electrical and Electronics
engineering
(iv) Record the best practices used in the disposal of E-waste and precautions
in the operation of electrical appliances.
Course Outcome Linked PO No of Periods

CO1 Analyze op-amp characteristics and apply the knowledge of op- 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 21
amp in basic applications
CO2 Apply the knowledge of Op-amp in Signal conditioning circuits 1,2,3,4 9

CO3 Design and test the working of Timers, PLL 1,2,3 6
CO4 Design simple circuits using op-amp and implement 1,2,3,10 9
376
18EC-407P - DIGITAL COMMUNICATION LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : Digital Communication Lab Practice Course Code 18EC-407P

Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Hours : 45Pds
Pre requisites
This course requires the Basic Knowledge of analog communication, digital electronics.
Course outcomes

Hours
CO1 Analyze a Pulse modulation system and interpret the R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 21
modulated and demodulated waveforms.
CO2 Demonstrate TDM and FDM process using Pulse R/U/A 1,2,3,4 6
amplitude modulation signals
CO3 Analyze digital modulation and demodulation techniques. R/U/A 1,2,3,4 12
CO4 Verify the generation and decoding of DTMF signals A 1,2,3,10 6
45
Course Contents
I. Pulse Modulation Techniques
1. Implement an op-amp sample and hold circuit and test
2. Implement D/A converter using R-2R ladder network/Binary Weighted type.
3 .a) Verify sampling theorem and observe waveforms on CRO
b) Sample an analog signal (using IC 398) at Nyquist rate and above Nyquist rate. And observe the waveforms
4. Verify and observe Pulse amplitude modulation and demodulation waveforms on CRO
5. Verify pulse position modulation and demodulation waveforms on CRO
6. Verify and observe Pulse Width modulation and demodulation waveforms on CRO
377
7. Verify and observe Pulse Code Modulation and Demodulation waveforms on CRO
8. Verify and observe Delta modulation and demodulation waveforms on CRO
II. Time Division &Frequency Division Multiplexing
9. Verify 2-channel TDM and observe input/output waveforms on CRO
10. Verify FDM and observe input/output waveforms on CRO
III. Signal Encoding (Keying ) Techniques
11. Generate and demodulate ASK signal and observe input/output waveforms on CRO
12. Generate and demodulate FSK signal and observe input/output waveforms on CRO
13. Generate and demodulate PSK signal
14. Observe line encoder &Decoder ( NRZ Signal)waveforms on CRO for
a) Unipolar and b) Bipolar techniques
IV. DTMF Signaling
15 Generate and decode DTMF signals using UM91214B IC/5089IC or any other equivalent ICs and observe the
waveforms on CRO
(i) Collection of catalogues and specification sheets, preparation of a chart displaying symbols of passive
components and connectors/cables.
(ii) Collection of the contributors (scientists) and contribution details to the field of Electrical and Electronics
engineering
(iv) Record the best practices used in the disposal of E-waste and precautions
in the operation of electrical appliances.
1. Electronics laboratory primer, S. Poorna Chandra, B.Sasikala, S. Chand Technical
Publication. ISBN 81-219-2459-6
2. Digital Communications, Dr. K.N.HariBhat and Dr.D.GaneshRao, III Edition, Sanguine
Technical Publishers.
3. www.nptel.ac.in
378
18EC-408P - Microcontroller Programming lab Practice
Course Title : Microcontroller Programming lab Course Code 18EC-408P

Practice
Semester IV Course Group :Core

Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Hours : :45Pds
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic skills of Handling digital circuits and computer.
Course outcomes:

PO Hours
CO1 Execute programs for data manipulation. R/U/A 1,2,3,4,10

9
CO2 Execute programs to perform and arithmetic and R/U/A 1,2,3,4,10

15
logical functions.
CO3 Write and execute programs to meet a requirement.. R/U/A 1,2,3,4,10 9
CO4 Implement time delays by writing programs. R/U/A 1,2,3,4,10

12
45
379
Course Contents
List of Experiments
I. Programs related to data transfer instructions.
1. a) Write an assembly language program (ALP) to move the data from one register to another.
b) Write an ALP to move the data from internal RAM one location to another.
2. a) Write an ALP to move the data from external RAM one location to another.
b) Write an ALP to move the data from external RAM internal RAM and vice versa.
3. a) Write an ALP to exchange the data between two registers.
b) Write an ALP to exchange the data between two internal RAM locations.
II. Programs on arithmetic instructions.
4. a) Write an ALP to add two binary numbers in i-RAM location.
b) Write an ALP to add two binary numbers in OFF chip-RAM location.
5. a) Write an ALP to add two decimal numbers in OFF chip-RAM location.
b) Write an ALP to add two decimal numbers in OFF chip-RAM location and store the carry in any reg.
6. a) Write an ALP to add two 16-bit binary numbers in i-RAM location.
b) Write an ALP to subtract two binary numbers in registers and store the diff. In i-RAM.
7. Write an ALP to multiply two binary numbers.
III. Programs on logical instructions.
8. a) Write an ALP to mask the higher order nibble.

b) Write an ALP to mask the lower order nibble.
9. a) Write an ALP to mask any one bit only of the binary number.
b) Write an ALP to rotate a number left twice with carry set.
10. a) Write an ALP to rotate a number right twice with carry reset.
b) Write an ALP to find the a) 1’s complement b )2’s complement of a given number.
IV. Programs to perform Data Transfer
11. a) Write an ALP to transfer a block of data from internal RAM overlap.to external RAM with
b) Write an ALP to transfer a block of datafrom external RAM to internal RAM without overlap.
12. Write an ALP to add block of decimal numbers present in internal RAM. Store the sum and carry in registers.
13. Write an ALP to test if a given number is present in the block of data.
14. a) Write an ALP to arrange a block of data in ascending order.
b) Write an ALP to arrange a block of data in descending order.
V. Counters/ &Timers
15. a) Implement a HEX up/down counter - (Program should check value @R0=0X30, if 0X30=0 then up counter else
down counter)
b) Write a program in assembly language to produce required time delay a) by Using instructions only b) by
using Timers
380
18EC-409P MATLAB PRACTICE
Course Title : MATLAB Practice Course Code 18EC-409P
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practicals Total Contact Hours : 45 Pds
Pre requisites
This course requires the knowledge of basic understanding of Arrays, Matrices, Analog Communication and Digital
Communication.
Course Contents
Unit-1: Practice with MATLAB Environment
1. To acquaint with MATLAB windows: Command window, Editor Window, Figure window, Command
history window, Current directory window, Workspace window
2. Know about data types in MATLAB
3. Practice with mathematical operators
4. Write a mathematical expression in MATLAB
5. Practice with MATLAB statements
6. Practice with conditional control statements such as if-end, if-else-end, if-else if-else if-else-end
7. Practice with loop control statements such as for loop and while loop
8. Write a program to compute roots of a quadratic equation ax2+bx+c=0given a, b and c

9. Create and print simple plots
10. To create, save & Execute a script file
11. Create and execute a function file
12. Plot simple graphs using f-plot function
13. Plot a sine wave with title and labels
14. Plot simple graphs using ez-plot function
15. Plot simple graphs using ezsurfc function
16. Know about Simulink
17. Practice with Simulink
Unit-2: Implement programs using Arrays and Matrices
1. Access elements of array
2. Write a program to sort an array in descending order and execute
381
3. Write a MATLAB program for an addition of scalar to an array and execute
4. Write MATLAB program to multiply an array by scalar and execute
5. Write a MATLAB program to add two arrays and execute
6. Write a program to create a matrix
7. Write a MATLAB program to find transpose, determinant and inverse of a matrix
8. Practice with MATLAB mathematical operators on matrices such as addition, subtraction and multiplication
9. Compute mean, median, standard deviation and variance of a set of data using formulae and
verify using built-in function..
Unit-3: Demonstrate Skills using MATLAB to simulate generation of required signal
1. Execute the given MATLAB program to generate message signal and simulate
2. Execute the given MATLAB program to generate carrier signal and simulate it
3. Simulate the given MATLAB program to generate AM modulated signal
4. Execute the given MATLAB program to generate DSBSC modulated signal and simulate it
5. Execute the given MATLAB program generate FM modulated signal and simulate it
6. Execute the given MATLAB program to generate PAM signal and simulate
1. Practice with MATLAB environment
2. Write and Simulate different programs
2. Apply the MATLAB environment for developing simple programs

CO1 Practice with MATLAB Environment 1,2,3,4,5,6,7
CO2 Implement programs using Arrays and Matrices 1,2,3,4,10

CO3 Demonstrate Skills using MATLAB to simulate generation of 1,2,3,4,10
required signal
3. www.nptel.ac.in
Reference Book:
1. MATLAB programming by Y. Kirani Singh and B.B. Chaudhuri, PHI.
2. Getting started with MATLAB by RudraPratap, Oxford University Press
382
Advanced Communication Skills and Life Skills
Course Title Advanced Communication Skills and Life Course Code 18 EC- 410 P
Skills
Semester IV Course Group Foundation
Teaching Scheme 15:0:30 Credits 1.5
in Periods- L:T:P
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact 45 Periods
Hours (3 Periods per
Week)
Rationale:
This course is designed to impart writing skills and employability skills to the students of diploma
which will help them in obtaining and maintaining the employment.
Prerequisites:
This course requires the basic knowledge of vocabulary, grammar and four language learning skills,
viz. Listening, Speaking, Reading and Writing.
Course Outcomes:
Modules At the end of the course the students will have the ability
to:
Prepare a presentation.
Use presentation aids effectively.
Presentation Skills
Develop public speaking skills.
Learn to make PowerPoint Presentations effectively.
Present a Paper using appropriate body language.
Learn kinds of reports.
Learn the format of a report.
Writing Reports
Organise ideas.
Develop essential vocabulary useful to write scientific and
technical reports.
Learn the techniques to face an interview.
Learn the etiquette to communicate with employers.
Interview Skills
Learn the dos and don’ts of an interview.
Learn the frequently asked questions in interviews.
Use appropriate body language.
Learn to face interviews telephonically.
383
Gain the confidence to face an interview by attending
mock interview.
Learn the dos and don’ts of a Group Discussion.
Participate in a Group Discussion in a healthy manner.
Use effective non-verbal communication.
Group Discussion
Use appropriate phrases and expressions useful in a group
discussion.
Learn workplace etiquette.

Identify the knowledge, skills and attributes useful at
workplace.
Workplace Awareness
Build strong workplace relationships.
Learn professional ethics.
Understand gender equality at the workplace
Develop a sense of responsibility towards the society.
Learn various writing formats useful at workplace.
Develop an ability to apply technical information in
documentation.
Revise and edit written documents effectively.
Writing Skills Useful at Workplace Develop corresponding skills - learn the kinds of business
letters - the format of a business letter.
Learn effective e-mail writing skills.
Learn Business Memos.
Learn Notes and Narratives.
Learn Forms and Applications.
Prepare templates for different purposes.
Prepare an agenda of a meeting.
Prepare the minutes of a meeting.
Prepare Notices / Circulars for various purposes.
Prepare Press release.
CO-PO Matrix

CO 1 Making effective presentations R/U/A 1, 2, 3,4, 5,6,7,8,9,10
384
CO 2 Writing scientific and technical reports R/U/A 1,2,3,4, 5,6,7,8,9,10
CO 3 Learn to face oral and telephonic R/U/A 1,2,3,4, 7,9,
interviews
CO 4 Learn to face group discussion R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9
CO 5 Learn to write various formats useful R/U/A 1,2,3,5,7,8,9,10
at workplace
CO6 Learn workplace etiquette and ethics R/U/A 1,2,3,7,8,9,10
Course Contents:
VII. Presentation Skills Duration: 6
periods
VIII. Writing Reports Duration: 9
periods
IX. Interview Skills Duration: 9 periods
X. Group Discussion Duration: 6 periods
XI. Workplace Awareness Duration: 6 periods
XII. Writing Skills Useful at Workplace Duration: 9
periods

 Paper Presentations
 Seminars
 Mock Interviews
 Telephonic Interviews
 Group Discussions
 Role Plays
 Creating advertisements
 Five-minute activities
 Creating a model of workplace
Evaluation Pattern:
III. Continuous Internal Examination: 60 Marks
d. Mid Sem - I 20 marks

Syllabus:
385
i. Presentation Skills
ii. Writing Reports
e. Mid Sem – II: 20 Marks

Syllabus:
i. Interview Skills
ii. Group Discussion
f. Internal assessment: 20 marks
iv. Seminars: 10 marks

v. Assignments: 5 marks
vi. Lab record submission: 5 marks
IV. Semester End Examination : 40 Marks
a. Write an essay on a given topic or participate in an activity: 15 Marks

b. Interview or Group Discussion: 15 Marks
c. Viva Voce 10 marks
References:
Adair, John. Effective Communication. London: Pan Macmillan Ltd., 2003.
Ajmani, J. C. Good English: Getting it Right. New Delhi: Rupa Publications, 2012.
Amos, Julie-Ann. Handling Tough Job Interviews. Mumbai: Jaico Publishing, 2004.
Collins, Patrick. Speak with Power and Confidence. New York: Sterling, 2009.
Fensterheim, Herbert and Jean Baer. Don't Say Yes When You Want To Say No. New York: D
Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeeta Sharma. Technical Communication: Principles and Practice.
Second Edition. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2011
E-Learning Resources:
http://www.dailywritingtips.com/
http://www.englishdaily626.com/c-errors.php
http://www.owlnet.rice.edu/~cainproj/
http://www.thehumorsource.com/
http://www.indiabix.com/group-discussion/topics-with-answers/
http://networketiquette.net/
https://public.wsu.edu/~brians/errors
http://www.bbc.co.uk/worldservice/learningenglish/radio/specials/15
FOURTH SEMESTER COMMON-410P
ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND LIFE SKILLS
386
MID SEM - I
Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Answer any one of the following questions.
1. Write the guidelines for preparing a PowerPoint presentation.
2. How do you prepare yourself for presenting a technical paper?
3. Mention a few presentation aids and how do you use them effectively?
Part – B 10 marks
4. Write the format of a report and describe it.
5. Write a report on the accident you have seen recently.
6. Give the outline of a project report and describe it.

FOURTH SEMESTER COMMON-410P
387
MID SEM - II
Part – A 10 marks
1. What are the dos and don’ts for a formal interview?
2. What at least ten frequently asked questions in a formal interview?
3. How do you prepare for a telephonic interview?
Part – B 10 marks
4. What are the dos and don’ts of a group discussion?
5. Mention some phrases and expressions commonly used in a group discussion.
6. Write a short paragraph on the steps you take while participating in a group discussion.
388
FOURTH SEMESTER 18 COMMON-410P
SEMESTER END EXAM
Part – A 10 marks
Instruction: Pick any one question from the given lot.

1. Prepare the outline of a project report and describe it.
2. Write the guidelines for preparing the slides of a PowerPoint presentation.
3. Write the minutes of the meeting conducted at the Principal’s chamber to conduct the
annual day celebrations. Prepare the agenda of the annual day celebrations.
4. Describe the workplace etiquette.
5. Prepare a press note for the ‘Job Mela’ which is going to be conducted at your institute.
Part – B 15 marks
6. Interview / Group Discussion

Part – C 15 marks
7. Viva Voce
389
SKILL UPGRADATION - IV
Course Title : Skill Upgradation -IV Course Code :Common

Teaching Scheme in periods ( L : : 0:0:7 Credits : 2.5
Methodology : Activities Total : 105
Contact
Rationale: This course is introduced for all semesters with a purpose of providing outside classroom experiences that
lead to overall development of the students. One whole day is allocated for activities.
Course Objective
To create an awareness on Engineering Ethics and Human Values.

Course Content
Activity
Periods Frequency
No Activity
Haritha Haram(plantation &Maintenance) 3 times in a

1 9
semester
Waste management 3 times in a

2 12
semester
Swatch Bharat 4 times in a

3 28
semester
Mini projects 1 time in a

4 7
semester
Video Clips 3 times in a

5 9
semester
Seminar/Quiz/Presentation/Group discussion 6 times in a

6 18
semester
Expert Lectures
8 • Ethical issues in engineering practice 16 4 Times
390
• Environmental ethics
391
• E-Waste Disposal-Semi conductor waste
• Motor Vehicles Act
• Emerging technologies
• Indian Culture and Yoga
Total Periods 105
Note: in case Expert faculty are not available English faculty may handle the expert lectures or Video clips on
the suggested lectures may be played
Course Outcomes
CO Outcome CO/PO
Mapping
profession.

COURSE CONTENT:
Ethical issues in engineering practice

Ethical issues–Industrial standards-Environmental ethics –Plastic waste disposal-E-Waste Disposal-Semi conductor
waste Disposal-Industrial waste disposal-Human centered environmental ethics- computer ethics –Types of issues-
Computer as the Instrument and Object of Unethical Acts -Engineers as managers-Codes of ethics-Sample code of
Ethics like -Institution of Engineers(India)-Institute of Electrical & Electronics engineers- Institute of Electronics &
Telecommunication Engineers - Indian Institute of Materials Management.
Evaluation:
The student must maintain a record of all activities conducted on skill upgradtion/ Activities day and prepare a soft copy
of report and submit it to their mentor or upload to the institute website or mail.
The reports shall be evaluated by the mentors though rubrics and accordingly give the eligibility for 2.5 credits . The
student must have participated in at least 75% of activities to get eligibility.
392
CO4
CO3
CO2
CO1
CourseOutcomes
✓
PO1
Basicknowledge
PO2
DisciplineKnowledge
PO3
Experimentsandpractice
PO4
EngineeringTools
✓
✓
✓
PO5
Engineer andsociety
✓
PO6
Environment
&sustainability
✓
✓
PO7
Ethics
PO8
Individual
andTeamwork
✓
PO9
Communication
✓
✓
✓
✓
PO10
Lifelonglearning
5,10
5,10
5,7,10
6,7,9,10
Mapped POs
Electronics &
Communication
Engineering
Semester-V
394
C-18 DECE SEMESTER V TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME
395
Instruction
Continuous Internal
Periods per Semester End Examination (SEE)
Evaluation (CIE)
week
Total
S.
Periods Credit
NO Code Course Name Min marks
per s Mid Mid Max
Internal Min Total for passing
L T P semester Sem Sem mark
Evaluation marks Marks including
1 2 s
internal
Industrial
18EC-
1 Management & 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
501F
Entrepreneurship
18EC- Industrial
2 502C Electronics 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
18EC - Data
503C Communication
3 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
and Computer
Networks
18EC- Elective1
504E (A) Electronic
Measuring
4 Instruments 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 14 100 35
(B) Digital
Circuit Design
using Verilog
18EC- Elective2
505E (A) Mobile &
Optical Fibre
5 3 1 0 60 3 20 20 20 40 20 100 35
Communication
(B) Basics of
VLSI circuits
18EC - Industrial
6 506P Electronics Lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Practice
18EC- Computer
7 507P Hardware and 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Networking
Lab
18EC- 8086
8 508P Microprocessor 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
Lab Practice
18EC- Programming
9 509P in C Lab 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
practice
18EC- Project Work
10 1 0 2 45 1.5 20 20 20 40 20 100 50
510P
Skill
11 0 0 7 105 2.5 0 0 Rubrics -- -
Upgradation
TOTAL 20 5 1 630 25 100 100 400 400 170 1000 425
Note: For Activities student performance is to be 7assessed through Rubrics.
1. Cumulative 35% (Mid sem 1 + Mid sem 2+ Tutorials+ End examination) and minimum marks in end examination is 35% (i.e.14marks).
2. If the cumulative of CIE is less than 35% (i.e.21 marks out of 60) therefore more than 35% of SEE is required to get overall 35%.
396
18EC-501F -INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT & ENTREPRENEURSHIP
This course is common with DCME, DEEE, DEIE & DFWT
Pre requisites:
Course Title : Industrial Management & Course Code 18EC-501F

Entrepreneurship
Semester V Course Group Foundation
Periods(L:T:P)
This course requires the basic knowledge of management and Entrepreneur skills.
Course Outcomes: After completion of the course the student will be able to attain the following
outcomes
CO Course Outcome Course Periods

Level
CO1 To become aware of business and management concepts. R/U 10
CO2 Analyze the various rules and regulations required for the R/U/A 6
planning of factory and its staff.
CO3 Analyse balance sheet and various budget issues. R/U/A 10
CO4 Optimize the material required and its management R/U/A 12

economically.
CO5 Apply the quality management and know the analysis R/U/A 10
procedure for quality.
CO6 Develop entrepreneur skills to establish a small scale R/U/A 12

industry
Course Content
1.0 Overview of Business, Management Process and Organization Management :

Business - types of business in various sectors- service, manufacturing & trade- Industrial
sectors – Engineering, process, Textile, Chemical, Agro industries – Globalization and effect of
globalization – advantages and Disadvantages- Intellectual Property Rights (I.P.R.)- Concept of
management – levels of management – Scientific management – by FW Taylor – Principles of
management- functions of management – Administration – management, Organization – types
of organization( line, line & staff, staff & project) – Departmentation – Classification
(centralized, decentralized, Authority, Responsibility, and span of control – Forms of
Ownership – Proprietorship – Partnership – Joint stock – Co-operative society and Government
sectors.
2.0 Human resource Management

397
Personal Management – Staffing – Introduction to HR planning – Recruitment procedures –
Types of Trainings –Personal training – skill development training – Leaderships – types –
Motivation – Maslow’s theory – Causes of accidents – safety precautions – Indian Factory Act –
Workmen’s compensation Act – Industrial disputes Act- ESI Act.
3.0 Finance Management

Introduction – Objectives of Financial Management – Types of capitals – sources of raising
capital – Types of budgets – production budgets – labour budgets – Concept of Profit loss
Account – Concept of balance sheet – proforma – types of taxes – brief concepts of – Excise
Tax, Service Tax, Income Tax, VAT and custom duty.
4.0 Material Management

Inventory Management – objectives of Inventory Management – ABC Analysis – Economic
order Quality – Purchasing – Objectives of purchasing – Functions – Procedures – Material
Management.
5.0 Project Management

Introduction – CPM & PERT – concept of Break event Analysis – quality system - Definition of
Quality , concept of Quality , Quality policy, Quality control, Quality Circle, Quality Assurance,
Introduction to TQM- Kaizen 5’s and 6 sigma concepts, ISO 9000 series standards- Merits and
drawbacks of ISO series standards.
6.0 Entrepreneurship and Supporting Institutions

Qualities of entrepreneurer-Manager- entrepreneur and technical entrepreneurer-Advantages of
being an entrepreneurer-Functions of entrepreneurer-Types of entrepreneurer and their
meaning- Role of entrepreneurship in economy development-Barriers to entrepreneurship-
Mention different types of industries-Definitions of small scale industry-Features of SSI-
Mention the objectives of developing SSIs-Scope of SSI in terms of various activies-Meritis of
SSIs-Explain the important steps involved in starting an SSI-Definition of startup company-
start up development basis-state level and national levelsources of information-various central
Government institutions and their funcrtions(like NSIC,SIDO,SISI and SSIB)- Telangana State
industry policy-Demographic merits of Telanagana state to set up SSIs-Names of state level
institutions and their functions(Like SSIDC,DIC,APIITCO)-Banks that support SSIs like
SIDBI,APSFC-Thrust areas and core sector as per Telanaga state industry policy-Classification
of the projects as per TSIP-Special assistance schemes for women and SC/ST entrepreneurers-
Features of TS-IPASS.
Suggested Learning Outcomes: Upon completion of the course the student should be able to
1.0 Explain the basics of Business, Management and Organization
1.1 Define Business
1.2 State the Types of Business ( Service, Manufacturing, Trade)
1.3 Explain about the various industrial sectors like engineering, process, textile, Agro based
industries.
1.4 State the need for Globalization.
1.5 List the Advantages & Disadvantages of globalization w.r.t. India.
1.6 Explain the importance of Intellectual Property Rights (I.P.R.)
1.6 Define Management.
1.7 Explain the concept of management
1.8 Explain the Different Levels of management
1.9 Explain Administration & management
398
1.10 State the principles of Scientific management by F.W.Taylor
1.11 State the principles of Management by Henry Fayol (14 principles)
1.12 List the Functions of Management
i) Planning ii) Organizing iii) Directing iv) Controlling
1.13 Define Organization
1.14 List the Types of organization :a) Line b) Line & staff c) Functional d) Project
1.15 Explain the four types of organization.
1.16 Define departmentalization.
1.17 Explain the following types of departmentalizations
i) Centralized & Decentralized ii) Authority & Responsibility iii) Span of Control
1.18 Explain the Forms of ownership
i)Proprietorship ii) Partnership iii) Joint stock iv) Co-operative Society v)Govt. Sector
2.0 Appreciate the need for Human Resource Management
2.1 Define Personal Management.
2.2 Explain the functions of Personal Management
2.3 Define Staffing .
2.4 State the importance of HR Planning.
2.5 Explain the various Recruitment Procedures.
2.6 Explain the need for Training & Development .
2.7 State the various types of training procedures( Induction, Skill Enhancement etc)
2.8 State the different types of Leaderships.
2.9 Explain the Maslow’s Theory of Motivation.
2.10 Explain the Causes of accident and the Safety precautions to be followed.
2.11 Explain the importance of various Acts – Indian Factory Act, ESI Act, Workmen Compensation
Act, Industrial Dispute Act etc.
3.0 Explain the basics of Financial Management
3.1 State the Objectives of Financial Management.
3.2 State the Functions of Financial Management.
3.3. State the necessity of Capital Generation & Management.
3.4 List the types of Capitals.
3.5 List the Sources of raising Capital.
3.6 Explain the Types of Budgets
i) Production Budget (including Variance Report ) ii) Labour Budget.
3.7 Explain Profit & Loss Account ( only concepts) .
3.8 Explain the proforma of Balance Sheet.
3.9 Explain i) Excise Tax , ii) GST iii) Income Tax
4.0 Explain the importance of Materials Management
4.1. Define Inventory Management (No Numerical).
399
4.2 State the objectives of Inventory Management.
4.3 Explain ABC Analysis.
4.4 State Economic Order Quantity.
4.5 Explain the Graphical Representation of Economic Order Quantity.
4.6 State the objectives of Purchasing.
4.7 State the functions of Purchase Department.
4.8 Explain the steps involved in Purchasing.
4.9 State the Modern Techniques of Material Management.
5.0 Explain the importance of Project Management and Quality Assurance
5.1 State the meaning of Project Management.
5.2 Explain the CPM & PERT Techniques of Project Management.
5.3 Distinguish between CPM & PERT techniques.
5.4 Identify the critical path and find the project duration using CPM & PERT techniques
(solve problems on CPM and PERT).
5.5 Explain the concept of Break Even Analysis.
5.6 Define Quality.
5.7 State the concept of Quality.
5.8 Explain the various Quality Management systems.
5.9 Explain the importance of Quality policy, Quality control, Quality Circle.
5.10 State the principles of Quality Assurance.
5.10 State the concepts of TQM, Kaizen 5’s and 6 sigma.
5.12 State the constituents of ISO 9000 series standards.
5.13 Merits and draw backs of ISO 9000 series standards.
6.0. Entrepreneurship and supporting Institutions
6.1 Explain the concept of entrepreneurship.
6.2 Mention the qualities of entrepreneur.
6.3 Distinguish between manager-entrepreneur and technical entrepreneur.
6.4 Mention the advantages of being an entrepreneur.
6.5 List the functions of entrepreneur.
6.6 Mention the important types of entrepreneur and their meaning.
6.7 Explain the role of entrepreneurship in economic development.
6.8 Mention the barriers to entrepreneurship.
6.9 Mention different types of Industries.
6.10 Define Small scale industry.
6.11 List the features of SSI.
400
6.12 Mention the objectives of developing SSIs.
6.13 Explain the scope of SSI in terms of various activities.
6.14 List the merits of SSIs.
6.15 Explain the important steps involved in starting an SSI.
6.16 Define a start up company.
6.17 Explain various start up development phases
6.18 Name the state level and National level sources of information
6.19 Mention the various Central government institutions and their functions
(like NSIC , SIDO, SISI_SSIB)
6.20 Explain Telangana state industry policy.
6.21 Mention the demographic merits of Telangana state to set up SSIs.
6.22 Mention the names of State level institutions and their functions (like SSIDC, DIC, APITCO)
6.23 List the banks that support SSIs like SIDBI, APSFC.
6.24 List the thrust areas and Core sectors as per Telangana state industry policy.
6.25 Classify the projects as per TSIP.
6.26 Mention Special assistance schemes for women and SC/ST entrepreneurs.
6.27 Mention the features of TS-iPASS.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Industrial Engg &Management by Dr. O.P. Khanna - Dhanpath Rai & sons New Delhi
2. Business Administration &Management Dr. S.C. Saxena & W.H. Newman& E.Kirby Warren-
Sahitya Bhavan Agra
3. The process of Management by Andrew R. McGill - Prentice Hall
4. Industrial Management by Rustom S. Davar - Khanna Publication
5. Total Quality Management, S Raja Ram, M Shivashankar
6. Industrial management and organizational behaviour, K.K.Ahuja
1.http: jiem.org/index.php/jiem
2. https://dipp.gov.in
3. www.worldwidelearn.com/online-education-guide/business/industrial-management-major.htm
401
1. Student visits Library to refer to Management courses.

2. Student observes the solo and partnership business establishments near by and prepare a report
about the activities.
3. Identify any one product, being manufactured in local industry, study the process they are
following for manufacturing the product, submit hand written report.
4. Visit a nearby industry, make a report on Plant layout, type of production, quality system is put
in practice and quality tools they are using in work place.
5. Motivate student to take case study on plant maintenance of nearby industry, observe type
of maintenance they undertake in their industry.
6. Each student should prepare a detailed project report on selected product.
7. Visit a local industry and list the safety precautions carried out there.
8. Meet a local Entrepreneur and prepare a report on his success story.
9. Quiz.
10. Group discussion.
11. Surprise test.
Co-Po Mapping Matrix

PO Hours
CO1 To become aware of business and management. R/U 1,2 10
CO2 Analyze the various rules and regulations required for R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7 6
the planning of factory and its staff.
CO3 Analyse the balance sheet and understanding of various R/U/A 1,2,9 10
budget issues.
CO4 Analyse the material required and its management R/U/A 1,2,5,7 12
economically.
CO5 Analyze the quality management and know the analysis R/U/A 1,2,5,10 10
procedure for quality.
CO6 Able to establish a small scale industry by knowing the R/U/A 1,2,3,7,10 12
enterprenuer skills.
402
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl
Unit No. U(3
Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6
11(a) 15(a)

3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8
12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
MID SEM -1 MODEL QUESTION PAPER 18EC-501F
403
PART- A
Total marks:20
5. Define business.
6. Define organization.
7. What are the different types of Leaderships?
8. Define personnel management.
PART-B
5.(a) State the need for Globalization .
OR
5.(b) Briefly explain Proprietor form of business ownership.
6.(a) Briefly explain the need for Training & Development .
OR
6.(b) What are the Causes of accident in an industry.
PART-C
7.(a) State the principles of Scientific management by F.W.Taylor .
OR
7.(b) Explain the line and staff type of organisation.
8.(a) Explain the Maslow’s Theory of Motivation.
OR
8.(b) Explain various features of Indian Factory Act.
404
MID SEM -II MODEL QUESTION PAPER 18EC-501F
PART- A
Total marks:20
1. List the types of Capitals.
2. Mention any two objectives of financial management.
3. Define inventory management.
4. List any two objectives of purchasing.
PART-B
5. (a) What is the necessity of Capital Generation?
OR
5.(b) Briefly explain Profit & Loss Account .
6.(a) State the Modern Techniques of Material Management.
OR
6.(b) What are the steps involved in Purchasing?
PART-C
7.(a) Explain about production budget.
OR
7.(b) Explain the proforma of balance sheet.
8.(a) Explain ABC analysis .
OR
8.(b) Explain the Graphical Representation of Economic Order Quantity.
405
SEMESTER END EXAM (SEE) - MODEL QUESTION PAPER 18EC-501F
PART- A
Total marks: 40
Answer all questions. Each question carries one mark. 1x8 = 8M
1. Define Staffing.
2. List the types of Capitals.
3. State the concept of Quality.
4. List the functions of entrepreneur.
5. What is meant by Project Management?
6. What is meant by Quality Assurance?
7. Define Small scale industry.
8. Define a start up company.
PART-B
9.(a) Write salient features of partnership type of business ownership.
OR
9.(b) Explain briefly the importance of Quality policy .
10.(a) What is meant by GST?
OR
10.(b). Mention the barriers to entrepreneurship.
. 11.(a) What are the concepts of TQM?
OR
11.(b) Explain the importance of Quality control.
12.(a) Explain briefly the role of entrepreneurship in economic development.
OR
12.(b) Mention the features of TS-iPASS.
406
PART-C
13.(a) Explain the principles of Management by Henry Fayol.
OR
13.(b) Explain the concept of Break Even Analysis .
14.(a) Explain the labour budget.
OR
14.(b) Explain the important steps involved in starting an SSI .
15.(a) Draw a network diagram and find out project duration for the following activities.
Activity 1-2 1-3 1-4 2-6 3-5 4-5 5-6 6-7

Duration 4 2 3 5 1 2 2 7
in days
OR
15.(b) Explain the importance of quality circle .
16.(a) Explain briefly Telangana state industry policy .
OR
16.(b) What are the special assistance schemes provided for women entrepreneurs.
407
18EC-502C - Industrial Electronics
Course Title : Industrial Electronics Course Code 18EC-502C

Semester V Course Group Core
Periods(L:T:P)
This course is common with 18EE-503E(A)
Pre requisites:
This course requires the knowledge of electronic devices and semiconductor devices operation
Course Outcomes : After Completion of the course the student will be able to attain the following
outcomes
CO Learning Outcome Outcome Level Periods
CO1 : Compare various power electronic device characteristics; 1,2,10 12

identify their Application and identify the use of UPS
and SMPS.
CO2 : Identify the use of choppers, rectifiers and inverters. 1,2,5,6,7 08
CO3 : Apply sensor for various applications 1,2,9 10
CO4 : Explain different welding techniques 1,2,5,7 10
CO5 : Use the concepts of PLC & SCADA for industrial 1,2,5 12
applications
CO6 : Develop an understanding of control systems 1,2,3,7 08
1. Power Electronic Devices Duration: 12 Periods (L: 10– T:2)

Different thyristor family devices- circuit symbols - Constructional details of SCR- Working of SCR
using two Transistor analogy- Volt-Ampere characteristics of SCR- Ratings of SCR- forward break over
voltage, latching current, holding current, turn on triggering time, turn off time of SCR- volt-ampere
characteristics of Diac &Triac under forward/Reverse bias- SUS, SBS, SCS & LASCR- SCR circuit
triggering by UJT - input and Output waveforms- Use of SCR in single phase and three phase Power
rectifiers- Volt-ampere characteristics of Diac - Volt-ampere characteristics of Triac- Phase control
circuit using Diac and Triac for AC power control- input and output waveforms. Need for protection
of power devices- Important specifications of power electronic devices from Manufacturer’s data sheet -
Important applications of power electronic devices- working of a) Off Line UPS b) Online UPS- PWM
408
Voltage control of UPS- Limitations of series Voltage regulated power supplies- Working of SMPS
with block diagram- Applications of SMPS- Working of Servo stabilizer .
2.0 Identify the use of choppers, rectifiers and inverters. Duration:08 Periods (L: 6– T:2)
Need for a chopper- types of choppers- principle of operation of choppers-need for a controlled rectifier-
single phase half-wave controlled rectifier- single phase full -wave controlled rectifier- 3-phase half-
wave controlled rectifier- 3- phase full -wave controlled rectifier-Define inverters- need for an inverter-
types of inverters- series inverter- parallel inverter.
3.0 Transducers &Ultrasonics Duration:10 Periods (L: 8– T:2)

Classification of transducers on the basis of principle of operation and applications- Working principle,
construction and applications of strain gauge- Working principle, construction and applications of
potentiometric transducer- Working principle, construction of capacitive and inductive transducers-
Important applications of transducers- Working principle, construction and applications of LVDT-
Working principle and construction of Piezo electric transducer-Uses for the Piezo electric transducer-
Working principle of RTD & Thermocouple transducer- Important applications of above transducers-
Application of transducer in Accelerometer, servomotors, and Tachogenerators-Methods of generating
ultrasonic waves-Draw and explain pulsed-echo ultrasonic flaw detector- Principle of MEMS devices-
Their uses in modern smart phones and other devices.
4.0 Industrial Heating &Welding Duration:10 Periods (L: 8– T:2)

Industrial heating methods- Principle of induction heating- Applications of induction heating-HF power
source for induction heating - Principle of dielectric heating- Electrodes used in dielectric heating &
method of coupling to RF generator- Applications of dielectric heating. Welding- types of Electrical
welding- Principle of resistive welding- Circuit of AC resistive welding - Applications of resistive
welding- Other welding Techniques.
5.0 PLCs & Programming Duration:12 Periods (L: 10– T:2)

Need for PLC- principle of PLCs- advantages and disadvantages of PLC’s- functional block diagram of
PLC- Ladder diagrams and sequence listing- ladder diagram for OR, AND, XOR logic and PLC code-
importance of PLC timers with examples. importance of PLC counters with examples- features of
popular PLCs like Siemens , Allenbradly- applications of PLCS- importance of SCADA- typical
SCADA system- applications of SCADA.
409
6.0 Control Engineering Duration:10 Periods (L: 8– T:2)
Definition of the System and Control system and its classification- Basic block diagram of control
system-Open loop control system with examples-Merits and demerits of open loop control-Closed loop
system with the help of a block diagram- Examples for closed loop system-Comparison of Open and
closed loop control systems- Transfer function- block diagram reduction techniques- simple problems
on reduction techniques.
Reference Books
1. Power Electronics by P.C.Sen Tata McGraw-Hill Education
2. Industrial Electronics and Control by S.K.Bhattacharya, S.Chatterjee TTTI Chandigarh –
TES
3. Industrial And Power Electronics (Paperback) By: G. K. Mithal (Author) | Khanna Publishers
4. Control Systems Engineering by I. J. Nagrath And M. Gopal New Age Publisher, New Delhi
5. PLCs & SCADA : Theory and Practice by Rajesh Mehra, Vikrant Vij- Laxmi Publications
Upon completion of this course a student should be able to
1.0 Understand the working of Power Electronic Devices, UPS and SMPS.
1.1 List different thyristor family devices.
1.2 Sketch the circuit symbols for each device.
1.3 Explain constructional details of SCR.
1.4 Explain the working of SCR using two Transistor analogy.
1.5 Explain the Volt-Ampere characteristics of SCR.
1.6 Mention the important ratings of SCR.
1.7 Define forward break over voltage, latching current, holding current, turn on triggering time,
turn off time of SCR.
1.8 Distinguish between SUS, SBS, SCS & LASCR
1.9 Explain SCR circuit triggering by UJT with a circuit diagram and Draw input and Output
waveforms.
1.10 Mention the use of SCR in single phase and three phase Power rectifiers.
1.11 Explain the working and Volt-ampere characteristics of Diac
1.12 Explain the working and Volt-ampere characteristics of Triac.
410
1.13 Explain the Phase control circuit using Diac and Triac for AC power control and Draw the
input and output waveforms.
1.14 Give important specifications of power electronic devices from Manufacturer’s data sheet.
1.15 List the six important applications of power electronic devices.
1.16 With a block diagram explain the working of a) Off Line UPS b) Online UPS
1.17 Explain the limitations of series Voltage regulated power supplies
1.18 Explain the working of SMPS with block diagram
1.19 Mention any 3 applications of SMPS.
1.20 Explain the working of Servo stabilizer.
2.0 Understand the working of choppers, rectifiers and inverters.

2.1 Define choppers.
2.2 What is the need for a chopper?
2.3 List the types of choppers.
2.4 Explain the principle of operation of choppers.
2.5 What is the need for a controlled rectifier?
2.6 Draw and explain the principle of operation of single phase half-wave controlled rectifier.
2.7 Draw and explain the principle of operation of single phase full -wave controlled rectifier.
2.8 Draw and explain the principle of operation of 3-phase half-wave controlled rectifier.
2.9 Draw and explain the principle of operation of 3- phase full -wave controlled rectifier.
2.10 Define inverters.
2.11 What is the need for an inverter?
2.12 List the types of inverters.
2.13 Draw and explain the operation of series inverter.
2.14 Draw and explain the operation of parallel inverter.
3.0 Understand the working of transducers and Ultrasonics

3.1 Classify transducers on the basis of principle of operation and applications.
3.2 Explain the working principle, construction and applications of strain gauge.
3.3 Explain the working principle, construction and applications of potentiometric transducer.
3.4 Explain the working principle, construction of capacitive and inductive transducers.
3.5 Mention the 6 important applications of above transducers.
3.6 Explain the working principle, construction and applications of LVDT.
3.7 Explain the working principle and construction of Piezo electric transducer.
3.8 List any 3 uses for the Piezo electric transducer
411
3.9 Explain the working principle of RTD & Thermocouple transducer.
3.10 Mention any 6 important applications of above transducers.
3.11 Explain the application of transducer in Accelerometer, servomotors, and Tachogenerators.
3.12 Draw and explain pulsed-echo ultrasonic flaw detector
3.13 Explain the principle of MEMS devices
3.14 Mention their use in modern smart phones and other devices
4.0 Industrial Heating & welding

4.1 Classify industrial heating methods.
4.2 Explain the principle of induction heating.
4.3 List four applications of induction heating.
4.4 Draw the circuit of HF power source for induction heating and explain its working.
4.5 Explain the principle of dielectric heating.
4.6 Explain the electrodes used in dielectric heating & method of coupling to RF generator.
4.7 Mention the applications of dielectric heating.
4.8 Define welding.
4.9 List 4 types of Electrical welding
4.10 Explain the principle of resistive welding.
4.11 Draw the basic circuit of AC resistive welding and explain its working.
4.12 Mention applications of resistive welding.
4.13 Mention the applications of other welding Techniques.
5.0 Understand architecture of PLCs & SCADA Programming

5.1. Explain the need for PLC
5.2. Explain the basic principle of PLCs.
5.3. List out the advantages and disadvantages of PLC’s.
5.4. Draw and explain the functional block diagram of PLC.
5.5. Explain the Ladder diagrams and sequence listing.
5.6. Draw ladder diagram for OR logic and write the PLC code.
5.7. Draw ladder diagram for AND logic and write the PLC code.
5.8. Draw ladder diagram for XOR logic and write the PLC code
5.9. Explain the importance of PLC timers with examples.
5.10. Explain the importance of PLC counters with examples.
5.11. List the features of popular PLCs like Siemens , Allenbradly .
5.12. List any 4 applications of PLCS in the industry.
5.13. Mention the importance of SCADA.
412
5.14. Explain a typical SCADA system.
5.15. List the applications of SCADA.
6.0 Control Engineering

6.1. Define system and Control system.
6.2. Classify control systems
6.3. Explain the basic block diagram of control system
6.4. Explain an open loop control system.
6.5. Give examples for open loop control system.
6.6. Give three merits and demerits of open loop control.
6.7. Explain the closed loop system with the help of a block diagram.
6.8. Give Examples for closed loop system
6.9. Compare Open loop and closed loop control systems.
6.10. Define Transfer function
6.11. Explain block diagram reduction techniques.
6.12. Solve simple problems using the above techniques.
Suggested E Learning Resources:

1. http://electrical4u.com/
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3. www.Techopedia.com
4. www.circuitdigest.com
1.Collect specifications and data sheets of various power electronic components.

2.Analyze the various components used and connections in the UPS available in the Institution facility.
3.Compare various wielding techniques and their relevance to situation
4. Participate in the Quiz &discussion
5. Search internet for knowing latest trends in industrial electronics
6.Student visits to Library to refer to Manuals and related books of industrial electronics.
413
Model of rubrics for assessing student activity
Scale
Dimension 1 2 3 4 5
1.Information Does not collect Collects very Collects basic Collects more Collects a
search and information limited information, information, great deals of
documentation relate to topic information, most refer to most refer to information,
some relate to the topic the topic all refer to
topic the
topic
Suggested E- Does not Performs Performs Performs Performs all
Learning perform any very little nearly all almost all duties of
references duties assigned duties duties duties assigned
to the team role team
2. Full-fills
roles
team roles and
duties
3. Shares Always relies on Rarely does Usually does Always does Always does
work equality others to do the the assigned the assigned the assigned the assigned
work work, often work, rarely work, rarely work,
needs needs needs without
reminding reminding reminding. needing
reminding
4. Listening Is always Usually does Listens, but Listens and Listens and
skills talking, never most of the sometimes talks a little talks a fare
allows anyone to talking, rarely talk too much, more than amount
else to speak allows others needed.
to speak
Reference Books:
2. Industrial Electronics and Control by S.K.Bhattacharya, S.Chatterjee TTTI Chandigarh –TES
5. PLCs & SCADA : Theory and Practice by Rajesh Mehra, Vikrant Vij - Laxmi Publications
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3. www.Techopedia.com
414

PO Periods
CO1 Compare various power electronic device characteristics; identify R/U 1,2,10 12
their Application and identify the use of UPS and SMPS.
CO2 Identify the use of choppers, rectifiers and inverters. R/U 1,2,5,6,7 08
CO3 Apply sensor for various applications R/U/A 1,2,9 10
CO4 Explain different welding techniques R/U/A 1,2,5,7 10
CO5 Use the concepts of PLC & SCADA for industrial applications R/U/A 1,2,5 12
CO6 Develop an understanding of control systems R/U/A 1,2,3,7 08
415
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl
Unit No. U(3
Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6
11(a) 15(a)

3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8
12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
416
C18EC-502C, V SEMESTER
C18EC-502C, V SEMESTER, INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS
MID EXAM - I MODEL QUESTION PAPER
PART-A
1. List different thyristor family devices
2. Draw the symbol of SCR, SCS.
3. Define choppers.
4. List the types of Inverters.
PART-B
Note:Answer any TWO questions . Each carries 3marks. 2X3=6 Marks
5.(a) Explain the Volt-Ampere characteristics of SCR.
(OR)
5.(b) Explain the Volt-Ampere characteristics of Triac
6.(a).Explain the need for a controlled rectifier.
(OR)
6.(b) Explain the working principle of Chopper.
PART-C
Note:Answer any TWO questions . Each carries 5 marks. 2X5=10

Marks
7.(a) Explain the working of SCR using two Transistor analogy.
(OR)
7.(b) Explain the Phase control circuit using Diac and Triac for AC power control.
8.(a) Explain the working of 3-phase half wave controlled rectifier.

(OR)
8.(b).Explain the working of SMPS with block diagram
417

MID EXAM - II MODEL QUESTION PAPER
PART-A
1. Classify transducers on the basis of principle of operation

2. List any 3 uses for the Piezo electric transducer
3. Classify industrial heating methods
4. Define welding.
PART-B
Note:Answer any TWO questions . Each carries 3marks. 2X3=6 Marks
5.(a) Explain the principle of MEMS devices

(OR)
5.(b) Explain the working principle of RTD
6.(a) Explain the principle of resistive welding.

(OR)
6.(b). Explain the principle of dielectric heating
PART-C
Note:Answer any TWO questions . Each carries 5 marks. 2X5=10 Marks
7.(a) Explain the working principle, construction of LVDT.

(OR)
7.(b) Explain the working principle, construction of strain gauge.
8.(a) Draw the circuit of HF power source for induction heating and explain its working.
(OR)
8.(b). Draw the basic circuit of AC resistive welding and explain its working.
418

PART-A
1. Mention any two applications of SMPS
2. List 4 types of Electrical welding.
3. List types of PLCs.
4. State the need for PLC.
5. List any two applications of PLCs in the industry.
6. List 2 applications of SCADA.
7. Define control system.
8. Define Transfer function.
PART-B
Answer any four questions.Each carries three marks marks 4X3=12Marks
9.(a) Draw the Volt-ampere characteristics of Diac and Triac.
(OR)
9. (b) Explain the basic principle of PLC..
10. (a) Classify transducers on the basis of principle of operation and applications
(OR)
10.(b) Classify control systems and give examples for each control system.
11. (a) Draw the ladder diagram for XOR logic and write the PLC code.
(OR)
11.(b) Explain the importance of SCADA system.
12. (a) Compare Open loop and closed loop control systems.
(OR)
12. (b) Explain the basic block diagram of control system.
PART-C
Answer any four questions. Each carries 5 marks 4X5=20Marks
13.(a) Explain the working of online UPS with the help of block diagram.
(OR)
13. (b) Explain the importance of PLC timers with an example.
14. (a) Explain the principle of resistive welding.

(OR)
14.(b) Find the transfer function for the given block diagram.
419
H2
C(s)
G1 G2
R(s)
H1
H3
15. (a) Draw and explain the functional block diagram of PLC.
(OR)
15.(b) Explain basic SCADA system.
16. (a) Explain the closed loop system with the help of a block diagram
(OR)
16. (b) Explain the open loop system with the help of a block diagram.
420
18EC-503C-DATA COMMUNICATIONS AND COMPUTER NETWORKS
Pre requisites:
Data Communications and

Course Title Course Code 18EC-503C
Computer Networks
Teaching Scheme in
3:1:0 Credits 3
Periods(L:T:P)
This course requires the Basics concepts of analog and digital communication, digital electronics and
computers
Course outcomes:
CO1 :
Apply physical layer functionality to select suitable media
CO2 : Apply MAC layer protocols for various topologies
CO3 : Use network layer protocols
CO4 : Use transport layer protocols
CO5 : Apply knowledge in securing the network
CO6 : Use application layer protocols
COURSE CONTENT
Upon completion of the course the student should be able to
UNIT 1 –
Basics of Data communication & OSI Layer Duration: 10 Periods (L: 8– T:2)
Introduction-concepts of data communication- analog and digital data-computer network-OSI 7 Layered

architecture-UTP- STP- Coaxial and Fiber optic cable - simplex, half-duplex and full-duplex
communication-bandwidth and throughput-circuit switching-packet switching-message switching
UNIT2 :
LAN and DLL protocols Duration:10 Periods (L: 8– T:2)
Local area network-network topologies (Bus, Star, Ring)-Token ring network-Hub/Repeaters-bridges-

routers-need for protocols-Ethernet frame format (IEEE 802.3)- flow control-error control- CSMA/CD-
CSMA/CA-wireless LAN frame format (IEEE 802.11)-FDDI-Bluetooth-WAP.
UNIT3
421
IP addressing and Network layer protocols Duration:10 Periods (L: 10– T:2 )
Internet and Intranet- Internet protocol-connection oriented (virtual circuit) and connectionless
(datagram) services-IPv4 addressing-classful and classless addressing-IPv6 addressing-router and
routing-cut through & store-and-forward protocols-packet transfer mechanism using routers and IP
address-architecture of ISP-PSTN Internet connectivity: Dial up access-leased line-DSL-ISDN-
Dijkstra’s algorithm- Bellman Ford algorithm
UNIT 4
WAN protocols 10 Periods (L: 6– T:2)
WAN architecture-X.25, FRAME relay and ATM WAN Protocols- ARPA NET and WWW-TCP/IP-
Address Resolution Protocol- port and sockets- gateways
UNIT 5
Understand Network security. 10 Periods (L: 8– T:2)

Network security-security devices, security services. Firewalls, Cryptography-Public key and private
algorithm-Salient Features of I.T Act-Cyber Security offences and penalties
UNIT 6
Understand Web Applications. 10 Periods (L: 8– T:2)
DNS server- email transfer-POP server-SMTP server-FTP- Web server-Web browser- HTTP
commands-proxy server- hyperlinks-web browser architecture-remote login
1.0 Basics of Data communication & OSI Layer

1.1 Define data communication
1.2 State the need for data communication networking.
1.3 Distinguish between analog and digital data.
1.4 Define computer network and state its use.
1.5 Draw the ISO: OSI 7 layer architecture and explain the function of each layer.
1.6 List the different types of physical transmission media.
1.7 Explain the use of UTP, STP, Coaxial and Fiber optic cable in networking.
1.8 Define simplex, half-duplex and full-duplex communication.
1.9 Define bandwidth and throughput of a physical medium.
1.10 List the three types of switching techniques used in networking.
1.11 Explain circuit switching, packet switching and message switching.
2.0 LAN and DLL protocols

2.1 Define Local area network and state its use.
2.2 Explain different network topologies (Bus, Star, Ring)
2.3 Compare the performances of the three topologies.
2.4 Explain the working of token ring network.
2.5 Explain the use of different networking devices such as repeater/hub, switch, bridge in
constructing networks
2.6 Differentiate between repeater, switch and bridges.
2.7 State the need for protocols in computer networks.
2.8 State the need for framing in data link layer.
2.9 Explain the Ethernet frame format (IEEE 802.3).
2.10 State the need for flow control and error control protocols.
422
2.11 Explain CSMA/CD and CSMA/CA.
2.12 Explain the topology of wireless LAN and explain its frame format (IEEE 802.11).
2.13 Discuss FDDI and its properties.
2.14 Explain the Bluetooth technology.
2.15 Write the applications of WAP.
3.0 IP addressing and Network layer protocols

3.1 Define the terms Internet and Intranet.
3.2 Define internet protocol.
3.3 Distinguish between connection oriented (virtual circuit) and connectionless (datagram) services.
3.4 Classify the two types of Internet Protocol addressing IPv4 and IPv6 and state the need for IPv6.
3.5 Explain classful addressing and classless addressing in IPv4.
3.6 Describe Internet protocol version-6 (IPv6) addressing.
3.7 Explain the use of routers in networking
3.8 Explain the concept of routers and routing.
3.9 Explain the internal architecture of ISP.
3.10 Know about Dial up access, leased line, DSL, ISDN types of internet connectivity for an
individual user/ organization.
3.11 Explain Crptography
3.12 Explain Public and private algorithm
3.13 Explain Dijkstra’s algorithm
3.14 Explain Bell man Ford algorithm
4.0 WAN protocols
4.1 Know about WAN architecture.

4.2 List the three commonly used WAN technologies.
4.3 Describe the working of X.25 WAN Protocol
4.4 Describe the FRAME relay WAN Protocol.
4.5 Explain ATM WAN Protocol.
4.6 Describe the ARPANET and WWW.
4.7 Explain different layers of TCP/IP.
4.8 Explain the features of TCP.
4.9 Explain Address Resolution Protocol (ARP).
4.10 Write the functions of port and sockets.
4.11 Describe the use of Gateways.
5.0 Network security

5.1 State the need for network security.
5.2 List various Network security services.
5.3 Define message confidentiality and message integrity
5.4 Define message authentication and entity authentication.
5.5 Explain key management, digital signature and firewalls in securing the networks.
5.6 List Salient Features of I.T Act
5.7 State need for Cyber security
5.8 State various security threats of network
5.9 List security Measures for threats.
6.0 Web Applications
6.1 Write the role of DNS server.

6.2 Explain DNS namespace.
6.3 Explain how email is transferred.
6.4 Discuss POP server and SMTP server.
423
6.5 Explain file transfer operation using FTP
6.6 Explain the working of Web server.
6.7 Explain the working of Web browser.
6.8 List HTTP commands.
6.9 Explain the purpose of proxy server.
6.10 Explain the use of hyperlinks.
6.11 Describe the web browser architecture.
6.12 Explain remote login.
Recommended Books
1. Computer Networks (4th Edition) by Andrew S. Tanenbaum
2. Network communication Technology by Ata Elahi Thomson
3. Data Communication and Networking by Godbole TMH
4. Data and Computer Communications: William Stallings 7th edition. PHI
5. Data Communication and Networking: BehrouzForouzan 3rd edition.TMH
Suggested E-Learning Resources
3. www.nptel.ac.in
4.www.youtube.com
1. Prepare a report on the Components of Network used in Computer Lab or

browsing centre or cellular network stations.
2. Prepare a report on ISDN or web applications.
3. Make a hand-written report on applications on internet devices that are observed
in your surroundings.
4. Prepare a report on various standards organization of data communication and
networking.
5. Participate in quiz
6. Participate in Group discussion
7.Attend seminars
8.Industrial visit
Model of rubrics for assessing student activity
424
Scal
Dimension e
1 2 3 4 5
Unsatisfacto Developin Satisfactor Goo Exemplar
ry g y d y
1. Collects Collects a
Collects Collects
Information Does not very limited great deals
basic more
search and collect information, of
documentat information some relate information,
most refer to most refer to
i relate to topic to all refer to
the topic the topic
on topic the
topic
Does not Performs all
2. Full-fills Perform Perform Performs
perform any duties of
team roles s very s nearly almost all
duties assigned
and duties little all duties
assigned team
duties duties
to the team role roles
Rarely Usually Always Always does
3. Always relies does the does the does the the assigned
Shares on others to do assigned assigned assigned work,
work the work work, often work, rarely work, rarely without
equality needs needs needs needing
reminding reminding reminding. reminding
Usually
Is always Listens
does most Listens, but Listens
4. talking, never and talks a
of the sometimes and talks
Listening allows anyone little more
f talking, talk too e a fare
skills
to rarely much, than amount
else to speak allows needed.
others to
speak
CO PO Mapping Matrix:

Periods
CO1 Apply physical layer functionality to select suitable media R/U/A 1,2,5,6,7,9,10
(Physical layer) 10
CO2 Acquire knowledge of wired and wireless MAC protocols R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10 10
CO3 Use network layer protocols R/U/A 1,2,3,9,10 10
CO4 U/A 1,2,3,9,10
Use transport layer protocols 10
CO5 Apply knowledge in securing the network R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5,7,9,10 5
CO6 R/U/A 1,2,3,4,9,10
Use application layer protocols 15
425
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl
Unit No. U(3
Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6
11(a) 15(a)

3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8
12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
18EC-503C
426
STATE BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS , (C-18)
DECE IV SEMESTER MID SEMESTER EXAMINATION – I
MODEL PAPER
DATA COMMUNICATIONS AND COMPUTER NETWORKS
PART-A
Instructions:
1.Answer ALL questions. 4X1=4 Marks
2.Each question carries ONE mark.
1. Define data communication

2. List the three types of switching techniques used in networking.
3. List different network topologies.
4. Define Local area network.
PART-B
Instructions:
1.Answer any TWO questions. 2X3=6 Marks
2.Each question carries THREE marks.
5(a). Distinguish between analog and digital data.

OR
5(b). Explain the use of Coaxial and Fiber optic cable in networking
OR
6(a). Differentiate between repeater, switch and bridges.
OR
6(b). Explain CSMA/CD.
PART-C
Instructions: 1.Answer any TWO questions. 2X5=10 Marks
2.Each question carries FIVE marks.
7(a). Draw the ISO: OSI 7 layer architecture and explain the function of each layer
OR
7(b). Explain circuit switching, packet switching and message switching
8(a). Explain the topology of wireless LAN and explain its frame format
OR
8(b) Explain the Ethernet frame format
18EC-503C
427
STATE BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS, (C-18)
DECE IV SEMESTER MID SEMESTER EXAMINATION – II
MODEL PAPER
PART-A
4X1=4MARKS
Instructions: 1.Answer ALL questions.
1. Define the terms Internet and Intranet

2. Define internet protocol
3. List the three commonly used WAN technologies
4. Write the functions of port and sockets
PART-B
2X3=6 Marks
Instructions: 1.Answer any TWO questions.
5(a). Explain the use of routers in networking

OR
5(b). Explain the internal architecture of ISP
6(a). Explain the features of TCP

OR
6(b). Describe the use of Gateways
PART-C
2X5=10 Marks
Instructions: 1.Answer any TWO questions.
2.Each question carries FIVE marks.
7(a). Explain classful addressing and classless addressing in IPv4

OR
7(b). Explain about Dial up access and DSL types of internet connectivity for an individual user/
organization
8(a). Describe the FRAME relay WAN Protocol.

OR
8(b). Explain different layers of TCP/IP
18EC-503C
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS , (C-18)
428
MARCH/APRIL-2020
DECE IV SEMESTER EXAMINATION
MODEL PAPER
PART-A
8X1=8 Marks
Instructions: 1.Answer ALL questions.
1. State the need for data communication networking.

2. Classify the two types of Internet Protocol addressing
3. Write the role of DNS server.
4. Define internet protocol
5. Define message authentication and entity authentication
6. State Need for Cyber security
7. List HTTP commands
8. State the use of hyperlinks
PART-B
4X3=12Marks
Instructions: 1.Answer any FOUR questions.
9(a) Define simplex, half-duplex and full-duplex communication
OR
9(b) List Salient Features of I.T Act
10(a) Explain the features of TCP.
OR
10(b) Explain how email is transferred
11(a) Define message confidentiality and message integrity
OR
11(b) List security Measures for threats
12(a) Explain DNS namespace
OR
12(b) Explain the purpose of proxy server
PART-C
429
4X5=20 Marks
Instructions: 1.Answer any FOUR questions.
2.Each question carries FIVE mark.
13(a). Draw the ISO: OSI 7 layer architecture and explain the function of each layer
OR
13(b) Explain key management, digital signature and firewalls in securing the networks
14(a) Describe the working of X.25 WAN Protocol
OR
14(b) Describe the web browser architecture.
15(a) State various security threats of network and explain them.
OR
15(b) Ex[lain Network security devices
16(a) Explain POP server and SMTP server
OR
16(b) Explain the working of Web server
430
18EC-504E (A) - ELECTRONIC MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
Course Title : ELECTRONIC MEASURING INSTRUMENTS Course Code 18EC-504E(A)

Semester V Course Group ELECTIVE
in Periods(L:T:P)
Periods : 60
Common with 18EI-504E(A)
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Analog and digital circuits
Course Outcomes

Course Outcome
CO1
Use Analog instruments for measuring Basic Electrical Quantities
CO2 Use ac and dc bridges for determining unknown parameters
CO3 Use digital instruments for measuring the given electrical quantities
CO4 Understand the working of AF, RF signal generators and power meters
CO5 Understand the working principles of CRO and its applications
CO6 Use the Test instruments in Laboratory applications
Course Contents
1.0 Analog instruments
Characteristics of ideal Voltmeter and ideal Ammeter- Construction and principle of operation of
PMMC instrument- Principle of extending the range of DC ammeter- Principle of extending the range of
DC voltmeter- Principle and working rectifier type voltmeter and ammeter- Construction and principle
of series and shunt type ohmmeters- Use of Megger for measuring the insulation resistance- loading
effect with an example- Need for high input impedance for Voltmeters- working of FET input voltmeter
with a circuit diagram- Drift problem in FET Voltmeters- Working of differential voltmeters-
2.0 DC & AC bridges

Use of high voltage probe and clamp-on current probe- Construction of AC Bridge- Conditions for
bridge balance- Types of DC bridges and AC bridges- Use of above bridges- Resistance measurement
using Wheat Stone Bridge- Inductance measurement using Maxwell’s Bridge- capacitance measurement
using Schering Bridge- important errors and their prevention in bridge measurements- Limitations of
AC bridge method for measurement of small inductances and capacitances
431
3.0 Digital instruments
Advantages of digital instruments over Analogue instruments- Working of Ramp type digital voltmeter
with block diagram- Successive approximation type digital voltmeters with block diagram-
Specifications of digital voltmeters- Working of digital frequency meter with block diagram- Important
specifications of digital frequency meter- Accuracy and Resolution of a meter- Factors effecting the
accuracy and Resolution of a frequency meter- Working of digital LCR meter with block diagram-
specifications of digital LCR meter.
4.0 working principle of AF, RF signal generators and power meters
Working of AF Oscillator (sine & square) - Block diagram- Front panel controls and specifications of
AF Oscillator- Working of function generator with block diagram- Applications of AF oscillators and
function generators- Working of RF signal generator- Specifications of RF signal generator- Important
Applications of RF signal generators- Importance of shielding in RF generators- Working of AF power
meter- Applications of power meters.
5.0 Working principle and use of CRO
Block diagram of general purpose CRO - Function of each block- Necessity of time base and deflection
amplifiers- Deflection sensitivity of CRO- Conditions for stationary waveforms- Conditions for flicker
free waveforms- Triggered sweep with necessary circuit- Advantages of triggered sweep- Function of
various controls on front panel of CRO- Procedure for measurement of - Voltage (DC & AC) b)
frequency - Phase angle - Time interval - Depth of modulation-Define a pulse - Waveform of a pulse-
Define the pulse parameters - Pulse width - Rise time - Fall time - Duty cycle-delay time- procedure
for measuring above pulse parameters with CRO- Different types of probes and connectors used in
oscilloscopes.
6.0 Test instruments
- Stray inductance and stray capacitance of a coil- Q meter with a block diagram- Parameters that can be
measured using Q meter- Distortion factor- Distortion Factor Meter with block diagram- Digital IC
tester with block diagram- Working of logic analyser with block diagram- Working principle of
spectrum analyser and uses- Plotters and Recorders- XY recorders- plotter- logic probe.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement techniques - Albert D. Helfrick William David
Cooper-PHI Publications
2. Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation - A.K. Sawhney , Puneet
SawhneyDhanpatRai& Company, 2010
Electronic Instrumentation - HS Kalsi ,-Tata McGraw Hill
432
After completing this course the student will be able to
1.0. Understand the working of analog instruments.

1.1. List the characteristics of ideal volt meter and ideal ammeter.
1.2. Explain the construction and principle of operation of PMMC instrument.
1.3. Explain the principle of extending range of DC ammeter.
1.4. Explain the principle of extending range of DC voltmeter.
1.5. Explain the principle & working of rectifier type voltmeter.
1.6. Explain the principle of series & shunt type ohmmeters.
1.7. Explain the use of Megger for measuring the insulation resistance.
1.8. Explain loading effect of voltmeter with an example circuit
1.9. Explain the need for high input impedance for voltmeters.
1.10.Explain the working of FET input voltmeter with a circuit diagram.
1.11.Explain the drift problems in FET voltmeters.
1.12.Explain the working of differential voltmeters.
1.13.Explain the use of high voltage probe & clamp-on current probe.
2.0 DC bridges and AC Bridges

2.1 Explain the construction of AC bridge.
2.2 State the conditions for AC bridge balance.
2.3 List 4 types of AC bridges.
2.4 Mention the use of above bridges.
2.5 Explain the resistance measurement using Wheatstone Bridge.
2.6 Explain the inductance measurement using Maxwell’s Bridge.
2.7 Explain the capacitance measurement using Schering Bridge.
2.8 List 4 important errors and their prevention in bridge measurements.
2.9 Mention the limitations of AC bridge method for measurement of small
inductances and capacitances.
3.0 Understand the working of Digital Instruments.

3.1 List 4 advantages of digital instruments over analog instruments.
3.2 Explain the working of RAMP type digital voltmeter with block diagram.
433
3.3 Explain the working of Successive approximation type digital voltmeter with block
diagram.
3.4 List 4 important specifications of digital voltmeter.
3.5 Explain the working of digital frequency meter with block diagram.
3.6 List 4 important specifications of digital frequency meter.
3.7 Define accuracy and resolution of a meter.
3.8 Explain factors effecting the accuracy and resolution of a frequency meter.
3.9 Explain the working of digital LCR meter with block diagram.
3.10 List 4 specifications of digital LCR meter.
4.0 Understand the construction and working of signal generators &power meters.
4.1 Explain the working of AF oscillator with block diagram.
4.2 List the front panel controls and specifications of AF oscillator.
4.3 Explain the working of function generator with block diagram.
4.4 List the applications of AF oscillators and function generators.
4.5 Explain the working of RF signal generator with block diagram.
4.6 List the specifications of RF signal generator.
4.7 Mention 3 important applications of RF signal generator.
4.8 Explain the importance of shielding in RF generators.
4.9 Explain the working of AF power meter.
4.10 List the applications of power meter
5.0 Understand construction and working of CRO.

5.1 Draw the block diagram of general purpose CRO and describe the function of
each block.
5.2 Explain the necessity of time base and deflection amplifiers.
5.3 Define deflection sensitivity of CRO.
5.4 List the conditions for stationary waveforms.
5.5 Mention the conditions for flicker free waveforms.
5.6 Explain the triggered sweep with necessary circuit.
5.7 Mention the advantages of triggered sweep.
5.8 Explain the function of various controls on front panel of CRO.
434
5.9 Explain the procedure for measurement of a) voltage (DC & AC) b) frequency c)
phase angle d) time interval e) depth of modulation.
5.10 Define a pulse.
5.11 Draw the waveform of a pulse.
5.12 Define the pulse parameters a) pulse width b) rise time c) fall time d) duty cycled)
delay time.
5.13 Explain the procedure for measuring above pulse parameters with CRO.
5.14 List different types of probes and connectors used in CRO’s.
6.0 Understand the construction and working of test instruments.
6.1 Define stray inductance and stray capacitance of a coil.
6.2 Explain the working of Q-meter with a block diagram.
6.3 List various parameters that can be measured using Q-meter.
6.4 Define distortion factor.
6.5 Explain the working of distortion factor meter with block diagram.
6.6 Explain the working of digital IC tester.
6.7 Explain the working of logic analyser with block diagram.
6.8 Explain the basic working principle of spectrum analyser and mention its use.
6.9 State the need for plotters and recorders.
6.10 Explain the working of XY recorders.
6.11 Explain the working of plotters.
6.12 Explain the working of logic probe
1. Student visits Library to refer to Manuals and related books of electronic instruments
2. Student inspects the available equipment in the Lab
3. Visit nearby Industry to familiarize with working of various electronic instruments
4. Participate in the Quiz &discussion
5. Search internet for knowing latest trends in electronic instruments
435
Model of rubrics for assessing student activity Scale
Dimension 1 2 3 4 5
1.Information Does not collect Collects very Collects basic Collects more Collects a
search and information limited information, information, great deals of
documentation relate to topic information, most refer to most refer to information,
some relate to the topic the topic all refer to
topic the
topic
Does not Performs Performs Performs Performs all
5. Full-fills perform any very little nearly all almost all duties of
team roles and duties assigned duties duties duties assigned
duties to the team role team
roles
6. Shares Always relies on Rarely does Usually does Always does Always does
work equality others to do the the assigned the assigned the assigned the assigned
work work, often work, rarely work, rarely work,
needs needs needs without
reminding reminding reminding. needing
reminding
7. Listening Is always Usually does Listens, but Listens and Listens and
skills talking, never most of the sometimes talks a little talks a fare
allows anyone to talking, rarely talk too much, more than amount
else to speak allows others needed.
to speak
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3.www.Techopedia.com
4.www.circuitdigest.com
Course Outcome Linked

PO
CO1 1,2
Use Analog instruments for measuring Basic Electrical
Quantities
CO2 Use ac and dc bridges for determining unknown parameters 1,2,3,5,
CO3 Use digital instruments for measuring the given electrical 1,2,5,9
quantities
CO4 Explain the working of AF, RF signal generators and power 1,2,5,7
meters
CO5 Understand the working principles of CRO and it’s 1,2,5,7
applications
CO6 Use the Test instruments in Laboratory applications 1,2,3,7,10
436
MID SEM-I EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM –II EXAM
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl No Unit No.
R U A

1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)

2 II

3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)

4 IV

9(b) 13(b)
4
5 V 5, 6 11(a) 15(a)

11(b) 15(b)

3
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)

Total Questions
8 8 8

437
Legend:
C18EC-504E (A), V SEMESTER
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING: TS: HYDERABD

C18EC-504E (A), V SEMESTER, ELECTRONIC MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
MID EXAM - I MODEL QUESTION PAPER
PART-A
1. List the characteristics of ideal ammeter
2. State the importance of high input impedance of voltmeter
3. State the conditions for AC bridge balance
4. List the limitations of AC bridge for measuring of small inductance.
PART-B
Note: Answer all questions. Each carries 3marks. 2X3=6 Marks
5.(a) Explain loading effect of volt meter

(or)
5. (b) Explain the principle of extending range of DC voltmeter
6. (a) Explain the resistance measurement using Wheatstone Bridge

(or)
6. (b).Explain the capacitance measurement using Schering bridge
PART-C
Note: Answer all questions. Each carries 5 marks. 2X5=10 Marks
7.(a)Explain the construction and principle of operation of PMMC instrument
(or)
438
7.(b)Explain the principle & working of rectifier type voltmeter
8.(a) Explain the inductance measurement using Maxwell’s Bridge
(or)
8.(b).State the conditions for AC bridge balance and Explain the construction of AC bridge

MID EXAM - II MODEL QUESTION PAPER
PART-A
1. List two advantages of digital instruments over analog instruments
2. Define accuracy of a meter
3. List the front panel controls of AF oscillator.
4. Mention 3 important applications of RF signal generator.
PART-B
Note: Answer all questions. Each carries 3marks. 2X3=6 Marks
5.(a)Explain factors effecting the accuracy and resolution of a frequency meter
(or)
5.(b)Explain the working of RAMP type digital voltmeter with block diagram.
6.(a) Explain the importance of shielding in RF generators
(or)
6.(b).Explain the importance of shielding in RF generators
PART-C
Note: Answer all questions. Each carries 5 marks. 2X5=10 Marks
7.(a)Explain the working of Successive approximation type digital voltmeter with block diagram
439
(or)
7.(b) Explain the working of digital frequency meter with block diagram.
8.(a) Explain the working of function generator with block diagram.
(or)
8.(b).Explain the working of AF power meter.

PART-A
1. List the characteristics of ideal volt meter.
2. Define resolution of a digital instrument.
3. List any two applications of a power meter.
4. Define pulse parameters like rise time and duty cycle.
5. Define deflection sensitivity of CRO.
6. State the conditions for stationary wave forms.
7. Define distortion factor.
8. State the need for plotters.
PART-B
Answer all questions. Each carries three marks. 4X3=12Marks
9.(a) Explain loading effect of voltmeter
(or)
9. (b) Explain the procedure for measurement of voltage(AC) and Frequency using CRO.
10.(a)Explain factors effecting the accuracy and resolution of a frequency meter
(or)
10.(b)Draw the block diagram of Q-meter.
11.(a)Mention the function of various controls on front panel of CRO.
(or)
11.(b)Explain the triggered sweep with necessary circuit.
12.(a)Draw the block diagram of distortion factor meter.
(or)
12.(b) State the basic working principle of spectrum analyzer and mention its use.
. PART-C
Answer all questions. Each carries 5 marks 4X5=20Marks
440
13.(a) Explain the capacitance measurement using Schering Bridge.
(or)
13. (b) Draw the block diagram of general purpose CRO and describe the function of each
block.
14. (a)Explain the working of function generator with block diagram.
(or)
14. (b) Explain the working of XY recorders
15. (a)Explain the necessity of time base and deflection amplifiers..
(or)
15. (b) Explain the procedure for measuring pulse parameters like parameters a) pulse width
b) rise time c) fall time d) duty cycle e) delay time with CRO
16. (a) Explain the working of logic probe
(or)
16. (b) Explain the working of plotters.
441
18EC-504E (B)- DIGITAL CIRCUIT DESIGN USING VERILOG
Course title : Digital circuit design through verilog Course code 18EC-504E
hdl (B)
Semester V Course Group Elective
Periods(L:T:P)
Periods: 60Pds
Pre requisites :
1) Concepts of switching theory and logic design.
2) Familiarity with a programming language like C or C++.
Course Outcomes:
After completion of the course the student should be able to
CO Learning Outcome Periods
CO1 : Use Layout design rules; Draw stick diagrams; Interpret fabrication 12
process, timing simulation.
CO2 : Apply the basics of Hardware Description Languages and use 8
Verilogmodules, instantiation process.
CO3 : Use Verilog HDL constructs and conventions. 12
CO4 : Develop Simple logic circuits using various levels of Abstraction in 8

Verilog HDL.
CO5 : Design and Simulate Combinational and sequential circuits using 12
Verilog HDL.
CO6 : Apply Verilog HDL principles to develop various real time applications 8
using FSM and FPGA.
Course Content
Unit 1: Basic Concepts of VLSI Circuits: Duration:12 Periods (L: 7 - T: 5)
MOS Transistor fabrication-Merits of CMOS technology-CMOS fabrication process-Layout

design rules-Stick diagrams-VLSI design flow-VLSI design specification and design entry-
Functional simulation-Planning Placement and Routing (PPR)-Timing
simulation-Fusing/Fabrication into the chip-Use of Verilog HDL in VLSI simulation.
442
Unit 2: Introduction to Verilog HDL: Duration:8 Periods (L: 5 - T: 3)
Steps involved in the design flow for the VLSI IC design-Importance of Hardware Description
Languages in VLSI design-Compare VHDL and Verilog HDL-Features of Verilog HDL-
Difference between an instantiation and inference of a component-Differences between modules
and module instances in Verilog-Levels of abstraction to represent the internals of the module-
Identify the components of a Verilog module definition-Port connection rules in module
instantiation.
Unit 3:Language constructs and conventions: Duration:8Periods (L: 5 - T: 3)

Lexical conventions like number specification, Identifiers, Keywords, etc-Different data types
like value set, nets, registers, vectors, integer, real and time register data types, arrays, memories
and strings-Defparam and localparam keywords-System tasks and compiler directives-
Expressions, operators and operands-Types of operators used in the Verilog HDL
Unit 4: Gate level, Data Flow and Behavioral modeling:Duration:12Periods (L: 7 - T: 5)
Logic gates primitives provided in Verilog-Instantiation of gates, gate symbols, and truth tables
for and/or and buf/not types gates-Rise, fall and turn off delays in gate level design-Initial and
Always statements-Assignment statements in data flow modeling-Different types of delays used
in the data flow level modeling-Blocking and Non blocking procedural assignments with
examples-Timing controls like delay based timing control and event based timing control-
Conditional statements-Multiway branching-Use of case, casex and casez statements-Difference
between conditional if statement and case statements-Looping statements such as while, for,
repeat and forever-Sequential and parallel blocks- User Defined Primitives (UDP)-Hierarchical
modeling-Advantages of hierarchical modeling-Modeling techniques in Verilog HDL-Design
simple logic circuits like adders, subtractors using Behavioral, Dataflow and Structural
modeling.
Unit 5: Modeling of combinational and Sequential Logic circuits:
Duration:13Periods (L: 8 - T: 5)
Modeling of combinational and sequential circuits-Design combinational circuits like

multiplexers, decoders, encoders, comparators and ALU-Design RS, JK, T and D flip flops with
asynchronous and synchronous clock and reset- Explain implementation of shift registers like
SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO, etc-Design synchronous and asynchronous counters-Design a divide
by 3 counter-Design shift register counters like ring counter, etc-Design memories like RAM
and ROM-Compare RTL level and structural level modelling.Test Bench module-Need of a
stimulus module-Structure of stimulus module-stimulus modules for combinational and
sequential circuits of Verilog designs.
443
Unit 6: System Design Concepts: Duration:7Periods (L: 4 - T: 3)
Concept of Finite State Machines-Mealy and Moore types of state machines-Problems on Mealy
and Moore state machines-Design of Mealy state machine using Verilog HDL. Various design
tools which are useful in different stages of design-Important programmable logic devices-
Architecture of PLAs -Architecture of CPLD-Architecture of FPGAs-Comparison-
Applications-Design of UART using FPGA board-Design of Traffic Light controller using
FPGA board.
Specific Learning Outcomes: After completion of the course the student will be able to
1.0 Basic Concepts of VLSI Circuits
1.1 Explain the processes of MOS Transistor fabrication

1.2 List the merits of CMOS technology
1.3 Explain CMOS fabrication process
1.4 List Layout design rules
1.5 Explain layout design rules
1.6 Explain stick diagrams
1.7 Explain VLSI design flow
1.8 Explain VLSI design specification and design entry
1.9 Explain functional simulation
1.10 Explain Planning placement and Routing (PPR)
1.11 Explain timing simulation
1.12 Explain Fusing/Fabrication into the chip
1.13 Explain the use of of Verilog HDL in VLSI simulation
2.0 Introduction to Verilog HDL
2.1 Explain the steps involved in the design flow for the VLSI IC design
2.2 Explain the importance of Hardware Description Languages in VLSI design
2.3 Compare VHDL and Verilog HDL
2.4 List the features of Verilog HDL
2.5 Explain the difference between an instantiation and inference of a component.
2.6 Explain differences between modules and module instances in Verilog.
2.7 Explain four levels of abstraction to represent the internals of a module
2.8 Identify the components of a Verilog module definition
2.9 Explain the port connection rules in a module instantiation
3.0 Language constructs and conventions
3.1 Explain the lexical conventions like number specification, Identifiers keywords, etc
3.2 Explain different data types like value set, nets, registers, vectors, integer, real and time register
data types, arrays, memories and strings.
3.3 Explain defparam and localparam keywords
3.4 Explain about system tasks and compiler directives
444
3.5 Define expressions, operators and operands.
3.6 Explain all types of operators used in the Verilog HDL
4.0 Understand concepts of Gate level, Data flow and behavioral modeling
4.1 Identify the logic gate primitives provided in Verilog
4.2 Explain the instantiation of gates, gate symbols, and truth tables for and/or and buf/not type
gates.
4.3 Explain Rise, fall and turn-off delays in the gate level design
4.4 Explain about the initial and always statements.
4.5 Explain the assignment statements in data flow modeling
4.6 Explain different types of delays used in the data flow level modeling
4.7 Explain blocking and non blocking procedural assignments with examples
4.8 Explain timing controls like delay based timing control and event based timing control
4.9 Explain conditional statements.
4.10 Explain multiway branching – use case, casex, and casez statements.
4.11 Explain the difference between conditional if statement and case statements.
4.12 Explain looping statements such as while, for, repeat, and forever.
4.13 Explain sequential and parallel blocks.
4.14 Explain about user defined primitives (UDP).
4.15 Explain about the hierarchical modeling.
4.16 List the advantages of hierarchical modeling.
4.17 Explain about modeling techniques in Verilog HDL.
4.18 Design simple logic circuits like Half Adder, Full Adder, Half Subtractor, Full Subtractor using
Behavioral, Data Flow and Structural Modeling.
5.0 Understand modeling of combinational and sequential logic circuits

5.1 Design combinational circuits like multiplexers, decoders, encoders,Comparators and ALU
5.2 Design RS, JK, T and D flip flops with Asynchronous and Synchronous Clock and reset
5.3 Explain implementation of shift registers like SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO, etc.
5.4 Design synchronous and asynchronous counters
5.5 Design a divide by 3 counter
5.6 Design shift register counters like ring counter, etc.
5.7 Design memories like RAM and ROM.
5.8 Compare RTL level and structural level modelings.
5.9 Define test bench module.
5.10 Explain the need of a stimulus module.
5.11 Explain the structure of stimulus module.
5.12 Apply the stimulus modules for combinational and sequential circuits of Verilog designs
6.0 Understand the system design concepts
6.1 List different Finite State Machines.
6.2 Explain the Mealy and Moore types of State Machines.
6.3 Explain the design of Mealy state machine using Verilog HDL
445
6.4 Explain the design of Moore state machine using Verilog HDL
6.5 Explain various design tools which are useful in different stages of design.
6.6 List 4 important programmable logic devices.
6.7 Explain the architecture of PLAs.
6.8 Explain the architecture of PALs
6.9 Explain the architecture of CPLD.
6.10 Explain the architecture of FPGA.
6.11 Compare the programmable logic devices.
6.12 List any 3 applications of programmable logic devices.
6.13 Explain the design of UART using FPGA.
6.14 Explain the design of Traffic Light Controller using FPGA board.
Recommended Books :
1. Digital systems design by Morris Mano

2. Verilog HDL: A guide to digital design and synthesis by S. Palnitkar
3. Advanced Digital Design with VERILOG HDL by Michael D. Ciletti
4. Switching and finite automation theory by Zvi Kohavi
5. Digital state machine design by David J. Comes
6. Digital Systems by Ronald Tocci
7. Digital design principles and practice- John F Wakerly, PHI / Pearson education Asia 3 rd
Edn,2005
8. Design through Verilog HDL – T.R. Padmanabhan and B. Bala Tripura Sundari, WSE, IEEE
Press, 2004.
9. A Verilog Premier – J. Bhasker, BSP, 2003.
10. Fundamentals of Logic Design with Verilog – Stephen. Brown and Zvonko Vranesic, TMH, 2005.
1.http://electrical4u.com
3. www.nptel.ac.in
4. www.allaboutcircuits.com
1.Participate in the Quiz
2. participate in Group discussion
3. Search internet for more literature.
4. Conduct Debates.
5. Surprise test.
446
Model Rubric for Debate on Verilog Vs VHDL

Lecturer Name:
Student Name: ________________________________________
Needs
CATEGORY Excellent Good Satisfactory improvement
Information All information Most information Most information Information had
presented in the presented in the presented in the several
debate was clear, debate was clear, debate was clear inaccuracies OR
accurate and accurate and and accurate, but was usually not
thorough. thorough. was not usually clear.
thorough.
Respect for Other All statements, Statements and Most statements Statements,
Team body language, and responses were and responses were responses and/or
responses were respectful and used respectful and in body language
respectful and were appropriate appropriate were consistently
in appropriate language, but once language, but there not respectful.
language. or twice body was one sarcastic
language was not. remark.
Use of Every major point Every major point Every major point Every point was
Facts/Statistics was well supported was adequately was supported with not supported.
with several supported with facts, statistics
relevant facts, relevant facts, and/or examples,
statistics and/or statistics and/or but the relevance
examples. examples. of some was
questionable.
Presentation Style Team consistently Team usually used Team sometimes One or more
used gestures, eye gestures, eye used gestures, eye members of the
contact, tone of contact, tone of contact, tone of team had a
voice and a level of voice and a level of voice and a level of presentation style
enthusiasm in a enthusiasm in a enthusiasm in a that did not keep
way that kept the way that kept the way that kept the the attention of the
attention of the attention of the attention of the audience.
audience. audience. audience.
Organization All arguments Most arguments All arguments Arguments were
were clearly tied to were clearly tied to were clearly tied to not clearly tied to
an idea (premise) an idea (premise) an idea (premise) an idea (premise).
and organized in a and organized in a but the
tight, logical tight, logical organization was
fashion. fashion. sometimes not
clear or logical.
Understanding of The team clearly The team clearly The team seemed The team did not
Topic understood the understood the to understand the show an adequate
topic in-depth and topic in-depth and main points of the understanding of
presented their presented their topic and presented the topic.
information information with those with ease.
forcefully and ease.
convincingly.
447

PO Periods
CO1 Use Layout design rules; Draw stick diagrams; Interpret R/U/A 1,2,10
fabrication process, timing simulation. 12
CO2 Apply the basics of Hardware Description Languages and use R/U 1,2,5,6,7
8
Verilog modules, instantiation process.
CO3 Use Verilog HDL constructs and conventions. R/U 1,2,9 8
CO4 Develop Simple logic circuits using various levels of Abstraction R/U/A 1,2,5,7
in Verilog HDL. 12
CO5 Design and Simulate Combinational and sequential circuits using R/U/A 1,2,5
13
Verilog HDL.
CO6 Apply Verilog HDL principles to develop various real time R/U/A 1,2,3,7
applications using FSM and FPGA. 7
448
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl
Unit No. U(3
Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6
11(a) 15(a)

3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8
12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
449
Model Paper for Mid-I,
VI SEMESTER, 18EC-504E (B)
DIGTAL CIRCUIT DESIGN USING VERILOG
Time :1 Hr Total Marks :20Marks
PART-A
1. List the merits of CMOS technology

2. Explain the need for stick diagrams
3. List types of design entry methods in VLSI..
4. Write the difference between module and instance.
PART-B
5. a) Explain the importance of HDLs in VLSI design.

OR
b) Explain Layout Design rules.
6. a) Explain the differences between Verilog HDL and VHDL.
OR
b)Explain about connecting ports by ordered list and ports by name in module instantiation.
PART-C
Answer any all questions, each carries five marks 2 X 5 = 10
7. a) Draw the stick diagram of CMOS transistor

OR
b) Describe about the various steps involved in VLSI design flow.
8. a)Explain about the four levels of abstraction Supported by Verilog HDL
OR
b) Explain the importance of hardware description languages in VLSI design.
450
Model Paper for Mid-II,
Time :1 Hr Total Marks:20Marks

PART-A
1. List the types of operators available in Verilog HDL.
2. Mention the difference between $display and $monitor.
3. Define Rise time delay and fall time delay in gate level design.
4. List the advantages of hierarchical modelling.
PART-B
5. a) Explain about defparam and localparam keywords.

OR
b) Explain about compiler directives in Verilog HDL.
6. a) Explain about initial statement.
OR
b)Explain about casex, casez and case statements.
PART-C
Answer any allquestions, each carries five marks 2 X 5 = 10
7. a) Explain about the following operators

i) Logical operators ii) Bit wise operators iii) Binary arithmetic operators
iv) Unary reduction operators
OR
b) Explain about system tasks available in Verilog for making and controlling simulation.
8. a)Design 1-bit half subtractor using gate level modeling.

OR
b) Design 1-bit full adder logic circuit using gate level modeling.
451
Model Paper for SEE,
Time :2Hrs Total Marks : 40Marks

PART-A
Answer all questions, each carries one marks 8 X 1 =8
1. List the Layout design rules.
2. List the features of Verilog HDL.
3. List any three system tasks in Verilog HDL.
4. Write the need for stimulus module.
5. Define test bench module.
6. List programmable logic devices.
7. Write any three applications of PLD’s.
8. Classify programmable logic devices.
PART-B
Answer all questions, each carries three marks 4 X 3 =12
9. a) Explain layout design rules.
OR
b)Explain about RTL level modelling.
10. a) Explain about compiler directives in verilog
OR
b) Explain the architecture of FPGA.
11. a) Explain about structural modelling.

OR
b) Explain the structure of stimulus module.
12. a) Explain the architecture of PLA’s.

OR
b) Explain various design tools which are useful in different stages of design.
PART-C
Answer all questions, each carries five marks 4 X 5 =20
13. a)Draw the stick diagram of two input NMOS NAND gate.
OR
b)Design up/down counter using Verilog HDL.
14. a) Design a 1 bit full adder using gate level and dataflow level modelling.
OR
b)Explain the design of Mealy state machine using Verilog HDL with an example.
15. a) Design a Dflip-flop with asynchronous reset and its Test bench using verilog HDL.
OR
b)Design 4 X 1 Mux using data flow level modeling.
16. a) Explain the design of Moore state machine using Verilog HDL with an example.
OR
b) Explain the design of UART using FPGA.
452
18EC-505E-(A) -MOBILE COMMUNICATION & OPTICAL FIBER COMMUNICATION
Course Title : Mobile Communication & Optical Course Code 18EC-505E(A)

Fiber Communication
Hrs(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Contact Periods 60
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of Analog Communication, Digital Communication and
Advanced Communication Systems
Course Outcomes

Hours
CO1 PO1,PO2 12
Interpret the Basic Concepts of Mobile
Communication and Cellular Systems
CO2 Comprehend GSM and Apply Intelligent Cell PO1,PO2,PO5,PO6,PO7 10
Concept in Mobile Communication
CO3 Understand the Basics of Optical Fibre PO1,PO2 10
Communication
CO4 Use Fiber Optic Components, Devices and PO1,PO2,PO3,PO5,PO8,PO9 10
Measuring Instruments
CO5 Explain Modern Wireless Communication PO1,PO2,PO3,PO4,PO7,PO10 8
Systems
CO6 Understand Wave Length Division Multiplexing PO1,PO2,PO3,PO7,PO10 10
& Apply Optical Amplifiers
CO Learning Outcome Periods
CO1 Understand the Basics of Mobile Communication & Cellular System 12
CO2 Comprehend Digital Cellular & Intelligent Cell Concept in Mobile 10

Systems
CO3 Understand the Basics of Optical Fiber Communication 10
CO4 Use Optical Components, Devices and Measuring Instruments 10
CO5 Explain Modern Wireless Communication Systems 8
CO6 Understand Wave Length Division Multiplexing and Optical 10

Amplifiers
453
Course Contents
UNIT1-Introduction to Mobile Communication & Cellular System Duration: 12 Periods (L:

10– T:2) Limitations of conventional mobile phone system-Mobile Station and Base Station-Functions
of Mobile Switching Centre (MSC)-Roamer- -Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) and Time Division
Duplex (TDD)-Uplink and Downlink channels in mobile communication-Block diagram of a basic
cellular system-Mobile Phone Handset-Call progress in a cellular telephone system- Hexagonal cell site-
Frequency reuse-Capacity of a mobile cellular system-Definition of the term Cell-Cluster- Relation
between capacity and cluster size- Hand-off in mobile communication- Channel assignment strategies-
Cell splitting and sectoring- Micro-cell concept- Umbrella cell
UNIT -2: Digital Cellular Mobile System & Intelligent Cell Concept Duration: 10 Periods (L: 6–
T:4)
Disadvantages of analog cellular system-Features of digital cellular system-Global system for Mobile
Communication (GSM): architecture with block diagram-Channels and Services in GSM -GSM radio
subsystem-Frame structure of the GSM-Concept of Intelligent cell –Advantages of implementing
Intelligent Cell – Applications of intelligent micro cell system – Intelligent Network and Types –
Intelligent Micro cell operation - Power delivery intelligent cells--Advanced Intelligent Network System
UNIT 3 –Basics of Optical Fiber Communication Duration: Duration: 10Periods
(L: 8– T:2)
Advantages of Light wave communication system over EM wave systems.- Different optical spectral
bands- Structure of optical fibre-Classification of optical fibres based on refractive index profile- Types
of fibres based on core diameter- Single Mode Fibre (SMF)- Multi Mode Fibre (MMF)- Advantages of
SMFs over MMFs- Total internal reflection in optical fibre- Define acceptance angle-Define cone of
acceptance- Define Numerical Aperture (NA)- Advantages of optical fibres over other communication
media- Various losses in optical fibres- -Classification of dispersions that occur in optical fibres- Group
Velocity Dispersion- Inter modal and intra modal dispersion- Wave Guide Dispersion- Polarization
Mode Dispersion
UNIT 4 Fibre Optic Components, Devices and Measuring Instruments Duration: 10 Periods (L:
6– T:4)
Various fibre optic components- Need for connectors in Fiber Optic Communication - Function of splice
in optical fibres- Types of connectors and splices- Mechanical splice and fusion splice- Need for optical
coupler/splitter- Different optical couplers- Working of an optical coupler- Need for isolator in Optical
Fibre Communication (OFC) - Working of isolator - Different types of measuring/testing instruments
454
used in the field of OFC- Use of optical attenuators- Working of Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
(OTDR)-Types of sources and detectors used in Optical Fibre Communication (OFC) - Features of an
optical source and detector- Principle of LASER- Construction and working of LASER source-
construction and working of APD - Block diagram of fibre optic communication system
Unit-5: Modern Wireless Communication Systems Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6– T:2)
Demerits of GSM system-Features of General Packet Radio Service (GPRS)- Features of Enhanced
Data Rates GSM Evolution (EDGE)-Compare the features of GSM, GPRS and EDGE systems-
Specifications of Digital European Cordless Telecommunication (DECT) system-Architecture of
DECT- DECT Radio Link – Personal Access Communication System (PACS) – Classification of
Mobile Data Networks- PACS Radio Interface - Basic concept of Wireless local loop (WLL)-Salient
features of 3G system-Advantages of 3G over earlier versions-Basic concepts of 4G.
UNIT 6 Wavelength Division Multiplexing and Optical Amplifiers Duration: 10 Periods

(L: 6– T:4)
Optical Time Domain Multiplexing- Limitations of Time Division Multiplexing (OTDM) in FOC- Need
for WDM in fibre optic communication- Wideband WDM and narrowband WDM - Dense Wavelength
Division Multiplexing (DWDM) - Block diagram of WDM system- Block diagram of DWDM-Need for
repeaters-Compare R, 2R and 3R repeaters- Comparison of repeaters and optical amplifiers- Block
diagram of Erbium Doped Fibre Amplifier (EDFA)- Principle and Operation of EDFA – Synchronous
Optical Network (SONET) - Fibres in Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet- Use of optical cables in
submarines- Local Telephone Network, in Cable T.V application
Suggested Learning Outcomes: After completing this course the student will be able to
1.0 Interpret the Basic Concepts of Mobile Communication System & Cellular System
1.1 List the limitations of conventional mobile phone system.
1.2 Define the terms mobile station and base station
1.3 State the functions of Mobile switching centre (MSC)
1.4 Define voice and control channels in mobile communication
1.5 Define Roamer
1.6 Distinguish between frequency division duplex (FDD) and time division duplex (TDD).
1.7 Explain uplink and downlink channels in mobile communication
1.8 Draw the block diagram of a basic mobile cellular system and explain each block.
1.9 Draw the and explain block diagram of mobile phone handset
1.10 Explain the process of call progress in a cellular telephone system
1.11 State the need for hexagonal cell site.
1.12 Explain the concept of frequency reuse.
1.13 Define the terms Cell and cluster
455
1.14 Explain the capacity of a cellular system
1.15 State the relation between capacity and cluster size.
1.16 Define co-channel interference.
1.17 Define Hand-off in mobile communication
1.18 Explain channel assignment strategies
1.19 Explain Cell splitting and sectoring
1.20 Define micro-cell concept
1.21 Define umbrella cell
2.0 Comprehend Digital Cellular & Intelligent Cell Concept in Mobile Systems
2.1 List the disadvantages of analog cellular system.
2.2 Mention the features of digital cellular system.
2.3 Explain the Global System for Mobile (GSM) architecture with block diagram.
2.4 Mention GSM channels
2.5 Explain GSM services
2.6 Explain the GSM radio subsystem
2.7 Explain the frame structure of the GSM
2.8 List the drawbacks of micro cell system
2.9 State the need for intelligent cell concept in mobile communication
2.10 Define Intelligent Cell
2.11 Mention the advantages of implementing intelligent cell
2.12 Explain intelligent micro cell operation
2.13 Explain power delivery intelligent cells
2.14 Mention the applications of intelligent micro cell system
2.15 List the types of intelligent network
2.16 Explain the types of intelligent network
2.17 Define Advanced Intelligent Network
2.18 Explain the characteristics of Advanced Intelligent Network
2.19 Draw and explain the architecture of Advanced Intelligent Network System
3.0 Basics of Optical Fibre Communication

3.1 Mention the advantages of Light wave communication system over EM wave systems.
3.2 Mention different optical spectral bands.
3.3 Explain the structure of optical fibre
3.4 Classify optical fibres based on refractive index profile
3.5 Draw the refractive index profile for step index and graded index fibre and explain
3.6 List the types of fibres based on core diameter
3.7 Define Single mode fibre (SMF)
456
3.8 Define multimode fibre (MMF)
3.9 List the advantages of SMFs over MMFs.
3.10 Explain total internal reflection in optical fibre.
3.11 Define acceptance angle, cone of acceptance and Numerical Aperture(NA)
3.12 List the advantages of optical fibres over other communication media
3.13 List various losses in optical fibres.
3.14 Classify different types of dispersions occur in optical fibres.
3.15 Explain Group Velocity Dispersion
3.16 Distinguish between inter modal and intra modal dispersion.
3.17 Define Wave Guide Dispersion
3.18 Explain Polarization Mode Dispersion
4.0 Use Optical Components, Devices and Measuring Instruments

4.1 List various fibre optic components
4.2 Mention the need for connectors in Fibre Optic Communication (FOC)
4.3 State the function of splice in optical fibres
4.4 List types of connectors and splices
4.5 Distinguish between mechanical splice and fusion splice
4.6 State the need for optical coupler/splitter
4.7 List different optical couplers
4.8 Explain the working of an optical coupler
4.9 State the need for isolator in Optical Fibre Communication (OFC)
4.10 Explain the working of optical isolator.
4.11 List different types of measuring/testing instruments used in the field of OFC.
4.12 State the use of optical attenuators
4.13 Explain the working of Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)
4.14 List two types of sources and detectors used in OFC
4.15 Mention important features of an optical source and an optical detector
4.16 State the principle of Light Amplification by Stimulation Emission of Radiation (LASER)
4.17 Explain the construction and working of LASER source.
4.18 Explain the construction and working of Avalanche Photo Diode (APD)
4.19 Draw the block diagram of Fibre Optic Communication System and explain each block.
5.0 Explain Modern Wireless Communication Systems
5.1 Mention the demerits of GSM system.
5.2 List the features of General Packet Radio Service (GPRS)
5.3 List the features of Enhanced Data Rates GSM Evolution (EDGE)
5.4 Compare the features of GSM, GPRS and EDGE systems
5.5 List specifications of Digital European Cordless Telecommunication (DECT) system.
457
5.6 Draw the architecture of DECT
5.7 Explain the architecture of DECT
5.8 Explain about DECT Radio Link
5.9 Draw and Explain the architecture of Personal Access Communication System (PACS)
5.10 Explain PACS Radio Interface
5.11 Mention mobile data applications
5.12 Classify mobile data networks
5.13 Explain basic concept of Wireless Local Loop (WLL)
5.14 List the salient features of 3G system
5.15 List the advantages of 3G over earlier versions
5.16 List the basic concepts of 4G version
6.0 Understand Wave Length Division Multiplexing and Optical Amplifiers
6.1 Explain Optical Time Division Multiplexing (OTDM)

6.2 Mention the limitations of Optical Time Division Multiplexing (OTDM) in FOC
6.3 Explain the need for WDM in fibre optic communication
6.4 Distinguish between wideband WDM and narrowband WDM
6.5 Explain wideband WDM
6.6 Draw the block diagram of WDM system
6.7 Draw and explain the block diagram of Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM)
6.8 State the need for repeater in Fibre Optic Communication
6.9 Compare R, 2R and 3R repeaters.
6.10 Distinguish between repeaters and optical amplifiers.
6.11 Draw and explain the block diagram of Erbium Doped Fibre Amplifier (EDFA).
6.12 Explain about Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)
6.13 Explain the use of fibres in Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet.
6.14 Explain the fibre optic cables for use in submarines, local telephone network and CTV
References
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. Mobile and Personal Communication Sytems and Services by Raj Pandya, PHI
2. Wireless Communications-Principles and Practice by Theodore S. Rappaport, PEARSON
3. Mobile Cellular Telecommunications-Analog and Digital systems by Willium C. Y. Lee,
McGrawHill
4. Mobile Communications by Jochen Schiller, PEARSON Publishers
5. Wireless and Cellular Communications by Sanjay Sharma, Katson Publications
458
6. Optical Fiber Communications by Gerd Keiser, McGraw Hill Publication
7. Optical Fiber and Laser Principles and Applications by Anuradha, New Age Publications
8. Optical Fiber Communications-Principles and Practice, John M. Senior, Pearson Publications
9. Optical Fiber Communications and Its Applications , S.C.Gupta, PHI
10. Electronic Communication Systems by Roy Blake, Thomson Delmar
Suggested E-Learning resources:
2. www.nptel.ac.in

1. Students visits Library to refer to Manuals and related books of Mobile and Optical
Communication
2. Visit nearby BSNL office / Optical Fiber Industry, Base station to familiarize with working of
various mobile communication systems, fabrication techniques, splicing and fiber networks
3. and prepare a report
4. Prepare a report on various modern wireless communication systems
5. Search Internet to know e-waste management
6. Prepare a PPT/Report on optical networks
7. Construct model optical fiber communication link
8. Search internet for knowing latest trends in mobile communication and prepare a report
459
Type of
Skill/Score
time independently. was collected several times was collected
Collects a great more than one independently. several times
Data/ deals of time Collects basic with assistance.
Material
Collection refer to the topic Collects more refer to the topic limited
topic topic

outlined in a step-by- outlined in a step- outlined in a step-by- were outlined
step fashion that could by-step fashion step fashion, but had were
be followed by that could be 1 or 2 gaps that incomplete or
Methodolog anyone without followed by require explanation not sequential,
y/ additional anyone without even after expert even after
Procedure explanations. additional feedback. expert feedback
Expert help was
needed to
accomplish this.
Activity/ Quality of Skill is Skill is mastered to Skill is present but Skill needs
Full-fills Performs all duties Performs almost Performs nearly all Performs
team roles of assigned team all duties duties very little
without needing rarely needs rarely needs work, often
Shares
reminding reminding reminding needs
work
reminding.
equality
Listen to fare amount a little more than sometimes talk too most of the
other team needed much talking,
mates rarely allows
others to
speak
CO/PO Mapping Matrix

460
Hours
CO1 PO1,PO2 8
Interpret the Basic Concepts of Mobile
Communication System
CO2 Explain Cellular System Design Fundamentals PO1,PO2,PO5,PO6,PO7 10
CO3 Compare and use various Multiple Access PO1,PO2,PO4,PO9 10
Techniques
CO4 Comprehend Digital Cellular Mobile Systems PO1,PO2,PO5,PO7,PO8 10
CO5 Apply Intelligent Cell Concept in Mobile PO1,PO2,PO5,PO10 10
Communication
CO6 Explain Modern Wireless Communication Systems PO1,PO2,PO3,PO7,PO10 12
461
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl
Unit No. U(3
Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6
11(a) 15(a)

3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8
12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
462
V Semester, 18EC-505E (A)-MOBILE COMMUNICATION & OFC
MID SEM – I MODEL QUESTION PAPER
PART-A
Answer All questions. Each carries 1 marks. 4X1=4 marks

1. State the functions of Mobile switching centre
2. State the need for cellular concept in mobile communication
3. List the disadvantages of analog cellular system
4. Mention GSM channels
PART-B
5(a) Draw the block diagram of a basic cellular system and explain each block?
OR
5(b) Explain the concept of frequency reuse?
6(a) Explain the GSM radio subsystem
OR
6(b). Explain power delivery intelligent cells
PART-C
7(a) Explain the process of call progress in a cellular telephone system

OR
7(b) Explain Cell splitting and sectoring
8(a) Explain the Global System for Mobile (GSM) architecture with block diagram
OR
8(b) Draw and explain the architecture of Advanced Intelligent Network System
463
MID SEM – II MODEL QUESTION PAPER
PART-A

1. Mention the advantages of Light wave communication system over EM wave systems?
2. List the advantages of SMFs over MMFs?
3. List various fibre optic components?
4. State the use of optical attenuators?
PART-B
Answer All questions. Each carries 3marks. 2X3=6Marks
5(a) Mention different optical spectral bands?

OR
5(b) Explain Group Velocity Dispersion?
6(a) What is the need for isolator in Optical Fibre Communication (OFC)?
OR
6(b) Distinguish between mechanical splice and fusion splice?
PART-C
7(a) Draw the refractive index profile for step index fibre and explain?
OR
7(b) Explain Polarization Mode Dispersion
8(a) Explain the working of Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)?

OR
8(b) Draw the block diagram of Fibre Optic Communication System and explain each block?
464
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING:TS: HYDERABD
PART-A
1. List the limitations of conventional mobile phone system
2. List various losses in optical fibres?
3. Classify mobile data networks?

4. Mention the applications of intelligent micro cell system
5. List the demerits of GSM system?
6. List the advantages of 3G over earlier versions?
7. What is the need for repeater in Fibre Optic Communication?
8. What is the need for WDM in fibre optic communication?
PART-B
9(a) Distinguish between frequency division duplex (FDD) and time division duplex (TDD)?
OR
9(b) List the salient features of 3G system?
10(a) List important features of an optical source used in Fibre Optic Communication?
OR
10(b) Distinguish between wideband WDM and narrowband WDM?
11(a) Explain the architecture of Digital European Cordless Telecommunication (DECT) system?
465
OR
11(b) Draw and Explain the architecture of Personal Access Communication System (PACS)?
12(a) Compare R, 2R and 3R repeaters?

OR
12(b) Explain the fibre optic cables for use in submarines?
PART-C
13(a) Draw the block diagram of a basic cellular system and explain each block?
OR
13(b) Explain about DECT Radio Link?

Explain the characteristics of Advanced Intelligent Network
14(a) Explain total internal reflection in optical fibre?
OR
14(b) Explain Optical Time Division Multiplexing (OTDM)?
15(a) Explain basic concept of Wireless Local Loop (WLL)?
15(b) Explain the architecture of DECT?

16(a) Draw and explain the block diagram of Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM)?
OR
16(b) Draw and explain the block diagram of Erbium Doped Fibre Amplifier (EDFA)?
466
18EC-505E (B) - Basics of VLSI Circuits
Pre requisites :
Course Title : Basics of VLSI Circuits Course Code 18EC-505E (B)

Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Assignments Total Contact Hours
: 60Pds
This course requires the basic knowledge of logic gates, combinational logic
Course Outcomes : After completion of the course the student will attain following outcomes
CO Learning Outcomes Periods
CO1 : Compare various MOS fabrication technologies 8
CO2 : Analyze the various factors affecting designing of MOS circuits 12
CO3 : Appreciate various design rules MOS fabrication 8
CO4 : Calculate resistance, capacitance, time delay of C MOS 12
CO5 : Compare the structures of Verilog and VHDL 12
CO6 : Use the concepts of Verilog programming 8
Course Content
1. Introduction to MOS technology Duration: 8 Periods (L: 2– T:6)

Evolution of Integrated circuit technology, Metal Oxide Semiconductor (MOS) and VLSI
Technology, Basic MOS transistor, Enhancement mode transistor, Depletion mode transistor.
nMOS fabrication process, pMOS fabrication process, CMOS fabrication – the p-well
process,CMOS fabrication – the n-well process, CMOS fabrication – Twin tube process,
BiCMOS technology, CMOS and Bipolar technologies.
2. Basic Electrical Properties of MOS and BiCMOS Circuits

Duration: 12 Periods (L: 6– T:6)
Drain to source current Ids versus voltage Vds relationships, aspects of MOS transistor threshold
voltage MOS transistor trans conductance g m and output conductance gds,MOS transistor figure
of merit ω0, pass transistor, nMOS inverter pull-up to pull-down ratio (Z p.u./Zp.d.) for an nMOS
inverter driven by another nMOS invert, Pull-up to pull-down ratio for an nMOS inverter driven
through one or more pass transistors, alternative forms of Pull-up, CMOS inverter – five regions
467
of operation, MOS transistor circuit model, key parameters of CMOS and Bipolar transistors,
BiCMOS inverters, latch-up in CMOS circuits, BiCMOS latch-up susceptibility.
3. Design Processes of MOS and BiCMOS Circuits Duration:8 Periods (L: 4– T:4)
MOS layers, Stick diagrams, nMOS design style, CMOS design style, Design rules, Lambda-
based design rules, Contact cuts, Double metal MOS process rules, CMOS lambda-based design
rules, Layout diagrams, CMOS layout.
4. Basic circuit concepts: Duration: 12 Periods (L: 4– T:8)

Sheet resistance, Inverter resistance. ,Area capacitances of layers, Standard unit of capacitance
Cg, area capacitance calculation, delay unit ( ĩ ), Inverter delays, Rise-time and fall-time
estimations of CMOS inverter, Cascaded inverters as drivers, Inverting type nMOS super buffer
,BiCMOS drivers. Propagation delays – cascaded pass transistors, Long polysilicon wires,
wiring capacitances.
5. Understand Design flow for designing VLSI IC Duration: 12 Periods (L: 6– T:6)
Use of Verilog VHDL in VLSI simulation- steps involved in the design flow for the VLSI IC
design- importance of Hardware Description Languages in VLSI design-Compare VHDL and
Verilog HDL-Features of Verilog HDL- Instantiation and inference of a component- modules
and module instances in Verilog - four levels of abstraction to represent the internals of a
module.
6. Concepts of Verilog Duration: 8 Periods (L: 6– T:2)
Components of a Verilog module definition- port connection rules in a module instantiation-

lexical conventions like number specification, Identifiers keywords, etc different data types like
value set, nets, registers, vectors, integer, real and time register data types, arrays, memories and
strings- defparam and localparam keywords- system tasks and compiler directives-Define
expressions, operators and operands- types of operators used in the Verilog HDL
Suggested Learning Outcomes :
1.0 Introduction to MOS technology
1.1 Evolution of Integrated circuit technology
1.2 Describe Metal Oxide Semiconductor (MOS) and VLSI Technology
1.3 Draw Basic MOS transistor
1.4 Explain Enhancement mode transistor .
1.5 Explain Depletion mode transistor.
1.6 Explain nMOS fabrication process.
468
1.7 Explain pMOS fabrication process.
1.8 List steps in CMOS fabrication – the p-well process.
1.9 List steps in CMOS fabrication – the n-well process.
1.10 List steps in CMOS fabrication – Twin tube process.
1.11 Explain BiCMOS technology.
1.12 Compare CMOS and Bipolar technologies.
2.0 Analyze Basic Electrical Properties of MOS and BiCMOS Circuits
2.1 Derive drain to source current Ids versus voltage Vds relationships.
2.2 Examine aspects of MOS transistor threshold voltage V t
2.3 Explain MOS transistor transconductance gm and output conductance g ds.
2.4 Define MOS transistor figure of merit ω 0.
2,5 Explain the pass transisitor.
2.5 Explain the nMOS inverter,
2.6 Determine pull-up to pull-down ratio (Zp.u./Zp.d.) for an nMOS inverter driven by another nMOS
inverter.
2.7 Explain Pull-up to pull-down ratio for an nMOS inverter driven through one or more pass
transistors.
2.8 Differentiate alternative forms of Pull-up.
2.9 Explain the CMOS inverter – five regions of operation.
2.10 Draw MOS transistor circuit model.
2.11 Compare aspects of key parameters of CMOS and Bipolar transistors.
2.12 Draw BiCMOS inverters.
2.13 Examine latch-up in CMOS circuits.
2.14 Explain BiCMOS latch-up susceptibility.
3.0 Design Processes of MOS and BiCMOS Circuits
3.1 Illustrate MOS layers.
3.2 Sketch Stick diagrams.
3.3 Describe nMOS design style.
469
3.4 Describe CMOS design style.
3.5 Apply Design rules.
3.6 Apply Lambda-based design rules.
3.7 Illustrate Contact cuts.
3.8 List Double metal MOS process rules.
3.9 List CMOS lambda-based design rules.
3.10 Describe Layout diagrams.
3.11 Draw the simple CMOS layout.
4.0 Understand Basic circuit concepts
4.1 Define Sheet resistance

4.2 Calculate Inverter resistance.
4.3 Explain Area capacitances of layers.
4.4 Define Standard unit of capacitance □Cg
4.5 Calculate area capacitance.
4.6 Define the delay unit ( ĩ )
4.7 Explain Inverter delays.
4.8 Explain Rise-time and fall-time estimations of CMOS inverter.
4.9 Explain Cascaded inverters as drivers.
4.10 Explain Inverting type nMOS super buffer.
4.11 Explain BiCMOS drivers.
4.12 Explain Propagation delays – cascaded pass transistors.
4.13 Describe long polysilicon wires.
4.14 Explain Wiring capacitances.
5.0 Understand Design flow for designing VLSI IC
5.1. Explain the use of Verilog VHDL in VLSI simulation

5.2. Explain the steps involved in the design flow for the VLSI IC design
5.3. Explain the importance of Hardware Description Languages in VLSI design
5.4. Compare VHDL and Verilog HDL
5.5. List the features of Verilog HDL
5.6. Explain the difference between an instantiation and inference of a component.
5.7. Explain differences between modules and module instances in Verilog.
5.8. Explain four levels of abstraction to represent the internals of a module.
470
6.0 Concepts of Verilog
6.1 Identify the components of a Verilog module definition
6.2 Explain the port connection rules in a module instantiation
6.3 Explain the lexical conventions like number specification, Identifiers keywords, etc
6.4 Mention different data types like value set, nets, registers, vectors, integer, real and time .
register data types, arrays, memories and strings
6.5 Explain defparam and localparam keywords
6.6 Explain about system tasks and compiler directives
6.7 Define expressions, operators and operands.
6.8 Mention important types of operators used in the Verilog HDL
Reference Books :
1. Pucknell & Eshraghian: Basic Vlsi Design, Phi, (3/E), 1996
2. E. Weste & Eshraghian: Principles Of CMOS VlSI Design, Addition Wesley, 1994
3. M. Conway: Introduction to VlSI Systems, Addition Wesley, 1980
4. A. Mukherjie: Introduction To NMOS and CMOS System Design, Phi,1986
1. http://www.vlsi-expert.com
2. www.nptel.ac.in
1. Refer to datasheets of various IC’s appraise of the usefulness of VLSI ICs such as SMD processors
2. Familiarize with various fabrication technologies of VLSI IC’s
3. Familiarize with various FPGA tools and technologies

PO Periods
CO1: Compare various MOS fabrication technologies R/U 1,2,10 10
CO2: Analyze the various factors affecting designing of MOS circuits R/U 1,2,5,6,7 10
CO3: Appreciate various design rules MOS fabrication R/U/A 1,2,9 10
CO4: Calculate resistance, capacitance, time delay of C MOS R/U/A 1,2,5,7 10
CO5: Compare the structures of Verilog and VHDL R/U/A 1,2,5 10
CO6: Use the concepts of Verilog programming R/U/A 1,2,3,7 10
471
MID SEM-I EXAM

S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-I 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-II 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)
MID SEM-II EXAM
S.No Unit Name
R U A Remarks
5(a) 7(a)
1 Unit-III 1, 2
5(b) 7(b)
6(a) 8(a)
2 Unit-IV 3, 4
6(b) 8(b)

Sl
Unit No. U(3
Marks)
1 I
1 9(a) 13(a)
2 II
3 III
2 10(a) 14(a)
4 IV
9(b) 13(b)
5 V 4 5, 6
11(a) 15(a)

3 11(b) 15(b)
10(b) 14(b)
6 VI 7,8
12(a) 16(a)

12(b) 16(b)
472
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING TELANGANA
18EC-505E (B) – BASICS OF VLSI CIRCUITS
VI SEMESTER MID SEMESTER-I MODEL PAPER
TIME:11/2 H Max Marks:20
PART-A
Answer all questions. Each question carries 1 mark. 4x1=4M
1. Draw enhancement mode nMOS transistor.

2. Name two methods of CMOS fabrication process.
3. Write the relation between Ids & Vds .
4. Draw Pass transistor.
PART-B
Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks . 2x3=6M
5(a). List the steps in CMOS fabrication process.
OR
5(b). Draw basic MOS transistor.
6(a). What are the three alternative forms of pull-up?
OR
6(b). What is meant by zpu and zpd for an nMOS inverter.
PART-C
Answer all questions. Each question carries five marks 2x5=10M
7(a). Explain BiCMOS technology.
OR
7(b).Compare five differences between CMOS and Bipolar Technology.
8(a). Explain the five regions of CMOS Inverter.
OR
8(b). Explain BiCMOS Latch-up susceptibility.
473
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING TELANGANA
VI SEMESTER MID SEMESTER-II MODEL PAPER
TIME:11/2 H Max Marks:20
PART-A
1. List the basic layers in MOS circuits.

2. What is meant by Stick diagram.
3. Define Sheet resistance.
4. Define delay unit.
PART-B
5(a). What is meant by contact cuts.
OR
5(b). List three lambda based design rules.
6(a). What is meant by wiring capacitance?
OR
6(b). What is meant rise time and fall time of CMOS inverter.
PART-C
Answer all questions. Each question carries five marks 2x5=10M
7(a). Draw the layout diagram of CMOS NOR gate
OR
7(b). Draw the layout diagram of nMOS inverter.
8(a). Explain propogation delay with cascaded pass transistor.
OR
8(b). Explain cascaded inverter as drivers.
474
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING - TELANGANA
VI SEMESTER END EXAM MODEL PAPER
TIME: 2 Hrs Max Marks:40
PART-A
1. Draw depletion mode nMOS transistor

2. What are the colours followed for n diffusion and p diffusion layers
3. List the logical operators in verilog.
4. Define standard unit of capacitance.
5. Define module in verilog.
6. List the four levels of abstraction in verilog
7. List 2 data types in verilog
8. Define operator in verilog.
PART-B
9(a). Draw BiCMOS inverter.
OR
9(b). State the use of verilog HDL in VLSI simulation.
10(a). List CMOS lambda based design rules.
OR
10(b). Define defparam with an example.
11(a). What is the difference between instantiation and inference of a component.
OR
11(b). List three features of verilog HDL.
12(a). What are the components of a verilog module.
OR
12(b). Explain the representation of number literal in verilog .
475
PART-C
Answer any four questions. Each question carries five marks. 4x5=20M
13(a). An nMOS inverter is operating in saturation region with following parameters. V GS = 5 V, Vtn=
12 V, W/L= 110, µnCox= 110 µA/V2. Find the transconductance of the device.
OR
13(b). Explain the importance of hardware description languages in VLSI design.
14(a). For the figure shown below calculate the area capacitance relative to that of standard gate L=30 λ
and W=3 λ
W
L
OR
14(b). Explain port connection rules in a module instantiation.
15(a). Explain the steps in VLSI IC design flow.
OR
15(b).Write verilog module for “and” gate in gate level and behavioural modelling.
16(a). Explain five operators used in verilog with an example.
OR
16(b). Explain about system tasks and compiler directives.
476
18EC-506P -INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : Industrial Electronics Lab Practice Course Code 18EC-506P

Periods(L:T:P)
Pre requisites
This course requires the basic knowledge of the components and basic skill in electronic laboratory
Course outcomes

PO Hours
CO1 Analyze characteristics of various power electronic R/U/A 1,2,4,10 9
devices
CO2 Design UJT relaxation oscillator R/U/A 1,2,3,4,10 12
CO3 Illustrate various power control methods R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5, 9

10
CO4 Appreciate characteristics of various types of transducers R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5, 15
10
45
Course Content
I. Power devices
1. Identify and test using DMM the Power Semiconductor devices SCR, TRIAC, DIAC,, SUS
SBS
2. Identify and test using DMM MOSFET, IGBT, LASCR, UJT, OPTO COUPLERS MCT2E,
MOC 3011 .
3. Plot the characteristics of MOSFET and determine gate source threshold voltage
a) Implement a MOSFET switch and control a 6V lamp using NAND gate
4. Plot the characteristics of SCR and determine Triggering current
a) To Verify 3 methods of switching off scr.
b) To design a simple burglar alarm circuit using SCR and test it
477
II. UJT Circuits
5. Plot the characteristics and determine the intrinsic standoff ratio of UJT
6. Construct UJT Relaxation oscillator circuit and observe the output waveforms on CRO
III. Power control
7. Trigger the SCR by UJT and control output Power

8. Plot the characteristics of TRIAC and DIAC
a) Verify that TRIAC can be triggered by positive and negative pulses
b) Verify 3 methods of switching off TRIAC
9. Implement 100 watt 230V AC Lamp Control circuit using Optocoupler MOC3011 and
4 Amps TRIAC.
10. Vary the speed of a 1 phase 230V AC motor using TRIAC-DIAC phase control
a) Observe the waveforms at the gate terminal and load using isolation transformer on
CRO
b) Replace the motor with a 230 volts incandescent lamp and observe the waveforms on
CRO
IV. Transducers
11. Draw the performance characteristics of LVDT

12, Draw the performance characteristics of RTD
13. Measure the temperature using IC LM 335
14. Implement an ON/OFF temperature controller using IC LM335
15. Draw the characteristics of Load cell
Reference Books

2. Industrial Electronics and Control by S.K.Bhattacharya, S.Chatterjee TTTI Chandigarh –TES
5. PLCs & SCADA : Theory and Practice by Rajesh Mehra, Vikrant Vij- Laxmi Publications
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3. www.youtube.com
478
1. Collection of catalogues and specification sheets, preparation of a chart displaying symbols of

above components
2. Familiarization of various kinds transducers that you student comes across in daily life.
3. Inspect a UPS under the guidance of experts to know various sub systems present
479
18EC-507P -COMPUTER HARDWARE & NETWORKING LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : Computer Hardware & Networking Course Code 18EC-507P

Lab Practice
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact
Periods : 45Pds
Rationale: With the computer becoming a household item , the need for Computer hardware knowledge
need not be stressed. Computer hardware industry is another major area where excellent job
opportunities are available. Experiments in Optical fibre communication are also included to give
additional practical inputs.
Course outcomes:

PO Periods
CO1 Identification of the tools required for computer repair R/U/A 1,2,4,10 9
CO2 Study of the basic computer Hardware R/U/A 1,2,3,4,10 12
CO3 Study of the Computer Networking methods R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5, 15

10
CO4 Study of the Fiber optic Communication links R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5, 9
10
45
Course Content:
1.0 PC Hardware- Identification of System Layout.
1.1 Identify the tools and material required for carrying out computer repair
1.2 Identify and familiarize with use of Cleaning material : Micro Fibre cloth , Brushes and
blower, cleaning alcohol
1.3 Identify and familiarize with safety procedures: wearing a Dicharge wrist band, Goggles,
gloves, attire
2.0. Basic Computer hardware
480
2.1 Open a PC cabinet and Identify Basic Computer Hardware: mother board ,
Components ,Chipset, Cables,Cards, Disk drives,connecting cards,Heatsink
2.2 Identify various Internal and External slots in the mother board and connect them with
required extension cards and connecting cables
2.3 Identify the voltage ratings of SMPS cables connected to :Disk drives, motherboard, Fans,
Measure the Output voltages of SMPS
2.4 Perform systematic Disassembling of the PC
2.5 Assemble the PC and perform routine tests of Monitor,Fan,SMPS and RAM
2.6 Change the settings of CMOS Setup in Drive sizes, partitions, booting sequence, password,
date and time, and verify them on completing booting
2.7 Install the latest version of Windows Operating system
2.8 Verify the function of control panel settings.
2.9 Perform Partitioning and and Formatting of Hard disks.
2.10 Install and Run antivirus software
2.11 Carry out Preventive maintenance of a PC
2.12 Take Backup of C drive
2.13 Identify Laptop Hardware
2.14 Carry out PC Troubleshooting by :removing RAM,disconnecting Fan power card, removing
Heat sink
2.15 Connect,operate and maintain i) Inkjet Printer ii) Laser Printer iii)Scanner iv) Web Cam
3. Computer Networking
3.1 Identify and note down the specifications of various networking devices & Cables, Jacks
Connectors, tools etc used in local area networks
3.2 Prepare the UTP cable for cross and direct connections using crimping tool.
3.3 Transfer files between systems in LAN using FTP Configuration,
3.4 Test the Network using ipconfig, ping / tracert and Netstat utilities and debug the network
issues (3)
3.5 Install and configure Network Devices: HUB ii) Switch iii) Routers
3.6 Configure Host IP, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway in a system in LAN (TCP/IP
Configuration).
3.7 Configure DNS to establish interconnection between systems
3.8 Install and Configure Wireless NIC and transfer files between systems in LAN and Wireless
LAN
3.9 access a remote desktop using Team viewer software
481
3.10 store the files in Cloud using Google drive/One drive/Drop box & share
482
4.0 Fiber Optics
4.1 Set up fiber optic analogue link.

4.2 Set up a fiber optic digital link
4.3 Verify modulation & Demodulation of light source by pulse width modulation
technique.
4.4 Test Fiber optic Voice Link.
4.5 Verify the NRZ & RZ modulation formats in Optical Communication.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. PC Upgrading -- Stephen Bigelow (TMH)
2. Computer Hardware -- Manhar Lotia & Others (BPB Publications)
3. Computer Networks, 4th Edition -- Tannenbaum
4. Enhanced Guide to Managing And Maintaining Your PC -- Jean Andrews (Thomson)
5. Basics of Networking -- NIIT PHI publications
6. PC Hardware A Beginners Guide -- Gilster (TMH)
7. Basics of Networking -- NIIT, PHI Publications
8. Networking Essentials with Projects - Palmer, Thomson
2. www.nptel.ac.in
3.www.Techopedia.com
483
8086 Microprocessors Programming Lab practice
Course Title : 8086 Microprocessors Programming Course Code 18EC508P
Lab Practice
Periods(L:T:P)
Pre requisites
Knowledge of instruction SET OF 8086 and keil software.
Course outcomes
Hours
CO1 Write programs using Data Transfer Instructions and R, U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 10

Arithmetic Instructions
CO2 Write Programs using Logical, Shift and Rotate R, U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 5
Instructions
CO3 Write Programs using Branching Instructions R,U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 20
CO4 Write Programs using CALL and RET Instructions U, A 1,2,3,4,8,9,10 10
Total 45
Sessions
List of Experiments
1. Execute an assembly language program related to data transfer group of instructions.

2. Execute an assembly language program for the addition of two 8 bit Numbers and two 16 bit
Numbers
3. Execute an assembly language program for the Subtraction of two 8 bit Numbers and two 16 bit
Numbers
4. Execute an assembly language program for Multiplication of two 8 bit Numbers and two 16 bit
Numbers
5. Execute an assembly language program for Division of 16 bit Number by 8 bit Number
6. Execute an assembly language program to add two BCD numbers.
7. Execute an assembly language program to find reverse of a given number
8. Execute an assembly language program to find the factorial of a number.
9. Execute an assembly language program to count number of ones and zeros in a number.
10. Execute an assembly language program to find sum of ‘N’ numbers given in an array.
11. Execute an assembly language program to find sum of ‘N’ Natural Numbers
12. Execute an assembly language program to find the Smallest among ‘N’ Numbers.
13. Execute an assembly language program to implement searching on an array.
484
14. Execute an assembly language program to manipulate strings.
15. Execute an assembly language program to implement pattern matching.
16. Execute an assembly language program to move data from one location to another location.
17. Execute a program for generating multiplication table for a given number
18. Execute an assembly language program to sort the numbers in ascending order.
19. Execute an assembly language program to sort the numbers in descending order.

Student activity like mini-project, quizzes, etc. should be done in group of 5-10 students.
1. Each group should do any one of the following type of activity or any other similar activity
related to the course with prior approval from the course coordinator and programme
coordinator concerned.
2. Each group should conduct different activity and no repetition should occur.
3. Visit different web sites relevant to topics. Listen to the lectures and submit a handwritten report
4. Coding competitions
485
18EC-509P-PROGRAMMING IN ‘C’LAB PRACTICE
Course Title : Programming in ‘C’ Lab practice Course Code 18EC-509P

Semester V Course Group :Core
Periods(L:T:P)
Methodology Lecture + Practical Total Contact Hours : :45Pds
Prerequisites:
Basics of digital electronics and logical thinking
Course outcomes:

PO Periods
CO1 Appreciate the necessity and evolution R/U/A 1,2,4,10 3

of the computer language and
selection of programming paradigms
CO2 Perform algorithm development, its R/U/A 1,2,3,4,10 15
representation using flow-charts and
analysis of solution for simple
problems.
CO3 Employ C-programming language for R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5, 6
simple real-world problem-solving 10
using computer
CO4 Develop and analyze simple R/U/A 1,2,3,4,5, 18
programs/functions and their 10
integration in larger problem solving.
List of Exercises
1. Write a C Program Display your country name and beep at the end.
2. Write a C Program Display the following text:
“welcome to C programming language”
3. Write a C Program Compute the area and circumference of a circle given the radius.
4. Given the resistance and standard tolerance, generate the color bands ofthe resistor.
5. Write a C Program Compute simple interest given the interest rate, principal and duration.
6. Write a CProgram to find if given number is even or odd.
7. Write a CProgram to find if given year is leap year.
8. Write a CProgram to find largest of three numbers.
9. Write a CProgram to grade students using switch case statement
90-100% A grade
486
70-89% B grade
50-69% C grade
40-49 D grade
Below 40% Fail
10. Write a CProgram to add 1 to n natural numbers.
11. Write a CProgram to print following output on screen.
*
**
***
****
12. Write a CProgram to add numbers in array.
13. Write a CProgram to add two 3X3 matrices.
14. Write a CProgram to multiply two 3X3 matrices.
15. Write a CProgram to find transpose of matrix.
16. Write a CProgram to find length of string.
17. Write a CProgram to find whether given string is palindrome or not.
18. Write a CProgram to swap two numbers by using call by value.
19. Write a CProgram to swap two numbers by using call by reference.
20. Write a CProgram to find factorial by using recursion technique.
21. Write a CProgram to add two numbers using user defined add function and return statement.
22. Write a CProgram to Find Absolute value of a number using math.h header file.
23. Write a C Program to Compute the area and circumference of a circle given the radius using macro
for pi.
24. Write a C Program to Find smallest of three numbers using macro
487
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION
18EC-510P - PROJECT WORK V
SEMESTER
Course Title : Project Work Course Code 18EC-510P

Periods(L:T:P)
S.
Duratio Max Marks
N Subject Items Remarks
n
o
1.Project Work I spell

(Abstract submission) 25
2. Project Work II spell

(Final submission) 25
3.a)Maintenance of
Log 15
Book
PROJECT 15
1 WORK 6 Months b)Record work
4.a) Seminar 10
b) Viva Voce 10
Total 100
:
The Project shall carry 100 marks and pass marks is 50% a candidate failing to secure
the minimum marks should repeat the Project work.
488
SKILL UPGRADATION-V
Course Title : Skill Upgradation -V Course Code : :Common

Semester : V Course : Core
Group : 2.5
Methodology
Contact
CIE : Rubrics Periods
SEE : Nil
Rationale: This course is introduced for all semesters with a purpose of providing outside
classroom experiences that lead to overall development of the students. One whole day is
allocated for activities.
Course Objective

2. To instil Moral, Social Values and Loyalty.

Activity Period
Frequency
No Activity s
1 Haritha Haram(plantation &Maintenance) 9 3 times in a semester
2 Waste management 12 3 times in a semester
3 Swach Bharath 28 4 times in a semester
4 Mini projects 7 1 time in a semester
5 Video Clips 9 3 times in a semester
6 Seminar/Quiz/Presentation/Group discussion 18 6 times in a semester

Expert Lectures
 Human Rights
 Discrimination against women in work
place 16
8 4 Times
 Domestic Violence
 Patent rights
 Salient features of the Constitution-
 Indian Culture &Yoga
 Emerging Technologies
Total Periods 105
489
Note: in case Expert faculty are not available English faculty may handle the expert lectures or
Course Outcomes
CO Outcome CO/PO
Mapping
profession.
COURSE CONTENT:
Human Rights
Human Rights-Definition-constitutional provisions-right to life and liberty-Human Rights of
Women-Discrimination against women- steps that are to be taken to eliminate discrimination
against women in Education, employment, health care, Economic and social life, Women in
rural areas- Status of Women in India - Constitutional Safeguards - Dowry Prohibition act
1961- Domestic violence act 2005- Sexual harassment at work place bill 2006-Human Rights
of Children- Who is a child- list the Rights of the Child- Right to education--Protection of
Children from Sexual Offences Act(POCSO)-2012- National Human Rights Commission-
Constitution- Powers and function of the Commission-Employee rights- Provisions made-
Contractual-Non contractual employee rights-Whistle blowing-definition-Aspects-Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR)–Meaning-Need for protection- Briefly description of concept of patents,
Copy right, Trade mark.
Evaluation:
The student must maintain a record of all activities conducted on skill upgradtion/ Activities
day and prepare a soft copy of report and submit it to their mentor or upload to the institute
website or mail.
The reports shall be evaluated by the mentors though rubrics and accordingly give the
eligibility for 2.5 credits . The student must have participated in at least 75% of activities to get
eligibility.
490
Experiments and
Basic knowledge
Lifelong learning
Communication
Environment &
Individual and
Engineer and
sustainability
Engineering
Team work
Knowledge
Discipline
practice
society
Ethics
Tools
PO PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1
1 0
CO1 ✓ ✓ ✓ 5,10
CO2 ✓ ✓ 5,10
CO3 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 6,7,9,10
CO4 ✓ ✓ ✓ 5,7,10
On Successful completion of the course, the student will be able to attain the following Course
Outcomes (COs):
491
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION
VI SEMESTER
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
(Practical Training)
Course Title : Industrial Training Course Code : : 18EC-601P

Semester : VI Course Group : Core
Teaching Scheme in : 0:0:7 Credits : 25
periods ( L : T :P)
Methodology : Training Total Contact Periods : 6 months
Rationale: Industrial is introduced in the VI semester for the students as a part of the
program to make the passed out students industry ready thus saving the training and
apprenticeship needs in the industry and also help in capacity building of the Telangana
state and the country.
Course Objective:
To enable the students to
1. Acquaint with Industry environment and culture.

2. Develop professional skills
3. Enhance the usage skills of modern tools
4. Develop Communication and leadership skills.
5. Encourage entrepreneurship
The industrial training shall carry 1000 marks and the passing minimum is 50%. A
candidate failing to secure the minimum marks should complete it at his own expense. No
apprenticeship training stipend is payable in such case.
During training the candidate shall put in a minimum of 90% attendance. The
Project report should be signed by the Organizational Representative and contain the
observations made by the Candidate.
492
 Evaluation and assessment of Industrial Training, shall be done and marks be awarded in the
following manner, provided the candidates concerned have put up minimum 90% attendance
of Industrial Training.
Industrial assessment at Industry : 600 marks (in two spells of 300 marks each)
Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks
Semester End Examination : 100 marks

(Seminar/viva-voce at Institution)
_________
TOTAL 1000 marks
Assessment parameters at Industry

Assessment I Assessment
Sl No (First II (Second
Learning Parameter
Quarter) Quarter)
Attendance and punctuality 20 20
1
Familiarity of tools and material 30 30
2
Engineering skills 50 50
3
Application of knowledge & Problem solving skills 50 50
4
Comprehension and observation 10 10
5
Professionalism/Professional ethics 20 20
6
Safety and environmental consciousness 10 10
7
Communication skills 20 20
8
Supervisory skills 50 50
9
General conduct during the period 40 40
10
Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

300
600 marks
493
Assessment parameters at Institution (End Examination)
Institution Level Evaluation Scheme

Sl Criteria Marks Time
No
1 1st Report Submission 50 within 4 Weeks
2 Seminar-I 50 9th to 10th week
3 2nd Report Submission 50 Within 12 weeks
4 Log book 100 --
5 Seminar-II 50 Before Viva-Voce
Institute Evaluation 300
Total
1 Viva-Voce 50 After 24 weeks
2 Presentation/Demonstration 50
of skills
Total 100
The assessment at the institute level will be done by a minimum of three members i.e. Internal
Faculty, Industrial Experts/External Examiner and H.O.D. and the shall be averaged
OBJECTIVES: On completion of a spell of practical training in an industry, the student will

be able to –
1.0 Organisational set up
1.1 Identify the type of organization
1.2 Draw the organizational chart
1.3 List the powers, duties/responsibilities of various organizational positions
as per the above chart.
1.4 Identify the various functions of the organization.
2.0 Automation of the organization
2.1 Identify the different atomized activities of the organization.
2.2 List the equipment, software used for each of the activities.
2.3 List various atomized operations you are trained/exposed to.
494

Dece

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dece

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dece

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING

1. Duration of course is 3 years of Regular Academic instruction.

II. RULES AND REGULATIONS

1.3 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION

The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.

1.4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)

A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in sessional work

to the 31st March of the succeeding year.

b). The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday

c). Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.

a) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester

2.1 I, II, III, IV, V and VI Semesters:

THEORY EXAMINATION: Each semester end examination carries 40 marks in

2.2 ASSESSMENT SCHEME

Part 3 ‘Understanding’ based

V. Award of Grades and Grade points criteria for C-18 Curriculum

2. Hybrid grading system for regular students:

E 0 Rest of the Candidates

a) The students are permitted to choose two electives in V semester.

Industrial Training (VI Semester)

Swapping of Industrial Training in C-18 Curriculum in V and VI Semesters

Institutional Evaluation : 300 marks

Semester End Examination : 100 marks

Total marks for Industry Evaluation 300

Assessment parameters at Institution (End Examination)

Institution Level Evaluation Scheme

3. A candidate shall be promoted to 3 rdsemester if he/she puts the required percentage of

before commencement of 3rd semester.

(b) A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th (Industrial Training) semester

i) Puts the required percentage of attendance i.e., 90% in 6thsemester (Industrial

4.1 EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

4.2 ISSUE OF GRADE CARD:

4.5.2 MALPRACTICE CASES:

L T P Mid Mid Internal Max Total Min

Note: For Activities student performance is to be assessed through Rubrics.

Prerequisites: Basic knowledge of English Language

UNIT – 1: SPEAKING Duration: 12 Periods

UNIT - 2: LISTENING Duration: 6 Periods

UNIT –3: VOCABULARY Duration: 8 Periods

7. How to use a Dictionary

UNIT -4 : GRAMMAR Duration: 16 Periods

UNIT - 5: READING Duration: 6 Periods

UNIT- 6: WRITING Duration: 12 Periods

16. Paragraph Writing - I

Suggested Learning Outcomes:

Slip Test 2 Vocabulary 5 2 questions out of 3 questions

Suggested Student Activities

Textbook: English for Polytechnics

MID SEM-I EXAM

6 VI 7,8 12(a) 16(a)

Remembering (R) 1 Mark

Application (A) 5 Marks

i. Anger ii. Jealousy iii. Worry

6. a) Identify the describing words in the following sentences.

b) Write any five expressions used by the teacher in the classroom.

Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each carries one mark.

2. Write any three basic uses of a dictionary?

a. He always ____ (visit) his parents on Sunday.

3. Change the voice.